Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Res 26-18 Contract Generator Install CF McDonald Electric
R0070155.01 SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TOWN OF WESTLAKE, TEXAS PUMP STATION GENERATOR REPLACEMENT June 2026 MAYOR KIM GREAVES Prepared by: TBPE FIRM REGISTRATION NO. F-11756 TBPLS FIRM REGISTRATION NO. LS-10074301 7557 Rambler Road, Suite 1400 Dallas, Texas 75231 (972) 235-3031 TOWN MANAGER WADE CARROLL PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR KYLE FLANAGAN TOWN OF WESTLAKE, TEXAS PUMP STATION GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT NO. R0070155.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS Spec No. Item DIVISION 0 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 01 Title Sheet 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 42 00 Bid Proposal 00 42 23.01 Unit Price Bid Form 00 42 23.02 Vendor Compliance to State Law 00 42 23.03 Contractor Compliance to Texas Sales Tax Code 00 42 23.04 Conflict of Interest Questionnaire (CIQ) 00 43 10 Bid Bond 00 43 43 Wage Rates 00 45 10 Form of Business 00 45 13 Statement of Qualifications 00 45 15 Certificate of Bidder’s Experience & Qualifications 00 45 16 Subcontractor References 00 45 20 Non-Collusion Affidavit 00 46 00 Post-Bid Procedures 00 52 23 Agreement 00 61 10 Performance Bond 00 61 15 Payment Bond 00 61 20 Maintenance Bond 00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance 00 61 30 State Sales Tax – Separated Contract Certificate 00 61 40 Form 1295 Certificate of Interested Parties 00 63 13 Request for Information Form (RFI) 00 63 36 Field Order Form 00 63 49 Work Change Directive Form 00 63 63 Change Order Form 00 72 00 Standard General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 10 Special Provisions TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary of Work 01 11 00 Additional Requirements 01 14 19 Use of Premises 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures 01 26 63 Change Order Procedures 01 27 00 Measurement and Payment 01 29 73 Schedule of Values 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 17 Construction Progress Schedules 01 32 34 Video and Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 01 35 43 Environmental Protection 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 19 Reference Standards 01 45 23 Inspection Services 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 56 39 Preservation of Trees 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 63 00 Equipment and Valve Tagging 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 71 13 Mobilization 01 73 19 Trench Safety Systems 01 74 16 Site Maintenance 01 74 19 Waste Material Disposal 01 74 23 Final Cleaning 01 75 50 Starting Systems 01 78 23 Operational and Maintenance Data 01 78 50 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Contractor Safety Plan DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 50 Demolition and Salvage APPENDICES Appendix A Generator Procurement Package Town of Westlake, Texas Electrical Technical Specifications (Division 26) for Construction of Pump Station Generator Replacement Westlake, Texas June 2026 TBPE Registration No. 16575 Baird Gilroy & Dixon, LLC 5220 Spring Valley Road, Suite 604 Dallas, Texas 75254 (281) 529-5005 TABLE OF CONTENTS ELECTRICAL No. of Section Title Pages DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions .................................................. 4 26 05 00 Electrical Work ....................................................................... 4 26 05 05 Electrical Demolition ............................................................... 3 26 05 19 600-volt Building Wire and Cable............................................ 4 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding .......................................................... 6 26 05 29 Supporting Devices ................................................................ 7 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes ........................................................... 27 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Pull Boxes ........................................ 5 26 05 53 Electrical Identification ............................................................ 7 26 05 73 Short-circuit/coordination Study/Arc Flash Hazard Study ...... 10 26 27 16 Cabinets and Enclosures ........................................................ 3 26 27 26 Wiring Devices ....................................................................... 3 26 28 00 Overcurrent Protective Devices .............................................. 6 26 32 13 Diesel Engine Generator & Controls (Installation) ................... 3 SECTION 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid Page 1 of 2 SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID The Town of Westlake is soliciting proposals for the construction of the following project: Pump Station Generator Installation The project generally includes the installation of a pre-purchased generator at the Town of Westlake Pump Station. Installation includes all site improvements, conduits, wiring, foundation, controls necessary for the operation of the generator. Sealed proposals must be delivered to: Physical Address: The Town of Westlake, 1500 Solana Boulevard – The Terraces, Building 7, Suite 7200, Westlake, Texas 76262. Mailing Address: The Town of Westlake, 1500 Solana Boulevard – The Terraces, Building 7, Suite 7200, Westlake, Texas 76262 Proposals shall be received no later than July 9, 2026, at 2:00PM. The proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud at this time and place. Bids received after this time will be unopened but not returned. Address proposals to the attention of Kyle Flanagan, Director of Public Works, sealed proposals must be labeled “RFP 2026-18 PW Backup Generator Installation Project Submittal” Contract Documents and generator procurement package may be examined free of charge at the following addresses: Engineer Owner Westwood Professional Services, Inc. Town of Westlake 7557 Rambler Road 1500 Solana Boulevard – The Terraces Suite 1400 Building 7, Suite 7200 Dallas, TX 75231 Westlake, Texas 76262 Nancy Lundie, P.E. Kyle Flanagan, Director of Public Works Advertisement and bid phase information for the Project can be found at the following web site: https://www.civcastusa.com/ SECTION 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid Page 2 of 2 Contract Documents may be downloaded or viewed free of charge at this web site. It is the downloader’s responsibility to determine that a complete set of documents, as defined in the Instructions to Bidders are received. Printed copies of the Contract Documents may be purchased at the website for the cost of printing. The cost for printed Contract Documents is not refunded. This web site will be updated periodically with addenda, planholder lists, bid tabulations, additional reports or other information relevant to bidding the Project. Direct questions regarding distribution of Contract Documents for this project to Westwood. Direct questions related to the design of the project to: Project Manager Nancy Lundie, P.E. 972-235-3031 Nancy.Lundie@westwoodps.com This project consists of removing an existing backup generator and installing a new backup generator and associated electrical improvements for the emergency operation of the Westlake Pump Station. Bidders must submit a cashier's check, certified check, or acceptable bidder's bond with their proposal as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a contract for the project with the Owner within 15 days of Notice of Award of the contract. The security must be payable to Owner in the amount of 5 percent of the bid submitted. Contractor must execute the contract, bonds and certificates of insurance on the forms provided in the Contract Documents. Contractors for this Project must pay no less than the prevailing wage rates for the area established by the Owner and included in the contract documents. The Town of Westlake reserves the right to reject any or all bids or to waive any informalities in the bidding. Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds are required. The Owner reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous interpretation of the bids submitted in the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating proposal prices, to reject any or all bids, and/or waive formalities. Bids may not be withdrawn within 90 days from date on which bids are opened. Equal Opportunity in Employment — All qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, handicap or national origin. Offerors are required to comply with the President’s Executive Order No. 11246, as amended by Executive Order 11375, and as supplemented in department of Labor regulations 41 CFR Part 60. END OF SECTION (Published:) _Sunday, June 21, 2026 Sunday, June 28, 2026 Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders Page 1 of 5 SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS A. The apparent low bidder shall submit documentation required in Section 00 45 13 – Bidder’s Qualifications within 5 days only if requested by the Owner to demonstrate that the Contractor is qualified by experience and capability to successfully construct the project within the Contract Time and for the Contract Amount. B. Bidders shall have a minimum of five successfully completed drinking water pump station improvements within the last ten years with at least one project completed within the last two years. These projects shall be of similar size and type (water supply) as this project for the Town of Westlake Pump Station Generator Replacement. Bidders without this experience may be rejected at the Owner’s option. C. The Superintendent proposed for these water system improvement project shall have a minimum of five years of experience as a superintendent on such projects. The superintendent shall be fluent in English and be able to communicate clearly with the Town staff through verbal and written communications. A copy of his resume and the resume of an alternate superintendent shall be submitted with Section 00 45 13 – Bidder’s Qualifications. If for any reason the proposed superintendent is not acceptable, the alternate superintendent will be considered. D. Owner may conduct investigations as considered necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors and other persons and organizations to do the work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction, and within the prescribed time. Owner may reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not meet any such evaluation to Owner's satisfaction. 1.03 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE A. Examine Contract Documents, make observations and investigations, correlate knowledge and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and consider these in preparation of a bid for the project. 1. Read the Contract Documents and related technical data and reports thoroughly. Use a complete set of Contract Documents in preparing Bids. Assume responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of partial or incomplete contract documents. 2. Visit the site to become familiar with general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress or performance of the work in any manner. Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders Page 2 of 5 3. Become familiar with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting cost, progress or performance of the work. Surveys and investigation reports of subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or conditions or situations affecting the design of the Project used by the Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents are referenced in the Supplementary Conditions. 4. These reports are available for information only and neither the Owner nor Engineer guarantees their accuracy or that any opinions expressed in the report are correct. 5. Make additional surveys and investigations as necessary to determine the bid price for performance of the work in compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents before submitting a bid. 6. Cost for these investigations is to be paid by the Bidders. B. Acknowledge sole responsibility for job site safety by the submission of a Bid for this project. C. The submission of a Bid is incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every requirement of this Section. 1.04 INTERPRETATIONS A. Submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents to the Engineer in writing. Replies are issued by Addenda to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the bidding documents. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda are binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Questions received less than 2 days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. 1.05 BID SECURITY A. Submit a bid security in the amount of 5 percent of the amount of the maximum total bid as a guarantee that the Bidder will promptly enter into a Contract and execute a Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds on the forms included in the Contract Documents if awarded the contract. B. Acceptable Bid securities are: 1. Certified or cashier's check made payable to the Owner. 2. An approved Bidder's Bond underwritten by a surety named in the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds" as published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. C. Bid securities will be returned to bidders when the contract award is made or bids are rejected. 1.06 CONTRACT TIME A. This project is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 90 consecutive calendar days from the date of the notice to proceed. Final Completion of the project shall be achieved within 30 days of the Substantial Completion date. Liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders Page 3 of 5 1.07 BID FORM A. Submit bids on the Bid forms provided with the Contract Documents for each contract Bid. Include supplemental data to be furnished in the same sealed envelope with Bid. B. Bid forms must be completed in ink. The Bid price of each item on the form must be stated in words and/or numerals. Words take precedence in case of a conflict. In the case of a conflict between the unit price indicated and the extended amount shown, the unit price indicated multiplied by the stated quantity shall govern. C. Execute bids by corporations in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. D. Execute bids by partnerships in the partnership name. Forms are to be signed by a partner. Print the name below the signature. Write the title of the Partner and show the official address of the partnership shown below the signature. E. Acknowledge receipt of all Addenda on the bid form by signing beside the Addenda number. 1.08 SUBMISSION OF BIDS A. Submit bids at the time and place indicated in the Invitation for Bids. Submit bids in a sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of the Bidder. Include the Bid security and other required documents in the envelope. 1.09 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS A. Modify or withdraw bids by submitting an appropriate document executed in the manner that a Bid must be executed. Deliver the modification or withdrawal to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 1.10 OPENING OF BIDS A. Bids will be opened as indicated in the Invitation for Bids. B. All Bids shall remain open for the period of time set forth in the Invitation for Bids, but Owner may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date. 1.11 AWARD OF CONTRACT A. Owner may reject Bids, waive formalities, or disregard nonconforming, conditional Bids or counter proposals. B. Owner may consider the following in evaluating the bids and awarding the contract: 1. Contractor's qualifications and ability to demonstrate current capability to complete the project in conformance with the requirements of the contract documents. 2. Compliance of the Bids with requirements of the Contract Documents. Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders Page 4 of 5 3. Alternates and unit prices if requested in the Bid forms. 4. The amount bid. 5. Proposed date of completion and the ability to meet intermediate milestones that may have been established for the project. C. The contract will be awarded to the responsive, responsible and qualified Bidder submitting the lowest/best bid. The bidder selected will be notified at the earliest possible date. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality in bids received where such rejection or waiver is in its interest. D. Each Bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner, the Engineer, and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any bid. 1.12 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT A. The failure of the successful bidder to execute the agreement and supply the required bonds within fifteen (15) days after Notice of Award, or within such extended period as the Owner may grant, shall constitute a default and the Owner may, at its option either award the contract to the next lowest responsible bidder, or re-advertise for bids. B. A Notice to Proceed authorizing the Contractor to commence work will be issued after the Contract Documents have been executed. 1.13 WAGE RATES A. Contractor must pay no less than the general prevailing rates for the Project location as determined in accordance with statutory requirements. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are included in the Contract Documents. 1.14 BONDS A. Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are required for this project and shall be provided in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.15 SALES TAXES A. The Owner qualifies as an exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas. Owner's purchasing department will issue exemption certificates. Comply with all statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. 1.16 BID PROPOSAL A. Bids are to be submitted as required in Section 00 42 23 – Bid Form. 1.17 ALTERNATE BID ITEMS A. Alternate bid items are indicated in Section 01 23 10 – Alternates and Allowances. Bidders shall refer to this section for additional requirements. 1. BID GUARANTEE Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders Page 5 of 5 Each bidder shall furnish a bid guarantee equivalent to five percent of the bid price (Water Code §17.183). If a bid bond is provided, the Contractor shall utilize a surety company which is authorized to do business in Texas in accordance with Surety Bonds and Related Instruments, Chapter 3503 of the Insurance Code. 2. AWARD OF CONTRACT TO NONRESIDENT BIDDER A governmental entity may not award a governmental contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident underbids the lowest bid submitted by a responsible resident bidder by an amount that is not less than the amount by which a resident bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident's principal place of business is located. A non-resident bidder is a Contractor whose corporate offices or principal place of business is outside of the state of Texas (Source: Texas Government Code, Chapter 2252, Subchapter A, Nonresident Bidders, §2252.002). END OF SECTION Revised 8/14/2024Form provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE For vendor doing business with local governmental entity A complete copy of Chapter 176 of the Local Government Code may be found at http://www.statutes.legis.state.tx.us/ Docs/LG/htm/LG.176.htm. For easy reference, below are some of the sections cited on this form. Local Government Code § 176.001(1-a): "Business relationship" means a connection between two or more parties based on commercial activity of one of the parties. The term does not include a connection based on: (A) a transaction that is subject to rate or fee regulation by a federal, state, or local governmental entity or an agency of a federal, state, or local governmental entity; (B) a transaction conducted at a price and subject to terms available to the public; or (C) a purchase or lease of goods or services from a person that is chartered by a state or federal agency and that is subject to regular examination by, and reporting to, that agency. Local Government Code § 176.003(a)(2)(A) and (B): (a)A local government officer shall file a conflicts disclosure statement with respect to a vendor if: *** (2) the vendor: (A) has an employment or other business relationship with the local government officer or a family member of the officer that results in the officer or family member receiving taxable income, other than investment income, that exceeds $2,500 during the 12-month period preceding the date that the officer becomes aware that (i) a contract between the local governmental entity and vendor has been executed; or (ii) the local governmental entity is considering entering into a contract with the vendor; (B) has given to the local government officer or a family member of the officer one or more gifts that have an aggregate value of more than $100 in the 12-month period preceding the date the officer becomes aware that: (i) a contract between the local governmental entity and vendor has been executed; or (ii) the local governmental entity is considering entering into a contract with the vendor. Local Government Code § 176.006(a) and (a-1) (a)A vendor shall file a completed conflict of interest questionnaire if the vendor has a business relationship with a local governmental entity and: (1) has an employment or other business relationship with a local government officer of that local governmental entity, or a family member of the officer, described by Section 176.003(a)(2)(A); (2) has given a local government officer of that local governmental entity, or a family member of the officer, one or more gifts with the aggregate value specified by Section 176.003(a)(2)(B), excluding any gift described by Section 176.003(a-1); or (3) has a family relationship with a local government officer of that local governmental entity. (a-1) The completed conflict of interest questionnaire must be filed with the appropriate records administrator not later than the seventh business day after the later of: (1) the date that the vendor: (A) begins discussions or negotiations to enter into a contract with the local governmental entity; or (B) submits to the local governmental entity an application, response to a request for proposals or bids, correspondence, or another writing related to a potential contract with the local governmental entity; or (2) the date the vendor becomes aware: (A) of an employment or other business relationship with a local government officer, or a family member of the officer, described by Subsection (a); (B) that the vendor has given one or more gifts described by Subsection (a); or (C) of a family relationship with a local government officer. SECTION 00 43 43 Wage Rates Page 1 of 5 SECTION 00 43 43 WAGE RATES Contractor must pay no less than the general prevailing rates for the Project location in accordance with the following: "General Decision Number: TX20260026 01/02/2026 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Johnson, Parker and Tarrant Counties in Texas. Heavy Construction Projects (Including Water and Sewer Lines) Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/02/2026 PLUM0146-002 01/01/2024 PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER: Rates Fringes $ 38.28 $12.81 SUTX1990-041 06/01/1990 Rates Fringes CARPENTER........................ $10.40 $3.64 Concrete Finisher....... $9.81 ** ELECTRICIAN...................... $13.26 ** Form Setter….. $7.86 ** Laborers: Common...................... $7.25 ** Utility..................... $8.09 ** PAINTER............. $10.89 ** Pipelayer........................ $7.45 ** Power equipment operators: Backhoe.... $11.89 $3.30 Bulldozer....... $10.76 ** Crane........ $13.16 ** Front End Loader................. $10.54 ** Mechanic........ $10.93 ** Scraper... $10.00 ** SECTION 00 43 43 Wage Rates Page 2 of 5 Reinforcing Steel Setter......... $10.64 ** TRUCK DRIVER................ $7.34 ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Note: Executive Order 13658 generally applies to contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act that were awarded on or between January 1, 2015 and January 29, 2022, and that have not been renewed or extended on or after January 30, 2022. Executive Order 13658 does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts regardless of when they were awarded. If a contract is subject to Executive Order 13658, the contractor must pay all covered workers at least $13.30 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2025. The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under Executive Order 13658 is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). SECTION 00 43 43 Wage Rates Page 3 of 5 ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classifications and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the type(s) of construction and geographic area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order under rate identifiers indicating whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate), a survey rate, a weighted union average rate, a state adopted rate, or a supplemental classification rate. Union Rate Identifiers A four-letter identifier beginning with characters other than ""SU"", ""UAVG"", ?SA?, or ?SC? denotes that a union rate was prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2024. PLUM is an identifier of the union whose collectively bargained rate prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2024 in the example, is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all changes over time that are reported to WHD in the rates in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing the classification. Union Average Rate Identifiers The UAVG identifier indicates that no single rate prevailed for those classifications, but that 100% of the data reported for the classifications reflected union rates. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 01/01/2024. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the State of Ohio. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/01/2024 in the example, indicates the date the wage determination was updated to reflect the most current union average rate. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January, to reflect a weighted average of the current rates in the collective bargaining agreements on which the rate is based. Survey Rate Identifiers The ""SU"" identifier indicates that either a single non-union rate prevailed (as defined in 29 CFR 1.2) for this SECTION 00 43 43 Wage Rates Page 4 of 5 classification in the survey or that the rate was derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As a weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SUFL2022-007 6/27/2024. SU indicates the rate is a single non-union prevailing rate or a weighted average of survey data for that classification. FL indicates the State of Florida. 2022 is the year of the survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 6/27/2024 in the example, indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. ?SU? wage rates typically remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. However, the Wage and Hour Division (WHD) has the discretion to update such rates under 29 CFR 1.6(c)(1). State Adopted Rate Identifiers The ""SA"" identifier indicates that the classifications and prevailing wage rates set by a state (or local) government were adopted under 29 C.F.R 1.3(g)-(h). Example: SAME2023-007 01/03/2024. SA reflects that the rates are state adopted. ME refers to the State of Maine. 2023 is the year during which the state completed the survey on which the listed classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/03/2024 in the example, reflects the date on which the classifications and rates under the ?SA? identifier took effect under state law in the state from which the rates were adopted. ----------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: a) a survey underlying a wage determination b) an existing published wage determination c) an initial WHD letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter d) an initial conformance (additional classification and rate) determination On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be directed to the WHD Branch of Wage Surveys. Requests can be submitted via email to davisbaconinfo@dol.gov or by mail to: SECTION 00 43 43 Wage Rates Page 5 of 5 Branch of Wage Surveys Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 Regarding any other wage determination matter such as conformance decisions, requests for initial decisions should be directed to the WHD Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Requests can be submitted via email to BCWD-Office@dol.gov or by mail to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2) If an initial decision has been issued, then any interested party (those affected by the action) that disagrees with the decision can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Requests for review and reconsideration can be submitted via email to dba.reconsideration@dol.gov or by mail to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION “ END OF SECTION Section 00 45 13 Statement of Qualifications Page 1 of 17 SECTION 00 45 13 STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS 1.01 GENERAL A. The Statement of Qualifications must be submitted by the apparent low bidder within 5 calendar days of the Bid opening and include, as a minimum, the information as described in this section of the Contract Documents. Failure to submit the required information in the Statement of Qualifications may result in the Owner considering the Bid non-responsive and result in rejection of the Bid by the Owner. Bidders may be required to provide supplemental information if requested by the Owner to clarify, enhance or supplement the information provided in the Statement of Qualifications. B. Bidders must provide the information requested in the Qualifications Statement using the forms attached to this Section. A copy of these forms may be provided in Microsoft Word to assist with the preparation of the Statement of Qualifications. Information in these forms must be provided completely and in detail. Information that cannot be totally incorporated in the form may be included in an appendix to the form. This appendix must be clearly referenced by appendix number in the form, and the appended material must include the appendix number on every sheet of the appendix. The appendix must include only the information that responds to the question or item number to which the appended information applies. C. Bidders may provide supplemental information to the Statement of Qualifications using AIA, AGC or other industry standard statement of qualification forms and / or Bidders may submit additional information such as organizational brochures or other marketing information to help demonstrate the ability to provide best value to the Owner. This information may not be submitted as a substitute to the information specifically requested in this Section, or in the Statement of Qualifications forms. If this information is include as an appendix to the information requested in Paragraph 1.02 above, the reference must include the specific paragraph or section that applies to that question or item. Section 00 45 13 Statement of Qualifications Page 13 of 17 1.02 AFFIDAVITS A. One of the following four affidavits shall be executed and provided with this information. The individual signing the affidavit shall attach evidence of their authority to bind the organization to an agreement. SECTION 00 46 00 Post-Bid Procedures Page 1 of 1 SECTION 00 46 00 POST-BID PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 IDENTICAL BIDS A. In the event of two or more identical low bids, the agreement will be awarded as prescribed by Chapter 271, Subchapter Z, Section 271.901 of Vernon's Texas Codes Annotated. 1.02 BID AMBIGUITY A. Any ambiguity in the bid as a result of omission, error, lack of clarity or non- compliance by the Bidder with specifications, instructions and all conditions of bidding shall be construed in the favor of the City. 1.03 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER(S) A. Any bidder(s) may be disqualified and their bid not considered for award by any the following specific reasons: 1. The bidder is party to any litigation against the Town of Westlake, Texas. 2. The bidder is delinquent in performance of an existing contract or has defaulted on a previous contract with the Town of Westlake, Texas, or with another party for the same or similar kinds of work. 3. Reasonable grounds exist for believing that the bidder lacks competency or capacity to satisfactorily and timely perform based on the bidder’s financial statement, experience, equipment, existing contractual commitment, etc. 1.04 AGREEMENT, BONDS, INSURANCE AND STATE SALES TAX CERTIFICATES A. Within 10 days of receipt of the Notice of Award, the lowest responsible Bidder shall execute and deliver to the Engineer for the Owner's approval those documents indicated by an "X" below: [ X ] Document 00 52 23 - Agreement [ X ] Document 00 61 10 - Performance Bond [ X ] Document 00 61 15 - Payment Bond [ X ] Document 00 61 20 - Maintenance Bond [ X ] Document 00 61 25 - Certificate of Insurance (Form to be Supplied by Contractor) [ X ] Document 00 61 30 - State Sales Tax - Separated Contract Certificate [ X ] Document 00 61 40 – Form 1295 Certificate of Interested Parties (Completed On-line) END OF SECTION July 21, 2026 TOWN OF WESTLAKE Wade Carroll Town Manager 1500 Solana Blvd., Bldg, 7, Suite 7200 Westlake, Texas 76262 Kyle Flanagan Public Works Director 1500 Solana Blvd, Bldg. 7, Suite 7200 Westlake, TX 76262 kflanagan@westlaketx.gov 817-490-5733 July 21, 2026 21 July July 21, 2026 21 July 21 July 07/07/2026 Risk Services - Leavitt Insurance Agencies 2190 North Loop West #309 Houston TX 77018 Stephanie Castle,CIC,ACSR,AINS (713)581-2102 (866)699-9142 stephanie-castle@leavitt.com 00013661 C F McDonald Electric Inc 5044 Timber Creek Drive Houston TX 77017 Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 26-27 Inland Marine Refer to remarks for project description A Inland Marine QT-630-B0428658-TLC-26 04/01/2026 04/01/2027 Leased/Rented EQ 200,000 Installation ea. site 3,000,000 Install-temp storage 3,000,000 Sch Owned Equip 231,660 Re: Town of Westlake Pump Station Generator Replacement The Town of Westlake 1500 Solana Blvd- The Terraces Building 7, Suite 7200 Westlake TX 76262 INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER F : INSURER E : INSURER D : NAME:CONTACT INSURER C : INSURER B : (A/C, No):FAX E-MAILADDRESS: CUSTOMER ID: PRODUCER PRODUCER (A/C, No, Ext):PHONE INSURED INSURER A : The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. LOCATION OF PREMISES / DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) REVISION NUMBER:CERTIFICATE NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. COVERAGES $$ $BOILER & MACHINERY / EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN $ $ $ TYPE OF POLICY CRIME POLICY NUMBER $ $ $ $ NAMED PERILS CAUSES OF LOSS TYPE OF POLICYINLAND MARINE $ RENTAL VALUE CONTENTS BUILDING DEDUCTIBLES WIND $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ BLANKET BLDG & PP BLANKET PERS PROP BLANKET BUILDING EXTRA EXPENSE BUSINESS INCOME PERSONAL PROPERTY BUILDING FLOOD EARTHQUAKE SPECIAL BROAD BASIC CAUSES OF LOSS PROPERTY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) INSR LTR LIMITSCOVERED PROPERTYPOLICY NUMBERTYPE OF INSURANCE $$ $ SPECIAL CONDITIONS / OTHER COVERAGES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) © 1995-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 24 (2016/03) AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. CANCELLATION CERTIFICATE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) CERTIFICATE HOLDER C F McDonald Electric Inc 00013661 Risk Services - Leavitt Insurance Agencies 24 Certificate of Property Insurance The Installation coverage includes blanket automatic insured endorsement provision that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status. The Inland Marine policy includes a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation provision that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires it. The Installation coverage includes a blanket notice of cancellation to certificate holders endorsements, providing for 30 days' notice if the policy is cancelled by the company other than for nonpayment of premium, 10 days' notice after the policy is cancelled for nonpayment of premium. Notice is sent to certificate holders with mailing address on file with the agent of the company. The Inland Marine policy includes a blanket loss payee endorsement as their interest may appear. Complete Named Insured: C F McDonald Electric, Inc McDonald Municipal and Industrial, A Division of C F McDonald Electric, Inc. * ACORD 101 (2008/01) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER:FORM TITLE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page of AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC #: AGENCY CARRIER NAIC CODE POLICY NUMBER NAMED INSURED EFFECTIVE DATE: COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE POLICY NUMBER:GENERAL PURPOSE ENDORSEMENT Page QT-630-B0428658-TLC-25 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL NAMED INSURED This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: INSTALLATION COVERAGE FORM The following Additional Condition is added to Section E. - ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS: Additional Named Insured The following persons or organizations are included as Additional Named Insureds when you have agreed in a written contract or written agreement, executed prior to loss, to name such persons or organizations as an Additional Named Insured, but only to the extent of their financial interest in Covered Property: a. Owners of Covered Property; and b. Mortgagees or loss payees. Copyright 2025 The Travelers Indemnity Company. All rights reserved. Includes the copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission. CM T8 04 1 07/07/2026 Risk Services - Leavitt Insurance Agencies 2190 North Loop West #309 Houston TX 77018 Stephanie Castle,CIC,ACSR,AINS (713) 581-2102 (866) 699-9142 stephanie-castle@leavitt.com C F McDonald Electric Inc 5044 Timber Creek Drive Houston TX 77017 Phoenix Insurance Company 25623 Travelers Indemnity Company of America 25666 Travelers Property Casualty Company of America 25674 Travelers Indemnity Company of CT 25682 St Paul Surplus Lines Insurance COmpany 30481 26-27 COI A DT-CO-A9854158-PHX-26 04/01/2026 04/01/2027 1,000,000 300,000 5,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 B Incl HNO 810-A9854331-26-26-G 04/01/2026 04/01/2027 1,000,000 C 10,000 CUP-C5295657-26-NF 04/01/2026 04/01/2027 10,000.000 10,000,000 D N UB-A985440A-26-26-G 04/01/2026 04/01/2027 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 E Pollution Liability Professional Liability ZCE-91P01636 04/01/2026 04/01/2027 Pollution - Ea. Condition $10,000,000 Pollution - Aggregate $10,000,000 Prof - Ea. Error Omission $2,000,000 Re: Town of Westlake Pump Station Generator Replacement The Town of Westlake 1500 Solana Blvd- The Terraces Building 7, Suite 7200 Westlake TX 76262 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURER F : INSURER E : INSURER D : INSURER C : INSURER B : INSURER A : NAIC # NAME:CONTACT (A/C, No):FAX E-MAILADDRESS: PRODUCER (A/C, No, Ext):PHONE INSURED REVISION NUMBER:CERTIFICATE NUMBER:COVERAGES IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. OTHER: (Per accident) (Ea accident) $ $ N / A SUBR WVD ADDL INSD THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. $ $ $ $PROPERTY DAMAGE BODILY INJURY (Per accident) BODILY INJURY (Per person) COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT AUTOS ONLY AUTOSAUTOS ONLY NON-OWNED SCHEDULEDOWNED ANY AUTO AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y / N WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below If yes, describe under ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE $ $ $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT EROTH-STATUTEPER LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY)POLICY EXP(MM/DD/YYYY)POLICY EFFPOLICY NUMBERTYPE OF INSURANCELTRINSR DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) EXCESS LIAB UMBRELLA LIAB $EACH OCCURRENCE $AGGREGATE $ OCCUR CLAIMS-MADE DED RETENTION $ $PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $GENERAL AGGREGATE $PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $MED EXP (Any one person) $EACH OCCURRENCE DAMAGE TO RENTED $PREMISES (Ea occurrence) COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY PRO-JECT LOC CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) CANCELLATION AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25 (2016/03) © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. CERTIFICATE HOLDER The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD HIRED AUTOS ONLY C F McDonald Electric IncRisk Services - Leavitt Insurance Agencies 25 Certificate of Liability Insurance: Notes Complete Named Insured: C F McDonald Electric, Inc. , McDonald Municipal & Industrial, A Division of C F McDonald Electric, Inc. The General Liability, Automobile, Pollution and Umbrella policies include blanket automatic insured endorsement provision that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status. The General Liability and Automobile liability policies contain a special endorsement with “Primary and Noncontributory” wording. The General Liability, Automobile, Pollution, Worker's Compensation and Umbrella policies include a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires it. The General Liability, Automobile, Worker's Compensation, Pollution and Umbrella polciies include a blanket notice of cancellation to certificate holders endorsement, providing for 30 days’ notice if the policy is cancelled by the company other than for nonpayment of premium, 10 days’ notice after the policy is cancelled for nonpayment of premium. Notice is sent to certificate holders with mailing addresses on file with the agent of the company. Workers compensation coverage includes maritime and USL&H endorsements. Pollution coverage includes mold, subject to the policy’s exclusions, limits, retentions, terms and conditions. Umbrella is follow form on underlying policies (General Liability, Automobile, Employers Liability), subject to its own exclusions, terms and conditions. ACORD 101 (2008/01) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER:FORM TITLE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page of AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC #: AGENCY CARRIER NAIC CODE POLICY NUMBER NAMED INSURED EFFECTIVE DATE: POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY any person or organization in any country or jurisdiction because we are not licensed to provide insurance in such country or jurisdiction;or (2)The furnishing of certificates or other evidence of insurance in any country or jurisdiction in which we are not licensed to provide insurance. 11.Representations By accepting this policy,you agree that: a.All statements in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations are accurate and complete; b.All such statements are based upon representations made by the "First Named Insured"; c.All statements and representations made in the application for this policy,including all information provided with the application for this policy,are accurate and complete; and d.We have issued this policy in reliance upon all such statements and representations. 12.Service Of Suit In the event that we fail to pay any amount claimed to be due under this policy and the "insured"sues us to recover such amount we shall honor the decision of the court that is authorized to hear the case. However,we have the right to appeal that decision. Service of process for any such lawsuit brought against us may be made upon us by serving our President,or our President's designee,at One Tower Square,Hartford,Connecticut 06183,and such person shall be authorized to receive the papers on our behalf. However,the "insured"may also serve or send papers involving such lawsuit to the Commissioner,Director or Superintendent of Insurance for the state in which the lawsuit is being filed.We designate that appropriate officer,or that person's successor,to mail a copy of the papers to us. For the State of California,service of process for any such lawsuit brought against us may be made upon: CSC-Lawyers Incorporating Service 2730 Gateway Oaks Drive,Suite 100 Sacramento,California 95833. For the State of Rhode Island,service of process for any such lawsuit brought against us may be made upon: Corporation Service Company 222 Jefferson Blvd.,Suite 200 Warwick,Rhode Island 02888. 13.Separation Of Insureds Except with respect to the limits of insurance, and any rights or duties specifically assigned in this policy to the "First Named Insured",this insurance applies: a.As if each "named insured"were the only "named insured";and b.Separately to each "insured"against whom a "claim"is made. 14.Transfer Of Control Of Defense If the available limits of insurance are used up, we will notify the "First Named Insured"in writing of all outstanding "claims"so that you can arrange to take control of the defense. Before the available limits of insurance are used up,you may take over control of the defense of any outstanding "claim"only if we agree that you may take over such defense. We will take whatever steps are necessary during a transfer of control of defense of an outstanding "claim"to continue that defense and avoid a default judgment during such transfer.You agree to repay the reasonable expenses we incur for any such steps taken after the available limit of insurance is used up.When we take such steps,you agree that we do not give up any rights. 15.Transfer Or Assignment Of This Policy This policy may not be transferred or assigned, except with our written consent,or in the case of death of a "named insured"that is an individual. If such "named insured"dies,that "named lnsured's"rights and duties will be transferred to that "named insured's"legal representative but only while acting within the scope of duties as such legal representative.Until such legal representative is appointed,anyone having proper temporary custody of such "named insured's"property will have such "named insured's"rights and duties but only with respect to that property. 16.Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us If the "insured"has rights to recover from others all or part of any payment we have made under this policy,those rights are transferred to us. RP10001121 ©2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved.Page20of37 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY e The "insured"must do nothing after the loss to impair them,and under any Contractors Indemnity For Design Professional's Liability Coverage and any Contractors Indemnity For Subcontractor's Pollution Liability Coverage,no "named insured"can agree in a contract or agreement to: a.Waive any "named insured's"right of recovery against any "design professional" or "specified subcontractor";or b.Limit the liability of the "design professional" or "specified subcontractor"to a maximum amount unless such limitation is an "authorized agreed limitation of liability". At our request,the "insured"will bring suit or initiate an alternative dispute resolution proceeding to enforce those rights or will help us enforce them. We will apply any amounts recovered in enforcing those rights of recovery in the following order until the total amount recovered is used up: a.We will reimburse any person or organization,including us or the "insured", any amount that person or organization has paid in excess of the limits of insurance. b.We will retain an amount equal to the amount we have paid under this policy. c.We will pay to the "insured"any remaining portion,including any amounts within any applicable deductible or self-insured retention. If any amounts are recovered in enforcing those rights of recovery,reasonable expenses incurred in enforcing such rights will be shared among all persons or organizations receiving amounts recovered.Each such person's or organization's share of those expenses is based on the ratio of its amount recovered to the total amounts recovered by all such persons or organizations in enforcing such rights. If the "insured"has agreed in a contract or agreement to waive that "insured's"right of recovery against any person or organization,we waive our right of recovery against such person or organization,but only for payments we make for: a."Loss"to which any of the following applies caused by an act,error or omission committed subsequent to the execution of the contract or agreement: (1)Any Contractors Professional Liability Coverage;or (2)Any Contractors Professional Liability Loss Mitigation Expenses Coverage; b."Loss"to which any "Pollution Liability Coverage"applies resulting from "pollution conditions"that commence subsequent to the execution of the contract or agreement; or c."Loss"to which any Contractors Pollution Loss Mitigation Expenses Coverage applies resulting from "faulty work incidents"that are not first discovered by any "insured"until subsequent to the execution of the contract or agreement. SECTION IX -DEFINITIONS 1."Agreed mediation": a.Means a voluntary and non-binding process that: (1)Is agreed to by us;and (2)Involves a qualified professional mediator facilitating an attempted settlement of the "claim"between the "insured"and the person or organization making the "claim". b.Does not include any mediation or alternative dispute resolution that is: (1)ordered or imposed by a court;or (2)Otherwise legally required. 2."Asbestos pollution conditions": a.Means any "pollution conditions"that are: (1)The disturbance of asbestos or asbestos fibers if the "pollution conditions"result from any activity that is performed on behalf of any "named insured"by a subcontractor under a written contract or agreement with such "named insured";or (2)The inadvertent disturbance of asbestos or asbestos fibers if the "pollution conditions"do not result from any activity that is performed on behalf of any "named insured"by a subcontractor under a written contract or agreement with such "named insured".As used in this provision,inadvertent disturbance does not include any discharge, dispersal,seepage,migration,release or escape of asbestos or asbestos fibers during or as a result of asbestos RP10001121 ©2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved.Page21 of37 POLLUTION LIABILITY as if such "foreign emergency response costs loss"were incurred by or on behalf of any "named insured"that is not a "foreign insured organization". 3.Other Insurance a.As used anywhere in this policy,other insurance means insurance,or the funding of losses,that is provided by,through or on behalfof: (1)Another insurance company; (2)us or any of our affiliated insurance companies; (3)Any risk retention group;or (4)Any self-insurance method or program, in which case the "insured"will be deemed to be the provider of other insurance. Other insurance does not include umbrella insurance,or excess insurance,that was bought specifically to apply in excess of the Limits of Insurance shown for this insurance in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations. b.If valid and collectible other insurance is available to the "insured"for a loss covered under this insurance,our obligations are limited as follows: (1)This insurance is primary except when Paragraph (2)below applies.When this insurance is primary: (a)If any other insurance is issued to any "named insured"by us,or any of our affiliated insurance companies, this insurance is primary to that other insurance,and we will not share with such other insurance; and (b)If any other insurance not described in Paragraph (a)above is also primary,we will share with all that other insurance as follows: (i)If all of the other insurance permits contribution by equal shares,we will follow this method also.Under this approach each provider of insurance contributes equal amounts until it has paid its applicable limit of insurance or none of the "loss"remains, whichever comes first. (ii)If any of the other insurance does not permit contribution by equal shares,we will contribute by limits.Under this method,the share of each provider of insurance is based on the ratio of its applicable limit of insurance to the total applicable limits of insurance of all providers of insurance. (2)This insurance is excess over any valid and collectible other insurance,whether such other insurance is primary,excess, contingent or on any other basis: (a)If the "pollution conditions"that caused the "loss"are "auto transportation pollution conditions"; (b)That only covers one or more projects specifically described in it. This paragraph does not apply to any other insurance that is available to any person or organization that: (i)Is an "insured"under Paragraph e.of the definition of "insured"; or (Ii)Is an "insured"under any additional insured endorsement issued by us as part of this policy; (c)That is available to the "insured" when the "insured"is an additional insured,or is any other insured that does not qualify as a named insured,under such other insurance; or (d)That is available to any person or organization that: (i)Is an "insured"under Paragraph e.of the definition of "insured"; or (ii)Is an "insured"under any additional insured endorsement issued by us as part of this policy. However,if the "named insured" specifically agrees in a written contract or agreement that the insurance provided to such person or organization must apply on a primary basis,or a primary and RP10031021 0 2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved.Page6of8 ;;; 5 noncontributory basis,this insurance is primary to other insurance that is available to such person or organization which cover that person or organization as a named insured,and we will not share with that other insurance,provide that the "bodily injury","property damage"or "pollution clean-up costs"for which coverage is sought result from "pollution conditions"that commence after the written contract or agreement was signed by the "named insured". (3)when this insurance is excess,we will have no duty to defend the "insured" against any "claim"if any provider of other insurance has a duty to defend the "insured"against that "claim".But we will have the right to associate in the defense and control of any "claim"that we reasonably believe is likely to involve this insurance.If no provider of other insurance defends any "claim"for "loss" to which this insurance applies,we will undertake to do so,but we will be entitled to the "insured's"rights against all those providers of other insurance. (4)when this insurance is excess,we will pay only our share of the amount of the loss,if any,that exceeds the sum of: (a)The total amount that all such other insurance would pay for the loss in the absence of this insurance;and (b)The total of all deductible and self-insured amounts under all such other insurance. SECTION III -DEFINITIONS 1."Contractors Pollution Liability Coverage": a.Means Contractors Pollution Liability Coverage. b.Includes Contractors Pollution Liability coverage that is part of any policy that provides Contractors Pollution Liability coverage and any other coverage. 2."Coverage territory"means anywhere in the world. 3."Financial interest"means the insurable interest in a "foreign insured organization"because of: POLLUTION LIABILITY a.Sole ownership of,or majority ownership interest in,such "foreign insured organization",either directly or through one or more intervening subsidiaries; b.Indemnification of,or an obligation to indemnify: (1)such "foreign insured organization"for a "foreign pollution legal liability loss"or "foreign emergency response costs loss";or (2)Any other "insured"for whom such "foreign insured organization"is liable for a "foreign pollution legal liability loss";or c.An obligation to obtain insurance for such "foreign insured organization". 4."Foreign emergency response costs loss"means "loss"that is "emergency response costs" incurred by or on behalf of any "named insured" and to which Emergency Response Costs of this insurance would have applied but for the fact that such "named insured"is located in any country or jurisdiction in which we are not licensed to provide this insurance and where providing this insurance would violate the laws or regulations of such country or jurisdiction. 5."Foreign insured organization"means any organization that: a.Is: (1)An "insured"under Pollution Legal Liability;or (2)A "named insured"under Emergency Response Costs; of this insurance;and b.Is located in a country or jurisdiction in which we are not licensed to provide this insurance and where providing this insurance would violate the laws and regulations of such country or jurisdiction. 6."Foreign pollution legal liability loss"means: a."Loss"the "insured"is legally obligated to pay and to which Pollution Legal Liability of this insurance would have applied;or b."Defense expenses"that we would have paid to defend the insured against any "claim"for "loss"that we would have defended under Pollution Legal Liability of this insurance; RP10 031021 0 2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved.Page 7 of 8 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY organization performing such services on its behalf is legally qualified to perform such services,if such legal qualification is required by applicable laws or regulations. 26."Design professional's insurance"means any professional liability insurance available to the "design professional"as a named insured for "your contractor professional services"and includes any deductible,self-insured retention or coinsurance obligation under that insurance. 27."Disposal site": a.Means a premises,site or location that is or was at any time used by or for any "insured" or others for the handling,storage,disposal, processing or treatment of waste. b.Does not include a premises,site or location that: (1)Is located within the boundaries of a job site where "covered operations"are being performed;and (2)1s not being used by you or on your behalf for the disposal,processing or treatment of waste. 28."Electronic data"means information,facts,or programs stored as or on,created or used on,or transmitted to or from computer software (including systems and applications software), hard or floppy disks,CD-ROMS,tapes,drives, cells,data processing devices,or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. 29."Emergency response costs"means reasonable and necessary expenses incurred by you or on your behalf that: a.Are for actions taken within the first ten days after the first discovery,or other knowledge,of the "pollution conditions"by any "insured";and b.Are to abate,remove or remediate the "pollution conditions"in response to an imminent and substantial threat of "bodily injury"or an imminent and substantial threat to the environment. 30."Employee": a.Includes: (1)A former or retired employee;and (2)A "leased worker". b.Does not include a "temporary worker". 31."Environmental damage": a.Means the harmful or damaging presence of "pollutants"that results in "pollution clean-up costs". b.Does not include "property damage". 32."Environmental laws"means any federal,state, provincial,tribal or local law,regulation or statute,or any governmental,judicial or administrative order or directive,governing liabilities or responsibilities of the "insured"with respect to "pollution conditions". 33."Executive officer"means any person holding an officer position created by an organization's charter,constitution,by-laws or any other similar governing document. 34."Faulty work incident"means any defect, deficiency,inadequacy or dangerous condition in "your work"that is neither expected nor intended from the standpoint of any "insured". 35."First Named Insured"means the first person or organization stated in Item 1.of the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations. 36."Fungi"means any type or form of fungus, including mold or mildew and any mycotoxins, spores,scents or byproducts produced or released by fungi. 37."Fungi or bacteria conditions"means the discharge,dispersal,seepage,migration,release or escape of"fungi"or bacteria,provided that no part of such discharge,dispersal,seepage, migration,release or escape is expected or intended from the standpoint of the "insured". The growth or reproduction of "fungi"or bacteria at a premises,site or location beyond amounts and concentrations naturally present at that premises,site or location will be deemed to be a discharge,dispersal,seepage,migration,release or escape of "fungi"or bacteria. 38."Insured"means: a.Any "named insured"; b.The "named insured's"legal representative if the "named insured"dies or if the "named insured"is declared mentally incompetent, but only with respect to duties as such.That representative will have all rights and duties of such "named insured"under this policy; c.Only for the purposes of: (1)Any Contractors Professional Liability Coverage,and only with respect to the conduct of the "named insured's" contractor business; RP10 001121 0 2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved.Page26of37 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY 4 ii (2)Any Contractors Pollution Liability Coverage,any Contractors Asbestos Pollution Liability Coverage,and any Non-Owned Disposal Site Pollution legal Liability Coverage if the "non-owned disposal site pollution conditions"are "contractor waste non-owned disposal site pollution conditions",and only with respect to the conduct of "covered operations"for the "named insured's"business;and (3)Any Site Pollution Liability Coverage, and any Non-Owned Disposal Site Pollution legal Liability Coverage if the "non-owned disposal site pollution conditions"are "operator waste non-owned disposal site pollution conditions",and only with respect to the conduct of the "named insured's" business; the following persons or organizations: (T)The "named insured's"spouse if such "named insured"is designated in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations as an individual,but only with respect to a business of which: (a)Such "named insured"is the sole owner;or (b)such "named insured"and spouse are the sole owners; (2)The "named insured's"partners, members and their spouses,if such "named insured"is designated in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations as a partnership or joint venture; (3)The "named insured's"members if such "named insured"is designated in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations as a limited liability company; (4)The "named insured's"managers if such "named insured"is designated in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations as a limited liability company,but only with respect to their duties as such "named insured's"managers; (5)The "named insured's""executive officers"and directors if such "named insured"is designated in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations as an organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company,but only with respect to their duties as such "named insured's" "executive officers"or directors; (6)The "named insured's"stockholders if such "named insured"is designated in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations as an organization other than a partnership,joint venture or limited liability company,but only with respect to their liability as such "named insured's"stockholders;and (7)The "named insured's""employees", other than either the "named insured's" managers (if it is a limited liability company)or the "named insured's" "executive officers"(if it is an organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company),but only for acts within the scope of their employment by such "named insured"or for their performance of duties related to the conduct of such "named insured's" business. However,none of these "employees"are "insureds"for: (a)"loss"because of "bodily injury": (i)To any "named insured",to any "named insured's"partners or members (if it is a partnership or joint venture),to any "named insured's"members (if it is a limited liability company),or to a co-"employee"while in the course of such co-"employee's" employment or performing duties related to the conduct of the "named insured's"business; (ii)To the spouse,child,parent, brother or sister of that co-"employee"as a consequence of "bodily injury", or as a consequence of the employment or performance of duties of that co-"employee", described in Paragraph (a)(i) above;or (iii)For which there is any obligation to share "loss"with or repay someone else who must pay "loss"because of the injury described in Paragraphs (a)(i) or (ii)above;or RP10001121 0 2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved.Page 27 of37 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY (b)"Property damage"to,or "pollution clean-up costs"for,property: (i)Owned,occupied or used by;or (ii)Rented to,in the care,custody or control of,or over which physical control is being exercised for any purpose by; any "named insured"or any of its "employees",any "named insured's" partners or members (if it is a partnership or joint venture),or any "named insured's"members (if it is a limited liability company).For the purposes of any Contractors Professional Liability Coverage,this exclusion does not apply to "property damage"to any premises, site or location that is temporarily rented or occupied by,or temporarily loaned to,the "named insured"exclusively for any job site where operations are being performed by or on behalf of such "named insured"that are part of such "named insured's"contractor business.For the purposes of any Contractors Pollution Liability Coverage and any Contractors Asbestos Pollution Liability Coverage,this exclusion does not apply to "property damage"to,or "pollution clean-up costs"for,any premises,site or location that is temporarily rented or occupied by, or temporarily loaned to,the "named insured"exclusively for any job site where "covered operations" are being performed; d.Only for the purposes of: (1)Any Contractors Professional Liability Coverage,and only with respect to the conduct of the "named insured's" contractor business;and (2)Any Contractors Pollution Liability Coverage,any Contractors Asbestos Pollution Liability Coverage,and any Non-Owned Disposal Site Pollution Legal Liability Coverage if the "non-owned disposal site pollution conditions"are "contractor waste non-owned disposal site pollution conditions",and only with respect to the conduct of "covered operations"for the "named insured's"business; the following persons or organizations: (1)The "named insured's"former or retired partners who are individuals and whom such "named insured"hires or retains as independent contractors in a contract or agreement with that former or retired partner if such "named insured"is designated in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations as a partnership, but only for their performance of duties under such contract or agreement; (2)The "named insured's"former or retired members who are individuals and whom such "named insured"hires or retains as independent contractors in a contract or agreement with that former or retired member if such "named insured"is designated in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations as a limited liability company but only for their performance of duties under such contract or agreement;and (3)The "named insured's"former or retired "employees"that such "named insured" hires or retains as independent contractors in a contract or agreement with that former or retired "employee" but only for their performance of duties under such contract or agreement. However,none of these "employees"are "insureds"for: (a)"Loss"because of "bodily injury" described in Paragraph c.(7)(a) above;or (b)"Property damage"or "pollution clean-up costs"described in Paragraph c.(7)b)above;and e.Only for the purposes of: (1)Any Contractors Pollution Liability Coverage; (2)Any Contractors Asbestos Pollution Liability Coverage;and (3)Any Non-Owned Disposal Site Pollution Legal Liability Coverage if the "non-owned disposal site pollution conditions"are "contractor waste non-owned disposal site pollution conditions"; RP 10 00 1121 2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved.Page 28of 37 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY any person or organization that the "named insured"agreed in a written contract or agreement to include as an additional insured under this insurance. However,such person or organization is an "insured"only for "bodily injury","property damage"or "pollution clean-up costs" arising out of "covered operations" performed by or on behalf of any "named insured"and only to the extent that the "pollution conditions"are caused by acts or omissions of any "named insured"or any of such "named insured's"subcontractors. Also,the insurance provided to such person or organization is subject to the following provisions: (1)The limits of insurance provided to such person or organization will be the minimum limits which the "named insured"agreed to provide in the written contract or agreement,or the limits shown in the Travelers ECP Custom Declarations,whichever are less. (2)The insurance provided to such person or organization does not apply to any: (a)"Bodily injury","property damage" or "pollution clean-up costs" resulting from: (i)"Pollution conditions"that commenced before the written contract or agreement was signed by the "named insured"; or (ii)"Pollution conditions",or any incident,condition or other circumstance which could become "pollution conditions", that was known,or reasonably should have been known,by such person or organization or by any of that organization's employees,and that was not previously disclosed to a "responsible person"before the written contract or agreement was signed by the "named insured";or (b)"Bodily injury","property damage" or "pollution clean-up costs"arising out of any "named insured's" operation,maintenance,or use of equipment rented or leased from that person or organization if the "pollution conditions"commenced after the equipment lease expires. 39."Insured contract"means that part of any contract or agreement pertaining to "covered operations"or "your contractor professional services"under which the "named insured" assumes the "tort liability"of another to pay "loss"sustained or incurred by others. 40."Lead pollution conditions"means any "pollution conditions"that are the discharge,dispersal, seepage,migration,release or escape of lead, lead compounds or any material or substance that contains or incorporates lead. 41."Leased worker": a.Means a person hired from a labor leasing firm under an agreement between the hirer and that firm to perform duties related to the conduct of the hirer's business. b.Does not include a "temporary worker". 42."Loading or unloading"means the handling of property: a.After it is moved from the place where it is accepted for movement into or onto an "auto",aircraft or watercraft or into or onto a wheeled vehicle designed for travel on railroad tracks; b.While it is in or on an "auto",aircraft or watercraft or in or on a wheeled vehicle designed for travel on railroad tracks;or c.While it is being moved from an "auto", aircraft or watercraft or from a wheeled vehicle designed for travel on railroad tracks to the place where it is finally delivered; but "loading or unloading"does not include the movement of property by means of a mechanical device,other than a hand truck,that is not attached to the "auto",aircraft or watercraft or to the wheeled vehicle designed for travel on railroad tracks. 43."Loss"means: a.For the purposes of any Contractors Professional Liability Coverage: (1)Compensatory damages;and (2)Punitive or exemplary damages if such damages are insurable under applicable law. RP10 001121 ©2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved.Page 29 of37 COMM RCIAL E ERAL IAB LITYEGNLI c.Meth d O h rin a.o f S a g The sta e e t in th a etmnser a cura e a d co p e ectnmlt;If a l o the o he i sura ce pe m t co t i ut olftrnnrisnrbin by e u l sha e , w i l fo l w t i m t o l oqarsewllohsehdas.b.Tho e sta e e ts a e ba e upostmnrsdn Und r th s e ch in ure co t i ut s re re e t ti n y ueiasrnrbepsnaoso a e to us; nmdad e ua a o n s unt l it ha pa d it a pl ca lqlmutisispibe c.We ha e i sue th s po i y i re i n e up nvsdilcnlacolmt o in ura ce o no e o th l ss re a ns,i i f s n r n f e o m i y ur e re e ta i ns.o r p s n t o The uni te ti n l o i sio o ,o uni t n i na e ronnoamsnfrnetolrrIfayothohrisuracedosnopemtnfetennetrii,a y i f rm ti n pro i e by y u whi h we re i dnnnoaovddoclecotrbuin by e u l sha e , we wi l co t i utnitoqarslnrbe up n i issui g th s po i y wi l no pre u i e y uonnilcltjdcorbylmt. Und r th s m t o ,e ch i sure 'siiseiehdanr ri ht unde th s in ura ce Ho e e ,thi pro i i ngsrisn.w v r s v s oshaeis ba e o the ra i o i s a p i a l i irsdntoftplcbelmt do s no a f ct o r ri h to co l ct a di i n letfeugtledtoaoinuracetothtoaaplcalliisofsnetlpibemtfpreimotoeecieor rig t o ca ce l t o omurxrsuhsfnlainrisuraceolnsures.n n f a l i r no re e a i cco d nce w t pp i a l n ura cennwlnaraihalcbeisn d P i a y And No -Co trib t ry In u an e If.r m r n n u o s r c l ws o e ul t o s.a r r g a i n Req i ed B Wri te o tracurytnCnt 7.Se arat o f n u edpinOIsrs If y u spe i i a l a re i a wri t n co t a t oocfclygentenrcr Ex e t wi h re pe t to the Li i s o In ura ce a dcptscmtfsn,naremntthatheisuraceafodd to ageetnnfren a y ri h s o du i s a sig e i th sngtrtesndniisureunehiCoeaePatmst p l nnddrtsvrgruapyo Co e a e Pa t to the fi st Na e Insure ,th svrgrrmddiapriaybai, o a pri a y a d no -m r s s r m r n n i sura ce a pl e :n n p i scotrbuoybais, th s i sura ce is pri a y tonitrsinnmr a.As i e ch Na e In ure we e the o lfamdsdrnyohrinuracetht i a a l bl otesnasviaet Na e n ure ; ndmdIsdawhih o e s such n ure a a n m d i sure ,c c v r i s d s a e n d b.Se a a e y to e ch in ure a a n t who cl iprtlasdgismamad we wil no sha e wi h th t o h r in ura cenltrtatesn,i m d o "sui "i b o g tsaertsruh.pro i e ha :v d d t t 8.Tra sfe O i h s O e o ery Ag i s t ersnrfRgtfRcvantOh(1)The "bo i y i j ry o "pro e ty da a e fodlnu"r p r m g "r To Uswhihcoeaeisoghocur; ndcvrgsutcsa If the i sure ha ri h s to re o e a l o pa t o a yndsgtcvrlrrfn(2)The "pe so a a d a v rt sin i j ry fornlndeignu"r pa m n we ha e m d unde thi Co e a e Pa tyetvaersvrgr,whi h co e a e is so gh i ca se by acvrgutsudn th se ri ht a e tra sfe re t us. he i sure ustogsrnrdoTndmofesetaicomte;f n h t s m i t d do no h ng a te l ss to i p i th m At o r re u st,t i f r o m a r e .u q esubseunttothesinngothacotrctoqegiftnarthisurewilbrig"sui "o tra sfe tho e ri h sendlntrnrsgtaremntbyyugeeo.to us a d h l s e f rce t e .n e p u n o h m5.P e i m Au irmudt 9.Wh n We D N t en weooRea.We wi l co p t a l p e i m f r h s Co e a elmuelrmusotivrg If we d ci e n t o r n w h s Co e a e P rt e wi ledoteetivrga,w lPaticcodncewtur u e a d a e .r n a r a i h o r l s n r t s m i o de i e to th fi st Na e In ure sho n inalrlvrermdsdwb.Pre i m sho n in th s Co e a e Pa t amuwivrgrs th De l ra i n wri te no i e o the no r n waecatostntcfneelavncepreimiadeoiprmumol.Adamuspsteinyt no l ss th n 0 da s be o e t e e pi a i n da etea3yfrhxrtot.th clo e o e ch a d t pe i d we wi l co p tesfauirolmue If no i e is m i e ,pro f o m i i g wi l be suffi i ntcaldofalnlcetthernd pre i m fo th t pe i d a d se deaemuraronn pro f f o i eoontc.no i e t th fi st Na e I sure .The du da etcoermdndet SE TI N V –D F N T O SCOEIIINfoadiadreropetiepeimitedtrutntscvrmusshae 1."shown as the due date on the bill.If the sum of Ad e t se e t"m a s a no i e th t s br a ca t ovrimnentcaiodsr pu l she to the ge e a pub i o spe i i m rbidnrllcrcfcatheadvanceandaudit premiums paid for the k te po i y pe i d is gre te tha the e rn dlcroarnae se m nt a o t y ur go ds, pro u ts o ser i egesbuoodcrvcs fo th purp se o a t a g custo e s oreoftrmrrpremium,we will return the excess to the fi rst Na e nsure .supp rt r . o h p r o e o hi de i i i nmdIdoesFrteupssftsfnto: c.The fi st Na e In ure m st k e re o d ormdsduepcrsf a.No i e th t a e publ she i cl de m t r atcsaridnuaeil th in o m t o we ne d fo pre i m pl ce o the Int rn t o oefrainermuadneern sim l r i a co p t ti n a d se d us co i s a such t m smuao,n n p e t i e m a s o co m ni a i n;a denfmucton a we m y re u st.s a q e b.Re a di g we sit s, o l tha pa t o a we si egrnbenytrfbt 6.Rep es n ati nretos th t is a o t y u go d , pro u ts o se v ceabuorosdcrris fo th pur o e o a t a custo e s orepssftrmrrBytigtiplcyogre:p n h s o i ,y u a e supp rt r i co si e e a a v rt se e toessndrdndeimn. Pa e 16 o 21gf CG 1 0 02 1T09© 2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company. All rights reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. with its permission. approach specifically ctin cting electronic acce whichever comes first. Declarations such insured REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 00 63 13-1 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION NO. DATE OF REQUEST: RESPONSE CODE: [ ] CRITICAL [ ] ROUTINE DATE RESPONSE REQUIRED: OWNER: TOWN OF WESTLAKE PROJECT NO.: R0070155.01 PROJECT TITLE: WESTLAKE PUMP STATION GENERATOR REPLACEMENT CONTRACTOR: Contractor shall submit a timely proposal, if Contractor believes the response given requires an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time, so as not to delay Contractor’s Work in accordance with the General Conditions of Agreement. Reference: Specification(s) Drawing(s) / Detail(s) Information Required: Response: Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times, if applicable (non -binding, preliminary): Contract Price Contract Time $ days [increase] [decrease]. [increase] [decrease]. REQUESTED: RESPONSED: By: By: Contractor (Authorized Signature) Engineer (Authorized Signature) Title: Title: Date: Date: FIELD ORDER 00 63 36-1 FIELD ORDER NO. CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE None Original Contract Price: $ CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES See Below Original Contract Times: Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days or dates [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. to No. : $ [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. to No. : N/A Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days Contract Price prior to this Change Order: $ Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days or dates [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: $ [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days or dates Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: $ Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days or dates RECOMMENDED: ACCEPTED: ACCEPTED: By: By: By: Engineer (Authorized Signature) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature) Title: Title: Title: Date: Date: Date: Professional Engineers Seal WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE 00 63 49-1 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE DATE OF ISSUANCE: EFFECTIVE DATE: OWNER: TOWN OF WESTLAKE PROJECT NO.: R0070155.01 PROJECT TITLE: WESTLAKE PUMP STATION GENERATOR REPLACEMENT CONTRACTOR: Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description of change: Reason for change: Attachments: [List documents supporting change] Purpose for Work Change Directive: Directive to proceed promptly with the Work described herein, prior to agreeing to changes on Contract Price and Contract Time, is issued due to: [check one or both of the following] Non-agreement on pricing of proposed change. Necessity to proceed for schedule or other Project reasons. Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times (non-binding, preliminary): Contract Price $ [increase] [decrease]. Contract Time days [increase] [decrease]. Basis of estimated change in Contract Price: RECOMMENDED: AUTHORIZED BY: RECEIVED: By: By: By: Engineer (Authorized Signature) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature) Title: Title: Title: Date: Date: Date: Lump Sum Cost of the Work Unit Price Other CHANGE ORDER NO. ____ CHANGE ORDER FORM 00 63 63-1 ISSUE DATE: EFFECTIVE DATE: OWNER: TOWN OF WESTLAKE CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: WESTWOOD PROFESSIONAL SERVICES PROJECT NO.: R0070155.01 PROJECT: WESTLAKE PUMP STATION GENERATOR REPLACEMENT The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order: Justification: Description: Attachments: [List documents supporting change] [Remainder of this page intentionally left blank] EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE and Issued and Published Jointly by AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE A Practice Division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS Endorsed by CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 (703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347-7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org Associated General Contractors of America 2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308 (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE. Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00 i STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology .......................................................................................................... 1 1.01 Defined Terms............................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 Terminology.................................................................................................................................. 5 Article 2 – Preliminary Matters......................................................................................................................... 6 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance............................................................................. 6 2.02 Copies of Documents.................................................................................................................... 6 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed .............................................................. 6 2.04 Starting the Work .......................................................................................................................... 7 2.05 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ................................. 7 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ................................................................................................... 7 Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse ............................................................................ 8 3.01 Intent.............................................................................................................................................. 8 3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................... 8 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 9 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .................................................................. 9 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 10 3.06 Electronic Data............................................................................................................................ 10 Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions; Reference Points .......................................................................................................... 10 4.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................. 10 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .......................................................................................... 11 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions............................................................................. 11 4.04 Underground Facilities ............................................................................................................... 13 4.05 Reference Points ......................................................................................................................... 14 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site.............................................................................. 14 Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance ..................................................................................................................... 16 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 16 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ................................................................................................... 16 5.03 Certificates of Insurance ............................................................................................................. 16 5.04 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 17 5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance ....................................................................................................... 18 5.06 Property Insurance ...................................................................................................................... 18 5.07 Waiver of Rights ......................................................................................................................... 20 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds ........................................................................ 21 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace........................................................... 21 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00 ii 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ......................................................... 21 Article 6 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................................ 22 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 22 6.02 Labor; Working Hours................................................................................................................ 22 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 22 6.04 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 23 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ....................................................................................................... 23 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ................................................................... 25 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 26 6.08 Permits......................................................................................................................................... 27 6.09 Laws and Regulations ................................................................................................................. 27 6.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 28 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ....................................................................................................... 28 6.12 Record Documents...................................................................................................................... 29 6.13 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................. 29 6.14 Safety Representative ................................................................................................................. 30 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ............................................................................................. 30 6.16 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 30 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ...................................................................................................... 30 6.18 Continuing the Work .................................................................................................................. 32 6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee.......................................................................... 32 6.20 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 33 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services .............................................................................. 34 Article 7 – Other Work at the Site................................................................................................................... 34 7.01 Related Work at Site ................................................................................................................... 34 7.02 Coordination................................................................................................................................ 35 7.03 Legal Relationships..................................................................................................................... 35 Article 8 – Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................................................. 36 8.01 Communications to Contractor................................................................................................... 36 8.02 Replacement of Engineer............................................................................................................ 36 8.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 36 8.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................ 36 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests .................................................................................. 36 8.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 36 8.07 Change Orders............................................................................................................................. 36 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .............................................................................................. 36 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ................................................................................... 36 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition.................................................................... 37 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ......................................................................................... 37 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program............................................................................................... 37 Article 9 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ........................................................................................ 37 9.01 Owner’s Representative .............................................................................................................. 37 9.02 Visits to Site ................................................................................................................................ 37 9.03 Project Representative ................................................................................................................ 38 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00 3 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work .................................................................................................. 38 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work .......................................................................................................... 38 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ......................................................................... 38 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work .......................................................................................... 38 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work .................... 39 9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities........................................................ 39 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program............................................................................................... 40 Article 10 – Changes in the Work; Claims ..................................................................................................... 40 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................... 40 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................... 40 10.03 Execution of Change Orders....................................................................................................... 40 10.04 Notification to Surety.................................................................................................................. 41 10.05 Claims.......................................................................................................................................... 41 Article 11 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work....................................................................... 42 11.01 Cost of the Work ......................................................................................................................... 42 11.02 Allowances .................................................................................................................................. 44 11.03 Unit Price Work .......................................................................................................................... 45 Article 12 – Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times............................................................... 46 12.01 Change of Contract Price............................................................................................................ 46 12.02 Change of Contract Times .......................................................................................................... 47 12.03 Delays .......................................................................................................................................... 47 Article 13 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ...................... 48 13.01 Notice of Defects ........................................................................................................................ 48 13.02 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................... 48 13.03 Tests and Inspections .................................................................................................................. 48 13.04 Uncovering Work ....................................................................................................................... 49 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work......................................................................................................... 49 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ................................................................................ 50 13.07 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................ 50 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work .................................................................................................. 51 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work ......................................................................................... 51 Article 14 – Payments to Contractor and Completion.................................................................................... 52 14.01 Schedule of Values ..................................................................................................................... 52 14.02 Progress Payments ...................................................................................................................... 52 14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................... 55 14.04 Substantial Completion............................................................................................................... 55 14.05 Partial Utilization ........................................................................................................................ 56 14.06 Final Inspection........................................................................................................................... 56 14.07 Final Payment ............................................................................................................................. 56 14.08 Final Completion Delayed .......................................................................................................... 57 14.09 Waiver of Claims ........................................................................................................................ 58 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00 4 Article 15 – Suspension of Work and Termination ........................................................................................ 58 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ........................................................................................................ 58 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................... 58 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................... 59 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate .................................................................................. 60 Article 16 – Dispute Resolution ...................................................................................................................... 60 16.01 Methods and Procedures............................................................................................................. 60 Article 17 – Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................. 61 17.01 Giving Notice .............................................................................................................................. 61 17.02 Computation of Times ................................................................................................................ 61 17.03 Cumulative Remedies ................................................................................................................. 61 17.04 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................... 61 17.05 Controlling Law .......................................................................................................................... 62 17.06 Headings...................................................................................................................................... 62 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-1 ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment - The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos - Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid - The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidder - The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. 7. Bidding Documents - The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). 8. Bidding Requirements - The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. 9. Change Order - A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract - The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-2 12. Contract Documents - Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price - The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times - The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment. 15. Contractor - The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work - See Paragraph 11.01 for definition. 17. Drawings - That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement - The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. Engineer - The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20. Field Order - A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21. General Requirements - Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto. 23. Hazardous Waste - The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations - Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-3 25. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 26. Milestone - A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 27. Notice of Award - The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. 28. Notice to Proceed - A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 29. Owner - The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 30. PCBs - Polychlorinated biphenyls. 31. Petroleum - Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 32. Progress Schedule - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 33. Project - The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. 34. Project Manual - The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 35. Radioactive Material - Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 36. Resident Project Representative - The authorized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 37. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 38. Schedule of Submittals - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-4 39. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 40. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 41. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 42. Specifications - That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 43. Subcontractor - An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 44. Substantial Completion - The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 45. Successful Bidder - The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 46. Supplementary Conditions - That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 47. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or Supplier having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor. 48. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 49. Unit Price Work - Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 50. Work - The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-5 such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 51. Work Change Directive - A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: 1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day: 1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective: 1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-6 c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide” is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide” is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-7 Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-8 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-9 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies: 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-10 2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or 3. Engineer’s written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are limited to electronic files submitted to the project delivery management system. Documents in hard copy format are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such hard copy documents will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the electronic copies govern. B. Electronic documents and submittals submitted through the project delivery management system cannot be modified as a new record after submittal. Therefore, all documents and submittals into the project delivery management system are deemed record on file upon receipt. C. All electronic records will be archived upon project delivery completion. ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-11 comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site; and 2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities). B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-12 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such final commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-13 or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data; b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction; and d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated: 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-14 reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-15 immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 4.06.E. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-16 Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-17 B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation to maintain such insurance. D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor. E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. 5.04 Contractor’s Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-18 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; 4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 6. include completed operations coverage: a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment. b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter. 5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-19 1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee; 2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07. D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-20 insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-21 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order. B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner’s exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-22 ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-23 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below. 1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service. b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-24 2. Substitute Items: a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: 1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified; 2) will state: a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice Contractor’s achievement of Substantial Completion on time, b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; 3) will identify: a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and 4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-25 B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or “or-equal” at Contractor’s expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-26 entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity; nor 2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-27 use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-28 and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor’s performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-29 6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work. D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-30 any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. 2. Samples: a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-31 b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures: 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have: a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer’s Review: 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-32 technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures: 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-33 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable . B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-34 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer. C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-35 B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor’s wrongful actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor’s wrongful action or inactions. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-36 ARTICLE 8 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 8.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 8.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B. 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-37 and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents. 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D. ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-38 9.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-39 on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question. B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B. C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-40 and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D. ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.D. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-41 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims. B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part; 2. approve the Claim; or 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-42 D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-43 subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-44 i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A. C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: 1. Contractor agrees that: EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-45 a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance: 1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-46 ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-47 deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive. 12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-48 E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article13. 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-49 the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense. B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-50 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-51 to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take possession of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-52 are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments: 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications: 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-53 refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-54 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due: 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. D. Reduction in Payment: 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because: a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s performance or furnishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-55 3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. 14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the tentative list. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-56 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D for that part of the Work. 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment: 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-57 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance: 1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due: 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-58 (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-59 4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion); 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and 3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. E. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-60 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph. ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-61 B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or 3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00 72 00-62 Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 17.06 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 1 of 27 SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Council (EJCDC C-700, 2007 edition) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. SC-1.01 Make the following modifications to 1.01 Defined Terms A. Delete Paragraph 1.01 A. 5 entirely and insert the following in its place: “5. Bid - The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices and schedule for the Work to be performed.” B. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 52: “52. Written Amendment – A written statement modifying the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the non- engineering or non-technical rather than strictly construction-related aspects of the Contract Documents.” C. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 53: “53. The Engineer’s Consultants are: 1. Westwood Professional Services, 7557 Rambler Road, Dallas, TX 75231” D. Add a new paragraph 1.01 A. 54: “54. Construction Manager – The authorized representative of Owner who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. The individual or entity will be responsible for administration of the Contract as a representative of the Owner. This individual may also serve as the Resident Project Representative. For this project the Owner has designated Countywide Inspection Services to serve as Construction Manager.” SC-1.02 Make the following modifications to 1.02 Terminology B. Add a new paragraph “B.2” as follows: "2. At no additional cost to Owner", "With no extra compensation to Contractor", "At Contractor's own expense", or similar words mean that the Contractor will perform or provide specified Work and that all cost for performing the Work is included in the Contract Price.” C. Delete Paragraph C. Add the following: “C. Day SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 2 of 27 1. A “calendar day” shall be a day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight, and is any day of the year, with no days being excluded. 2. A “working day” shall be a day which permits construction of the principal units of the work for a period of not less than seven hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Working days do not include days on which weather or other conditions not under the control of the Contractor prevent Contractor from working the seven hours defining a working day. Working days do not include Saturdays, Sundays or any of the following holidays: New Year, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving and Christmas Eve and Christmas Day.” D. Add new paragraphs “E.5 and E.6” as follows: “5. Specifications are written in modified brief style. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 6. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish", "install", "provide", or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words.” SC-2.02 Make the following modifications to 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Amend the first sentence of paragraph GC-2.02 A. by deleting “ten” and inserting “five.” SC-2.05 Make the following modifications to 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 2.05.A.3 “B. Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which the Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation from the Engineer before proceeding with any work affected thereby. In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract Document which were not reported prior to the Award of the Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have included the most expensive item in their bid.” SC-3.01 Make the following modifications to 3.01 Intent A. Add the following to 3.01 A “Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 3 of 27 Provide any work, materials or equipment required for a complete and functional system even if they are not detailed or specified.” 1. The contract requirements described in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to each and all specification sections unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Organization of Contract Documents is not intended to control or to lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing work among Subcontractors, or to establish the extent of work to be performed by any trade, Subcontractor or Supplier. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each specification or drawing. Items shown in the contract documents are applicable regardless of location in the Contract Documents. 3. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict specification text.” B. Add new paragraphs “D - F” as follows: “D. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, unless Contract Documents indicate otherwise. 1. Quantity or quality level shown or indicated shall be the minimum to be provided or performed in every instance. 2. Actual installation must meet or exceed the minimum quality indicated. 3. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for context of requirements. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Engineer for a decision before proceeding. E. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the drawings but are not included in the specifications. F. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by Field Order. Change Order or Written Amendment.” SC-3.02 Make the following modifications to 3.02 Reference Standards A. Add a new paragraph “B” as follows: “B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents regardless of lack of reference in the Contract Documents. Apply provisions of the Contract Documents where Contract Documents include more stringent requirements than these referenced standards. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 4 of 27 1. Standards referenced directly in the Contract Documents take precedence over standards that are not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as applicable. 2. Comply with standards not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as applicable for performance of the work except as otherwise limited by the Contract Documents. The Engineer determines whether code or standard is applicable, or which of several are applicable. 3. Make copies of reference standards available as requested by Engineer or Owner.” SC-3.03 Make the following modifications to 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Delete Paragraph 3.03.A.3 entirely and insert the following in its place: 3. “In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc in his Bid.” SC-3.05 Make the following modifications to 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Delete the last sentence of 3.05 B entirely and insert the following in its place: “Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited in writing by the Owner for security reasons. If the Owner so directs, Contractor shall surrender all copies of the construction contract documents and other related documents, in paper or digital format and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment.” SC-4.01 Make the following modifications to 4.01 Availability of Lands A. Add the following to Paragraphs 4.01.C: “A copy of the written agreements for the use of such land shall be provided to the Owner for record purposes.” SC-4.02 Make the following modifications to 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 4.02.B: “C. The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner: 1. None “D. The following drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) are known to Owner: 1. None a. None of the contents of such drawings is "technical data" on which Contractor may rely.” SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 5 of 27 SC-4.03 Make the following modifications to 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Amend paragraph 4.03 A. by deleting “promptly” and inserting “promptly but no later than within three (3) days.” SC-4.04 Make the following modifications to 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Amend paragraph 4.04.B.1. by deleting “promptly” and inserting “promptly but no later than within three (3) days.” SC-4.06 Make the following modifications to 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. Delete Paragraphs 4.06.A and 4.06.B in their entirety and insert the following: “A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site are known to Owner.” B. Delete Paragraphs 4.06.G. entirely and insert the following in its place: “G. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, OWNER SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTORS, AND ENGINEER, AND THE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS, AND SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO A HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION, PROVIDED THAT SUCH HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION: (I) WAS NOT SHOWN OR INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS OR IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO BE INCLUDED WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE WORK, AND (II) WAS NOT CREATED BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE. NOTHING IN THIS PARAGRAPH 4.06.G SHALL OBLIGATE OWNER TO INDEMNIFY ANY INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY FROM AND AGAINST THE CONSEQUENCES OF THAT INDIVIDUAL’S OR ENTITY’S OWN NEGLIGENCE.” C. Delete Paragraphs 4.06.H. entirely and insert the following in its place: “H. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER AND ENGINEER, AND THE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS, AND SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO A HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION CREATED BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE. NOTHING IN THIS PARAGRAPH 4.06.H SHALL OBLIGATE SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 6 of 27 CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY ANY INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY FROM AND AGAINST THE CONSEQUENCES OF THAT INDIVIDUAL’S OR ENTITY’S OWN NEGLIGENCE.” SC-5.01 Make the following modifications to 5.01 Performance, Payment and Other Bonds A. Amend paragraph 5.01 A. by deleting “These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date…” and adding the following: “These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until the period indicated in the bond documents….” B. Add the following to Paragraph 5.01.C.” “Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement bond may be considered an event of default under Article 15, Paragraph 15.02.” C. Add new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 5.01C “D. Amounts owed by Owner to Contractor under the Contract shall be used for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any performance bond or payment bond. By Contractor furnishing and Owner accepting these bonds, they agree that all funds earned by Contractor in the performance of the Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of Contractor under these bonds, subject to Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the Work. “E. Contractor or surety on behalf of Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner of all claims filed against the Payment Bond. When a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code 2253, the Contractor or surety on behalf of Contractor shall, with reasonable promptness, notify the claimant and Owner of the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed, including, but not limited to, the lack of substantiating documentation to support the claim as to entitlement or amount, and the Contractor or surety on behalf of Contractor shall, with reasonable promptness, pay or make arrangements for payment of any undisputed amount; provided, however, that the failure of the Contractor or surety on behalf of Contractor to timely discharge its obligations under this paragraph or to dispute or identify any specific defense to all or any part of a claim shall not be deemed to be an admission of liability by the Contractor or surety as to such claim or otherwise constitute a waiver of the Contractor’s or surety’s defenses to, or right to dispute, such claim.“ “F. Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any claimant under Payment Bonds, and shall have no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to claimants under Payment Bonds.” “G. In addition to the Performance and Payment Bonds, Contractor shall provide a Maintenance Bond in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract Price. This bond is to become effective the date of the expiration of the one year correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07 for all or any part of the project so designated in accordance with GC-14.04, and shall remain in effect for a period of two year after the date of Substantial Completion, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations. Surety for the Maintenance Bond shall meet same requirements SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 7 of 27 as for Performance and Payment Bonds set forth in GC-5.01. Specific requirements for these Maintenance Bonds shall be as established in Section 00 61 19 “Maintenance Bond Requirements.” “H. Contractor shall provide a Process Performance Bond in the full amount of the equipment cost as indicated in the amount shown for the equipment listed below and as described in the noted Section of the Specifications. This Bond is to become effective the date of Substantial Completion for the equipment so designated in accordance with GC-14.04, and shall remain in effect for a period as shown in the Specification Section after the date of Substantial Completion, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations. Surety for the Process Performance Bond shall meet the same requirements as for Performance and Payment Bonds set forth in GC-5.01. Specific requirements for these Process Performance Bonds shall be as established in the noted Section of the Specifications.” Specification Section Description of Equipment Bond Amount Bond Duration SC-5.02 Make the following modifications to 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. Add a new paragraph “B.” as follows: “B. Insurance companies providing insurance required by Contract Documents shall have a minimum rating of A-VIII according to A.M. Best Company.” SC-5.03 Make the following modifications to 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Delete Paragraph 5.03.B entirely. SC-5.04 The following additional information is provided as required by Paragraph 5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance A. Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance required by Paragraph 5.04. is to provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations. Workers' Compensation, etc., 1) State: Statutory 2) Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshore) Statutory Employers' Liability 1) Bodily Injury by Accident $500,000 4) Maritime Coverage Endorsement SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 8 of 27 Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the Owner and Additional Insured identified in Paragraph SC-5.04 E. B. Contractor's Liability Insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 is to provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations: Insurance for Claims of Damages 1) Comprehensive General Liability (Except Products - Completed Operations) $1,000,000 / Occurrence $2,000,000 / Aggregate 2) Products - Completed Operations $1,000,000 / Occurrence $2,000,000 / Aggregate 3) Personal and Advertising Injury (One Person/Organization) $1,000,000 4) Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000 5) Limit Per Person - Medical Expense $5,000 6) Personal Injury Liability coverage will include claims arising out of Employment Practices Liability, limited to coverage provided under standard contract. 1,000,000 7) Property Damage Liability insurance will provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage where applicable $1,000,000 8) Watercraft Liability Policy. Coverage shall apply to all vessels $1,000,000 9) Excess Liability, Umbrella Form to include coverage of Watercraft Liability. General Aggregate - Each Occurrence $1,000,000 C. Contractor's Liability Insurance shall also include completed operations and product liability coverage, and eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody and control of Contractor. In lieu of elimination of the exclusion, Contractor may provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. The Installation Floater insurance shall be a broad form or “All Peril” policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixture, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. Coverage under the Contractors Installation Floater will include: • faulty or defective workmanship, materials, maintenance or construction, • cost to remove defective or damaged Work from the project site or to protect it from loss or damage. • cost to cleanup and remove pollutants. • coverage for testing and start up, • any loss to property while in transit. • any loss at the Project Site. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 9 of 27 • any loss while in storage, both on-site and off-site, and • any loss to temporary project works if their value is included in the Contract Price. Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Contractor’s Installation Floater will provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. The Contractor will be solely responsible for any deductible carried under this coverage and claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixture, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. This policy will include a waiver of subrogation for those listed as additional insured in these Supplemental Conditions. D. Contractor's Automobile Liability Insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.A.6 is to provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations. Bodily Injury: 1) Each Person $1,000,000 2) Each Accident $1,000,000 Property Damage: 1) Each Accident, or $1,000,000 2) Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000 Town of Westlake, Texas Westwood Professional Services F. Contractor’s Contractual Liability Insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B is to provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations. Contractor’s Contractual Liability Insurance 1) General Aggregate $1,000,000 2) Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000 SC-5.05 Make the following modifications to 5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance A. Delete Paragraph 5.05.A entirely and insert the following in its place: “A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Contractor shall purchase and maintain for Owner, at no additional cost, Owner’s Protective Liability insurance naming Owner as the named insured with insurance that will protect said parties against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. This coverage shall be from the same company that provides Contractor’s liability insurance coverage, and in the same minimum amounts. The Engineer and Engineer’s consultants are additional insured as their interest may appear including their officers, directors, agents and employees.” SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 10 of 27 SC-5.06 Make the following modifications to 5.06 Property Insurance A. Delete Paragraph 5.06.A entirely and insert the following in its place; Subparagraphs 1 through 7 shall remain: “A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the work at the site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to deductible amounts as may be provided by the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Contractor in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 shall comply with requirements of Paragraph 5.08. This insurance shall:” B. Amend paragraph 5.06.A.4 by inserting the following language after the word “Work” in the second line: “and in transit for incorporation in the Work from such storage locations” C. Delete Paragraph 5.06.B entirely and insert the following in its place: “B. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of those listed as an insured or listed as an additional insured in Paragraph SC 5.04 E.” D. Delete Paragraph 5.06.D entirely. E. Delete Paragraph 5.06.E entirely. SC-5.07 Make the following modifications to 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. Delete Paragraph 5.07.B entirely. SC-5.08 Make the following modifications to 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Delete Paragraph 5.08 entirely. SC-5.11 Make the following modifications to ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE A. Add a new paragraph “5.11” as follows: “5.11 Owner’s Insurance for Project A. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Contractor shall determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from or connected with operations under this contract whether or not said losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of certificates or other evidence of insurance by the Owner, Engineer, and/or others listed as additional insured in Paragraph SC- 5.04 E that in any respect do not comply with the Contract requirements does not release the Contractor from compliance herewith.” SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 11 of 27 SC-6.05 Make the following modifications to 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-equals” A. Delete paragraph 6.05 A. and insert the following in its place: “A. Where equipment and products are specified by name, no substitutes or “or - equal” will be considered or approved unless the term “or-equal” is included in the individual Specification. If substitutes or “or equals” are specifically permitted for consideration by the individual Specifications, they must be submitted and will be reviewed and evaluated in accordance with the provisions established in Paragraph 6.05 and in the General Requirements of the Specifications.” Subparagraphs 605.A.1 and 605.A.2 remain intact. B. Amend paragraph 6.05 C. by deleting the fourth sentence and inserting the following in its place: “No “or-equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or Field Order.” C. Amend paragraph 6.05 E. by deleting the word “substitute” in all locations and replacing it with the phrase “substitute or “or-equal””. SC-6.06 Make the following modifications to 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others A. Amend paragraph 6.06 B. by deleting the words “Supplementary Conditions” and inserting the words “Contract Documents” it their place. B. Add a new paragraph “H.” as follows: “H. Owner or Engineer may furnish to any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or organization, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor in accordance with Contractor's Application for Payment on account of the particular Subcontractor's, Supplier's, other person's or other organization's Work.” SC-6.07 Make the following modifications to 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Delete Paragraphs 6.07.B. entirely and insert the following in its place: “B. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, OWNER SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS CONTRACTOR, AND ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS, AND SUBCONTRACTORS FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS, AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO ANY INFRINGEMENT OF PATENT RIGHTS OR COPYRIGHTS INCIDENT TO THE USE IN THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK OR RESULTING FROM THE INCORPORATION IN THE SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 12 of 27 WORK OF ANY INVENTION, DESIGN, PROCESS, PRODUCT, OR DEVICE SPECIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, BUT NOT IDENTIFIED AS BEING SUBJECT TO PAYMENT OF ANY LICENSE FEE OR ROYALTY TO OTHERS REQUIRED BY PATENT RIGHTS OR COPYRIGHTS.” B. Delete Paragraphs 6.07.C. entirely and insert the following in its place: “C. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER AND ENGINEER, AND THE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS AND SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO ANY INFRINGEMENT OF PATENT RIGHTS OR COPYRIGHTS INCIDENT TO THE USE IN THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK OR RESULTING FROM THE INCORPORATION IN THE WORK OF ANY INVENTION, DESIGN, PROCESS, PRODUCT, OR DEVICE NOT SPECIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.” SC-6.09 Make the following modifications to 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Delete paragraph 6.09 B. and insert the following in its place: “B. If Contractor performs any Work that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work.” B. Add a new paragraph “D” as follows: “D. All Bidders are required to complete and submit with their Bid the Vendor Compliance to State Law form, which follows the proposal.” C. Add a new paragraph “E” as follows. Definitions included in this paragraph pertain only to this paragraph which is included verbatim as a statutory requirement of the State of Texas. The paragraph is to read as follows: “E. Workers Compensation Statement for Building or Construction Projects for Government entities in Texas A. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 13 of 27 Persons providing services on the project ("Subcontractor" in 406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent Contractors, Subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. H. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 14 of 27 to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (2) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (3) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 15 of 27 of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity.” SC-6.10 Make the following modifications to 6.10 Taxes A. Add the following to Paragraph 6.10.A.” “The Owner qualifies as an exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall comply with all statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller.” SC-6.11 Make the following modifications to 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Delete Paragraphs 6.11.A.3 entirely and insert the following in its place: “3. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER AND ENGINEER, AND THE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS AND SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO ANY CLAIM OR ACTION, LEGAL OR EQUITABLE, BROUGHT BY ANY SUCH OWNER OR OCCUPANT AGAINST OWNER, ENGINEER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER TO THE EXTENT CAUSED BY OR BASED UPON CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. SC-6.13 Make the following modifications to 6.16 Safety and Protection A. Add the following to Paragraph 6.13.F. “The Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto shall be reinstated when any additional efforts are required during the one year correction period to correct defects in the Work.” SC-6.16 Make the following modifications to 6.16 Emergencies A. Amend paragraph 6.16.A by deleting the third sentence and inserting the following in its place: “If Engineer determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Change Order, Field Order or Work Change Directive will be issued.” SC-6.17 Make the following modifications to 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Delete paragraph 6.17.C.3. entirely and insert the following in its place: “3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 16 of 27 variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents on a Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided by the Engineer and request that a Field Order or Change Order be issued for each of the specific variations submitted for approval. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. “ B. Delete paragraph 6.17.D.3. entirely and insert the following in its place: “3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation issuing a Field Order or Change Order. If the proposed modification is approved by the Engineer, the submittal will be considered to be in strict compliance with the Contract Documents and it will be reviewed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If the proposed Modification is not approved, the submittal will be returned to the Contractor with appropriate comments. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.” C. Delete paragraph 6.17 E.1. entirely and insert the following in its place: “1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Re-submittals shall reference and respond directly to Engineer’s previous comments. Any variations from strict compliance with the Contract Documents will be identified in the same manner as required in paragraph 6.17.C.3 and will require the same approvals.” D. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.17.E: “F. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy in order to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing subsequent submittals of Shop Drawings, samples, or other items requiring approval and Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Engineer’s charges for such time. G. In the event that Contractor requests a change of a previously approved item, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Engineer’s charges for its review time unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.” SC-6.18 Make the following modifications to 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Add the following to Paragraph 6.18.A. “Contractor assumes and bears responsibility for all costs and time delays associated with any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents.” SC-6.20 Make the following modifications to 6.20 Indemnification A. Delete paragraph 6.20.A entirely and insert the following in its place: SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 17 of 27 “A. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER AND ENGINEER, AND THE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, CONSULTANTS AND SUBCONTRACTORS OF EACH AND ANY OF THEM FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH CLAIM, COST, LOSS, OR DAMAGE IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY OR DEATH, OR TO INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY (OTHER THAN THE WORK ITSELF), INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM BUT ONLY TO THE EXTENT CAUSED BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, ANY SUPPLIER, OR ANY INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY OF THEM TO PERFORM ANY OF THE WORK OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE." B. Delete paragraph 6.20.C entirely. SC-9.03 Make the following modifications to 9.03 Project Representative A. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 9.03.A: “B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will provided by Countywide Inspection Services and will act as directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will confer with Engineer regarding RPR's actions. RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general shall be with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors shall be through or with the full knowledge and approval of Contractor. The RPR shall: 1. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals, and schedule of values prepared by Contractor and consult with Engineer concerning acceptability. 2. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences and other project-related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof. 3. Liaison: a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor, working principally through Contractor’s authorized representative, assist in providing information regarding the intent of the Contract Documents. b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations. c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for proper execution of the Work. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 18 of 27 4. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer. 5. Shop Drawings and Samples: a. Record date of receipt of Samples and approved Shop Drawings. b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and notify Engineer of availability of Samples for examination. 6. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report such suggestions, together with RPR’s recommendations, to Engineer. Transmit to Contractor in writing decisions as issued by Engineer. 7. Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work: a. Conduct on-Site observations of Contractor’s work in progress to assist Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Report to Engineer whenever RPR believes that any part of Contractor’s work in progress will not produce a completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents or will imperil the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise Engineer of that part of work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. 8. Inspections, Tests, and System Startups: a. Verify that tests, equipment, and systems start-ups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate Owner’s personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records thereof. b. Observe, record, and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the test procedures and systems start-ups. 9. Records: a. Record names, addresses, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, web site locations, and telephone numbers of all Contractors, Subcontractors, and major Suppliers of materials and equipment. b. Maintain records for use in preparing Project documentation. 10. Reports: a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and of Contractor’s compliance with the progress schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals. b. Draft and recommend to Engineer proposed Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain backup material from SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 19 of 27 Contractor. c. Immediately notify Engineer of the occurrence of any Site accidents, emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the discovery of any Hazardous Environmental Condition. 11. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the schedule of values, Work completed, and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work. 12. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that materials and equipment certificates, operation and maintenance manuals and other data required by the Specifications to be assembled and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have these documents delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to payment for that part of the Work. 13. Completion: a. Participate in a Substantial Completion inspection, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and the preparation of lists of items to be completed or corrected. b. Participate in a final inspection in the company of Engineer, Owner, and Contractor and prepare a final list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be remedied. c. Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning acceptance and issuance of the Notice of Acceptability of the Work. C. The RPR shall not: 1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment (including “or-equal” items). 2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or Contractor’s superintendent. 4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of Contractor’s work unless such advice or directions are specifically required by the Contract Documents. 5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of Owner or Contractor. 6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off- site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 20 of 27 7. Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than Contractor. 8. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.” SC-9.04 Make the following modifications to 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Add the following to Paragraph 9.04.A: “The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing prior to beginning any Work addressed in a Field Order if the Contractor does not agree that the Work involved represents no additional cost and/or time change in the Contract Documents.” SC-10.03 Make the following modifications to 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Add a new paragraph “B” as follows: “B. Contractor assumes and bears responsibility for all costs and time delays associated with any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variation is specifically approved by Change Order.” SC-10.05 Make the following modifications to 10.05 Claims A. Amend paragraph 10.05.B. by deleting “30” and inserting “7” in its place and by deleting “60” and inserting “30” in its place. SC-11.01 Make the following modifications to 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Amend paragraph 11.01.A by deleting the following words in the third sentence: " those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include only the following items:" and insert the following in its place: "those paid for the Work included in the Contract Price, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.01 B. Contractor shall provide certified payroll records listing personnel classifications and salaries for all individuals involved in additional Work. Salaries for those not included in the certified payroll will be considered as being compensated under paragraph 11.01 B, and shall include only the following items:” B. Amend paragraph 11.01.A.1 by deleting the following words in the second sentence: "without limitation superintendents, foreman" and inserting the following in its place: "one foreman (unless agreed upon prior to beginning Work)” C. Amend paragraph 11.01.A.1 by deleting the following words in the last sentence: "be included in the above" SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 21 of 27 and inserting the following in its place: "not exceed 1.5 times regular pay and shall be included in the above" D. Amend paragraph 11.01.B.1 by adding “superintendents” to the list of excluded personnel in the first sentence: E. Amend paragraph 11.01.D by inserting “and at intervals” in the last sentence as shown below: “..... and submit in a form and at intervals acceptable to Engineer ...” SC-11.03 Make the following modifications to 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Delete paragraph 11.03.D entirely and insert the following in its place: “D. The unit price of an item of Unit Price Work shall be subject to reevaluation and adjustment under the following conditions: 1. If the total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to twenty percent (20%) or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. If there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 3. If Contractor believes that Contractor has incurred additional expense as a result thereof; or if Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Unit Price, either the Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 11 if the parties are unable to agree as to the effect of any such variation in the quantity of the Unit Price Work performed.” SC-12.03 Make the following modifications to 12.03 Delays A. Add the following to Paragraph 12.03.A. “No time extensions will be allowed for weather conditions for Projects using calendar days for the Contract Time.” SC-12.04 Make the following modifications to ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME A. Add a new paragraph “12.04” as follows: “12.04 No Damage for Delays A. The Contractor agrees to make no claims for damage for delay in the performance of the Contract occasioned by any act or omission to act of the Owner, Engineer, or any of the Engineer’s or Owner’s agents, and agrees that any such claim shall be fully compensated by an extension of time, as set forth in a Change Order, to complete performance of the work as provided herein.” SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 22 of 27 SC-13.03 Make the following modifications to 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Delete paragraph 13.03 B entirely and insert the following in its place: “B. Employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor is solely responsible for maintaining that the quality of work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for the notification and scheduling required assuring that a certified technician from the testing laboratory is present during all sampling and testing procedures required in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not proceed with construction work requiring such testing without the presence of the laboratory’s certified technician. The Owner, at his option, may perform additional tests as quality monitoring. Quality monitoring activities of the Owner and Engineer, or failure on the part of the Owner or Engineer to perform tests on constructed works, in no way relieves the Contractor of the obligation to perform work and furnish materials conforming to the Contract Documents. 1 Contractor’s Responsibilities a. Control the quality of work produced and verify that the work performed meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect and verify conformance of all materials furnished and work performed, whether by the Contractor, its subcontractors or its suppliers. 2. Provide and pay for the services of a testing laboratory approved by Owner to insure that products proposed for use fully comply with the Contract Documents. 3. Perform tests as indicated in this and other sections of the specifications. Schedule the time and sequence of testing with the Owner and Engineer. Testing is to be observed by the Owner, Engineer, or designated representative. 4. Promptly replace any defective materials and/or construction work incorporating defective materials or workmanship. 5. Provide Certified Test Reports as required by the SUBMITTALS section. Reports are to indicate that materials and construction are in compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Assist the Engineer, Owner, and Owner’s testing organization to perform quality monitoring activities. 2. Quality Monitoring Activities by the Owner a. Quality Monitoring activities of the Owner and Engineer through their own forces or through contracts with materials testing laboratories and survey crews are for the Owner’s use in monitoring the results of the Contractor’s work and quality control activities, if deemed necessary by the Owner and Engineer. The Quality Monitoring activities of the Owner SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 23 of 27 do not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide testing in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or to provide materials and construction work complying with the Contract Documents. 3. Submittals a. Submittals shall be accordance with the SUBMITTALS section, and shall include: 1. The name of the proposed primary and secondary testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications, a list of tests that can be performed, and a list of the certified laboratory technicians and the licensed engineers who will be performing the sampling and testing for the Construction Work along with their certifications and licenses. 2. Test reports per Paragraph 7, TEST REPORTS of this supplementary condition. 4. Standards a. Provide a testing laboratory that complies with the ASTM (American Society of Testing Materials) and/or ACIL (American Council of Independent Laboratories) “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications”, or other specified testing organizations. b. Perform tests listed in the specifications. 5. Delivery and Storage a. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the construction site in accordance with ASTM or other applicable testing procedures. 6. Verification Testing a. Provide verification testing when tests performed by the Owner indicate that materials or the results of construction activities are not in conformance with Contract Documents. b. Verification testing is to be provided at the Contractor’s expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been made. c. Tests must comply with recognized methods or with methods recommended by the Owner’s testing laboratory and approved by the Engineer. 7. Test Reports A. Test reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, project title and number, equipment installer and general contractor. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 24 of 27 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number. c. Name and signature of the certified laboratory personnel performing the sampling and testing. d. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing. c. Date the report was issued. d. Description of the test performed. e. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling. f. Location at the site or structure where the test was taken. g. Standard or test procedure used in making the test. h. A description of the results of the test. i. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. j. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. B Distribute copies of the test reports to: Owner 2 copies Resident Project Representative 1 copy Engineer 1 copy Contractor 1 copy 8. Non-Conforming Work a. Contractor shall promptly correct any work that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents and shall immediately notify the Owner when the corrective work will be performed. b. Payment for non-conforming work shall be withheld until such work is corrected or replaced with work complying with the Contract Documents. SC-13.07 Make the following modifications to 13.07 Correction Period A. Amend paragraph 13.07.A by adding: “When early acceptance of a Substantially Completed portion of the Work is accomplished in the manner indicated, the correction period for that portion of the Work shall commence at the time of substantial completion of that Work.” SC-14.02 Make the following modifications to 14.02 Progress Payments A. Amend paragraph 14.02 C.1. by deleting “Ten” and inserting “Thirty” in its place. B. Amend paragraph 14.02.D.1. by deleting “or” in paragraph 14.02.D.1.c. and adding new paragraphs “e”, “f”, “g”, and “h” as follows: SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 25 of 27 “e. Owner has been notified of failure to make payments to Subcontractors or Suppliers or for labor, or f. failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by GC-6.12, or g. failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the Owner or Engineer, or h. failure to provide Project photographs required by Specifications.” C. Amend paragraph 14.02.D.2. by adding “to Owner’s satisfaction.” D. Amend paragraph 14.02.D.3 by deleting “and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.” E. Add a new paragraph “14.02.D.4” as follows: “4. Owner may permanently withhold payment from Contract Price for a. liquidated damages incurred by Contractor, or b. compensation for Engineer for overtime charges of Resident Project Representative, third review of submittals, review of substitutions, re- inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of defective Work, or other Services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor. Compensation will be based on the following rates: Position Hourly Rate Principal in Charge $280.00 Project Manager $200.00 Project Engineer $180.00. Construction Manager $265.00 Resident Engineer $175.00 Resident Project Representative $135.00 Senior Resident Representative $260.00 Design Engineer $160.00 Engineering Technician $155.00 Clerk $105.00 Expenses will be billed at the actual cost multiplied by 1.15. c. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that work previously tested and found to be defective has been corrected. Verification testing is to be provided at the Contractor's expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been made.” SC-14.04 Make the following modifications to 14.04 Substantial Completion A. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 14.04 E. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 26 of 27 “F. All Work must be completed with the exception of any optimization work and troubleshooting. “ SC-15.02 Make the following modifications to 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. Add a new paragraph “A.5” as follows: “5. If Contractor fails to provide the replacement bond required by General Conditions, Section 5.01.C or insurance coverage as required by General Conditions Article 5 and as amended by Supplemental Conditions.” B. Add a new paragraph “A.6” as follows: “6. If any petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, or if Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency, upon the occurrence of any such event, Owner shall be entitled to request of Contractor or its successor in interest adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the terms and conditions hereof. Failure to comply with such request within seven (7) days of delivery of the request shall entitle Owner to terminate this agreement and to the accompanying rights set forth in Paragraphs 15.02 and 15.03 hereof. In all events pending receipt of adequate assurance of performance and actual performance in accordance therewith, Owner shall be entitled to proceed with the Work with its own forces or with other Contractors on a time and material or other appropriate basis. The cost of work by Owner or other Contractors will be back charged against the Contract Sum hereof.” C. Delete paragraph 15.02.F. entirely. SC-15.04 Make the following modifications to 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. Add a new paragraph “C” as follows: “C. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the previous written consent of the Owner.” SC-16.01 Make the following modifications to 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Delete paragraph 16.01 entirely and insert the following in its place: “16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Law.” SC-17.02 Make the following modification to 17.02 Computation of Times A. Add a new paragraph “B” as follows: “B. All references and conditions for a "calendar day contract" in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions shall apply for a "Fixed Date Contract." A “Fixed Date Contract” is one in which the calendar dates for reaching substantial completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the actual calendar days involved. SECTION 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Page 27 of 27 SC-17.07 Make the following modifications to ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS A. Add a new paragraph “17.06” as follows: “17.06 Independent Contractor A. Each Party will perform its duties under this Agreement as an independent contractor. The Parties and their personnel will not be considered to be employees or agents of the other Party. Nothing in this Agreement will be interpreted as granting either Party the right or authority to make commitments of any kind for the other. This Agreement will not constitute, create, or be interpreted as a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind.” B. Add a new paragraph “17.07” as follows: “17.07 Sovereign Immunity A. The parties agree that the Owner has not waived it’s sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Agreement.” C. Add a new paragraph “17.08” as follows: “17.08 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders any part of this Agreement invalid or unenforceable, that part will be severed and the remainder of this Agreement will continue in full force and effect. D. Add a new paragraph “17.09” as follows: “17.09 Headings A. The Article and paragraph headings in this Agreement are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions or as a limitation of the scope of the particular section to which they refer. This Agreement will be fairly interpreted in accordance with its terms and conditions and not for or against either Party.” E. Add a new paragraph “17.10” as follows: “17.10 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Agreement shall be construed to create any right in any third party not a signatory to this Agreement, and the parties do not intend to create any third party beneficiaries by entering into this Agreement.” END OF SECTION SECTION 00 73 10 Special Provisions Page 1 of 6 SECTION 00 73 10 SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 BONDS Bidders must submit with the Bid a Cashier’s or Certified Check payable to the Town of Westlake, in the amount of 5% of the maximum price bid, or submit a Bid Bond in the same amount from a surety Company to the Town, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract and execute the required bonds after the acceptance of the bid and award of the contract. In accordance with Chapter 2253 of the Local Government Code of Texas, V.T.C.A., the successful bidder will be required to furnish Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds in the full amount of the contract. The Bonds must be executed by an approved Surety Company holding a permit from the State of Texas to act as Surety. Each Bond shall be accompanied by a “Power of Attorney” authorizing the attorney-in-fact to bind the Surety and certified to include the date of the bond. 1.02 WARRANTY The work performed under this Contract shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance. If the owner determines that the process has failed during the warranty period, the Contractor will perform and make all repairs at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE Without limiting any of the other obligations or liabilities of the CONTRACTOR, during the term of the contract the CONTRACTOR and each subcontractor, at their own expense, shall purchase and maintain the herein stipulated minimum insurance with companies duly approved to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the OWNER. Certificates of each policy shall be delivered to the OWNER before any work is started, along with a written statement from the issuing company stating that said policy shall not be canceled, non-renewed or materially changed without 30 days advance written notice being given to the OWNER, except when the policy is being canceled for nonpayment of premium, in which case 10 days advance written notice is required. Prior to the effective date of cancellation, the CONTRACTOR must deliver to the OWNER a replacement certificate of insurance or proof of reinstatement. Coverage shall be of the following types and not less than the specified amounts. 1. Workers’ compensation as required by Texas law, with the policy endorsed to provide a waiver of subrogation as to the OWNER; employer’s liability insurance of not less than $100,000 for each accident. 2. Commercial general liability insurance, including independent contractor’s liability, completed operations and contractual liability, covering, but not limited to, the liability assumed under the indemnification provisions of this contract, fully insuring CONTRACTOR’S (or subcontractor’s) liability for injury to or death of OWNER’S employees and third parties, extended to include SECTION 00 73 10 Special Provisions Page 2 of 6 personal injury liability coverage with damage to property of third parties, with minimum limits as set forth below: General Aggregate $1,000,000 Products – Components/Operations $1,000,000 Aggregate Personal and Advertising Injury $ 600,000 Each Occurrence $ 600,000 Fire Damage (any one fire) $ 50,000 Medical Expense (any one person) $ 5,000 The policy shall include coverage extended to apply to operations, asbestos hazards (if this project involves work with asbestos) and XCU (explosion, collapse and underground) hazards. The completed operations coverage must be maintained for a minimum of one year after final completion and acceptance of the work, with evidence of same filed with OWNER. 3. Comprehensive automobile and truck liability insurance, covering owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles, with a combined bodily injury and property damage minimum limit of $600,000 per occurrence; or separate limits of $250,000 for bodily injury (per person), $500,000 for bodily injury (per accident) and $100,000 for property damage. Such insurance shall include coverage for loading and unloading hazards. B. OWNER’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE CONTRACTOR shall obtain, pay for, and maintain at all times during the prosecution of the work under this contract an OWNER’S protective liability insurance policy naming the OWNER and the Engineer as insureds for property damage and bodily injury, which may arise in the prosecution of the work or CONTRACTOR’S operations under this contract. Coverage shall be on an “occurrence” basis, and the policy shall be issued by the same insurance company that carries the CONTRACTOR’S liability insurance with a combined bodily injury and property damage minimum limit of $600,000 per occurrence and $1,000,000 aggregate. C. “UMBRELLA” LIABILITY INSURANCE If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain, pay for, and maintain umbrella liability insurance during the contract term, insuring CONTRACTOR for an amount of not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence combined limit for bodily injury and property damage that follows form and applies in excess of the primary liability coverages required hereinabove. The policy shall provide “drop down” coverage where underlying primary insurance coverage limits are insufficient or exhausted. OWNER and Engineer shall be named as additional insureds. D. POLICY ENDORSEMENTS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. Each insurance pol. to be furnished by CONTRACTOR shall include the following conditions by endorsement to the policy: a. each policy shall name the OWNER as an additional insured as to all applicable coverage; SECTION 00 73 10 Special Provisions Page 3 of 6 b. each policy shall require that 30 days prior to the cancellation, nonrenewal or any material change in coverage, a notice thereof shall be given to OWNER by certified mail. If the policy is canceled for nonpayment of premium, only 10 days written notice to OWNER is required. c. the term “OWNER” shall include all authorities, boards, bureaus, commissions, divisions, departments and offices of the OWNER and individual members, employees, and agents thereof in their official capacities and/or while acting on behalf of the OWNER; d. the policy phrase “other insurance” shall not apply to the OWNER where the OWNER is an additional insured on the policy; and e. all provisions of the contract concerning liability, duty, and standard of care together with the indemnification provision, shall be underwritten by contractual liability coverage sufficient to include such obligations within applicable policies. 2. Insurance furnished by the CONTRACTOR shall be in accordance with the following requirements: a. any policy submitted shall not be subject to limitations, conditions or restrictions deemed inconsistent with the intent of the insurance requirements to be fulfilled by the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER’S decision thereon shall be final; b. all policies are to be written through companies duly licensed to transact that class of insurance in the State of Texas; and c. all liability policies required herein shall be written with an “occurrence” basis coverage trigger. 3. CONTRACTOR agrees to the following: a. CONTRACTOR hereby waives subrogation rights for loss or damage to the extent same are covered by insurance. Insurers shall have no right of recovery or subrogation against the OWNER, it being the intention that the insurance policies shall protect all parties to the contract and be primary coverage for all losses covered by the policies; b. companies issuing the insurance policies and CONTRACTOR shall have no recourse against the OWNER for payment of any premiums or assessments for any deductibles, as all such premiums and deductibles are the sole responsibility and risk of the CONTRACTOR; c. approval, disapproval, or failure to act by the OWNER regarding any insurance supplied by the CONTRACTOR (or any subcontractors) shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of full responsibility or liability for damages and accidents as set forth in the contract documents. Neither shall the bankruptcy, insolvency, or denial of liability by the insurance company exonerate the CONTRACTOR from liability; and d. no special payments shall be made for any insurance that the CONTRACTOR and subcontractors are required to carry; all are included in the contract price and the contract unit prices. Any of such insurance policies required under this section may be written in combination with any of the others, where legally permitted, but none of the specified limits may be lowered thereby. SECTION 00 73 10 Special Provisions Page 4 of 6 E. VEHICLES INSURANCE The successful Bidder shall meet the minimum Texas State Financial Responsibility Act requirements for the operation of vehicle(s) used while performing services in the Town. 1.04 ASSIGNMENT The successful Bidder's rights and duties awarded by the agreement may not be assigned to another without written consent of the Town signed by the Town's authorized agent. Such consent shall not relieve the assigner of the liability in the event of default by the assignee. 1.05 CONTRACT TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES As time is of the essence on this Contract, the Contractor agrees to commence work under this Contract within ten (10) days from the date specified in the “Notice to Proceed” and to totally complete the work within one hundred twenty (360) consecutive calendar days after the date specified in the “Notice to Proceed”, subject to such extensions of time as are indicated in the General Provisions. The Contractor further agrees to pay as liquidated damages, the sum of $500.00 for each calendar day that any work remains uncompleted after the time specified above or after any extensions of time as are provided in the General Provisions. It is understood between the parties hereto that the sum of $240.00 per day shall be treated as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, and the Owner may withhold from the Contractor’s compensation such sums as liquidated damages. 1.06 PAYMENT Contractor shall submit to the Town a monthly invoice for services performed that month. The Town is exempt from Federal Excise and State Sales Tax; therefore, tax must not be included in the bid price. 1.07 SITE SURVEYING The Contractor shall be responsible for all required site surveying to include lines, grades, centerlines, off-set stakes, etc. necessary to lay out and install the paving, storm drain, water, and sanitary sewer system improvements as designed and shown on the plan sheets in these contract documents. 1.08 UTILITY LOCATES AND COORDINATION The Contractor shall be responsible for securing the services of a utility location firm to provide “locates” for any underground utilities in the areas of the proposed construction. All coordination of such activities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.09 CITIZEN NOTIFICATION The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and distribution of a Town-approved "Notice of Construction" letter to all businesses and residents who will be directly affected by the proposed paving, storm drain, water, and sewer construction activities. The Town Project Inspector will designate to the Contractor which houses/businesses are to receive the notices. This notice must include contact phone numbers for the Contractor and a brief description of the duration and general type of work to be done. 1.10 CHANGE ORDERS SECTION 00 73 10 Special Provisions Page 5 of 6 No oral statement of any person shall modify or otherwise change, or affect the terms, conditions, or specifications. All change orders to the agreement will be made in writing and not effective unless signed by an authorized representative of the Town. 1.11 NON-DISCRIMINATION A. Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, age, color, religion, sex, ancestry, national origin, disability, or place of birth. B. Contractor shall take action to ensure that applicants are employed and treated without regard to their race, age, color, religion, sex, ancestry, national origin, disability, or place of birth. This action shall include, but not be limited to, the following; employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation and selection of training, including apprenticeship. 1.12 LIENS The successful Bidder agrees to and shall indemnify and save harmless the Town against any and all liens and encumbrances for all labor, goods and services which may be provided under the Town's request, by seller or seller's vendor(s) and if the Town requests, a proper release of all liens or satisfactory evidence of freedom from liens shall be delivered to the Town. 1.13 PATENT INDEMNITY The successful Bidder hereby warrants that the use or sale of the products and materials delivered hereunder will not infringe on the rights of any patent, copyright, or registered trademark, covering such materials and the successful Bidder agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Town for any and all costs, expenses, judgments, and damages which the Town may have to pay or incur. 1.14 INDEMNITY The successful Bidder agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the Town and all of its officers, agent, employees, and elected officials whole and harmless against any and all claims for damages, costs, and expenses of persons or property that may arise out of, or be occasioned by, or from any negligent act, or omission of the successful Bidder, or any agent, servant, or employee of the successful Bidder in the execution of performance of this agreement, without regard to whether such persons are under the direction of Town agents or employees. 1.15 GRATUITIES/BRIBES The Town may, by written notice to the successful Bidder, cancel this agreement without liability to the successful Bidder if it is determined by the Town that gratuities or bribes in the form of entertainment, gifts, or otherwise, were offered or given by the successful Bidder, or its agent or representative to any Town officer, employee or elected representative with respect to the performance of the agreement. In addition, the successful Bidder may be subject to penalties stated in Title 8 of the Texas Penal Code. 1.16 TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT The Town reserves the right to terminate this agreement with ten (10) days written notice if the successful Bidder fails to perform in a manner deemed acceptable to the Town. Upon delivery of such notice by the Town to the successful Bidder, the successful Bidder shall discontinue all SECTION 00 73 10 Special Provisions Page 6 of 6 services in connection with the performance of this agreement and shall discontinue all services in connection with the performance of this agreement and shall proceed to cancel promptly all existing orders and contracts insofar as such order or contracts are chargeable to this agreement. As soon as practicable after receipt of notice of termination, the Bidder shall submit a statement to the Town for payment of that portion of agreement successfully performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 10 00 Summary of Work Page 1 of 3 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work in this contract is for construction of an electrical backup generator to accommodate the pump station expansion and connection of the generator to the site electrical system located at 13590 Denton Highway, Westlake, TX 76262. B. The work in this contract generally includes the installation of a pre-purchased generator at the Town of Westlake Pump Station. Installation includes all site improvements, conduits, wiring, foundation, controls necessary for the operation of the generator. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the entirety of the work as shown on the Drawings and Project Manual. The exclusion of any scope from this summary does not relieve the Contractor from fulfilling his obligation under this Contract. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the project completely and fully operable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete project. 3. Provide the civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and all other work required for a complete and operable project. 4. Test and place the completed project in operation. 5. Provide the special tools, spare parts, lubricants, supplies, or other materials as indicated in Contract Documents for the operation and maintenance of the Project. 6. Install Owner provided products and place in operation. 7. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. C. The Work is separated into Lump Sum Base Bid Price items in Contract Documents Bid Proposal. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall utilize Section I, Divisions 200 through 800 of the 2017 NCTCOG “Public Works Construction Standards”, or current addition, with the latest amendments (as published by the North Central Texas Council of Governments). These specifications shall govern and shall constitute the Technical Specifications. Texas Department of Transportation “Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges” (most current edition) shall supplement the NCTCOG document as necessary. They will be referred to as the Standard Specifications and will not be physically bound with other contract documents. SECTION 01 10 00 Summary of Work Page 2 of 3 B. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements apply to each specification section. C. Comply with all applicable state and local codes and regulations pertaining to the nature and character of the work being performed. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A. No other items of work by Owner are planned during the construction of this project. B. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner in the event major maintenance at the facility does occur that may be in conflict with the construction. 1.04 OWNER-SELECTED PRODUCTS A. There are no owner selected products. 1.05 OWNER-PROVIDED PRODUCTS A. There are no owner provided products. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Utility companies or their contractors will provide new or enhanced utilities for this project. Coordinate with others performing work associated with this project. B. Power and Electrical Services: 1. Owner will provide permanent power connections for the project site through the power utility unless indicated otherwise in the contract documents. 2. Cost for providing permanent power will be paid for by the Owner. 3. Contractor is required to coordinate and cooperate with others performing this work. 4. Power utility will provide the construction to the property line. 5. Provide conduit, conductors, pull boxes, manholes, and other appurtenances for the installation of power cable between the property line and the transformer and between the transformer and the main power switch. 6. Test conductors in accordance with Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements and coordinate with the power utility to energize the system when ready. 7. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection, fees and permits. 8. When permanent power is available at the site, the Contractor may use this power source in lieu of temporary power source previously used. a. Notify Engineer and Owner of intent to use the permanent power source. b. Arrange with the power utility and pay the charges for connections and monthly charges for use of this power. 9. Pay for the power consumed until the project has been accepted as substantially complete. SECTION 01 10 00 Summary of Work Page 3 of 3 C. Telephone Services: 1. Contractor shall provide temporary telephone service for all field offices at the project site through the telephone utility. 2. Cost for providing temporary telephone service to all field offices shall be paid for by the Contractor. 3. Coordinate and cooperate with others performing this work. 4. Pay for temporary service, including, but not limited to construction cost, telephones and equipment, connection fees and permit. 5. Arrange with the Telephone Utility and pay the charges for connections and monthly charges for use of this service. 6. Pay for the service until the project has been accepted as substantially complete. Provide separate service for Owner, Contractor and Engineer as required. Owner will pay for service to Owner’s telephone. 1.07 NOMINATED SUBCONTRACTOR A. Owner has not selected a contractor or sub-contractor for furnishing, installing, and testing any products for this project. 1.08 OCCUPANCY A. As soon as any portion of the structure and equipment are ready for use, the Owner shall have the right to occupy or operate that portion upon written notice to the Contractor. B. Testing of equipment and appurtenances including specified test periods, training, and start up does not constitute acceptance for operation. C. Owner may accept the facility for continued use after start-up and testing at the option of the Owner. If acceptance is delayed at the option of the Owner, shut down facilities per approved Operation and Maintenance procedures. D. The execution of bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions. E. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting occupancy of the structures and use of equipment during the remaining period of construction. F. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and products per the individual sections of the specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 11 00 Additional Requirements Page 1 of 1 SECTION 01 11 00 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Additional Requirements may include Cash Allowances, Alternates, Owner- Furnished Products and work sequence as required work by the Owner. 1.02 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Include the following specific Cash Allowances in the Contract Price under provision of General Conditions: 1. See Bid Form. 1.03 ALTERNATES A. From the following list of Alternates, amount included in the Contract Price will only be those Alternates accepted by the Owner. 1. None. 1.04 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. The following items will be furnished by the Owner for installation and final connection by the Contractor: 1. None. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange and pay for Product delivery to the site. 2. Receive and unload Products at the site; jointly with the Owner, inspect for completeness or damage. 3. Handle, store, install, and finish Products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after delivery to the project. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct the Work in Phases during the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with the Engineer. 1. No Phases for this Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 14 19 Use of Premises Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 14 19 USE OF PREMISES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General use of the site including properties inside and outside of rights-of-way, work affecting road, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. 1.02 RIGHTS-OF-WAY A. Confine access, operations and storage areas to rights-of-way provided by the OWNER; trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B. Make arrangements, at no cost to the OWNER, for temporary use of private properties. Submit a copy of agreements between private property owners and Contractor prior to use of the area. Agreements between private property owners and Contractor shall be notarized or bear the signatures of two witnesses. C. Restrict total length of distributed materials along the route of construction to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved in writing by OWNER Engineer. 1.03 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF RIGHTS-OF-WAY A. Do not alter the condition of properties adjacent to and along rights-of-way. B. Do not use ways, means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures that result in damage to properties or improvements. C. Restore damaged properties outside of rights-of-ways at no cost to the OWNER. 1.04 USE OF SITE A. Obtain approvals from Project Manager and governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads and streets. Do not close more than two consecutive intersections at one time. B. Notify Project Manager and OWNER Traffic Management at least five working days prior to closing a street or street crossing. Obtain permits for street closures in advance. C. Maintain 10-foot-wide minimum access lanes for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D. Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets. When obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E. Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems that may exist within the site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition existing at start of the Work, or better. Test irrigation system prior to construction. SECTION 01 14 19 Use of Premises Page 2 of 4 F. Conform to daily clean-up requirements of Article 5 of Contract Documents- General Conditions. G. Beware of overhead power lines existing in area and in close proximity of the Project. When 10 feet of clearance between energized overhead power line and construction-related activity cannot be maintained, request local electric provider to de-energize or move conflicting overhead power line. Contact local electric provider representatives. Schedule, coordinate and pay costs associated with de- energizing or moving conflicting overhead power lines. When there is no separate pay item for this effort, include these costs in various items of bid that make such work necessary. H. Maintain access to all buildings, driveways and parking lots throughout the Project. I. The Contractor will comply with all facility procedures regarding entry, egress, and onsite security for the duration of the contract. This will include, but not limited to, pedestrian and/or vehicular gate entry, use of security codes, and limitation of presence to only construction areas. J. Contractor will be responsible for certifying workers on the project whom (temporary or permanent) are trained for hazardous chemical spills and evacuation drills per OSHA standards. None of the workers will be allowed onsite by the OWNER Project Manager unless this certification is submitted for record documentation. Contractor will keep the list of trained employees readily available at the worksite. K. The Contractor shall provide necessary restroom facilities for employees and subcontractors. No facility restroom shall be used by the Contractor. The Contractor is not allowed in buildings other than where work is being performed. 1.05 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A. Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of proposed construction and time schedule. Notify not less than 72 hours or more than two weeks prior to work performed within 200 feet of homes or businesses. Follow form and content of sample door hanger provided by OWNER. B. Include in notification, nature of the Work and names and telephone numbers of two company representatives for resident contact available on 24-hour call. C. Submit proposed notification to Project Manager for approval. Consider ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Provide notice in an understandable language. D. In regard to notifications on all small-diameter water lines, the Contractor must perform all customer notifications and complete a Notice of Customer Communication form provided by the Project Manager that such notice has been given 48-hours in advance of any water disruptions. Notification must also include the approximate duration of planned service outages. The Contractor must have the completed Notification of Customer Communication form before the commencement of valve assisted work. Follow the form and content of sample door hanger provided by Project Manager. E. Contractor shall consult OWNER Project Manager and Public Infrastructure Inspector for resident and business notification procedure. Contractor shall not SECTION 01 14 19 Use of Premises Page 3 of 4 perform notifications and/or work without proper authorization from OWNER representative. 1.06 PUBLIC, TEMPORARY, AND CONSTRUCTION ROADS AND RAMPS A. Construct and maintain temporary detours, ramps, and roads to provide for normal public traffic flow when it is necessary to close public roads or streets. B. Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing roadways from tracked equipment, large tandem axle trucks or equipment that will damage the existing roadway surfaces. C. Construct and maintain access roads and parking areas as specified in Section 01 50 40 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.07 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A. Avoid hindering or inconveniencing public travel on streets or intersecting alleys for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of OWNER Engineer. B. Obtain Traffic Management and OWNER Engineer's approval when nature of the Work requires closure of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are Contractor's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. C. Remove surplus materials and debris and open each block for public use, as work in that block is complete. D. Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E. Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F. Provide temporary crossings or complete excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G. Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section VI of the State of Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 1.08 SURFACE RESTORATION A. Restore the site including landscaping to the condition existing before construction, or better. B. Repair paved areas per the requirements of the Drawings. C. Repair damaged turf areas, level with bank run sand conforming to Section 01 74 16 – Site Maintenance. Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using appropriate steel wheel rollers for sodding. Do not use spot sodding or sprigging. 1.09 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Confine operations to lands within construction work limits shown on Drawings. Unless otherwise noted on Drawings adhere to the following: SECTION 01 14 19 Use of Premises Page 4 of 4 B. Where utility alignment is within esplanade, and construction limits are shown on Drawings to extend to edge of esplanade, keep equipment, materials, stockpiles a minimum of five feet from back of curb. C. Where construction limits shown on Drawings extend to property line, keep sidewalks free of equipment, materials, and stockpiles. 1.10 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL SALVAGE A. Salvage material and equipment listed hereinafter shall become the property of the rights to retain all items shown to be demolished and/or removed in the drawings. Prior to initiating demolition, the Contractor and the OWNER shall make a joint inspection to identify all items to be retained by the OWNER. The Contractor shall relocate and store items, to be retained by the OWNER, where directed onsite or offsite. B. Contractor shall dismantle all such items to a size that can be readily handled and deliver the items to a designated OWNER storage facility. Contractor shall deliver salvage material to the designated OWNER storage facility or dispose of the salvage material at no additional cost to the OWNER. Any salvage material damaged due to improper handling will not be accepted by the OWNER and the replacement value of the material deducted from the payment to the Contractor. C. Project Inspector shall coordinate delivery of salvage items to designated OWNER storage facility. D. Contractor shall submit to the OWNER a signed and dated transmittal/manifest by Operations/Contractor representative, respectively, upon delivery of noted equipment for record documents. E. Contractor shall notify the OWNER 14 calendar days prior to demolition activities and request a list and/or marking of items for salvage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures Page 1 of 3 SECTION 01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Options for making product or process selections. B. Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes, including pre-approved, and approved products or processes. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Product: Means, materials, equipment, or systems incorporated into the Work. Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B. Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.05 SELECTION OPTIONS A. Pre-approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as “pre-approved”. Products of other Manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered und er the submittal process for approving alternate products. B. Approved Products: Products of certain Manufacturers or Suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal”. Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C. Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible, provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer, make, or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY SECTION 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures Page 2 of 3 A. Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. B. Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C. If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications, the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.07 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A. Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B. Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C. The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.08 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A. Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in determining equivalency as related to the Approved Product specified. B. Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen (14) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C. After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D. Submit five (5) copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Owner’s Representative, Engineer, and installing Contractor. 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. SECTION 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures Page 3 of 3 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E. Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 26 63 Change Order Procedures Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 26 63 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work. 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time. 3. Change procedures, using proposals and Modifications. 4. Execution of Change Orders. 5. Correlation of Contractor submittals. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Blue Book is defined as the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. Data Quest Blue Book). B. Rental Rate is defined as the full -unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.03 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A. Provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute Modifications, and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. Provide this information at the pre-construction meeting. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A. Maintain detailed records of changes in the Work. Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes and substantiate costs of changes in the Work. B. Document each proposal for change in Contract Price or Contract Time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of proposal. C. Include the following minimum information on proposals: 1. Quantities of items in original Section 00 42 00 – Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. Quantities and cost of items in original Schedule of Values with additions, reductions, deletions and substitutions. 3. Provide Unit Prices for new items, with supporting information, for inclusion in Schedule of Unit Price Work. 4. Justification for changes in Contract Time. SECTION 01 26 63 Change Order Procedures Page 2 of 4 5. Additional data upon request. D. For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-material basis, provide the following additional information: 1. Quantities and description of Products. 2. Taxes, insurance and Bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions. 4. Dates, times and by whom work was performed. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for Products, rental equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E. For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-materials basis, rental equipment is paid as follows: 1. Actual invoice cost for duration of time required to complete extra work without markup for overhead and profit. When extra work comprises only a portion of a rental invoice where equipment would otherwise be on site, compute hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176. One day equals eight hours and one week equals 40 hours. 2. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book for items of equipment. Overhead and profit will be allowed on the operating cost. F. For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-materials basis using Contractor-owned equipment, use Blue Book rates as follows: 1. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid at the Blue Book Rental Rate for the duration of time required to complete extra work without markup for overhead and profit. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of Rental Rate for double shifts, one extra shift per day, and 200 percent of Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in Blue Book. No other rate adjustments apply. 2. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Overhead and profit will be allowed on operating costs. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on standby. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of Section 00 63 63 – Change Order Form. Issuance of Section 00 63 49 – Work Change Directive Form will be formalized into a Change Order. Changes will be in accordance with requirements of Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions. B. OWNER Engineer will advise of Minor Changes in the Work as authorized by Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions by issuing Section 00 63 36 – Field Order Form. SECTION 01 26 63 Change Order Procedures Page 3 of 4 C. Request clarification of Drawings, Specifications, Contract documents or other information by using Section 00 63 13 – Request for Information Form. Response by ENGINEER to Requests for Information does not authorize Contractor to perform tasks outside scope of the Work. Changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.06 PROPOSALS AND CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS A. Submit requests for Contract changes to OWNER Engineer describing proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing reason for change and effect on Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. OWNER Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work. Work Change Directive will subsequently be incorporated into a Change Order. B. Work Change Directives will describe changes in the Work and designate the method of determining change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C. Proceed promptly to execute changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.08 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted proposal. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. Where Unit Prices for affected items of the Work are included in Section 00 42 00 – Bid Proposal, the Change Order will be based on Unit Prices, subject to Articles 7 and 9 of Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions. B. Where Unit Prices of the Work are not pre-determined in Section 00 42 00 – Bid Proposal, the Work Change Directive or accepted proposal will specify the Unit Prices to be used. 1.10 TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A. Provide itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions. B. OWNER Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions. C. Maintain detailed records for work done on time -and-material basis as specified in Paragraph 1.04 above. D. Provide full information required for evaluation of changes and substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01 26 63 Change Order Procedures Page 4 of 4 A. OWNER Engineer will issue Change Orders, Work Change Directives, or Minor Change in the Work for signatures of Parties as described in Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. For Stipulated Price Contracts, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record authorized Change Orders as separate line items. B. For Unit Price Contracts, the next monthly estimate of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include new items not previously included with appropriate Unit Prices. C. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, and to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change and resubmit for review. D. Promptly enter changes to on-site and record copies of Drawings, Specifications or Contract documents as required in Section 01 78 50 - Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 27 00 Measurement and Payment Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 27 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for measurement and payment plus conditions for nonconformance assessment, nonpayment for rejected Products, and Material on Hand (MOH)/Stored Material. 1.02 AUTHORITY A. Measurement methods delineated in Specification sections are intended to complement criteria of this Section. In event of conflict, requirements of the Specification section shall govern. B. Contractor will take measurements and compute quantities accordingly. OWNER will verify measurements and quantity computations. C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel. D. Measurement and Payment paragraphs are included only in those Specification sections of Division 01 where direct payment will be made. Include costs in the total bid price for those Specification sections in Division 01 that do not contain Measurement and Payment paragraphs. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantity and measurement estimates stated in the Agreement are for contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work and verified by ENGINEER will determine payment. B. When actual work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00 42 00 – Bid Proposal, provide required quantities at Unit Prices contracted. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes are measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies are measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. B. Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using average end area method. C. Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. SECTION 01 27 00 Measurement and Payment Page 2 of 4 D. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at item centerline or mean chord. E. Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the Agreement. F. Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination, as appropriate, as completed item or unit of the Work. G. Measurement by Each: Measured by each instance or item provided. H. Measurement by Lump Sum: Measure includes all associated work. 1.05 PAYMENT A. Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision, labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services, and incidentals; and erection, application, or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. B. Total compensation for required Unit Price work shall be included in Unit Price bid in Section 00 42 00 – Bid Proposal. Claims for payment as Unit Price work but not specifically covered in the list of Unit Prices contained in Section 00 42 00 – Bid Proposal will not be accepted. C. Interim payments for stored materials will be made only for materials to be incorporated under items covered in Unit Prices, unless disallowed in Section 00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions and Section 00 73 10 – Special Provisions. D. Progress payments will be based on Project Manager's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by Unit Price. E. Final payment for work governed by Unit Prices will be made on the basis of actual measurements and quantities determined by Project Manager multiplied by the Unit Price for work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. 1.06 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A. Remove and replace work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B. When not practical to remove and replace work, OWNER Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. Nonconforming work will remain as is, but Unit Price will be adjusted lower at discretion of OWNER Engineer. 2. Nonconforming work will be modified as authorized by OWNER Engineer, and the Unit Price will be adjusted lower at the discretion of OWNER Engineer, when modified work is deemed less suitable than specified. C. Specification sections may modify the above remedies or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D. Authority of OWNER Engineer to assess nonconforming work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS SECTION 01 27 00 Measurement and Payment Page 3 of 4 A. Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in an unacceptable manner. 2. Products and/or work performed by the Contractor and/or Subcontractors determined as nonconforming by Code Enforcement, OWNER Engineer or representative, Engineer of Record, and/or OWNER before or after placement/installation. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicles. 4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products. 1.08 PAYMENT FOR MATERIAL ON HAND (MOH)/STORED MATERIAL A. Material on Hand (MOH)/Stored Material are finish products and goods, such as mechanical/electrical equipment, software/instrumentation, and associated appurtenances, purchased in accordance with Contract Documents and approved submittals by the Engineer of Record in advance of the product installation and incorporation into the project. B. The Contractor shall request the OWNER procedure for payment of Material on Hand. C. Contractor may submit a request for payment of Material on Hand (MOH)/Stored Material for the following equipment in accordance with the requirements of the MOH payment procedure: 1. Mechanical/Electrical Pump and Components, 2. SCADA and Motor Control Center(s) per Instrumentation and Control General Provisions, 3. All mechanical/electrical equipment, software/instrumentation, and associated components which perform an operation to the function and/or process of the water/wastewater treatment plant, pump station, and/or traffic handling. D. The OWNER Project Manager reserves the right to evaluate, approve, and take appropriate action on the Contractor’s written request for payment of Material on Hand/Stored Material as noted in Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions – Article 7. The product delivery to the jobsite or offsite facility may require payment prior to installation as noted in Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions – Article 7. Contact the OWNER for Material on Hand/Stored Material payment procedures. E. Contractor may request payment for Material on Hand/Stored Material as noted in Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions – Article 7. The OWNER shall reserve the right to deduct and/or refuse payment for stored material not meeting the criteria of the approved submittal, contract drawings/specifications, or storage protocols and/or procedures for approved products listed in the above Paragraph C. 1. Contractor shall submit a letter on company letterhead to the OWNER requesting Stored Material payment noting the following information: SECTION 01 27 00 Measurement and Payment Page 4 of 4 a. Vendor name, b. Invoice number, c. Schedule of Value line-item number, d. Material amount. 2. Contractor shall submit invoice(s) and support document(s) for review and payment by the OWNER a minimum of five (5) days prior to pay period close date to assure consideration for reimbursement. F. The Contractor shall comply with Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions – Article 5.3 for offsite storage location approval of noted approved materials. The OWNER shall require the Contractor store materials at an insured/bonded location in a designated area with appropriate labeling. The OWNER shall be exempt from all taxes, storage, delivery, and handling fees by the vendor, shipping agent, contractor, submittals, or storage facility. Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Insurance for the building and/or storage facility for offsite stored material. The amount of the insured facility policy shall meet or exceed the cost of the stored material. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for the following: a. Equipment storage/handling per manufacturer’s guidelines, b. Integrity of stored equipment, c. Shipping and/or delivery of equipment to project site from the storage facility, 2. Contractor shall allow interval inspection of stored material at the OWNER’S request upon delivery, storage, and prior to shipping of equipment to the project site. During the offsite facility equipment inspection, the Contractor shall provide: a. Product manifests upon request for OWNER inspection and verification, b. Location of specified product in a unified bundle with label noting OWNER, Project Name, Product type, and Project Number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 29 73 Schedule of Values Page 1 of 3 SECTION 01 29 73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Preparation and submittal of Schedule of Values for stipulated price contracts or for major unit price work on unit price contracts. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 DEFINITION A. The Schedule of Values is an itemized list that establishes the value of each part of the Work for a stipulated price contract and for major unit price work on a unit price contract. The Schedule of Values is used as the basis for preparing applications for payments. Quantities and unit prices shall be included in the schedule of values. B. Major Unit Price Work is an individual unit price item: 1. Whose value is greater than five percent of original contract price, 2. Whose value becomes greater than five percent of original contract price as the result of an increase in quantity, or 3. Whose value is $100,000, whichever is least. 1.04 PREPARATION A. For stipulated price contracts, subdivide the Schedule of Values into logical portions of the Work, such as major work items or work in contiguous construction areas. Organize each portion using the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as an outline for listing the value of work by Sections. Provide at least one item for each specification section. A pro rata share of mobilization, bonds, and insurance may be listed as separate items for each portion of the work. 1. Schedule of Values must follow the OWNER’S construction tracking system format/template. 2. Include the following Project identification: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Owner. c. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with columns to indicate the following for each item listed: SECTION 01 29 73 Schedule of Values Page 2 of 3 a.Related Specification Section or Division. b.Description of Work. c.Name of subcontractor. d.Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e.Name of supplier. f.Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g.Dollar value. h.Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4.Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate evaluation of Applications for Payment. Break subcontract amounts down into several line items if needed. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5.Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased, or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 6.Provide separate line items for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value. 7.Show line items for indirect costs and margins on costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item. Temporary facilities and items that are not direct cost of work-in-place may be shown as separate line items or distributed as general overhead expense. 8.Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives change the Contract Sum. B.For unit price contracts, items shall use the bid items for the Schedule of Values. C.For lump sum equipment items, where submittal of operation/maintenance data and testing are required, include a separate item for equipment operation and maintenance data where: 1.Submittal of maintenance data shall be valued at five percent (5%) of the lump sum amount for each equipment item. Contractor will not be paid the value of (5%) of the lump sum amount until maintenance data is submitted and approved. 2.Submittal for testing and adjusting shall be valued at five percent (5%) of the lump sum amount for each equipment item. Contractor will not be paid the value of (5%) of the lump sum amount until testing data is submitted and approved. 3.Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a.Construction schedule. b.Application for payment forms, including continuation sheets. c.List of subcontractors. SECTION 01 29 73 Schedule of Values Page 3 of 3 d. List of products. e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. f. Schedule of submittals. D. Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest $100.00. Set the value of one (1) item, when necessary, to make all values equal the contract price for stipulated price contract or lump sum amount for unit price work. E. No payment request (including the first) will be approved until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the Engineer. 1.05 SUBSCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES A. Submit a sub-schedule of unit costs and quantities for products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products. B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values. C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste. D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into: 1. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid. 2. Copies of invoices for component material shall be included with the payment request in which the material first appears. 3. Paid invoices shall be provided with the second payment request in which the material appears, or no payment shall be allowed and/or may be deleted from the request. E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values. 1.06 SUBMITTAL A. Submit the Schedule of Values in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit initial schedule of values within 15 days after execution of contract or at the time of the pre-construction conference. B. Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications. After the changes are reviewed without exception by the Owner, make the submittal at least 10 days prior to submitting the next application for progress payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 31 19 Project Meetings Page 1 of 3 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section describes the various project related meetings which will be held on a routine schedule throughout the duration of the project. B. The CONTRACTOR shall attend all project-related meetings as indicated hereinafter. The CONTRACTOR's representatives, at a minimum, shall include his Project Manager and Construction Site Superintendent. Other CONTRACTOR representatives may attend project-related meetings; however, a maximum of four (4) representatives at any one meeting is mandatory unless the Owner’s Representative approves a larger number. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all pertinent reports, copies of reports, etc., for each meeting as may be required by this or other sections of the Specifications. D. All project related meetings shall be held in the Owner’s Representative office unless otherwise specified. E. The Owner’s Representative will record the minutes of all meetings and will furnish all attendees and others, as necessary and appropriate, with copies within three (3) working days. The CONTRACTOR shall advise the Owner’s Representative, in writing, of any inaccuracies, discrepancies, objections and or missing items in the minutes, within seven (7) calendar days or receipt of the minutes or by the next meeting, whichever is sooner. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed, a Preconstruction Conference shall be scheduled and held as designated by the OWNER. In addition to the OWNER's, ENGINEER’s, and CONTRACTOR's representatives the meeting shall be attended by the representatives of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction of the project, if required, and such other persons the OWNER may designate. B. Unless otherwise specified or agreed by the OWNER and CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR shall present to the OWNER the written safety program, names of salaried specialists of CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors, and all other preconstruction documents required of him by the Contract at that time. C. In general, matters to be discussed and the instructions and information to be furnished to or given by the CONTRACTOR shall include: 1. Project meeting schedule. 2. Progress schedule and schedule of values submitted by CONTRACTOR. SECTION 01 31 19 Project Meetings Page 2 of 3 3. Communication procedures between the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, and ENGINEER. 4. The names and titles of all persons authorized by the CONTRACTOR to represent and execute documents for him, with samples of all authorized signatures. 5. The names, addresses and telephone numbers of all those authorized by the CONTRACTOR to act for him in emergencies. 6. Construction permit requirements, procedures and posting. 7. Public notice of starting work. 8. Procedures concerning the installation of work on public or private property not owned by the OWNER. 9. Access and rights-of-way furnished by the OWNER. 10. Forms and procedures for CONTRACTOR's submittals. 11. Change order forms and procedures. 12. Payment application forms and procedures and the revised progress schedule reports to accompany the applications. 13. CONTRACTOR's safety and training program and designation of the CONTRACTOR's safety officer and his qualifications. 14. First-aid and medical facilities to be furnished by CONTRACTOR. 15. Contractor's provisions for barricades, traffic control, utilities, sanitary facilities, and other temporary facilities and controls. 16. Project sign for OWNER if required by the Specifications. 17. Inspector and his duties. 18. Construction surveyor and initiation of surveying services. 19. Testing laboratory or agency, and testing procedures. 20. Construction equipment and methods proposed by the CONTRACTOR. 21. Procedures for payroll and labor cost reporting by the CONTRACTOR. 22. Procedures to ensure nondiscrimination in employment on and for the work. 23. Issuance of the notice to proceed. 24. Use of site for construction, storage, staging, etc. and its interrelationship with other contracts. 25. Inventory of materials to be stored on site. 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Progress meetings shall be held throughout the duration of the project at the frequency and manner determined by the Owner’s Representative. The meetings shall be held on the same day and at the same time in an office, all to be determined at the preconstruction conference. In addition to the OWNER's, ENGINEER's and CONTRACTOR's representatives, the meeting shall be SECTION 01 31 19 Project Meetings Page 3 of 3 attended by other persons designated/requested by the OWNER, ENGINEER and/or CONTRACTOR. B. The format may include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following subjects: 1. Review of previous meetings notes and update of pertinent information and project status. 2. Identification and discussion of new job-related construction problems. Such discussion will be toward resolving identified problems. 3. Establishment of proposed construction activities for the upcoming month. 4. Coordination with other contracts, including meeting with other contractors. 1.05 OTHER MEETINGS A. Other meetings shall be held from time to time as may be requested by the CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER, or the OWNER. The time and place of the meetings shall be as mutually agreed upon. Those required to be in attendance at the meetings shall be as requested by that party requesting the meeting. B. Other meetings shall also include meetings with regulatory agencies. When requested, the CONTRACTOR shall attend meetings held or required by the governmental regulatory agencies having jurisdiction of the project. C. Other meetings shall also include post-construction conference. A post- construction conference shall be held prior to final inspection of the work to discuss and resolve all unsettled matters. The bonds and insurance to remain in force, and other documents required to be submitted by the CONTRACTOR, will be reviewed and any deficiencies determined. Schedules and procedures for the final inspection process and for the correction of defects and deficiencies shall be discussed and agreed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 32 17 Construction Progress Schedule Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 32 17 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare and submit a progress schedule for the work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor the work progress, to anticipate the time and amount of progress payments, and to relate submittal processing to sequential activities of the work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of submittals and the dates when submittals must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the work per the schedule submitted. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit progress schedules in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Submit schedules within the following times: 1. Preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. 2. Detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. B. Submit progress schedules with requests for partial payment. Schedules may be used to evaluate the requests for partial payment. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of progress payments. 1.03 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the work. 2. Assure the coordination of the work of the Contractor and the various subcontractors and suppliers. 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the work. 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the contract and project schedule. 5. Assist the Owner in review of Contractor's monthly payment requests. B. Provide personnel with 5 years’ minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer-generated critical path schedule which includes work to be performed on the project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: SECTION 01 32 17 Construction Progress Schedule Page 2 of 4 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Require that detailed plans for the execution of the work be prepared in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish inter-relationships of significant planned work activities and provide a logical sequence of interdependence of planned work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the project. 6. Permit preparation of new schedules when an existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the work as it actually occurs. D. A time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram shall be prepared to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop milestone dates and project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and contract completion date. 2. Use calendar days durations while accounting for normal holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate by a graphical method, the critical path for work to complete the project. Only one critical path shall be shown on the construction schedule. E. The schedule is to be accompanied by a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the work scheduled at any time during the project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of work. 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of work. 4. The activity start and stop dates. 5. The activity duration. 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity. Group related activities or use lines to indicate relationships. 7. A clearly indicated critical path. Indicate only one critical path on the schedule. The subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path where several subsystem each have a critical path. Float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Submit a separate submittal schedule indicating the dates when the submittals are to be sent to the Engineer. 1. List specific dates submittal is to be sent to the Engineer. 2. List specific dates submittal must be processed in order to meet the proposed schedule. SECTION 01 32 17 Construction Progress Schedule Page 3 of 4 3. Allow a reasonable time to review submittals, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the submittal, the submission of other submittals, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of the submittals for each item. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous submittals and for time lost when submittals are submitted for products that do not meet specification requirements. G. Update the schedule at the end of each monthly partial payment period to indicate the progress made on the project to that date. 1.04 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the project back on schedule. c. Anticipated time required to bring the project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in contract time approved by change order. 1. Revised schedule is to be included with Contract Modification Request and in response to Proposed Contract Modifications by the Owner and Engineer for which an extension of time is requested. 2. Failure to submit a revised schedule indicates that the modification shall have no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the project on time and that the cost associated with the change of additional plant or work force have been included in the cost proposed for the modification. C. Updating the project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the project schedule. D. Payment estimates may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractors plan for bringing the project back on schedule. 1.05 FLOAT TIME A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. SECTION 01 32 17 Construction Progress Schedule Page 4 of 4 D. Contract time cannot be changed by the submission of this schedule. Contract time can only be modified by approved change order. E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the contract completion date is to be indicated as float time. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 32 34 Video and Photographic Documentation Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 32 34 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way) including but not limited to streets, curb and gutter, utilities, driveways, fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the Construction Manager before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the Construction Manager if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire project site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the Construction Manager to photograph the project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the site from an angle and height to include the entire project site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit photographic documentation as record data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as record data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. SECTION 01 32 34 Video and Photographic Documentation Page 2 of 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the Construction Manager. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date, time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photograph in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the Owner. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 2.02 VIDEO RECORDING A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pump Stations, Ground Storage tanks, water treatment plants and other site components shall be video recorded in an organized sequential order with major components identified. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This specification includes submittal procedures for the following as applicable to this project. 1. Schedule of Values. 2. Construction Schedules. 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Sampler. 4. Operations and Maintenance Data. 5. Manufacturer's Certificates. 6. Construction Photographs. 7. Project Record Documents. 8. Video Tapes. 9. Design Mixes. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Scheduling and Handling: 1. Schedule submittals well in advance of the need for the material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after submittal is approved. 2. Develop a submittal schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction, resubmission and final review of all submittals. Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a submittal schedule be acceptable which allows less than 21 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. B. Submittal Review 1. The Engineer's review of submittals covers only general conformity to the Drawings, Specifications and dimensions that affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. ENGINEER will verify no quantities. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Drawings and Specifications. 2. Engineer will attach a separate review form to the contractor original submittal when returned to the contractor. SECTION 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Page 2 of 4 3. Submit one (1) copy of documents in pdf format unless otherwise specified by the Engineer or OWNER inspector during the pre-con meeting. 4. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 5. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in periodic progress payments until approval has been obtained in the specified manner. C. Transmittal Form and Numbering: 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a Transmittal Form. A copy of the Transmittal Form is attached at the end of this Section. Submittals not containing the prescribed Transmittal Form will be returned without Engineer’s Review. 2. Re-submittals shall use the original number with a decimal suffix (i.e., 2.1 for first re-submittal of Submittal 2 or 15.3 for third re-submittal of Submittal 15). With the exception of defined systems, each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. D. Contractor's Stamp: 1. Apply Contractor's stamp, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 2. At a minimum, Contractor's Stamp shall include: a. Contractor's name. b. Job number. c. Submittal number. d. Certification statement that the Contractor has reviewed the submittal and it is in compliance with the Contract Documents. e. Signature and Date line for Contractor. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a Schedule of Values in accordance with General Conditions and Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A. Submit Construction Schedules as provided in the General Conditions and Section 01 32 00 – Schedule and Sequence of Construction. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Page 3 of 4 A. Submit Operations and Maintenance data in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 78 23 – Operational and Maintenance Data. 1.07 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in Specification sections, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer. B. Contractor's Stamp, as described in paragraph 1.2C, shall be placed on the front page of the certification. C. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer. PART 2 - PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SEE ATTACHED TRANSMITTAL FORM AFTER THIS SECTION SECTION 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Page 4 of 4 TRANSMITTAL FORM Date of Submittal: Project Name: Submittal: Manufacturer/Supplier: Manufacturer/Supplier Site Delivery: weeks Relevant Specification Section(s): Exceptions: Remarks: I certify that the above submitted items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications except as noted by the above variance. (Contractor Signature) SECTION 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Methods, schedules, and processes to be followed for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Sample submittals. 1.02 REQUIREMENT A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples as required by Article 5 in Contract Documents – General Conditions and Specification sections, using procedures specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and the requirements of this Section. B. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples are not considered Contract documents. 1.03 SHOP DRAWING/SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit a separate Shop Drawing submittal schedule at same time the Construction Schedule is submitted. List Products for which Shop Drawings and other submittals are required in the order that they appear in Specifications. Include Product Data and Sample submittals in the schedule. Payment Applications or Certificates for Payment will not be processed until Project Manager has approved the Shop Drawing submittal schedule. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data through the OWNER ’S electronic project management system Trello. If the OWNER’S project management system cannot accommodate the file, submit the Shop Drawings and Product Data using an alternate method approved by the Project Manager. B. Place Contractor's Stamp on each drawing as described in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. C. Show the following accurately and distinctly: 1. Field and erection dimensions. 2. Arrangement and section views. 3. Relation to adjacent materials or structure, including complete information for making connections between the Work and work under other contracts. 4. Types of Products and finishes. 5. Parts list and descriptions. 6. Assembly drawings of equipment components and accessories showing respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. SECTION 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples Page 2 of 2 7. Identify details by referencing drawing sheet and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Contract drawings, where necessary for clarity. D. Scale drawings to provide a true representation of the specific equipment or item Furnished. E. Coordinate and submit components, necessary for Project Manager to adequately review submittal, as a complete package. Reproduction of the Drawings for use in Shop Drawings is not allowed. F. For major changes to original documents, submit Computer-Aided Design (CAD) drawings on a media acceptable to Project Manager. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit Product Data for review as required in Specifications. B. Place Contractor's stamp, on each data item submitted, as described in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. C. Mark each copy to identify applicable Products, models, and options to be used in the Work. Where required by Specifications, supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to the Work. D. Give manufacturers, trade name, model or catalog designation and applicable reference standard for Products specified only by reference standards. E. Approved Products: 1. For Products proposed as alternates to ”approved" products, provide information required to demonstrate that the proposed Products meet the level of quality and performance criteria of the "approved” product. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit Samples for review as required by Specifications. Have Samples reviewed and signed by a Registered Professional. B. Place Contractor's stamp on each Sample or firmly attach a sheet of paper with C. Contractor's stamp, as described in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit the number of Samples specified in Specifications; Project Manager will retain one. D. Reviewed Samples that may be used in the Work are identified in Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 35 43 Environmental Protection Page 1 of 7 SECTION 01 35 43 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Construction of the Work covered by these Contract Documents is subject to the applicable provisions and rules of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and United States Army Corps of Engineers and all other local applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, and conditions/requirements of permits issued by governmental agencies for the conduct of this project. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. 01 74 19 – Waste Material Disposal 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Record Data-Storage and Fueling Plan: for hydraulic fluid, oil, and fuel: Submit for approval by ENGINEER prior to bringing fuel storage on-site. Describe plan for fueling equipment and fuel storage including spill prevention, containment, and cleanup provisions. Provide a list of all equipment that will contain more than 55 gallons of hydraulic fluid, oil, or fuel. Provide drawings for the secondary containment systems pertaining to above ground fuel storage tanks, equipment- mounted fuel tanks, oil reservoirs, and oil and fuel lines (including hydraulic fluid lines). Provide a description on how secondary containment will be inspected. Provide a description on how fueling operations will be handled over or near a waterway, or on shore, describing environmental protection methods that will be implemented. Provide description for requesting additional fuel storage containers not included in initial request. Provide inspection form to be used on a weekly basis in evaluating these areas. B. Record Data-Equipment Maintenance Plan: Describe plan for minimizing the potential environmental impacts of preventative and non-scheduled equipment maintenance activities. Describe what environmental protections measures will be implemented prior to and during both preventative and non-scheduled equipment maintenance activities. C. Record Data – Equipment Inspection Reports: Provide inspection procedure and example inspection form to be used on a weekly basis to report equipment inspections. D. Record Data – MSDS: Provide MSDS data sheets on all proposed fuels, chemicals, paints greases, hydraulic fluids, coatings, epoxies, cements, SECTION 01 35 43 Environmental Protection Page 2 of 7 admixtures, etc. to be used on and with equipment, to be used temporarily during construction, and to be permanently incorporated into the work. E. Record Data – Materials used to perform the Work: Provide a list for the following types of materials that will be used in performing the Work. 1. Ozone-depleted chemicals 2. Materials with volatile organic compounds (VOC’s) 3. Any material that will become an F-Listed waste (e.g. acetone, xylene, toluene, methyl ethyl ketone). 4. Acutely toxic materials. 5. Constituents subject to reporting under the state and federal Right-to-Know regulations (as shown on the Material Data Sheets). F. Record Data – Care of Water Plan: Describe plan for dewatering an area and managing water flows and infiltration into the work area. All water flows from, or generated by the work, must meet State and Federal regulations prior to entering a creek, stream, or a lake. Regulations include, but not limited to, 30 TAC 307 and 26 TWC 121, Surface Water Quality Standards and Water Quality Control for the State of Texas, respectively. G. Record Data – Storm Water Inspections: Contractor to submit weekly storm water inspections to OWNER based on Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan developed by Contractor. 1.05 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES A. The land resources, within the project boundaries and outside the limits of work under the Work of this Contract, shall be preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition after construction that will appear to be natural and not detract from the appearance of the project. Activities shall be confined to areas defined by the Drawings and Specifications. 1.06 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES A. No water courses shall be polluted with any construction debris, loose soil, suspended sediment, petroleum products, abrasives, epoxies, paints, solvents, cleaners, fuels, surface preparation materials, oils, lubricants, bitumen, calcium chlorides, insecticides, herbicides, or other toxic materials harmful to life unless specifically permitted. Chemical emulsifiers, dispersants, coagulants, or other cleanup compounds shall not be used without prior written approval. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to ensure compliance with state and local water quality standards and to identify if any additional discharge permits are required to perform Work. B. The CONTRACTOR may be required to submit a certified Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan (SPCC) that will fulfill the requirements of the Clean Water Act, CFR Part 112. In the event that the total capacity of all hydraulic fluid, oil, fuel containing tanks, containers, and equipment exceeds 1,320 gallons an SPCC is required. The plan must be prepared prior to installing or mobilizing equipment that would cause the 1,320-gallon limit to be exceeded. SECTION 01 35 43 Environmental Protection Page 3 of 7 C. The CONTRACTOR will submit for approval all fuel storage containers, prior to mobilizing containers onto site, in accordance with Edwards Aquifer Rules (30 TAC 213). Additional fuel storage containers not approved in the initial request must be individually approved by the ENGINEER. 1.07 DEWATERING A. The CONTRACTOR will control and manage all dewatering of the project, and any non-storm water discharges from the construction site in compliance with all TCEQ water quality discharge requirements, including but not limited to 30 TAC 307,Surface Water Quality Standards for the State of Texas. B. Contractor shall provide continuous observation of dewatering activities and effectiveness of BMP’s. C. The following non-storm water discharges from construction activities are acceptable. 1. Discharges from firefighting activities 2. Fire hydrant flushing. 3. Vehicle, external building, and pavement wash water where detergents and soaps are not used and where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred (unless spilled materials have been removed; and if local, state, or federal regulations are applicable, the materials are removed according to those regulations), and where the purpose i s to remove mud, dirt, and dust. 4. Water used to control dust. 5. Potable water sources including waterline flushing. 6. Air conditioning condensate 7. Uncontaminated ground water or spring water, including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents or other pollutants. D. Dewatering and non-storm water discharges will, at a minimum, flow through silt fence, or other suitable structural controls, prior to leaving the site, as necessary to meet compliance requirements with all State and Federal water quality discharge requirements, including but not limited to 30 TAC 307 or 26 TWC 121, Surface Water Quality Standards and Water Quality Control for the State of Texas, respectively. E. Dewatering of water contaminated with hydrocarbons or other oils is prohibited from being discharged to a creek, stream, lake, or the soil surface. 1.08 PROTECTION OF AIR QUALITY A. All Work shall be performed in such a manner as to ensure that air quality is protected. CONTRACTOR will complete and maintain all records to support compliance with the applicable air quality standards including but not limited to 30 TAC 106.183. SECTION 01 35 43 Environmental Protection Page 4 of 7 B. Minimize air pollution by requiring the use of properly operating combustion emission control devices on construction vehicles and equipment and encourage shutdown of motorized equipment not in use. 1.09 PROTECTION OF FISH AND WILDLIFE A. All Work shall be performed, and all steps taken to prevent interference or disturbance to fish and wildlife. Water courses or habitats outside the project boundaries shall not be altered or disturbed, without OWNER’s written prior consent. 1.10 BURNING OF DEBRIS A. No debris or surplus materials may be disposed of by burning at the job site or at any other location. 1.11 INFORMATION REGARDING WASTES REQUIRED WITH BID A. Waste control measures shall be implemented during construction activities to prevent unauthorized release and ensure proper management of waste in accordance with Section 01 74 19 – Waste Material Disposal. 1.12 PROHIBITED MATERIALS A. The CONTRACTOR is strictly prohibited from using any of the following types of materials that could generate waste in performance of the work. 1. Asbestos, asbestos-containing material (ACM) 2. Mercury containing material. 3. Surface coatings with lead, cadmium, chromium, or mercury 4. PCB containing material. 5. Radioactive containing material 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL INSPECTIONS A. The OWNER reserves the right to perform environmental inspections. The CONTRACTOR shall provide remedial action as required by the OWNER. PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EROSION CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION A. A. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize the Best Management Practices (BMP’s) with regard to controlling erodible soils within the construction lay-down area, project site, and while working near water, or water courses. This may include installing and maintaining silt fences or other similar structural controls as prescribed within the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan or additional controls as needed for any erodible soil, or storage of materials within the lay-down area and work site. 3.02 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP) SECTION 01 35 43 Environmental Protection Page 5 of 7 A. Implementation of the SWPPP is required. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare the SWPPP for the project, the CONTRACTOR shall perform all actions required within the SWPPP in relation to day to day on site activities including weekly inspections of controls, and maintenance to sediment and erosion controls based on inspection records. Contractor shall provide a copy of the inspection records to Owners Representative on a weekly basis beginning with first required inspection, in addition, CONTRACTOR will maintain records in accordance with Texas Pollution Discharge Elimination System requirements. B. The SWPPP included in the plan set provides the minimum requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall modify and update the drawing as necessary. 3.03 PLACEMENT OF TEMPORARY PLATFORMS AND ACCESS FACILITIES A. Temporary platforms or other temporary access facilities may be placed for temporary construction access to perform required Work. All placements of temporary platforms shall be conducted in accordance with the terms and general conditions of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit Program and other environmental compliance requirements specified herein. 3.04 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, FUELING, AND SPILL CONTAINMENT A. Scheduled preventive maintenance shall be performed on all construction equipment prior to mobilization in the work area. CONTRACTOR shall establish a maintenance area within the staging area for performing all routine and preventative maintenance, when possible. CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly inspect all construction equipment for any leaks prior to use at the job site and on a daily basis. B. A spill can be defined as an accidental release of a solid, liquid, or gas to land, air, or water that would create a potential or actual hazard to human health or the environment. 1. The CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for any spills or release caused by himself or any of his subcontractors that occur during the performance of, or in connection with the performance of the Work under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all notifications required by any federal, state, or local law or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the OWNER of the nature and location of any spill. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a written report to OWNER that identifies the substance, quantity released, location of the spill, agencies notified/talked to if any, cleanup, and remediation activities conducted or planned. The written report should be a narrative that summarizes on the scene activity, remediation efforts, and if long term remediation will be required. This initial report shall be provided to the OWNER within 24 hours after the incident. Follow up reports may be required if requested by the OWNER. These requirements are also required if the spill occurs off the OWNER’s property as a result of contractor’s performance of the Work under this Contract. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall be liable for and agrees to indemnify and hold the OWNER harmless from any and all liabilities, including, but not limited to, remediation costs, fines, penalties, court costs, and attorney fees resulting from spills, releases, improper handling and/or disposal of wastes connected with a spill by the CONTRACTOR. SECTION 01 35 43 Environmental Protection Page 6 of 7 3. Spills shall be cleaned up to background levels or to criteria as set forth in the applicable federal, state, or local laws and regulations, or whichever is the most stringent. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a temporary secondary containment berm with plastic liner around all stationary construction equipment subject to potential leakage of fluids or fuel to contain accidental leakage and/or discharges. Detection and cleanup of liquid fuel, oil leaks, or spills, shall be accomplished as follows. 1. Leak Detection: Leaks from any tanks or lines on equipment shall be detected by the CONTRACTOR during a daily check. Any fuel, oil, or chemical leak shall be reported immediately verbally and then in writing, in the appropriate format, to the OWNER’s Resident Representative. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the source of the leak is repaired and that the spilled fluid is cleaned up immediately and thoroughly. 2. Leak Cleanup: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all spill cleanups and notify OWNER’s Resident Representative immediately. Any fuel, oil, or chemical leakage shall be collected in the bermed area surrounding the equipment using absorbent material. Contractor shall keep absorbent materials on site for clean-up. Contaminated absorbent materials shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 01 74 19 – Waste Material Disposal. 3. Oil Filters: Used oil, oil filters, and cartridges shall be collected by the CONTRACTOR and these items will be recycled at an OWNER approved and audited recycling facility. 4. Operation of Equipment in Areas Subject to Direct Discharge to Waterways: Special precautions shall be taken to prevent releases of fuel, oil, or chemicals when equipment is working over or adjacent to the water. This shall include provision of secondary containment for equipment-mounted fuel tanks, oil reservoirs, and fuel and oil lines (including hydraulic fluid lines). Exposed hydraulic lines shall be double wrapped and/or shielded by the use of deflectors, as necessary, to prevent a release to the water in the event of a line rupture. No fuel container larger than 250 gallons shall be stored on-site outside of the staging area designated on the construction drawings, unless prior written approval by the owner. Fueling of equipment over or adjacent to water shall be done using a maximum fuel storage/transfer container size of five (5) gallons. A funnel shall be used to minimize fuel spillage, and a drip pan shall be used to capture any spillage of fuel. If the total quantity of containers smaller than five gallons on a barge, platform, walkway, or structure exceeds five (5) gallons, then these multiple items shall be kept in secondary containment while in storage. D. The CONTRACTOR should attempt to use and work with the least amount of chemicals or fuels needed for a given job. 3.05 NOISE CONTROL A. The CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise. Such measures shall be appropriate for the normal ambient sound levels in the area during working hours. All construction machinery and vehicles shall SECTION 01 35 43 Environmental Protection Page 7 of 7 be equipped with appropriate sound muffling devices and operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient performance of the Work. 3.06 EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS A. All hydraulic systems and lines on CONTRACTOR’s equipment should be evaluated to determine if vegetable-based or environmentally friendly hydraulic oil can be utilized over waterways. Vegetable-based or environmentally friendly hydraulic oil is required if equipment manufacturer allows replacement of standard hydraulic oils. Provide MSDS sheets on the proposed hydraulic fluids. All hydraulic systems shall be double wrapped with absorbent materials or use deflective devices. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers. Correct defective Work. 2. Inspect products and materials to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers of raw materials, parts, components, assemblies, and other products have adequate quality control system to ensure that quality products are produced. Provide only products that comply with the Contract Documents. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner to insure that products proposed for use fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide all facilities and calibrated equipment required for quality control tests. 5. Provide consumable construction materials of adequate quality to provide a finished product that complies with the Contract Documents. 6. Perform tests as indicated in this and other sections of the specifications. Schedule the time and sequence of testing with the Construction Manager. All quality control testing is to be observed by the Construction Manager or designated representative. 7. Maintain complete inspection and testing records at the site and make them available to Owner, Engineer and Construction Manager. B. Technical specifications govern if any requirements of this section conflicts with the requirements of the technical specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES BY THE OWNER A. Owner may perform its own quality assurance test independent of the Contractor’s Quality Control Program or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. Provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and related items for testing by the Owner including, but not limited to temporary construction required for testing and operation of new and existing utilities. Assist the Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager, and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities. 1. Provide access to the Work and to the Supplier’s operations at all times Work is in progress. 2. Cooperate fully in the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing. 3. Furnish labor and facilities to: a. Provide access to the work to be tested. b. Obtain and handle samples for testing at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested. SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements c. Provide calibrate scales and measuring devices for the Owner’s use. d. Facilitate inspections and tests. e. Provide adequate lighting to allow Owner observations. f. Store and cure test samples. 4. Furnish copies of the tests performed on materials and products. 5. Provide adequate quantities of representative product to be tested to the laboratory at the designated location. 6. Give the Construction Manager adequate notice before proceeding with work that would interfere with testing. 7. Notify the Construction Manager and the testing laboratory prior to the time that testing is required. Lead time is to be adequate to allow arrangements to be made for testing. 8. Do not proceed with any work until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the work is acceptable. 9. Provide complete access to the Site and make Contract Documents available. 10. Provide personnel and equipment needed to perform sampling or to assist in making the field tests. 11. Quality assurance testing performed by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing performed by the Owner, which shall be paid for by the Contractor as described in Paragraph 1.06. B. Quality assurance activities of the Owner, Engineer or Construction Manager through their own forces or through contracts with materials testing laboratories and survey crews are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor’s work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Quality assurance activities of the Owner and Engineer or non-performance of quality assurance activities: 1. Do not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to perform Work and furnish materials and products and constructed Work conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Do not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures. 3. Do not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of the material, product or Work before Owner’s acceptance. 4. Do not constitute or imply Owner’s acceptance. 5. Do not affect the continuing rights of the Owner after Owner’s acceptance of the completed Work. D. The presence or absence of the Owner’s Resident Representative or Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from any contract requirement, nor is the Owner’s Resident Representative or Engineer authorized to change any term or condition of the Contract Documents without the Owner’s written authorization in a Field Order or Change Order. SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements E. Failure on the part of the Owner, Engineer or Construction Manager to perform or test products or constructed works in no way relieves the Contractor of the obligation to perform work and furnish materials conforming to the Contract Documents. F. All materials and products are subject to Owner’s quality assurance observations or testing at any time during preparation or use. Material or products which have been tested or observed or approved by Owner at a supply source or staging area may be re-observed or re-tested by Owner before or during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if they do not comply with the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. A written Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this program as Record Data. 2. A Statement of Qualification for the proposed testing laboratory. The statement of qualifications is to include a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, equipment used with date of last certification and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Test reports per Paragraph 1.07, Test Reports of this specification. Reports are to certify that products or constructed Works are in full compliance with the Contract Documents or indicate that they are not in compliance and describe how they are not in compliance. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports on materials or products to be incorporated into the Project. Reports are to indicate that material or products are in full compliance with the Contract Documents or indicate that they are not in compliance and describe how they are not in compliance. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a testing laboratory that complies with the ACIL (American Council of Independent Laboratories) “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications.” B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various sections of the specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. 1.06 VERIFICATION TESTING A. Provide verification testing when tests indicate that materials or the results of construction activities are not in conformance with Contract Documents. SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements B. Verification testing is to be provided at the Contractor’s expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been made. C. Tests must comply with recognized methods or with methods recommended by the testing laboratory and approved by the Engineer. 1.07 TEST REPORTS A. Test reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, project title and number, equipment installer and general contractor. b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number. c. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test. d. Description of the product being sampled or tested. e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing. f. Date the report was issued. g. Description of the test performed. h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling. i. Location at the site or structure where the test was taken. j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test. k. A description of the results of the test. l. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents. m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor or his suppliers or vendors on the forms provided in Section 01 31 13.13 – Forms. 3. Engineer will prepare test reports on test performed by the Engineer. B. Distribute copies of the test reports to the Construction Manager within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. Hard copies of test reports are to be distributed to individuals designated at the pre-construction conference: Recipient No. of Copies Owner 2 Engineer 1 Construction Manager 1 Contractor 1 C. Payment for Work subject to testing may be withheld until the Contractor’s quality control test reports of the Work are submitted to the Engineer or the Owner’s Resident Representative. 1.08 NON-CONFORMING WORK SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements A. Immediately correct any Work that does not comply with the Contract Documents or submit a written explanation of why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action to the Work will be performed. B. Payment for non-conforming Work shall be withheld until Work is brought into compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.09 LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY OF THE TESTING LABORATORY A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing consultation on the test performed and to an advisory capacity. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor. 4. Stop the work. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Submit Contractor’s Quality Control Plan that identifies personnel, procedures, control, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the Quality Control Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of work to be started. Work outside of the features of work included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a Quality Control Plan or another interim plan containing the additional features of work to be started. B. Content of the Quality Control Plan. The Quality Control Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following to address all construction operations, both on-site and off- site, including work by Subcontractors and Suppliers: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgement that the quality control staff shall implement the quality control program for all aspects of the Work specified. 2. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a quality control function. 3. A copy of the letter to the Quality Control Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the Quality Control Manager, including authority to stop work which does not comply with the Contract Documents or will result in Work that does not comply with the Contract Documents. The Quality Control Manager shall issue letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities, and responsibilities. Copies of these letters shall also be furnished to the Construction Manager. 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of Subcontractors and Suppliers. 5. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test is to include the test name, specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements be tested, test frequency, person responsible for each test, applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test. 6. Procedures for tracking phases of quality control, verification, and acceptance tests including documentation. 7. Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 8. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats. 9. The name of the proposed testing laboratory along with documentation of qualifications, a list of tests that can be performed, and a list of recent projects for which similar testing has been performed with references from those projects. C. Notification of Changes. After submittal of the Quality Control Plan, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of any proposed changes. D. Coordination Meeting. After the Pre-construction Meeting and before start of construction, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner, Engineer and Construction Manager to discuss the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. The Quality Control Plan shall be submitted a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details shall be developed, including the forms for recording the Quality Control operations, testing, administration of the system for both on- site and off-site work, and the interrelationship of Contractor’s management and control with the Owner’s Quality Assurance. Revise the Quality Management Plan to reflect comments and recommended changes resulting from this meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING APPARATUS A. Furnish testing apparatus and related accessories necessary to perform the tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each section of the specifications and where indicated on the drawings. B. Provide a quality control program that includes the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the contract drawings. b. Review submittals and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure that they are on hand, conform to submittals, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates submittal comments. i. Discuss results of planning with the Construction Manager. Conduct a meeting attended by the quality control manager, the Construction Manager, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the quality control manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the Construction Manager at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks to correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal non-conforming work. c. Conduct a review of the Work 1 month prior to the expiration of the correction period prescribed in the General Conditions with the Owner and Construction Manager. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and review if: 1. The quality of on-going work is unacceptable. SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, onsite production supervision or work crew. 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity. 4. Other quality problems develop. 3.02 ELECTRICAL TESTING A. Qualifications: 1. Perform testing using qualified personnel with a minimum of 5 years’ experience installing and testing electrical equipment and machinery, unless otherwise specified. 2. Use testing firms or individuals to perform tests that have not provided services or materials used on the Project or are otherwise related or affiliated with other Contractors or Suppliers for this project unless permitted by the Owner. B. Report Forms: Complete appropriate test report neatly and in ink for the items being tested. Note listed data that is not applicable or cannot be obtained as “N/A” or document with an explanation for the omission. Incomplete test forms will not be witnessed by the Construction Manager. Repeat tests not accepted. Substitute forms recording similar data and test equipment as that specified may be used if approved by the Engineer. C. Test Equipment: 1. Provide test equipment and materials necessary to perform the requested tests. 2. Test equipment and apparatus shall be appropriate for the full range and duration of the test to be performed. 3. Demonstrate that the test equipment is functioning properly, prior to the commencement of the test. Suspend the test and repair or replace the equipment if test equipment fails during any portion of a test. Repeat the test in its entirety or as otherwise required by the Construction Manager. 4. Provide a copy of the test equipment calibration certificate to the Construction Manager prior to the commencement of the test. Provide test equipment that has been calibrated with 6 months of the date of the test using methods approved by the National Institute of Standards and Technology. D. Execution: 1. Make appropriate repairs or replacements if the circuit, equipment or machinery being tested does not pass. Repeat test as directed by the Construction Manager. 2. The more rigid requirement prevails if test procedures or equipment conflicts occur between the various sections and/or Supplier’s recommendations. E. Electrical Cable: 1. Communication Cable and Conductors - Submit test forms to the Owner’s for approval prior to performing the following tests: a. Test shielded pair, telephone, paging, signaling and computer cables for continuity, short circuits and grounds with a low voltage source, not to exceed the insulation rating of the conductors or jacket. SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements b. Test fiber-optic cable between terminating ends for each circuit per the Supplier’s recommendation. Cables, splices (where permitted), and connectors shall be tested for continuity, band width (maximum), and attenuation losses. 2. 600-Volt Cable and Conductors: a. Test power and control conductors rated at 600 volts with an insulation resistance tester at 1000 volts, with respect to ground, and at 1000 volts with respect to all other conductors in each circuit. b. Verify suitable ground connections are provided and maintained throughout the test. c. Perform tests and record results as required by the “600-Volt Cable Test Report” or form provided by the Engineer. d. Test each circuit and record the results for continuity between terminating ends with a low voltage source. 3. 5-kV Cable and Conductors: a. Perform insulation resistance test on 5-kV cable for insulation resistance tested at 2500 volts with respect to ground and at 2500 volts with respect to all other conductors in each circuit. b. H-Pot test 5-kV cables incrementally to 25 kV DC for 15 minutes per ANSI/IEE STD 400. Record leakage current in the spaces provided, at the time intervals shown, on the “Medium Voltage Cable Test Report.” Do not exceed the cable Supplier’s maximum test values or procedures. c. Perform Individual conductor resistance tests and recorded results. Test each circuit for continuity between terminations ends and record the test results. Provide additional tests and checks as requested by the Supplier. 4. 15-kV Cable and Conductors: a. Perform insulation resistance test on 15-kV cable at 2500 volts with respect to all other conductors in each circuit. b. H-Pot test 15-kV cable incrementally to 55 kV DC for 15 minutes per ANSI/IEE STD. 400. Record leakage current at the time interval, shown, on the “Medium Voltage Cable Test Report.” Do not exceed the cable Supplier’s recommended maximum test values or procedures. Perform individual conductor resistance tests and record the results. Test each circuit for continuity between terminating ends and record the results. Provide additional tests and checks as required by the Supplier. F. Switchgear: 1. Test electrical switchgear and electrical devices and controls mounted on or in the switchgear in accordance with the “Switchgear Test Report” form. 2. Record the following information and attach to the test report: a. Resistance reading across joints of each horizontal and vertical bus. b. Verify proper operation of electrical, mechanical and keyed interlocking systems. c. Operate devices at both their open and closed states. Operate stored energy devices mechanically and electrically as applicable. Operate remotely controlled devices from their remote location. SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements d. Verify proper operation of draw-out circuit breakers and switches. Remove and re- install each unit. Verify proper operation of shutters and barriers. e. Disconnect electrical and electronic sensing and protective devices not rated to withstand insulation resistance test potentials. Reconnect the devices before energizing the switchgear. f. Perform insulation resistance tests at the test voltages shown below for the following equipment. Do not exceed the Supplier’s recommended maximum test values or procedures. Equipment Rating Test Voltage 0-250 volts 500 volts 251-600 volts 1000 volts 601-5,000 volts 2500 volts 5,001-15,000 volts 2500 volts 15,001-39,000 volts 5000 volts g. Provide additional tests and checks as recommended by the Supplier before energizing. h. Energize switchgear. Measure and record instrument indications for no-load and connected-load conditions. G. Transformers: 1. Test single and three-phase, liquid filled and dry transformers rated 5 KVA and larger in accordance with the “Transformer Test Report,” form. 2. Record the following information and attach to the test report. a. Verify proper operation of all fans, alarms, and other auxiliary and monitoring devices. b. Verify “tap changer” operation, if applicable, in all positions. Set and secure “tap changer” to position recommended by the Construction Manager or Engineer. c. Obtain insulating liquid sample from all liquid filled transformers. Submit sample to testing laboratory, approved by the Owner for analysis. Perform standard insulating liquid tests as required by the Construction Manager or Engineer. Deliver test results to the Owner within 30 days after sampling. d. Perform insulation resistance tests at the test values shown below for the following equipment. e. Perform tests from each winding to ground and winding to winding. Primary and secondary sections shall be tested separately. f. Do not exceed the Supplier’s recommended maximum test values or procedures. Transformer Coil Rating Test Voltage 0-600 volts 1000 volts SECTION 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 601-5000 volts 2500 volts 5001-15,000 volts 5000 volts 15,001-39,000 volts 10,000 volts g. Provide additional tests and checks as recommended by the Supplier before energizing. h. Energize transformer. Measure and record primary and secondary volts and amps under no load and connected load conditions. H. Motors: 1. Test electric motors in accordance with the “Motor Start-Up Report” form. 2. Check and record motor winding continuity phase to phase with a low voltage source. 3. Check and record motor winding insulation resistance, each phase with respect to ground, at the test values shown below for A.C. induction motors per REF. IEEE Standard 43. 4. Do not exceed the Supplier’s recommended maximum test values or procedures. 5. Check and record motor circuit voltage before starting motor. Motor Voltage Rating (Volts) Test Voltage 250 V and below 500 Above 250 V 1000 2360 volt, three-phase Per Manufacturer’s start-up instructions or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. 4160 volt, three-phase Per Manufacturer’s start-up instructions or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. 6. Verify operation of motor space heater if applicable. 7. Provide additional tests and checks as recommended by the Supplier before energizing. 8. Start motor and verify immediately correct shaft rotation. 9. Check and record motor running volts and amps. 10. Verify correct operation of all interlocking and protective devices. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 42 19 Reference Standards Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes general quality assurance as related to reference standards and a list of references. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in the General Conditions. C. Request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding should specify which reference standards conflict with Contract documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES A. AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials B. ACI – American Concrete Institute C. AGC – Associated General Contractors of America D. AI – Asphalt Institute Research E. AITC – American Institute of Timber Construction F. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction G. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute H. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers I. AMPP – Association for Materials Protection and Performance J. ANSI – American National Standards Institute K. APA – Engineered Wood Association L. API – American Petroleum Institute M. AREMA – American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association N. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials International O. AWPA – American Wood Protection Association P. AWS – American Welding Society Q. AWWA – American Water Works Association R. CLFMI – Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute S. CRSI – Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute SECTION 01 42 19 Reference Standards Page 2 of 2 T. EJMA – Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association U. FS – Federal Standardization Documents V. ICEA – Insulated Cable Engineers Association W. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers X. ISA – International Society of Arboriculture Y. MIL – Military Specifications Z. NACE – International National Association of Corrosion Engineers AA. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers' Association BB. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association CC. OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration DD. PCA – Portland Cement Association EE. PCI – Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute FF. PPI – Plastic Pipes Institute GG. SDI –Steel Deck Institute HH. SSPC – Society for Protective Coatings II. TAC – Texas Administrative Code JJ. TxDOT – Texas Department of Transportation KK. UL – Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. LL. UNI-BELL – PVC Pipe Association PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 45 23 Inspection Services Page 1 of 1 SECTION 01 45 23 INSPECTION SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Inspection services and references 1.02 INSPECTION A. OWNER Engineer will appoint an Inspector to represent the OWNER and perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual Specification sections. B. OWNER Engineer may also appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional inspection or construction management services as indicated in Section 01 45 29 – Testing Laboratory Services. C. The independent firm will submit reports to Project Manager, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or noncompliance with Contract requirements. D. Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Inspector; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, and storage. E. Contractor shall notify OWNER OR ENGINEER 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. F. Contractor shall sign and acknowledge reports for Inspector. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Pre-construction testing to verify conformance of materials with the requirements of the specifications shall be performed and paid for by the CONTRACTOR. Testing results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. The OWNER will employ and pay for services of an independent 3rd party testing laboratory to perform QA/QC services specified in this Section. All other required tests shall be paid for by the CONTR ACTOR, including tests required for gradation, concrete mix designs, asphalt mix designs, etc. See related Sections for specific requirements of the CONTRACTOR. C. Employment of a testing laboratory by the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR in no way relieves the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to perform the work according to the Contract. D. Contractor is responsible for addressing and retesting failed samples until acceptable to project parameters. Owner’s independent 3rd party testing lab cannot be employed for retesting purposes. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals: Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED A. Testing is required for the following items of work: 1. Soils compaction control. 2. Cast-in-place concrete. 3. HMAC Compaction Control 1.05 TESTING LABORATORY A. DUTIES 1. Cooperate with the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR; provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. 2. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction: a. Comply with specified standards; ASTM, other recognized authorities and as specified. SECTION 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services Page 2 of 2 b. Ascertain compliance with requirements of the Contract documents. 3. Promptly notify the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR of irregularities or deficiencies of work which are observed during performance of services. 4. Promptly prepare and distribute reports of inspections and tests as follows: 5. ENGINEER: Digital PDF file (or 2 paper copies if requested) 6. CONTRACTOR: Digital PDF file (or 2 paper copies if requested) 7. OWNER: Digital PDF file (or 2 paper copies if requested) 1.06 LIMITS OF AUTHORITY A. The laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of the Contract documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the CONTRACTOR. 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel; provide access to the work or to manufacturer's operations. B. Provide to laboratory preliminary representative samples of materials to be tested in required quantities. C. Furnish copies of mill test reports. D. Furnish casual labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to the work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the site. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. E. Coordinate/schedule all laboratory tests with 3rd party lab employed by the Owner. Notify the laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for his assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. F. Arrange with the laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for the CONTRACTOR's convenience. PART 2 - PRODUCT – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 1 of 9 SECTION 01 50 40 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the project including utilities, telephone, sanitary facilities, field office, storage sheds and building, safety requirements, first aid equipment, fire protection, security measures, protection of the Work and property, access roads and parking, environmental controls, disposal of trash, debris, and excavated material, pest and rodent control, water runoff and erosion control. B. The facilities and controls specified in this section are considered minimum for the Project. The Contractor may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet Contractor’s responsibilities for protection of persons and property. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work that is not designated on the Bid Form. CONTRACTOR will include all costs of the requirements of these items in the appropriate bid item(s) on the Bid Form. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in other sections of the Specifications. 1. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous service. 2. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. 3. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. 4. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition. B. Shop drawings, product data and samples are not considered Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Obtaining Temporary Service: 1. Make arrangements with utility service companies for temporary services. SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 2 of 9 2. Abide by rules and regulations of the utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Be responsible for utility service costs until the Work is substantially complete. Included are fuel, power, light, heat, and other utility services necessary for execution, completion, testing, and initial operation of the Work. B. Water: 1. Provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices, or for other use as required for proper completion of the Work. 2. For water to be drawn from public fire hydrants, obtain special permit or license from the proper authorities. 3. Provide and maintain an adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel and Engineer or his Representatives. C. Electricity and Lighting: 1. Provide electric powered service as required for the Work, including testing of Work. Provide power for lighting, operation of the Contractor’s equipment, or for any other use by Contractor. 2. Electric power service includes temporary power service or generator to maintain plant operations during any scheduled shutdown. 3. Minimum lighting level shall be 5 foot-candles for open areas; 10 foot-candles for stairs and shops. Provide a minimum of one 300-watt lamp for each 20 square feet in work area. D. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: 1. Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of the Work. 2. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions; maintain enclosed areas at a minimum of 50 degrees F. E. Sanitary Facilities: 1. Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on the job site; comply with the regulations of State and local departments of health. 2. Enforce the use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at the job site. Such facilities shall be enclosed. Pit-type toilets will not be permitted. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause a nuisance or health problem; have sewer and waste hauled off -site and properly disposed in accordance with local regulations. 3. Locate toilets near the Work site and secluded from view insofar as possible. Keep toilets clean and supplied throughout the course of the Work. 3.02 STORAGE SHEDS AND BUILDINGS A. Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 3 of 9 B. Storage of materials not susceptible to weather damage may be on blocks off the ground. C. Store materials in a neat and orderly manner. Place materials and equipment to permit easy access for identification, inspection and inventory. D. Fill and grade site for temporary structures to provide drainage away from temporary and existing buildings. 3.03 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Submit and follow a safety program in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable Federal, State and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The Contractor is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Project. C. Observe and comply with Texas Occupational Safety Act (Art. 5182a, V.C.S.) and with all safety and health standards promulgated by Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of Contract Work Hours and Standards Act, published in 29 CFR Part 1926 and adopted by Secretary of Labor as occupational safety and health standards under the Williams -Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and to any other legislation enacted for safety and health of Contractor employees. Such safety and health standards apply to subcontractors and their employees as well as to the Contractor and its employees. D. Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without qualification the responsibility of the Contractor without reliance or superintendence of or direction by the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative. Immediately advise the Engineer of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the Contractor or subcontractor's work or place of work on the job site under this Contract, and after such investigation or inspection, advise the Engineer of the results. Submit one copy of incident report to Engineer within 10 days of occurrence. E. Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidence of contamination, immediately take appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area. F. Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first -aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment, in the specifications and shown on the Drawings are obligations of the Contractor. G. Maintain required coordination with the Local's Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract. H. Include Project safety analysis in safety plan. Itemize major tasks and potential safety hazards. Plan to eliminate hazards or protect workers and public from each hazard. 3.04 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A. Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians, hospitals, and ambulance services in each first aid kit. SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 4 of 9 B. Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the site whenever Work is in progress. 3.05 FIRE PROTECTION A. Conform to specified fire protection and prevention requirements established by Federal, State, or local governmental agencies and as provided in Contractor's Safety Program. 3.06 SECURITY MEASURES A. Protect all Work materials, equipment, and property from loss, theft, damage, and vandalism. Contractor's duty to protect property includes Owner property and Inspector’s and Architect/Engineer’s property used in connection with the execution of the Contract. B. If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction. Provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing. 3.07 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES AND PIPELINES A. Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. Approximate locations of known utilities are shown on the Drawings, but all lines may not be shown. Excavate with caution and repair lines damaged by construction operations. B. Utilize the Texas One Call System, telephone number 1-800-669-8344, which must be called 48 hours in advance before mobilizing to the job site. C. Before excavating, locate underground utilities by appropriate means including the use of metal detectors and probes, or by excavation or surveys. Repair damage caused by investigative work and by failure to locate or to preserve underground utilities. D. Give utility owners a minimum five days’ notice before commencing excavation to allow time to locate utilities and make adjustments or relocations when they conflict with the Work. Include cost for temporary relocation of water, wastewater, and storm drainage lines, necessary to accommodate construction, in unit prices for utility construction unless otherwise noted. Bypassing sanitary waste to storm drainage facilities is not allowed. E. Prior to excavation near pipelines, request a representative of the pipeline company to meet with Contractor at the site to discuss procedures to be used. Request pipeline company’s representative to locate the pipelines in at least three locations: at each side and at centerline of proposed excavation of proposed utility. Also request representative to be present to observe Contractor operations when excavation is conducted within 15 feet of pipeline. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY A. Preventive Actions: 1. Take necessary precautions and actions to prevent damage, injury, or loss to the Work or public and private property including: SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 5 of 9 a. Storage of apparatus, supplies, and Products in an orderly, safe manner to limit interference with progress of the Work or the Work of any other contractor, any utility service company, or Owner’s operations. b. Suitable storage for Products subject to damage by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, etc. c. Limitation of loading pressures imposed upon portions of the Work. d. Frequent cleanup of refuse, scrap materials, and debris caused by construction operations, necessary to maintain the site safe and in orderly condition. e. Provision of barricades and guard rails to protect pedestrians and traffic around openings, scaffolding, temporary stairs and ramps, excavations, elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. 2. Protect public and private property adjacent to the site. Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying with workers, tools, materials or equipment, privately - owned land except on easements provided for construction. Restore property damaged by construction operations to condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage. B. Barricades and Warning Signals: 1. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to roadways, rights -of-ways, or public land, furnish and erect barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, danger signals, and other precautionary measures necessary for protection of persons or property and for protection of the Work. a. Erect sufficient barricades to keep vehicles and pedestrians from entering the Work. Paint barricades to be visible at night. From sunset to sunrise, provide at least one light at each barricade. b. Maintain barricades, signs, lights, and provide watchmen until the OWNER approves removal. Whenever work creates encroachment onto public roadways, station flagmen to manage traffic flow in accordance with approved traffic control plan. C. Protection of Existing Structures: 1. Underground Structures: a. Underground structures are defined to include, but not be limited to, sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels, and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. b. Known underground structures, including water, sewer, electric, and telephone service connections are shown in the Drawings. This information is shown for the assistance of the Contractor in accordance with the best information available but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. c. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structure at no additional cost to the OWNER. SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 6 of 9 d. Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the Engineer to avoid unanticipated underground structures. e. If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface installations is required and not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the Engineer will direct Contractor in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the provisions for changes in the Contract Price as described in the Contract Documents. 2. Surface Structures: Surface structures are defined as existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to buildings, tanks, walls, bridges, roads, dams, channels, open drainage, piping, poles, wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing, and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface. 3. Protection of Underground and Surface Structures: a. Support in place and protect from direct or indirect injury underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports, Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure. b. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties, or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract. c. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures, pipelines, or utilities, give a minimum of 5 working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operation reaches and uncover the utility. d. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by his Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure. D. Employ a structural engineer to ensure protection measures are adequate for the safety and the integrity of structures and facilities. E. Protection of Installed Products: 1. Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed, prior to completion of Work. SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 7 of 9 2. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. 3. Provide coverings to protect equipment and materials from damage. Cover projections, wall corners, jambs, sills, and exposed sides of openings in areas used for traffic and for passage of materials in subsequent work. 3.09 ROADS AND PARKING A. Prevent interference with traffic and OWNER operations on existing roads. B. Designate temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking. Locate as approved by Engineer. C. Minimize use by construction traffic of existing streets and driveways. D. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in existing parking areas. 3.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. B. Comply with statutes, regulations, and ordinances which relate to the proposed Work for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources, including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, PL 91 -190, Executive Order 11514. C. Minimize the impact to the surrounding environment. Do not use construction procedures that cause unnecessary excavation and filling of the terrain, indiscriminate destruction of vegetation, air or stream pollution, nor the harassment or destruction of wildlife. D. Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the Contract Documents. Particularly avoid pollution of "on -site" streams, sewers, wells, or other water sources. E. Burning of rubbish, debris or waste materials is not permitted. 3.11 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B. Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other such substances adjacent to streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers. D. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. 1. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 8 of 9 2. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. E. Use equipment during construction that conforms to current Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. 3.12 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A. Provide rodent and pest control as necessary to prevent infestation of construction or storage areas. B. Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the site or on adjoining properties. 3.13 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide vehicles, equipment, and construction activities that minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to the latest OSHA standards and local Ordinances and in no case will noise levels be permitted which interfere with the Work of the Owner or create a nuisance in the surrounding residential neighborhoods. B. Conduct construction operations during daylight hours except as approved by Engineer. C. Select construction equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If in the opinion of the Engineer, objectional noise or vibration is produced by equipment, rectify such conditions without additional cost to the Owner. The Sound Power Level (PWL) of any equipment shall not exceed 85 dbA (re: 10 -12 watts) measured 5 feet from the piece of equipment, or the levels prescribed by Local Ordinances, whichever is lower Explicit equipment noise requirements are specified with equipment specifications. 3.14 DUST CONTROL A. Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment. Apply water or use other methods, subject to approval of the Engineer, which will control the amount of dust generated. 3.15 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A. Contractor shall comply with the TPDES Requirements. B. In addition to the TPDES requirements the Contractor shall: 1. Provide methods to control surface water, runoff, subsurface water, and water from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the site, or adjoining properties. 2. Control fill, grading and ditching to direct water away from excavations, pits, tunnels, and other construction areas; and to direct drainage to proper runoff courses so as to prevent any erosion, sedimentation or damage. 3. Provide, operate, and maintain equipment and facilities of adequate size to control surface water. 4. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to any portion of the site or to adjoining areas and in conformance with environmental requirements. SECTION 01 50 40 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 9 of 9 5. Retain existing drainage patterns external to the construction site by constructing temporary earth berms, sedimentation basins, retaining areas, and temporary ground cover as needed to control conditions. 6. Plan and execute construction and earth work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation. 7. Keep to a minimum the area of bare soil exposed at one time. 8. Provide temporary control measures, such as berms, dikes, and drains. 9. Construct fills and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or clays which will erode. 10. Inspect earthwork periodically to detect any evidence of the start of erosion. Apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 56 39 Preservation of Trees Page 1 of 3 SECTION 01 56 39 PRESERVATION OF TREES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This item shall govern the placing of protection for trees and other landscape plant material or natural areas to be protected during construction. No site preparation work shall begin in areas where tree preservation and treatment measures have not been completed and approved. Where removal of trees is indicated on the drawings, they shall be marked as directed by the Engineer or designated representatives. This item shall also govern the excavation, filling, trenching and boring around trees described on the plans, and for furnishing all materials, water, labor, tools, equipment and supplies required as specified by this item or as indicated on the plans. B. Reference the Town of Westlake Tree Preservation Ordinance (Town of Westlake Code of Ordinances, Chapter 98) 1.02 MATERIALS A. Level I Fence Protection: 1. Fabric: Fabric (4-foot height or 1.2 m) shall consist of orange plastic fencing as shown on the plans and shall be woven with 2-inch (50 mm) mesh openings such that in a vertical dimension of 23 inches (584 mm) along the diagonals of the openings there shall be at least seven meshes. 2. Installation Posts: Installation posts shall be a minimum of 72 inches (1.5 m) long and steel “T” shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per linear foot (6.3 kg per meter). 3. Tie Wire: Wire for attaching the fabric to the t-posts shall be not less than No. 12 gauge galvanized wire. Sufficient fastening material shall be furnished to provide for the securing of the fabric to the “T” line posts. 4. Used Materials: Previously-used materials, meeting the above requirements and when approved by the Engineer, may be used. B. Level IIA Fence Protection: 1. Materials same as Level I -OR- C. Level IIB Fence Protection: 1. Sleeve: 2x4 lumber to a height of 4 feet above the root crown. 2. 2x4 shall be utilized as called for on plan. 3. Tie Wire: Wire for securing the 2x4s shall not be less than No. 12 gauge. D. Other Materials: 1. Tree Dressing - Asphaltic Tree Wound Paint 2. Dry Wells – Native Stone Wall or Concrete Segmental Retaining Wall System. SECTION 01 56 39 Preservation of Trees Page 2 of 3 3. Paving – Permeable segmented pavers in conjunction with PVC pipe aeration system or concrete on gravel base with cored holes or suspended concrete slab. 4. Schedule 40 PVC Wheel and Spoke Venting System 5. Vertical Venting Systems-Schedule 40 PVC Pipe w/Fertilizer Basket and Cap or Metal Pipe w/Cap. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS (LEVEL 1 FENCE PROTECTION) A. Level I Fence Protection: 1. All trees and shrubs in the proximity of the construction site shall be carefully checked for injuries prior to beginning any development activity. 2. Protective fencing shall be erected at locations shown in the plans or as directed by the Inspector and/or City Arborist or in accordance with the details shown on the plans at the drip line of trees (Root Protection Zone, RPZ) and/or landscape plant material including natural areas. Fencing shall be maintained and repaired by the contractor during site construction. 3. Protective fence locations in close proximity to street intersections or drives shall adhere to the Town of Westlake’s site distance criteria. 4. The protective fencing shall be erected before sitework commences and shall remain in place during the entire construction phase. Access to fenced areas will be permitted only with the approval of the engineer. 5. The installation posts will be placed every 6 feet (2 m) around the drip line or RPZ and embedded to 18 inches (457 mm) deep. Fabric attachment shall be attached to the installation posts by the use of sufficient wire ties to securely fasten the fabric to the “T” posts as to hold the fabric in a stable and upright position. a. Do not clear, fill or grade in the RPZ of any tree. b. Do not store, stockpile or dump any job material, soil or rubbish under the spread of the tree branches. c. Do not park or store any equipment or supplies under the spread of the tree branches. d. Do not set up any construction operations under the spread of the tree branches. (E.g. pipe cutting and threading, mortar mixing, painting or lumber cutting) e. Do not nail or attach temporary signs, meters, switches, wires, bracing or any other item to the trees. f. Do not permit runoff from waste materials including solvents, concrete washouts, asphalt tack coats (MC-30 oil), etc. to enter the RPZ. Barriers are to be provided to prevent such runoff substances from entering the RPZ whenever possible, including in an area where rain or surface water could carry such materials to the root system of the tree. B. The contractor shall avoid cutting roots larger than one inch in diameter when excavation occurs near existing trees. Excavation in the vicinity of trees shall proceed with caution. The contractor shall contact the city inspector. SECTION 01 56 39 Preservation of Trees Page 3 of 3 C. Remove all trees, shrubs or bushes to be cleared from protected root zone areas as directed by engineer by hand. D. Trees damaged or lost due to contractor’s negligence during construction shall be mitigated at the contractor’s expense and to the engineer’s satisfaction. E. Any tree removal shall be approved by the city arborist prior to its removal. F. Cover exposed roots at the end of each day with soil, mulch or wet burlap. G. In critical root zone areas that cannot be protected during construction and where heavy traffic is anticipated, cover those areas with (8) inches of organic mulch to minimize soil compaction. This (8) inch depth of mulch shall be maintained throughout construction. H. Water all trees, most heavily impacted by construction activities, deeply once a week during periods of hot dry weather. Spray tree crowns with water periodically to reduce dust accumulation on the leaves. I. When installing concrete adjacent to the root zone of a tree, use a plastic vapor barrier behind the concrete to prohibit leaching of lime into the soil. See related specifications. J. When an excavation or embankment is placed within the dripline of any tree greater than (8) inches in diameter, a Tree well shall be constructed to protect the tree as indicated, when the cut or fill exceeds (8) inches. See related specifications. K. Where paving or filling is necessary within the dripline of any tree (8) inches or greater, a permeable pavement and aeration system must be installed as indicated. See related specifications. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION METHODS (LEVEL IIA FENCE PROTECTION) A. Level 2 Fence Protection 1. Fabric: Fabric (4-foot height or 1.2 m) shall consist of orange plastic fencing as shown on the plans and shall be woven with 2-inch (50 mm) mesh openings such that in a vertical dimension of 23 inches (584 mm) along the diagonals of the openings there shall be at least seven meshes. 2. Installation Posts: Installation posts shall be a minimum of 72 inches (1.5 m) long and steel “T” shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per linear foot (6.3 kg per meter). 3. Tie Wire: Wire for attaching the fabric to the t-posts shall be not less than No. 12 gauge galvanized wire. Sufficient fastening material shall be furnished to provide for the securing of the fabric to the “T” line posts. 4. Used Materials: Previously-used materials, meeting the above requirements and when approved by the Engineer, may be used. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 1 of 12 SECTION 01 57 23 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Implementation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans (SWP 3) described in Section 01 35 43 – Environmental Protection. B. Installation, maintenance, and removal, of storm water pollution prevention structures: diversion dikes, interceptor dikes, diversion swales, interceptor swales, down spout extenders, pipe slope drains, paved flumes, and level spreaders. Structures are used during construction and prior to final development of the site. C. Filter Fabric Barriers: 1. Type 1: Temporary filter fabric barrier for erosion and sediment control in non-channelized flow areas. 2. Type 2: Temporary reinforced filter fabric barrier for erosion and sediment control in channelized flow areas. D. Hay Bale Fence. E. Drop Inlet Basket F. Inlet Sediment Traps G. Brush Berm H. Sandbag Barrier I. Bagged Gravel Barrier J. Sediment Basin K. Inlet Protection Barrier 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. UNIT PRICES 1. Payment for filter fabric barrier is on a linear foot basis measured between limits of beginning and ending of stakes. 2. Payment for reinforced filter fabric barrier is on a linear foot basis measured between limits of beginning and ending of stakes. 3. Payment for drop inlet baskets is on a unit price basis for each drop inlet basket. 4. Payment for storm inlet sediment traps is on a unit price basis for each storm inlet sediment trap. 5. Payment for storm water pollution prevention structures is on a lump sum basis for the project. Earthen structures with outlet and piping include diversion dikes, interceptor dikes, diversion swales, interceptor swales, and SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 2 of 12 excavated earth-outlet sediment trap, embankment earth-outlet sediment trap, down spout extenders, pipe slope drains, paved flumes, stone outlet sediment trap, and level spreaders. 6. Payment for hay bale barrier, if included in Contract Documents – Bid Proposal, is on a linear foot of accepted bale barriers, if not include in cost of storm water pollution prevention structures. 7. Payment for brush berm, if included in Contract Documents – Bid Proposal, is on a linear foot of accepted brush berm, if not include in cost of storm water pollution prevention structures. 8. Payment for sandbag barrier, if included in Contract Documents – Bid Proposal, is on a linear foot basis measured between limits of beginning and ending of sandbags, if not include in cost of storm water pollution prevention structures. 9. Payment for bagged gravel barrier, if included in Contract Documents – Bid Proposal, is on a linear foot basis measured between limits of beginning and ending of bagged gravel barrier, if not include in cost of storm water pollution prevention controls. 10. Payment for inlet protection barriers, if included in Contract Documents – Bid Proposal, is on a linear foot basis measured along outside face of inlet protection barrier, if not included in cost of storm water pollution prevention structures. Contractor shall maintain and/or replace damaged barriers at no additional charge to the OWNER during the duration of the project as noted in the Contract Documents – Bid Proposal. 11. No separate payment will be made for maintenance and replacement of inlet protection barriers required by the SWPPP as stipulated work in the Contract Documents – Bid Proposal. 12. Contractor shall remove and reinstall inlet protection barriers at the direction of OWNER representative before, during, and after during major storm weather events. Payment for Work in this Section shall be stipulated in the Contract Documents – Bid Proposal. 13. Refer to Section 01 27 00 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum) Contract. If Contract is Stipulated Price Contract, payment for Work in this Section is included in total Stipulated. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM 1. A 36-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. D698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-1bf/ft3 (600kN-m/m3)). 3. D3786-Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength for knitted Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics. 4. D 4355-Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Ultraviolet Light and Water (Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus). SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 3 of 12 5. D 4491-Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. 6. D 4632-Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. 7. D 4833-Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products. 8. D 6382-Standard Practice for Dynamic Mechanical Analysis and Thermogravimetry of Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane Material. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Filter Fabric Barrier Type 1 and Type 2: Install to allow surface or channel runoff percolation through fabric in sheet-flow manner and to retain and accumulate sediment. Maintain Filter Fabric Barriers to remain in proper position and configuration at all times. B. Hay Bale Fence: Install to allow surface runoff percolation through hay in sheet- flow manner and to retain and accumulate sediment. Maintain Hay Bale Fence to remain in proper position and configuration at all times. C. Interceptor Dikes and Swales: Construct to direct surface or channel runoff around the project area or runoff from project area into sediment traps. D. Drop Inlet Baskets: Install to allow runoff percolation through the basket and to retain and accumulate sediment. Clean accumulation of sediment to prevent clogging and backups. sediment to settle onto the bottom of trap. E. Sediment Traps: Construct to pool surface runoff from construction area to allow sediment to settle onto the bottom of trap. F. Sandbags: Are used during construction activities in unstabilized minor swales, ditches, or streambeds when the contributing drainage area is no greater than 2 acres. It is also sediment barrier for stage one Inlet. G. Bagged Gravel Barrier: Are used during construction activities in unstabilized minor swales, ditches, or streambeds when the contributing drainage area is no greater than 2 acres. It is also sediment barrier for stage two Inlet. H. Drop Inlet Insert Basket: Is a temporary barrier placed within a storm drain inlet (Lower Portion of Stage I and Upper Portion of Stage II Inlets) consisting of a filter fabric supported by a metal framework to prevent sediment and other pollutants from entering convey system. I. Brush Berm: Brush Berm is constructed at the perimeter of a distribution site within the developing area. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. C. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile or filter fabrics, outlet pipe, perforated riser, and connectors. SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 4 of 12 D. Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials, and sequence of operations for storm-water pollution prevention structures. E. Submit shop drawings for Drop Inlet Baskets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete: Class B or as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 AGREGATE MATERIALS A. Use poorly graded cobbles with diameter greater than 3 inches and less than 5 inches. B. Provide gravel lining as shown on the Drawings. C. Provide clean cobbles and gravel consisting of crushed concrete or stone. Use clean, hard crushed concrete or stone free from adherent coatings, salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, or organic matter. D. Sediment Pump Pit Aggregate: Use nominal 2-inch diameter river gravel. 2.03 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC A. Woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material, in continuous rolls of longest practical length. B. Grab Strength: 100 psi in any principal direction (ASTM D-4632), Mullen burst strength > 200 psi (ASTM D-3786), and equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C. Furnish ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers for minimum 6 months of expected usable construction life at temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D. Mirafi, Inc., Synthetic Industries, or equivalent 2.04 BARRIER A. Wire Barrier: Woven galvanized steel wire, 14-gauge by 6-inch square mesh spacing, minimum 24-inch roll or sheet width of longest practical length. B. Barrier Stakes: Nominal 2 by 2-inch moisture-resistant treated wood or steel posts (min. of 1.25 lbs. per linear foot and Brinell Hardness greater than 140) with safety caps on top length as required for minimum 8 inch bury and full height of filter fabric. 2.05 SANDBAGS A. Provide woven material made of polypropylene, polyethylene, or polyamide material. 1. Minimum unit weight of four ounces per square yard. 2. Minimum grab strength of 100 lbs in any principal direction (ASTM D4632) 3. Mullen burst strength exceeding 300 lbs (ASTM D4833). SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 5 of 12 4. Ultraviolet stability exceeding 70 percent. After 500 hours of exposure (ASTM 4355). 5. Size: Length:18 to 24-inches. Width: 12 to 18-inches. Thickness: 6 to 8- inches. Weight: Approximately 40 to 50 pounds not to exceed 75 pounds. 2.06 BAGGED GRAVEL BARRIER A. Minimum unit weight of four ounces per square yard. B. Minimum grab strength of 100 lbs in any principal direction (ASTM D4632) C. Mullen burst strength exceeding 300 lbs (ASTM D4833). D. Ultraviolet stability exceeding 70 percent. After 500 hours of exposure (ASTM 4355). E. Size: Length:18 to 24-inches. Width: 12 to 18-inches. Thickness: 6 to 8-inches. F. Weight: Approximately 40 to 50 pounds not to exceed 75 pounds. 2.07 DROP INLET BASKET A. Provide steel frame members in accordance with ASTM A36. B. Construct top frame of basket with two short sides of 2-inch by 2-inch and single long side of 1-inch by 1-inch, 1/8-inch angle iron. Construct basket hangers of 2- inch by ¼-inch iron bars. Construct bottom frame of 1 inch by ¼-inch iron bar or ¼-inch plate with center 3 inches removed. Use minimum ¼-inch diameter iron rods or equivalent for sides of inlet basket. Weld minimum of 14 rods in place between top frame/basket hanger and bottom frame. Exact dimensions for top frame and insert basket will be determined based on dimensions of type of inlet being protected. 2.08 HAY BALE A. Hay: Standard-baled agricultural hay bound by wire, nylon, or polypropylene rope. Do not use jute or cotton binding. B. Hay Bale Stakes (applicable where bales are on soil): No. 3 (3/8 diameter) reinforcing bars, deformed or smooth at Contractor's option, length as required for minimum 18-inch bury and full height bales. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION, INSTALLATION AND MAINTEINANCE A. Provide erosion and sediment control structures at locations shown on the Drawings. B. Do not clear, grub or rough cut until erosion and sediment control systems are in place unless approved by Project Manager to allow installation of erosion and sediment control systems, soil testing, and surveying. C. Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within project site until acceptance of Project or until directed by Project Manager to remove and discard existing system. SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 6 of 12 D. Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of erosion and sediment control structures. Unless otherwise directed, maintain erosion and sediment control structure until project area stabilization is accepted. Redress and replace granular fill at outlets as needed to replenish depleted granular fill. Remove erosion and sediment control structures promptly when directed by Project Manager. Dispose of materials in accordance with Section 01 57 60 – Waste Material Disposal. E. Remove and dispose sediment deposits at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a project spoil site is not designated on Drawings, dispose of sediment off site at approved location in accordance with Section 01 57 60 – Waste Material Disposal. F. Compact embankments, excavations, and trenches in accordance with the Drawings. G. Prohibit equipment and vehicles from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated right of way and easements for construction. Immediately repair damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control structures. H. Protect existing trees and plants in accordance with Section 01 56 39 – Preservation of Trees. 3.02 SEDIMENT TRAPS A. Install sediment traps so that surface runoff shall percolate through system in sheet flow fashion and allow retention and accumulation of sediment. B. Inspect sediment traps after each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. C. Use fill material for embankment in accordance with requirements outlined in the Drawings general notes. D. Excavation length and height shall be as specified on Drawings. Use side slopes of 2:1 or flatter. E. Stone outlet sediment traps: 1. Maintain minimum of 6 inches between top of core material and top of stone outlet, minimum of 4 inches between bottom of core material and existing ground and minimum of 1-foot between top of stone outlet and top of embankment. 2. Embed cobbles minimum of 4 inches into existing ground for stone outlet. Core shall be minimum of 1 foot in height and in width and wrapped in triple layer of geotextile filter fabric. F. Sediment Basin with Pipe Outlet Construction Methods: Install outlet pipe and riser as shown on the Drawings. G. Remove sediment deposits when design basin volume is reduced by one-third or sediment level is one foot below principal spillway crest, whichever is less. 3.03 FILTER FABRIC BARRIER CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Fence Type 1: Filter Fabric: Barrier SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 7 of 12 1. Install stakes 3 feet on center maximum and firmly embed minimum 8 inches in soil. If filter fabric is factory preassembled with support netting, then maximum support spacing is 8 feet. Install wood stakes at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. 2. Trench in the toe of the fence lines so the downward face of the trenches is flat and perpendicular to direction of flow. V-trench configuration as shown on Drawings may also be used. 3. Lay fabric along edges of trenches in longest practical continuous runs to minimize joints. Make joints only at a support post. Splice with minimum 6- inch overlap and seal securely. 4. Staple filter fabric to stakes at maximum 3 inches on center. Extend fabric minimum 18 inches and maximum 36 inches above natural ground. 5. Backfill and compact trench. B. Barrier Type 2: Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 1. Layout barrier same as for Type 1. 2. Install stakes at 6 feet on center maximum and at each joint in wire fence, firmly embedded 1-foot minimum, and inclined it as for Type 1. 3. Tie wire fence to stakes with wire at 6 inches on center maximum. Overlap joints minimum one bay of mesh. 4. Install trench same as for Type 1. 5. Fasten filter fabric wire fence with tie wires at 3 inches on center maximum. 6. Layout fabric same as for Type 1. Fasten to wire fence with wire ties at 3 inches on center maximum and, if applicable, to stakes above top of wire fence it as for Type 1. 7. Backfill and compact trench. 8. Attach filter fabric to wooden fence stakes spaced a maximum of 6 feet apart or steel fence stakes spaced a maximum of 8 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 12 inches. Install stakes at a slight angle toward source of anticipated runoff. 9. Trench in toe of filter fabric barrier with spade or mechanical trencher so that downward face of trench is flat and perpendicular to direction of flow. A V- trench configuration may also be used. Lay filter fabric along edges of trench. Backfill and compact trench upon completion of Construction. 10. Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. 11. Cut length of fence to minimize use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice fabric together only at support post with minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. 12. When used in swales, ditches or diversions, elevation of barrier at top of filter fabric at flow line location in channel shall be lower than bottom elevation of filter fabric at ends of barrier or top of bank, whichever is less, in order to keep stormwater discharge in channel from overtopping bank. SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 8 of 12 C. Triangular Filter Fabric Barrier Construction Methods 1. Attach filter fabric to wire fencing, 18 inches on each side. Provide a fabric cover and skirt with continuous wrapping of fabric. Skirt should form continuous extension of fabric on upstream side offence. 2. Secure triangular fabric filter barrier in place using one of the following methods: i. Toe-in skirt 6 inches with mechanically compacted material ii. Weight down skirt with continuous layer of 3-inch to 5-inch graded rock or iii. Trench-in entire structure 4 inches. 3. Anchor triangular fabric filter barrier structure and skirt securely in place using 6-inch wire staples on 2-foot centers on both edges and on skirt or staked using 18-inch by 3/8-inch diameter re-bar with tee ends. 4. Lap fabric filter material by 6 inches to cover segment joints. Fasten joints with galvanized shoat rings. 3.04 DIKE AND SWALE A. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain minimum dike height of 18 inches, measured from cleared ground at up slope toe to top of dike. Maintain side slopes of 2:1 or flatter. B. Dike and Swale Stabilization: When shown on the Drawings, place gravel lining 3 inches thick and compacted into the soil or 6 inches thick if truck crossing is expected. Extend gravel lining across bottom and up both sides of swale minimum height of 8 inches vertically, above bottom. Gravel lining on dike side shall extend up the up-slope side of dike a minimum height of 8 inches, measured vertically from interface of existing or graded ground and up slope toe of dike, as shown on Drawings. C. Divert flow from dikes and swales to sediment basins, stabilized outlets, or sediment trapping devices of types and at locations shown on Drawings. Grade dikes and swales as shown on Drawings, or, if not specified, provide positive drainage with maximum grade of 1 percent to outlet or basin. D. Clear in accordance with the general notes in the Drawings. E. Carry out excavation for swale construction so that erosion and water pollution is minimal. Minimum depth shall be 1-foot and bottom width shall be 4 feet, with level swale bottom. Excavation slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter. Clear, grub and strip excavation area of vegetation and root material. 3.05 DOWN SPOUT EXTENDER A. Down spout extender shall have slope of approximately 1 percent. Use pipe diameter of 4 inches or as shown on the Drawings. 3.06 PIPE SLOPE DRAIN A. Compact soil around and under drain entrance section to top of embankment in lifts appropriately sized for method of compaction utilized. SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 9 of 12 B. Inlet pipe shall have slope of 1 percent or greater. Use pipe diameter as shown on the Drawings. C. Top of embankment over inlet pipe and embankments directing water to pipe shall be at least 1 foot higher at all points than top of inlet pipe. D. Pipe shall be secured with hold-down grommets spaced 10 feet on centers. E. Place riprap apron with a depth equal to pipe diameter with 2:1 side slopes. 3.07 PAVED FLUME A. Compact soil around and under the entrance section to top of the embankment in lifts appropriately sized for method of compaction utilized. B. Construct subgrade to required elevations. Remove and replace soft sections and unsuitable material. Compact subgrade thoroughly and shape to a smooth, uniform surface. C. Construct permanent paved flumes in accordance with Drawings. D. Remove sediment from riprap apron when sediment has accumulated to depth of one foot. 3.08 LEVEL SPREADER A. Construct level spreader on undisturbed soil and not on fill. Ensure that spreader lip is level for uniform spreading of storm runoff. B. Maintain at required depth, grade, and cross section as specified on Drawings. Remove sediment deposits as well as projections or other irregularities which will impede normal flow. 3.09 INLET PROTECTION BARRIER A. Place sandbags for Stage I, Bagged gravel for Stage II and filter fabric barriers at locations shown on the SWP3. Maintain to allow minimal inlet in flow restrictions / blockage during storm events. B. Contractor shall maintain and/or replace damaged inlet protection barriers daily or by request of the OWNER representative at no additional charge to the OWNER. 3.10 DROP INLET BASKET CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Fit inlet insert basket into inlet without gaps around insert at locations shown on the SWP3. B. Support for inlet insert basket shall consist of fabricated metal as shown on Drawings. C. Push down and form filter fabric to shape of basket. Use sheet of fabric large enough to be supported by basket frame when holding sediment and extend at least 6 inches past frame. Place inlet grates over basket/frame to serve as fabric anchor. D. Remove sediment deposit after each storm event and whenever accumulation exceeds l-inch depth during weekly inspections. SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 10 of 12 3.11 HAY BALE FENCE CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Place bales in row with ends tightly abutting adjacent bales. Place bales with bindings parallel to ground surface. B. Embed bale in soil a minimum of 4 inches. C. Securely anchor bales in place with Hay Bale Stakes driven through bales a minimum of 18-inches into ground. Angle first stake in each bale toward previously laid bale to force bales together. D. Fill gaps between bales with straw to prevent water from channeling between bales. Wedge carefully in order not to separate bales. E. Replace with new hay bale fence every two months or as required by OWNER. 3.12 BRUSH BERM CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Construct brush berm along contour lines by hand placing method. Do not use machine placement of brush berm. B. Use woody brush and branches having diameter less than 2-inches with 6-inches overlap. Avoid incorporation of annual weeds and soil into brush berm. C. Use minimum height of 18-inches measured from top of existing ground at upslope toe to top of berm. Top width shall be 24 inches minimum and side slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter. D. Embed brush berm into soil a minimum of 4-inches and anchor using wire, nylon, or polypropylene rope across berm with a minimum tension of 50 pounds. Tie rope securely to 18-inch x 3/8-inch diameter rebar stakes driven into ground on 4-foot centers on both sides of berm. 3.13 STREET AND SIDEWALK CLEANING A. Keep areas clean of construction debris and mud carried by construction vehicles and equipment. B. In lieu of or in addition to stabilized construction exits, shovel or sweep pavements as required to keep areas clean. Do not waterhose or sweep debris and mud off street into adjacent areas, except, hose sidewalks during off-peak hours, after sweeping. 3.14 WASTE COLLECTION AREAS A. Prevent water runoff from passing through waste collection areas and prevent water runoff from waste collection areas migrating outside collection areas. 3.15 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment to areas specifically designated for that purpose, so fuels, lubricants, solvents, and other potential pollutants are not washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid and solid waste. Clean and inspect maintenance areas daily. SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 11 of 12 B. Where designated equipment maintenance areas are not feasible, take precautions during each individual repair or maintenance operation to prevent potential pollutants from washing into streams or conveyance systems. Provide temporary waste disposal receptacles. 3.16 VEHICLE/ EQUIPMENT WASHING AREAS A. Install wash area (stabilized with coarse aggregate) adjacent to stabilized construction access, as required to prevent mud and dirt run-off. Release wash water into drainage swales or inlets protected by erosion and sediment controls. Build wash areas as shown in the Drawings. Install gravel or rock base beneath wash areas. B. Wash vehicles only at designated wash areas. Do not wash vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment at locations where runoff flows directly into waterways or storm water conveyance systems. C. Locate wash areas to spread out and evaporate or infiltrate wash water directly into ground or collect runoff in temporary holding or seepage basins. 3.17 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A. Control surface water, runoff, subsurface water, and water from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the site, or adjoining properties. Follow environmental requirements. B. Control fill, grading and ditching to direct water away from excavations, pits, tunnels, and other construction areas, and to direct drainage to proper runoff courses to prevent erosion, sedimentation, or damage. C. Provide, operate, and maintain equipment and facilities of adequate size to control surface water. D. Retain existing drainage patterns external to the site by constructing temporary earth berms, sedimentation basins, retaining areas, and temporary ground cover as required to control conditions. E. Plan and execute construction and earthwork to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Hold area of bare soil exposed at one time to a minimum. 2. Provide temporary controls such as berms, dikes, and drains. F. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or clays which will erode. G. Inspect earthwork periodically to detect start of erosion. Immediately apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. H. Dispose of sediments offsite, not in or adjacent to waterways or floodplains, nor allow sediments to flush into streams or drainage ways. Assume responsibility for offsite disposal location. I. Unless otherwise indicated, compact embankments, excavations, and trenches by mechanically blading, tamping, and rolling soil in maximum 8-inch layers. SECTION 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Control Page 12 of 12 Provide compaction density at minimum 90 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D- 698-78 density. Make at least one test per 500 cubic yards of embankment. J. Prohibit equipment and vehicles from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Immediately repair damage to erosion and sedimentation control systems caused by construction traffic. K. Do not damage existing trees intended to remain. 3.18 REMOVAL OF CONTROLS A. A. Remove erosion and sediment controls when the site is finally stabilized or as directed by OWNER. B. Dispose of sediments and waste products following Section 01 50 40 – Temporary Facilities and Controls. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water Page 1 of 8 SECTION 01 57 80 CONTROL OF GROUND AND SURFACE WATER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dewatering, depressurizing, draining, and maintaining trenches, shaft excavations, structural excavations and foundation beds in stable condition, and controlling ground water conditions for tunnel excavations. B. Protecting work against surface runoff and rising floodwaters. C. Trapping suspended sediment in the discharge form the surface and ground water control systems. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. UNIT PRICES 1. Measurement for control of ground water, if included in Contract Documents– Bid Proposal, will be on either a lump sum basis or a linear foot basis for continuous installations of wellpoints, eductor wells, or deep wells. 2. If not included in Contract Documents– Bid Proposal, include the cost to control ground water in unit price for work requiring such controls. 3. No separate payment will be made for control of surface water. Include cost to control surface water in unit price for work requiring controls. 4. Follow Section 01 27 00 – Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum) Contract. If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, include payment for work under this section in the total Stipulated Price. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698- Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction of soils Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600kN-m/m3) B. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards-Excavation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) C. Storm Water Management Handbook for Construction Activities prepared by OWNER. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Ground water control system: system used to dewater and depressurize water- bearing soil layers. 1. Dewatering: lowering the water table and intercepting seepage that would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations, or into tunnels and shafts; and disposing of removed water. Intent of dewatering is to increase stability of tunnel excavations and excavated slopes, prevent dislocation of SECTION 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water Page 2 of 8 material from slopes or bottoms of excavations, reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing, improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material, prevent failure or heaving of bottom of excavations, and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. 2. Depressurization: includes reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, necessary to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom or instability of tunnel excavations. B. Excavation drainage: includes keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. C. Surface drainage: includes use of temporary drainage ditches and dikes and installation of temporary culverts and sump pumps with discharge lines necessary to protect Work from any source of surface water. D. Monitoring facilities for ground water control system: includes piezometers, monitoring wells and flow meters for observing and recording flow rates. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. Submit proposed method and spacing of readings for review prior to obtaining water level readings. B. Design ground water control system, compatible with requirements of Federal Regulations 29 CFR Part 1926 to produce following results: 1. Effectively reduce hydrostatic pressure affecting: a. Excavations b. Tunnel excavation, face stability or seepage into tunnels 2. Develop substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities and other work 4. Prevent loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of foundation strata 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations C. Provide ground water control systems that include single-stage or multiple- stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D. Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from other sources entering excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E. Provide ditches, berms, pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. SECTION 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water Page 3 of 8 F. Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. G. Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and settlement or resultant damage caused by ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, adjacent water wells, or potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of system to protect property as required. H. Install an adequate number of piezometers installed at proper locations and depths, necessary to provide meaningful observations of conditions affecting excavation, adjacent structures and water wells. I. Install environmental monitoring wells at proper locations and depths necessary to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into work area or ground water control system. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by Project Manager prior to start of excavation work. Include the following: 1. Results of subsurface investigations and description of extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control. 2. Names of equipment Suppliers and installation Subcontractors. 3. Description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria and operation and maintenance procedures. 4. Description of proposed monitoring facilities indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics. 5. Description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations. 6. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. 7. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization. 8. Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other means. 9. Surface water control and drainage installations. 10. Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water. SECTION 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water Page 4 of 8 C. Submit following records upon completion of initial installation: 1. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells. 2. Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells. 3. Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells. 4. Initial flow rates. D. Submit the following records weekly during control of ground and surface water operations: 1. Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to Paragraph 3.02, Requirements for Eductor, Well Points, or Deep Wells. 2. Maintenance records for ground water control installations, piezometers and monitoring wells. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B. Comply with Texas Commission on Environmental Quality regulations and Texas Water Well Drillers Association for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering systems. C. Obtain necessary permits from agencies with jurisdiction over use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Since review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to obtain required approvals. D. Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Select equipment and materials necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to review by Project Manager through submittals required in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Use experienced contractors, regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation, to furnish and install and operate educators, well points, or deep wells, when needed C. Maintain equipment in good repair and operating condition. D. Keep sufficient standby equipment and materials available to ensure continuous operation, where required. E. Portable Sediment Tank System: Standard 55-gallon steel or plastic drums, free of hazardous material contamination. SECTION 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water Page 5 of 8 1. Shop or field fabricate tanks in series with main inlet pipe, inter-tank pipes and discharge pipes, using quantities sufficient to collect sediments from discharge water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND WATER CONTROL A. Perform necessary subsurface investigation to identify water bearing layers, piezometric pressures and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine draw down characteristics. Present results in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan submittal. B. Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C. Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Notify Project Manager in writing of changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with notification. D. Provide continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E. Monitor operations to verify systems lower ground water piezometric levels at rate required to maintain dry excavation resulting in stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. F. Depressurize zones where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavations to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed works. Define allowable piezometric elevations in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. G. Removal of ground water control installations. 1. Remove pumping system components and piping when ground water control is no longer required. 2. Remove piezometers, including piezometers installed during design phase investigations and left for Contractor’s use, upon completion of testing, as required in accordance with Part 3 of applicable specification. 3. Remove monitoring wells when directed by Project Manager. 4. Grout abandoned well and piezometer holes. Fill piping that is not removed with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout. H. During backfilling, maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. Do not allow the water level to cause uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement-stabilized sand until at least 48 hours after placement. SECTION 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water Page 6 of 8 I. Provide uniform pipe diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drains when no longer required. If pipe removal is impractical, grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fi11 pipe with cement- bentonite grout or cement-sand grout after removal from service. J. The extent of ground water control for structures with permanent perforated underground drainage systems may be reduced, for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means to drain affected portions of underground systems, including standby equipment. Maintain drainage systems during construction operations. K. Remove systems upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L. Compact backfill to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 698. M. Foundation Slab: Maintain saturation line at least 3 feet below lowest elevations where concrete is to be placed. Drain foundations in areas where concrete is to be placed before placing reinforcing steel. Keep free from water for 3 days after concrete is placed. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS, OR DEEP WELLS A. For aboveground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between each eductor well or well point and discharge header to allow visual monitoring of discharge from each installation. B. Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are pre-drained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for selected method of work. C. Install piezometers or monitoring wells at least one week in advance of the start of associated excavation. D. Dewatering may be omitted for portions of under drains or other excavations, where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is pre- drained by existing systems and that ground water control plan criteria are satisfied. E. Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F. Provide additional ground water control installations, or change method of control if, ground water control plan does not provide satisfactory results based on performance criteria defined by plan and by specifications. Submit revised plan according to Paragraph 1.06B. 3.03 SEDIMENT TRAPS A. Install sediment tank as shown on approved plan. B. Inspect daily and clean out tank when one-third of sediment tank is filled with sediment. SECTION 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water Page 7 of 8 3.04 SEDIMENT SUMP PIT A. Install sediment sump pits as shown on approved plan. B. Construct standpipe by perforating 12-inch to 24-inch diameter corrugated metal or PVC pipe. C. Extend standpipe 12 to 18 inches above lip of pit. D. Convey discharge of water pumped from standpipe to sediment trapping device. E. Fill sites of sump pits, compact to density of surrounding soil and stabilize surface when construction is complete. 3.05 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A. Use excavation drainage methods if well-drained conditions can be achieved. Excavation drainage may consist of layers of crushed stone and filter fabric, and sump pumping, in combination with sufficient ground water control wells to maintain stable excavation and backfill conditions. 3.06 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A. Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while ground water control installations or excavation drainage is operating at the site, or water is seeping into tunnels, and maintain systems in good operating condition. B. Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedules. C. Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make specified observations D. Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside of excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by Project Manager. 3.07 MONITORING AND RECORDING A. Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also, monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. Record observations daily until steady conditions are achieved and twice weekly thereafter. B. Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Project Manager determines more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Project Manager's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.08 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches, curb walls, pipes, sumps or other approved means. Requirement SECTION 01 57 80 Control of Ground and Surface Water Page 8 of 8 includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B. Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by agencies. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This item shall consist of providing, installing, moving, replacing, maintaining, cleaning, and removing temporary or permanent street closure barricades, signs or other devices required to handle the traffic in conformance with the current edition of the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Street and Highways and as indicated or directed by the Engineer. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFICED ELSEWHERE SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, see below for reference. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Shop Drawings showing size, dimensions, and project specific content of signage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials used in barricades, signs and traffic handling shall conform to the following: 1. SIGNS a. Sign Plates – 0.080-in thickness Alodine finished Federal Specification 6061 – T6 aluminum b. Sign Posts – 1.25 ounce/square foot hot dipped galvanized welded steel tubing ASTM A 513, O.D. 2.375 inches, wall thickness 0.065-inch, 1.60 pounds per foot. c. Hardware – Aluminum alloy ASTM A 444 sign hardware for clamp casting or stainless steel with galvanized or electroplated cold rolled steel U-bolts, bolts, washers, and nuts. 2. SIGN PLATE MESSAGE AND SIZE a. Sign Designation – Size i. OM—4R – 18 inches x 18 inches ii. W14-1 – 30 inches x 30 inches 3. LUMBER SECTION 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage Page 2 of 2 a. Rails shall be new unweathered S4S grade #2 fir or yellow pine of the size indicated. b. Posts, of the size indicated, shall be pressure treated with pentachlorophenol. 4. CONCRETE a. Concrete shall be 4000 psi Concrete as indicated in the Drawings. 5. RETRO-REFLECTIVE SHEETING a. Red and white strips shall conform to Table 1 CIE Chromaticity Coordinates, ASTM Designation D 523, ASTM 39". SDHPT Test Method Tex-842-B, ASTM D-987-48%, Atlas Twin ARC Weathering ASTM E 4269, Type E conforming to ASTM D 822-60X which requires the ASTM E 42 Type E Atlas XW data; L-2300B dated January 7, 1970. 6. PAINT a. Exterior Oil base paint, colors as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Prior to commencing construction, suitable " Project Signage " devices shall be installed to protect the workers and the public. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing all markers, signs and barricades conforming to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and/or as indicated. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, additional markers, signs or barricades are needed in the interest of safety, the Contractor will install such as are required or as directed by the Engineer. C. Maintenance- It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain, clean, move and replace if necessary, barricades, signs and traffic handling devices during the time required for construction of the project. Permanent barricades shall be constructed as required after the completion of the street by drilling holes to place the posts and concrete foundations. Foundation concrete shall be cured before the rails are attached. When no longer needed all temporary project signage shall be removed and the area restored to its original condition or as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 60 00 Product Requirements Page 1 of 6 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide products for this project that comply with the requirements of this section. Specific requirements of the detailed equipment specification govern in the case of a conflict with the requirements of this Section. B. Comply with applicable specifications and standards. C. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified or as modified per Section 01 31 13 - Project Coordination. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Assume responsibility for the design of the products to include structural stability and operational capability. 2. Design members to withstand all loads imposed by installation, erection, and operation of the product without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operational requirements of the product. Size and strength of materials for structural members are specified as minimums only. 3. Design mechanical and electrical components for all loads, currents, stresses, and wear imposed by start-up and normal operations of the equipment without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operation of the unit. Mechanical and electrical components specified for equipment are specified as the minimum acceptable for the equipment. B. Coordination: 1. Provide coordination of the entire project, including verification that structures, piping, and equipment components to be furnished and installed for this project are compatible. 2. Determine that the equipment furnished for this project is compatible with the Contract Document requirements and with the equipment and materials furnished by others. 3. Electrical components provided for equipment shall comply with all provisions of the Contract Documents. 4. Protective coatings and paints applied to equipment shall be fully compatible with the final coatings to be field applied in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Adaptation of Equipment: 1. Drawings and specifications are prepared for the specified products. Make modifications to incorporate the products into the project at no cost to the Owner, if a substitution for a product is requested and approved in accordance with Section 01 31 13 - Project Coordination. SECTION 01 60 00 Product Requirements Page 2 of 6 2. Do not provide a product with a physical size that exceeds the available space. Consideration may be given to the acceptance of these products or equipment if the Contractor assumes all costs necessary to incorporate the item and the Engineer approves such revisions. 3. Coordinate electrical requirements for the products to be installed in the project, including revisions in electrical equipment components wiring and other factors necessary to incorporate the component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, and shall include: 1. Certificates of Adequacy of Design, as described in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Equipment Installation Reports per Section 01 75 50 - Starting Systems. 3. Other documentation as required by detailed equipment specifications. 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable industry standards referenced in Specifications shall apply as if written here in its entirety. B. Except where otherwise indicated, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in items of equipment shall conform to the Standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction. 1.05 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. Guarantee and or Warranty products furnished by the Contractor under this contract against: 1. Faulty or inadequate design. 2. Improper assembly or erection. 3. Defective workmanship or materials. 4. Leakage, breakage, or other failure. B. Guarantee and or Warranty the products installed under this contract, including products furnished by the Owner, against leakage, breakage, or other failure due to improper assembly or erection and against improper installation of the equipment. The guarantee and or Warranty period shall be as defined in the General Conditions. Individual specification sections may have more stringent warranty requirements than stated in the General Conditions. The most stringent warranty will be required in the event of any difference in the two aforementioned locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS SECTION 01 60 00 Product Requirements Page 3 of 6 A. Design, fabricate, assemble, deliver and install according to normally accepted engineering and shop practices, except where a higher standard of quality is required by the Contract Documents. B. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages. Like parts are to be interchangeable. C. Two or more items of the same kind are to be identical and made by the same Supplier. D. Provide products suitable for the intended service. E. Adhere to the equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions indicated by the Contract Documents. F. Do not use products for any purpose other than that for which it is designed. G. Provide new products unless previously used products are specifically allowed in the Contract Documents. H. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. I. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. J. Iron castings shall be tough, close-grained gray iron free from blowholes, flaws, or excessive shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A48. K. Structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or vibratory loads. L. Unless otherwise indicated, steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4-inch thick. All edges are to be chamfered to preclude any sharp exposed edges. 2.02 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications, motors furnished with equipment shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Motors shall be designed and applied in compliance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and AFBMA standards and the NEC for the specific duty imposed by the driven equipment. 2. Where frequent starting occurs, motors shall be designed for frequent starting duty equivalent to the duty service required by the driven equipment. 3. Unless recognized and defined by the standards and codes for intermittent duty as a standard industry practice, motors shall be rated for continuous duty at 40 C ambient. Motor temperature rise above 40 C ambient on continuous operation at nameplate horsepower shall not exceed the NEMA limit. 4. Motors shall be designed to start with appropriate starter or variable speed drive. 5. Motor bearing life shall be based upon the actual operating load conditions imposed by the driven equipment. 6. Motors shall be sized for the altitude at the location where the equipment is to be installed. SECTION 01 60 00 Product Requirements Page 4 of 6 7. Motors with 1.0 service factor shall not be loaded more than 87 percent of the nameplate horsepower. Motors with a 1.15 service factor shall not be loaded more than 100 percent of the nameplate horsepower. 8. Where the detailed specifications call for encapsulated motor windings, the following process shall be used: a. After stator assembly, the stator assembly shall be sealed vacuum- pressure impregnation (VPI) of epoxy resin. The stator shall receive two VPI treatments, each treatment consisting of a dip followed by an oven bake. After the final cure, the stator assembly shall receive a final (third) coating of a durable epoxy varnish to further protect against dust, moisture, and a chemical degradation. The windings shall comply with the latest applicable provisions of NEMA MG1. 9. Motors shall have a clamp-type grounding terminal inside the motor conduit box. 10. Motors with external conduit boxes shall have oversized conduit boxes. 11. Maximum starting current shall be per NEMA MG1, Class H. 12. Efficiency shall be per NEMA MG1 for High efficiency motors. 13. Minimum insulation shall be Type F. 14. Motors shall be random wound with copper coils. 15. Motors located in a hazardous location shall be rated for the appropriate classification. B. It is intended that the Supplier use his standard motor on integrally constructed motor driven equipment such as appliances, hand tools, etc., which would otherwise require redesign of the complete unit in order to provide a motor having the specified features. C. Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications, motors within the horsepower ranges indicated below shall be rated and constructed as follows: 1. Below 1/2 HP: a. 115-volt, 60-Hz, 1-phase. b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFP in all other locations. c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. d. Built-in manual-reset thermal protector; or furnished with integrally mounted stainless steel enclosed manual motor-overload switch. 2. 1/2 to 1 HP: a. 230/460-volt, 60-Hz, 3-phase. b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFC in all other locations. c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. d. 1-1/2 HP and Above: e. 230/460-volt, 60-Hz, 3-phase. f. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFC in all other locations. g. Oil or grease lubricated anti-friction or oil lubricated sleeve bearings. SECTION 01 60 00 Product Requirements Page 5 of 6 h. Vertical motors shall have 15-year average life thrust bearings. D. Motors with horsepower ratings of 15 horsepower or greater shall be provided with space heaters to operate on 120-volt single-phase service. 2.03 EQUIPMENT APPURTENANCES A. Cover belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts on all sides by a safety guard. 1. Fabricate safety guards from 16 USS gage or heavier galvanized or aluminum-clad sheet steel or 1/2-inch mesh galvanized expanded metal. 2. Design guards for easy installation and removal. 3. Provide galvanized supports and accessories for each guard. 4. Provide stainless steel bolts and hardware. 5. Provide safety guards in outdoor locations designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water. 2.04 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide suitable anchor bolts for each product. B. Provide anchor bolts, with templates or setting drawings, sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. C. Provide two nuts for each bolt. D. Provide anchor bolts for products mounted on baseplates that are long enough to permit 1- 1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. E. Provide stainless steel anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. 2.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES A. Furnish tools, instruments, lifting and handling devices, and accessories necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment that are available only from the Product Vendor or are not commonly available. 2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLAQUES A. Provide a plaque for each piece of equipment in accordance with Section 01 63 00 – Equipment and Valve Tagging. 2.07 LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment lubricated by systems which: 1. Require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. 2. Do not require attention during start up or shutdown. 3. Do not waste lubricants. SECTION 01 60 00 Product Requirements Page 6 of 6 B. Provide lubricants to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace lubricant consumed during testing, start up, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment including equipment pre-selected or furnished by the Owner. Assume responsibility for proper installation, start-up and making the necessary adjustments so that the equipment is placed in proper operating condition per Section 01 75 50 - Starting Systems. 3.02 LUBRICATION A. Lubricate all products provided or installed for this project, including products furnished by the Owner, per the Supplier’s written recommendations until the product is accepted by the Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 63 00 Equipment and Valve Tagging Page 1 of 3 SECTION 01 63 00 EQUIPMENT AND VALVE TAGGING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. A system to uniquely name and number process and mechanical facilities, systems, equipment, piping, and valves to be constructed, installed, and used on the Westlake Pump Station Generator Replacement Project has been developed and shall be used on all correspondence, submittals, and nameplates as described below. B. Equipment and valve numbers shall be as indicated or specified in Paragraph 1.06 below, and as shown on the Drawings. C. Use the equipment and valve numbers, and the pipe identification labels, indicated on the Drawings or as specified in all transactions, including correspondences and submittals. If a nomenclature label is not specified or indicated, notify the Engineer. The Engineer will assign additional nomenclature labels, where appropriate. Contractor will provide non-specified labels at no additional cost to the OWNER. D. Equipment numbers and tagging for architectural items are not part of this Section. E. Equipment numbering and tagging for instruments and control equipment are part of this section and shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in this Section. F. Valve numbering and tagging for valves provided under Division 40 (including Fire Protection, HVAC and Plumbing systems) are part of this section and shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section. G. Equipment numbering and tagging for electrical items are part of this section and shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals are included in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data is included in Section 01 78 23 – Operational and Maintenance Data. C. Contractor’s Quality Control is included in Section 01 45 16 – Contractor’s Quality Control. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, shop drawings and product data required to establish compliance with this Section. SECTION 01 63 00 Equipment and Valve Tagging Page 2 of 3 B. Product data including product materials, sizes and dimensions, and other relevant technical information. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide in accordance with Section 01 45 16 – Contractor’s Quality Control. B. Documents (letters, Requests for Information, submittals, O&M manuals, vendor training manuals, shop drawings) which use equipment or valve numbers other than as indicated or specified will be rejected by the Engineer and corrected and resubmitted by the Contractor at no additional cost to the OWNER. C. Provide equipment and valve tagging prior to field and hands-on training as defined in the individual equipment and valve specifications. 1.06 NOMENCLATURE A. All process equipment, pumps, gates, valves, and access hatches shall be identified and numbered in accordance with the system as established on the Drawings. B. Process equipment, pumps, gates, valves, and access hatches shall be identified and numbered as indicated on the Drawings and as indicated in individual specification sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND VALVE TAGS A. For each item assigned an equipment or valve number as specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide a tag with the corresponding equipment or valve number. B. For equipment, provide corrosion resistant, 0.125-in thick plastic tags with equipment nomenclature, in white 1/2-in lettering, engraved in black enamel background, with a minimum of 1/8-in border around the engraved print, and with extra length to provide for fastening device. C. The nameplates shall be fastened to the equipment (except piping) in an accessible location with oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. D. Nameplates shall at a minimum contain manufacturers name and address; year of manufacturer; serial number; model or type designation; principal rated capacities; electrical or other power characteristics; and other applicable information as acceptable to ENGINEER. E. Provide materials specified below for attaching tags to equipment: 1. Provide 1/8-in by 3/8-in, Type 316 stainless steel machine screws or drive pins. 2. Provide one-piece self-locking nylon tag fasteners for tags that cannot be attached with screws. a. Provide nylon fasteners to attach tags only on non-moving parts of stationary equipment. b. Fasteners longer than 8 inches are not acceptable. SECTION 01 63 00 Equipment and Valve Tagging Page 3 of 3 c. Provide no more than one fastener per tag. 3. Provide 5-mil solvent-activated permanent adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. It is essential to the construction, operation, and maintenance of the Project that the nomenclature and tagging system is correctly implemented. Therefore, all correspondence, requests for information, submittals, operations and maintenance data, tags, spare parts, and all other items shall incorporate the correct equipment and/or valve numbers and pipe identification label. Replace or repair items not using the correct equipment or valve number label, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF TAGGING A. Provide all material, equipment, and labor to install identification systems as specified and indicated. B. Prepare and clean surfaces on which signs and tags will be mounted prior to installation. C. Tags 1. Attach tags to be accessible and readable without disassembly, removal, or disruption of operation of any equipment. 2. Do not install tags in path of operation of moving or moveable equipment. 3. Tighten nylon tag fasteners such that tags do not hang more than 1-in from equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. 4. Drilling for Machine Screws a. For fluid handling equipment including pipes, valves and pumps, and electric motors do not drill directly into wall containing the fluid or machinery; drill into flanges or support elements for attaching tags. D. Install tags as specified with the specified or indicated equipment and/or valve number incorporated as the text for these tags. 3.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Compare tags and signs with equipment and areas referenced. Replace tags and signs that do not reference equipment or area to which attached, located, or giving direction to, at no additional cost to the OWNER. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Comply with requirements of the General Conditions and specified administrative procedures in closing out the Construction Contract. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit affidavits and releases on forms provided by the Engineer. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Submit written notification that the work or designated portion of the work is substantially complete to the Engineer when the work is considered to be substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the project will be considered to be complete. B. Engineer shall visit the project site to observe the work within a reasonable time after notification is received to determine the status of completion. C. Engineer shall issue notification to the Contractor that the work is either substantially complete or that additional work must be performed before the project may be considered substantially complete. 1. Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing of items that must be completed before the project can be considered substantially complete. a. Correct the noted deficiencies in the work. b. Issue a second written notice with a revised list of deficiencies when work has been completed. c. Engineer shall revisit the site and the procedure shall begin again. 2. Engineer shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Owner when the project is considered to be substantially complete. Certificate shall include a tentative list of items to be corrected before final payment. a. Owner will review and revise the list of items and notify the Engineer of any objections or other items that are to be included in the list. b. Engineer shall prepare and send to the Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be corrected or completed. c. Review the list and notify the Engineer in writing of any objections within 10 days of receipt of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.04 FINAL INSPECTION A. Submit written certification in the form provided by the Engineer when the project is complete and: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. SECTION 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Page 2 of 4 2. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational. 4. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed. 5. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided. 6. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. Engineer shall make an inspection with the Owner and appropriate regulatory agencies to determine the status of completeness within a reasonable time after the receipt of the Certificate. C. Engineer shall issue notice that the project is complete or notify the Contractor that work is not complete or is defective. 1. Submit the request for final payment with Closeout submittals described in Paragraph 1.07 if notified that the project is complete and the work is acceptable. 2. Upon receipt of notification from the Engineer that work is incomplete or defective, take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies. Send a second certification to the Engineer when work has been completed or corrected. 3. Engineer shall re-visit the site and the procedure will begin again. 1.05 REINSPECTION FEES A. Pay fees to the Owner to compensate the Engineer for reinspection of the work required by the failure of the work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor. B. Owner may withhold the amount of these fees from the Contractor’s final payment. C. Cost for additional inspections will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual hours required for the reinspection and preparation of related reports in accordance with the rates provided in the Supplemental Conditions. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO THE ENGINEER A. Record Drawings per Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. B. Keys and keying schedule. C. Warranties and bonds. D. Evidence of payment or release of liens on the forms provided by the Engineer and as required by the General Conditions. E. Consent from Surety to Final Payment. F. Equipment installation reports on equipment. G. Shop drawings, record data, Operations and Maintenance Manuals, and other submittals as required by the Contract Documents. SECTION 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Page 3 of 4 H. Specified spare parts and special tools. I. Certificates of Occupancy, operating certificates, or other similar releases required to allow the Owner unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities. J. Evidence of final, continuing insurance, and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. K. Final Photographs per Section 01 32 34 - Video and Photographic Documentation. 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT REQUEST A. Submit a preliminary final Application for Payment. This application is to include adjustments to the Contract Amount for: 1. Approved Change Orders. 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order. 3. Unit prices. 4. Deductions for defective work that has been accepted by the Owner. 5. Penalties and bonuses. 6. Deductions for liquidated damages. 7. Deductions for reinspection payments per Paragraph 1.05. 8. Other adjustments. B. Engineer shall prepare a final Change Order, reflecting the approved adjustments to the contract amount which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders. C. Submit the final application for payment per the General Conditions, including the final Change Order. 1.08 TRANSFER OF UTILITIES A. Transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued, final cleaning has been completed per Section 01 74 23 - Final Clearing, and the work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the work. 1.09 WARRANTIES, BONDS, AND SERVICES AGREEMENTS A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” or by the individual sections of the specifications. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the General Conditions. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Each document is to be signed by the respective Supplier or Subcontractor. SECTION 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Page 4 of 4 2. Each document is to include: a. The product or work item description. b. The firm, with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number. c. Scope of warranty, bond or services agreement. d. Date, duration, and expiration date for each warranty bond and service agreement. e. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure. f. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit two copies of each document to the Engineer for review and transmittal to the Owner. 1. Submit duplicate sets. 2. Documents are to be submitted on 8-1/2 x 11 paper, punched for a standard three-ring binder. 3. Submit each set in a commercial quality three-ring binder with a durable and cleanable plastic cover. The title “Warranties, Bonds, and Services Agreements”, the project name and the name of the Contractor are to be typed and affixed to the cover. E. Submit warranties, bonds and services agreements: 1. At the time of final completion and before final payment. 2. Within 10 days after inspection and acceptance for equipment or components placed in service during the progress of construction. 1.10 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. Claims and disputes must be resolved prior to recommendations of final Application for Payment. Acceptance and final payment by the Contractor will indicate that any outstanding claims or disputed issues have been resolved to the full satisfaction of the Contractor. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 71 13 Mobilization Page 1 of 1 SECTION 01 71 13 MOBILIZATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This item shall govern the mobilization of personnel, equipment and materials at the work site for other contract items that will be performed by the Contractor. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to the movement of equipment, personnel, material, supplies, etc. to the work site; the installation of temporary facilities (when not paid for separately) and the establishment of office and other necessary facilities prior to the initiation of the Work. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. “Mobilization” will be measured as a Lump Sum bid item. B. Mobilization Lump sum bid item shall not exceed five (5) percent of the contract value. C. Partial payments of the "Mobilization Payout" shall be as follows: 1. Upon presentation of a paid invoice for the Payment Bond, Performance Bond and required insurance, the Contractor will be paid that cost from the amount bid for "Mobilization Payment". 2. When one (1) percent of the adjusted contract amount is earned, fifty (50) percent of the "Mobilization Payout” will be paid. 3. When ten (10) percent of the adjusted contract amount is earned, seventy- five (75) percent of the "Mobilization Payout” will be paid. Previous payments under this item will be deducted from this amount. 4. When twenty (20) percent of the adjusted contract amount is earned, one hundred (100) percent of the “Mobilization Payout” will be paid. Previous payments under this item will be deducted from this amount. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. This section covers the mobilization fo personnel, equipment, and materials at the work site for other cortract items that will be performed by the contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 73 19 Trench Safety Systems Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 73 19 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench safety system for the construction of trench excavations. B. Trench safety system for structural excavations which fall under provisions of State and Federal trench safety laws. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for trench safety systems used on trench excavations is on a linear foot basis measured along the centerline of the trench, including manholes and other line structures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. A trench shall be defined as a narrow excavation (in relation to its depth) made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. B. The trench safety system requirements will apply to larger open excavations if the erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation slope and the installation to dimensions equivalent of a trench as defined. C. Trench Safety Systems include but are not limited to sloping, sheeting, trench boxes or trench shields, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering, or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a safety program specifically for the construction of trench excavation. Design the trench safety program to be in accordance with OSHA 29CFR standards governing the presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench excavations. B. Construction and shop drawings containing deviations from OSHA standards or special designs shall be sealed by a licensed Engineer retained and paid by Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Engineer will only be in regard to compliance with this specification and will not constitute approval by the Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under State and Federal trench safety regulations. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with the detail specifications set out in the provision of Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring, Federal Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29CFR, Part 1926, as amended. The sections that are incorporated into these specifications by reference include Sections 1926-650 through 1926-652. SECTION 01 73 19 Trench Safety Systems Page 2 of 2 B. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of the OSHA standards. C. Legislation that has been enacted by the Texas Legislature with regard to Trench Safety Systems, is hereby incorporated, by reference, into these specifications. Refer to Texas Health and Safety Code Chapter 756.1.06 INDEMNIFICATION D. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer, their employees, and agents, from any and all damages, costs (including, without limitation, legal fees, court costs, and the cost of investigation), judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. E. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner and Engineer in case the Owner and Engineer is/are negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA 29CFR. B. Install specially designed trench safety systems in accordance with the Contractor's Trench Excavation Safety Program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. A competent person, as identified in the Contractor's Trench Excavation Safety Program, shall verify that trench boxes and other pre-manufactured systems are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Contractor, or Contractor's independently retained consultant, shall make daily inspections of the trench safety systems to ensure that the installed systems and operations meet OSHA 29CFR and other personnel protection regulations requirements. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, Contractor shall immediately stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until the necessary precautions have been taken by Contractor to safeguard personnel entering the trench. C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on the project. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 74 16 Site Maintenance Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 74 16 SITE MAINTENANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes final clean-up and site restoration affected by the Work on public or private property, including pavement, esplanades, sidewalks, driveways, fences, lawns and landscaping or any other item disturbed by the Work or Contractor neglect. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section. Contractor shall include the cost for this work in the Contract Bid Price for the Work of which this is a component part. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data as required for final clean-up and site restoration in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1.04 SCHEDULING A. Restoration shall be completed immediately after the Work is completed. B. Phased Construction: Commencement of subsequent Phase will follow scheduling of site restoration of prior Phase. C. Construction of Projects with no Phases: Limit work to a maximum of 50% of total project linear feet or as limited in other specifications, whichever is greater, of right-of-way and easement. Commence work in additional right-of-way or easement after completion of site restoration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Specified materials include, but are not limited to, sidewalks, driveways, seeding, sodding, trees, shrubs, plants or any other material relating to site restoration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATORY WORK A. Provide clean-up and restoration crews to work closely behind construction crews, and where necessary, during testing, restoration and transfer of service, abandonment of lines, backfill and surface restoration. B. Water and Wastewater Lines: Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, comply with the following: SECTION 01 74 16 Site Maintenance Page 2 of 2 1. Immediately after transfer of services, begin abandonment of old water lines and site restoration. C. Street Construction and Paving Projects 1. Once the Engineer approves work within a Line Segment or block, immediately begin preparatory work for sidewalk construction, tree planting, sodding and hydro mulching. 2. Immediately provide site restoration after testing. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove debris and trash to maintain a clean and orderly site in accordance with the requirements of Section 00 72 00 – Standard General Conditions and Section 01 74 19 – Waste Material Disposal. 3.03 LANDSCAPING AND FENCES A. After obtaining approval from the Engineer of satisfactory site restoration, Contractor shall restore turf in all areas disturbed during construction. B. All fences, walks, driveways or other permanent facilities are to be completed in place before turf restoration. C. Fence Replacement. 1. Replace removed, relocated or damaged fencing to equal or better condition than existed prior to construction, including concrete footings and mow strips. Provide new wood posts, top and bottom railing and panels as required. 2. Metal fencing material, not damaged by the Work, may be reused. 3. Remove and dispose of damaged or substandard material per Section 01 74 19 – Waste Material Disposal. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 74 19 Waste Material Disposal Page 1 of 1 SECTION 01 74 19 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Specific products are not required. Use equipment and materials necessary to properly complete disposal of waste materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DISPOSAL AREA A. All waste material becomes property of the Contractor and must be removed from the work site and disposed of in a legal manner not to damage the Owner or other persons. Provide copies of all disposal manifests to the Owner. B. Spoils shall either be disposed of by Contractor and/or placed in a location as directed by the Plans and /or Owner. C. Strip the disposal area of vegetation, humus or other debris. Strippings become property of Contractor to be legally disposed of with other waste materials. D. Protect trees designated for preservation. Take special care not to damage trees designated for preservation which are outside limits of waste disposal areas. 3.02 BURNING A. Burning of waste materials will not be permitted on Owner’s controlled property. 3.03 COMPACTION AND GRADING A. Compact waste materials to the density of the surrounding area. Shape the area for proper drainage. Place excess topsoil on waste material in an even layer not greater than 3 inches thick and grade smooth. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 74 23 Final Cleaning Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 74 23 FINAL CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at substantial completion. 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Perform a thorough cleaning of the site, buildings, or other structures prior to Owner occupancy of the buildings, and prior to Final Completion. Leave the project clean and ready for occupancy. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide data for maintenance per Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A. Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Furnish the labor and products needed for cleaning and finishing as recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material being cleaned. B. Use cleaning products only on the surfaces recommended by the Supplier. C. Use only those cleaning products which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean the entire site and make ready for occupancy. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water truck or hose down paved site to like new appearance. B. Clean floors and inspect for damage. 1. Remove oil, grease, paint drippings, and other contaminants from floors, then mop repeatedly until thoroughly clean. Replace damaged flooring. SECTION 01 74 23 Final Cleaning Page 2 of 2 2. Clean resilient flooring with an approved cleaner and provide one coat liquid floor polish as recommended by the flooring Supplier. Polish to a buffed appearance with powered floor buffer. 3. Vacuum all carpets with powered floor sweeper to remove dirt and dust. Remove glue or other substances from nap of carpet. C. Clean and polish inside and outside glass surfaces. Wash with window cleaner and water, apply a coat of high-quality glass polish and wipe clean. Do not scratch or otherwise mar glass surfaces. D. Clean wall surfaces to remove dirt or scuff marks. Remove excess adhesive along top edges of wall base. Remove adhesive from surfaces of vinyl wall coverings. E. Align tile to fit properly in grid and replace cracked or damaged tile. Remove smear marks and other dirt from tile and clean surface of grid system. F. Spot paint nicks and other damage. If spot-painting does not blend into the existing color and texture of the surrounding surfaces, repaint wall from inside corner to inside corner. Touch up damaged surfaces on factory finished equipment using special paint furnished by the Manufacturer. G. Clean plumbing fixtures, valves, and trim. Clean toilet seats and covers. Remove labels and adhesive from fixtures. Remove floor drains and clean baskets or buckets. Polish strainers and exposed chrome or brass. H. Remove dirt, oil, grease, dust and other contaminants from floors, equipment and apparatus in mechanical and electrical rooms with vacuum. I. Clean and polish ceramic tile floors and wall surfaces to remove mildew or other stains. Tuck point defective joints. J. Inspect exterior painted surfaces. Spot paint any damaged surfaces. K. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters on heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. L. Clean roof areas of debris; flush roof drainage systems with water until clear. M. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. N. Clean and polish all electrical equipment and exposed conduits. Remove paint overspray. Provide a blemish free appearance on all exposed equipment and conduits. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 75 50 Starting Systems Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 75 50 STARTING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Engineer seven days prior to startup of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under Contractor's supervision in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.02 DEMONSTRATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Engineer two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Engineer in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. SECTION 01 75 50 Starting Systems Page 2 of 2 D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. E. At a minimum Contractor shall demonstrate the following: 1. Procedures to set and maintain landscape irrigation system. 2. Procedures to set and maintain on-site wastewater /sanitary system. 3. Procedures to set and maintain security and fire alarm systems; and 4. Procedures to set and maintain ventilation (thermostat, suction fans, and louvers) systems. 3.03 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Contractor shall appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting and balancing. B. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION SECTION 01 78 23 Operational and Maintenance Data Page 1 of 5 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall compile equipment and product data and related information appropriate for OWNER'S operation and maintenance (O&M) for each item of equipment or product specified in other sections. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFICED ELSEWHERE SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit preliminary digital copies of each manual as PDF files to the Engineer for review. B. Identify resubmittals with the original number plus the suffix letter starting with “A.” PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL CONTENT A. Contact information for all equipment vendors including name of contact, phone number, and address. B. Operation and Maintenance Manual shall include necessary data for reordering replacement parts, lubrication, and other common parts. 2.02 GENERAL FORMATTING A. A. Operation and Maintenance Manual to be organized with equipment in each area or process in the same volume with heavy duty dividers separating equipment. In addition, submit as an electronic file (PDF). B. Size: 8 1/2 in. by 11 in., or 11 in. by 17 in. folded, with standard 3-hole punching. C. Paper: 20 lb. minimum, white, for typed pages. D. Text: Manufacturer's printed data ( English ) large enough to read and in an easily legible font. E. Drawings: 1. Bind in with text in their respective sections. 2. Fold larger drawings and place in 8.5" x 11" plastic sleeve with same binding as manual. SECTION 01 78 23 Operational and Maintenance Data Page 2 of 5 3. Place identification on outside of each envelope. F. Tabs: 1. Provide tabbed sections dividing each major equipment section. 2. Provide tab index in Table of Contents G. Binders: 1. Bind in volumes, no more than three-inches thick, in high quality binders with clear plastic (cleanable) cover. Paperboard or canvas binding will not be accepted. 2. When multiple binders are used, contents shall be organized into related sections. 2.03 BINDER TITLE SHEET A. Each Binder Volume is to have a cover page on the outside in clear plastic protection. B. Label each volume cover with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and the following: 1. Owner name 2. Project title. 3. Year of construction 4. Volume number and number of total volumes 5. Identification of major equipment 2.04 PRODUCT LIST A. After the title sheet, include a list of products included in the volume identified by product name and model number as set forth by the manufacturers 2.05 MAJOR EQUIPMENT TITLE SHEET A. First page in for each major equipment section shall contain the following: 1. Name(s) of applicable building(s) or structure(s) as shown on Drawings in which equipment located. 2. Name of equipment as set forth in Contract Documents. 3. Specification section number for equipment as indicated in Contract Documents. 4. Subcontractor's name, address, and telephone number if equipment provided by Subcontractor. 5. CONTRACTOR'S or Subcontractor's purchase order number, manufacturer's shop order number or other such numbers required for parts and service ordering. 6. Manufacturer's name, address, and telephone number. SECTION 01 78 23 Operational and Maintenance Data Page 3 of 5 7. Name, address, and telephone number for local source of supply for parts and service. 2.06 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS AND DRAWINGS A. Provide specification and catalog sheets showing configuration, manufacturer's specifications, models, options, and styles of equipment and major components being provided. Product data sheets will show project specific information with inapplicable information deleted by removal. Insert in tabbed section(s). B. Include only those sheets pertinent to specific project. C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Specific content, for each unit of equipment and system, shall include following: a. Description of Unit and Component Parts. b. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. c. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests as applicable. d. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. e. Complete nameplate data. f. P&ID numbers for equipment as set forth in Drawings. D. OPERATING PROCEDURES: 1. Startup, break-in, and normal operating instructions. 2. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. 3. Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable. 4. Special operating instructions. E. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES: 1. Routine maintenance operations. 2. Guide to troubleshooting. 3. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions. 4. Alignment, adjusting, and checking instructions. F. SERVICING AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULE: 1. List of lubricants required and quantity to be applied. 2. Schedule of lubrication. 3. Schedule for other routine maintenance. G. Manufacturer's printed instructions regarding safety precautions for both (a) protection of personnel operating the equipment and systems and (b) prevention of damage to the equipment and systems. H. Description of sequence of operation of controls. I. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts and quantities of same. SECTION 01 78 23 Operational and Maintenance Data Page 4 of 5 J. As-approved control diagrams. These shall be ladder diagrams, instrumentation loop diagrams, and electrical schematics as appropriate. K. Bill of material. L. Copy of each manufacturer start-up report for equipment included each section. M. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. N. TEXT REQUIREMENTS: 1. Identify specific product or part installed. 2. Identify text applicable to product or part installed. 3. Contain no inapplicable information. O. DRAWINGS REQUIREMENTS: 1. Supplement text with drawings to clearly illustrate following. 2. Product and components. 3. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 4. Control and flow diagrams. 5. Drawings to be actual drawings of equipment from manufacturer. "Typical" drawings not acceptable unless they accurately illustrate actual installation. P. WARRANTY 1. Include a copy of each warranty, bond or service contract issued. 2. Proper procedures in event of failure or malfunction to prevent voiding warranty. 3. Instances affecting validity of warranties or bonds. 2.07 SPECIFIC CONTENT FOR EACH ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEM: A. Applicable to equipment such as switchgear, motor control centers, panelboards, switchboards, starters, breakers, and relays shall include following. B. Description of System and Component Parts: 1. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2. 2) Performance curves, engineering data, rating tables, and tests as applicable. 3. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 4. 4) Complete nameplate data. 5. 5) P&ID numbers for equipment as set forth on Drawings. C. Circuit Directories of Panelboards: 1. Electrical service. 2. Controls. 3. Communications. SECTION 01 78 23 Operational and Maintenance Data Page 5 of 5 D. Complete instrumentation loop diagrams with tabulated listing of components in each control circuit or loop. E. Operating Procedures: 1. Routine and normal operating instructions. 2. Sequences required. 3. Special operating instructions. F. Maintenance Procedures: 1. Routine maintenance operations. 2. Guide to troubleshooting. 3. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions. 4. Adjustment and checking instructions. G. Manufacturer's printed instructions regarding safety precautions for both (a) protection of personnel operating the equipment and systems and (b) prevention of damage to the equipment and systems. H. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities maintained in storage. I. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 78 50 Project Record Documents Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 78 50 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Maintain one record copy of documents at the site in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Store Record Documents and samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and samples. C. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. D. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry, and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E. Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by Engineer. F. Bring record documents to progress review meetings for viewing by OWNER and Engineer. 1.03 RECORDING A. Before final payment will be made, the Contractor must furnish the OWNER with one (1) set of Record Drawings on the media and size chosen by the OWNER. B. Record information legibly with red ink pen on a set of blueline opaque drawings, concurrently with construction progress. Maintain an instrument on site at all times for measuring elevations accurately. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to benchmark utilized for project. 4. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 5. Field changes of dimension and detail. 6. Changes made by modifications. 7. Details not on original contract drawings. SECTION 01 78 50 Project Record Documents Page 2 of 2 8. References to related shop drawings and Modifications. D. Survey all joints of water mains at the time of construction. Record on Drawings, water main invert elevation, elevation of top of manway, and centerline horizontal location relative to baseline. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. At contract closeout of the Contract, deliver Project Record Documents to Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 79 00 Contractor Safety Plan Page 1 of 3 SECTION 01 79 00 CONTRACTOR SAFETY PLAN PART 1 - GENERAL The Contractor shall provide the management and labor required to develop, implement, enforce, and report on a job specific Environmental Health and Safety Plan (EH&S) for this project. The Contractor is responsible for addressing the safety issues associated with construction activities, including potential hazards. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION JOB SITE SAFETY INCLUDING LAYDOWN AREAS AND TRANSPORT OF EQUIPMENT MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES TO THE PROJECT SITE. 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare a job specific EH&S Plan. B. Maintain the EH&S Plan, including all required staff, equipment, and materials, through the project duration. C. Submit the EH&S plan as a project submittal prior to the Preconstruction Meeting and be prepared to discuss major points of the submitted plan at the meeting. (See 1.04-Submittals below) D. Host safety training for staff and subcontract staff on site as conditions require. E. Designate a safety officer to oversee enforcement and to serve as point-of- contact to NTMWD and contractor’s employees. F. Inspect equipment as needed to ensure safe operation. G. Provide necessary training to employees as merited by equipment, materials, or working conditions prior to risky activities. H. Maintain an OSHA 300 log and provide monthly update (with pay application) of recordable incidents. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Plan and conduct all construction activities to minimize risk and ensure safety for staff, surroundings, and subcontractors. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The Contractor shall provide a job specific EH&S Plan that incorporates the following considerations, as a minimum: 1. Applicable Local, State, and Federal Requirements for all project specific hazards. 2. All requirements of OSHA Title 29 CFR Part 1926 3. NTMWD Lock Out Program Control #382-018 4. Any site or task specific risk management guidance that has been implemented by the District that pertains to the Work under this project. SECTION 01 79 00 Contractor Safety Plan Page 2 of 3 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit the EH&S plan in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures prior to the Preconstruction Meeting. The document shall be updated in the Construction Management Software on a regular basis, and a current, updated copy shall be available at the project site at all times. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 JOB SPECIFIC EH&S CONTENTS A. The EH&S Plan shall include at the minimum the following information: 1. Background information including but not limited to 2. Contractor Name 3. NTMWD Project Number 4. Project Name 5. Project Location(s)/Site(s) 6. Project Description 7. List of conditions of site/location that may or shall pose a hazard to contractor, owner, or citizens. 8. Objective of the EH&S Plan 9. Administration and Enforcement of the Plan 10. Assignment of Safety Officer(s) 11. Injury reporting procedure 12. Emergency Notification procedures based on hazard type 13. Who to notify in which situations 14. Name, address, contact number, and map showing location of nearest urgent care facility and nearest emergency care facility 15. Site Access Control Requirements 16. Contractor shall control access to the work site by unauthorized persons during the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that applicable OSHA requirements and standards are met before any person is allowed to enter the project area. 17. Contractor Safety Guidelines may include, but are not limited to, the following based on the project specific issues 18. Fire Prevention and Protection 19. Means of Egress 20. Hazardous Materials 21. Hazardous waste operations 22. Bloodborne Pathogen Exposure SECTION 01 79 00 Contractor Safety Plan Page 3 of 3 23. Solid wastes 24. Health Hazards 25. Confined Space plan 26. Electrical safety 27. Excavations 28. Fall Protection Plan 29. Equipment safety (scaffolding, vehicles, etc.) 30. Site safety housekeeping 31. Flammable/Combustible Liquids 32. Hot work activities (welding, torch cutting, grinding, etc.) 33. Hazard communication 34. Trench safety requirements 35. Reference trench safety plan 36. Ladders and Stairways 37. Machine and equipment guarding 38. Personal protective equipment 39. Contractor’s training program 40. Job Hazard analysis 41. Job site safety inspections and audit schedule/plan 42. Job safety checklist specific to the project (and phase) 43. Contractor and subcontractor acknowledgement of the safety plan 44. Appendix 45. Accident Reporting documentation 46. Safety equipment checklists 47. Equipment Checklists 48. Safety Meeting sign in 49. List of Trained Individuals 2.02 EH&S PLAN ORGANIZATION A. Provide a Table of Contents listing each section of the manual for each product or system. B. Assign a number and letter to each section in the manual. C. Provide Index tabs for each section of the manual. D. The designation on each index tab is to correspond to the number and letter assigned in the Table of Contents. END OF SECTION SECTION 02 41 50 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE Page 1 of 4 SECTION 02 41 50 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide all dismantling, modifications, and salvage work required, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The Contractor shall comply with applicable laws, codes, ordinances and regulations, and shall obtain and pay for necessary permits. C. The Contractor shall remove from site and legally dispose of dismantled materials, trash, debris, etc. except any items specifically indicated to be reused and any items designated to be salvaged for Owner's own purposes. Such items shall be carefully removed under the Contract and moved to an area designated by the Owner on the project site. D. All other materials removed under the modification work and not called for to be reused or turned over to the Owner on the project shall be disposed of legally, off the site, by Contractor, who shall, upon removal from site, have the rights of salvage of materials. E. The Contractor shall visit the site of the work and examine the premises so as to fully understand all of the existing conditions relative to the work. No increase in cost or extension of performance time will be considered for failure to know the conditions of the site and structures. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing and modifying piping and structures in such a sequence that there will be no disruption of operations. The Contractor's construction schedule, to be provided per Section 01 32 17 shall include demolition work at times that meet the construction sequencing issues presented in Contract Documents. 1.02 CARE, PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. The Contractor is cautioned to exercise great care in protecting existing structures and property of the Owner while proceeding with work of this Section and the entire Contract. All damage shall be repaired at once to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All such repairs shall be at the expense of the Contractor and no claims for additional payment will be accepted. 1.03 CONDITIONS OF STRUCTURES A. The Owner and the Engineer assume no responsibility for the actual condition of the piping and equipment to be demolished or modified. B. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner insofar as practicable. However, slight variations may occur prior to the start of demolition work. SECTION 02 41 50 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE Page 2 of 4 C. The Engineer may, upon inspection, direct the Contractor to repair or replace deteriorated or damaged structures, piping or mechanical equipment as extra work. Extra work, if any, will be performed and paid for in accordance with other portions of this Project Manual. 1.04 TRAFFIC AND ACCESS A. Special attention of the Contractor is directed towards maintaining safe and convenient access at all times to and through the existing facilities for plant operations personnel and associated vehicles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MANNER OF CONDUCTING WORK A. Execute work in careful, orderly manner. Provide and maintain barriers, dust screens, warning lights as may be necessary to protect persons and property. Perform work with utmost care, using tools and methods that will not transfer any heavy shocks to adjacent structures to remain in service and in place. Take all possible care to avoid vibration and other disturbance. Conduct work in a manner giving prime consideration to, but not necessarily limited by: 1. Protection of public and Owner's personnel. 2. Protection from weather. 3. Control of noise, shocks, vibration. 4. Control of dirt and dust. 5. Maintenance of orderly access. 6. Protection of existing structures or portions thereof to remain. 7. Coordination and cooperation with Owner. B. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate. C. No fires will be permitted on site. D. The use of explosives will not be permitted on the project. E. Provide temporary support and shoring as required for existing materials until new work is installed. F. Pollution Controls. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. SECTION 02 41 50 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE Page 3 of 4 2. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations, as directed by Owner or governing authorities. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 3. Prior to demolition inside existing structures, provide covers consisting of plastic sheeting and framing over existing pumps, motors, switchgear and control panels. Maintain covers during demolition operations. 3.02 MODIFICATIONS A. Modification consists of demolition as required, removing, replacing, or altering existing concrete. Also included is such work as plugging pipe and wall openings, the removal of portions of an existing structure, and construction of additions to existing structures. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Explosives. The use of explosives will not be permitted for any purposes. B. Fires. Fires are not permitted on this project C. Modifications of Existing Structures. 1. Where only a portion of the existing structure is to be removed, special care shall be taken to prevent damage to that portion that will remain in place. Portions of concrete structures to be removed shall be saw-cut or cored in order to minimize impact loads on the remaining structure. No "headache" balls or other swinging weights may be used. Where not connecting to new structures, the existing concrete shall be removed to neat lines as shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer, and reinforcing steel shall be saw-cut and removed to a depth of 2 inches from the finished surface and coated, or as noted on the Drawings. The new opening shall be patched and finished with nonshrink nonmetallic grout or other treatment as required to function as intended. 2. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. Torch cutting will not be permitted. 3. Where physical cutting is required, cut work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Unless otherwise specified, core drill or saw cut openings through all concrete work. Core drilling shall be done utilizing diamond bits. Corners shall not be over-cut without prior written approval from the Engineer. 4. Where a portion of the existing concrete is to be removed and new concrete is to be added, a minimum of 1-inch saw-cut is required to provide a straight, neat edge at the surface. Care shall be taken to maintain existing reinforcement where indicated on the plans. 5. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained work, adjoining, in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. 6. Take care in the removal of equipment and materials to be salvaged to prevent damage to such. SECTION 02 41 50 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE Page 4 of 4 D. Piping Demolition. Piping shall be disconnected, dismantled, and removed as required and in such a manner as to minimize distributing or damaging adjacent facilities. Where indicated on the Contract Drawings piping shall be properly restrained as specified. E. Disposal. All removed material, debris, and rubbish resulting from the demolition operations shall be removed from the site and disposed by and at the expense of the Contractor. Metallic items removed from the site shall be recycled or delivered to a steel mill, ferrous foundary, or similar facility, where material will be scrapped. Under no circumstances shall any other use be made of the removed material, nor shall they be reused in another installation. Contractor shall submit a Construction Waste Management Plan. Contractor shall also maintain Waste Management Reports and CWM Closeout Documentation. F. Structural Members. Carefully remove and lower structural steel, cast-iron framing and heavy timbers. G. Pavement Repair. Repair existing access paving and/or sidewalks that is disturbed as a result of demolition procedures, including haul-off. Replacement shall include repair of the existing subgrade and surface course. The new materials shall be of the same type and thickness as the existing materials. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions Page 1 of 4 SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic requirements specifically applicable to the work of Division 26 - Electrical Requirements. B. The Contractor shall furnish equipment, materials, and labor for assembly and installation plus checkout and start-up of the complete electrical system as shown on the Drawings and stipulated in the Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As a minimum requirement, the electrical system shall be constructed in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Local Building Code. 3. Other applicable Codes and Standards as referenced in other Master Specifications. B. Comply with local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase. C. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards. D. Equipment and materials shall conform to requirements of specification and to the criteria provided in data sheets for the project. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Conformance Certificate and Quality Assurance Release. 1. Submit an overall conformance certificate for electrical components signed by the person responsible for product quality. Specifically identify the purchased material or equipment by project name and location, purchase order number, supplements, and item number where applicable, including materials and services provided by others. Indicate that all requirements have been met and identify any approved deviations. 2. Field Inspection: a. Electrical work shall be inspected and approved by the local code inspector and the Engineer. b. Contractor shall give a minimum of one-day notice to the Inspector that the installation is ready for inspection and two days’ notice to the Engineer. c. Concealed work shall be inspected before it is covered: SECTION 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions Page 2 of 4 (1) Conduit with stub-ups, underground in duct banks before concrete is poured. (2) Conduit in slabs, walls and ceilings, complete with boxes. d. Electrical equipment and materials shall be inspected upon arrival by the Engineer for compliance with specifications. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Take the following site conditions into consideration when fabricating, erecting, installing and wiring electrical equipment under this contract: 1. Seismic Zone Zone 0 2. Wind Velocity 115 mph 3. Temperature, Min/Max.: a. Coldest Winter Month: High 60 degrees F Low 41 degrees F b. Warmest Summer Month: High 94 degrees F Low 73 degrees F c. Lowest Expected: 11 degrees F d. Highest Expected: 107 degrees F 4. Rainfall: a. Annual 45 inches b. Design hours 3.4 inches/hour, 8.4 inches/24 hours 5. Design Relative Humidity: 98% 6. Station Barometric Pressure: a. Average Annual 29.5 inches Hg Absolute. 7. Utility Water Systems: Design Pressure Design Temp. a. River Water _______ PSI ____ degrees F b. Well Water _______ PSI ____ degrees F c. City Water _______ PSI ____ degrees F 8. Electric Power Supply Characteristics (Available to Contractor): Voltage Phase Hz Wire Delta or Wye 1 480 3 60 4 Wye PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENT DESIGN A. Components utilized in the construction of the material or equipment shall be of the latest proven design, new and in current production. Do not use obsolete components or components to be phased out of production. SECTION 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions Page 3 of 4 2.02 FACTORY INSPECTION A. Provide free access with prior notice for the Engineer at all times to the shop where the material or equipment is being fabricated or tested. Provide reasonable facilities for inspection, witnessing tests, and examining records. Give 7 days notice prior to starting tests, which are scheduled for factory inspection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify dimensions and ratings of equipment and materials to ensure proper fit and performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. If field conditions necessitate changes in electrical installation, obtain approval from the Engineer. B. All electrical equipment shall be mounted at an elevation of twenty-four (24) inches above the base water surface flood elevation (500 YR WSEL) of the construction site. Should there be a difference in the mounting elevation on the construction Drawings that is in conflict with the previous directive the Contractor shall immediately bring such conflict to the attention of the Engineer for resolution. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Test the electrical system to specification requirements and to demonstrate correct installation and operation of equipment. B. Before 7-days test, demonstrate the system to the Engineer. Show the system to be fully operational. All alarms, safety’s, and communication points to central and locally must operate in both full-automatic and back-up modes. Use fresh water in the test medium. C. Operate the system continuously for a period of 7 days in full automatic, without failure, to qualify as acceptable. "Failure" is considered any problem that requires correction by maintenance personnel. This would exclude conditions not under the control of Contractor, such as: evident lightning strikes, 25-year rains, purchased power failure longer than the specified duration of service from UPS. Failures due to uncontrollable situations would allow the 7-day test to continue, as soon as test conditions are restored and the Engineer is notified. D. The existing station shall remain in service during this test. 3.04 WARRANTY A. The Contractor warrants to the Engineer and Owner that all material and equipment furnished under this contract will be new and of good quality. The Contractor also warrants that all work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects for two (2) years from Final Acceptance date. SECTION 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions Page 4 of 4 END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 00 Electrical Work Page 1 of 4 SECTION 26 05 00 ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work shall include providing materials and equipment required for installation of complete and functioning electrical system as specified and as shown on the drawings. B. Electrical Control and Instrumentation Plans & Specifications are representative of the design intent and may not contain minute details normally associated with normally accepted electrical construction, as described in applicable codes or as described in manufacturer’s literature. Contractor shall provide all appurtenances normally associated with a particular equipment or device, and as required for a properly operating system. 1.02 MAJOR ITEMS OF WORK AS FOLLOWS A. Installation of Pre-procured Generator and Accessories B. Installation of Underground Duct banks C. Installation of Grounding Systems 1.03 GENERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM A. The Contractor shall install a complete generator system as shown on plans. . This include but shall not be limited to all circuit breakers, indicating lights, selector switches, surge protectors, relays, push button, control transformers, power supplies, interlock wiring, terminal blocks, nameplates, and all other associated items required to provide a workable system. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer’s approval. B. Where submittals for a particular equipment, device or material item vary from that specified or shown on plan drawings, and where that item is not specifically noted as acceptable and, where installation of submitted item results in improper or undesirable operation of the system, Contractor shall be liable for removal and/or replacement of that item with the item specified or shown on plan drawings at no additional cost to Owner. C. With each submittal include a copy of the applicable specification(s) Page(s) for the item submitted and mark “complies” or “non-compliance” or “exception” adjacent to the applicable paragraph. Identify applicable drawing sheet number and specification section on front of each submittal cover. 1.05 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES A. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate electrical power, telephone, data or special purpose line installation with utility companies. Within 30 days after award of SECTION 26 05 00 Electrical Work Page 2 of 4 contract, Electrical contractor shall contact utility company and owner and shall request service needed. B. It is Electrical Contractors sole responsibility to assure that utility company and owner are notified and are kept aware of requirements. C. Contractor shall provide all conduit, conductors and termination equipment as needed for utilities and shall coordinate with utility companies for installation requirements and shall provide installation constructed according to the utility company standards whether or not such is shown in detail or plans. D. Electrical Contractor shall review all sections of the plans including Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Instrumentation, Process, Architectural, and Electrical and shall note all electrical and/or requirements for devices and equipment shown or implied, and shall provide service accordingly for a complete operating electrical system. E. Electrical Contractor shall provide all programming set-up, adjustments and testing of devices or equipment included under this contract unless specifically excluded or unless equipment is not provided by Electrical Contractor. F. General Contractor is specifically responsible for coordination of all electrical systems, devices and equipment provided or installed under this contract and shall assure that all requirements by all trades are met such as to insure a complete and operating electrical, control, process or instrumentation system. G. Electrical Contractor shall be experienced with all types of electrical systems covered under this contract. No work shall be undertaken where Contractor’s firm, project supervisors and project electrical workers have not had recent experience in similar projects in area or project location. Contractor will be required to furnish proof of experience where requested by Owner or Engineer or their Representatives. H. General Contractors Project Manager or his Assistant shall be familiar with types of electrical construction required by this project in order to determine that all subcontractors work in conformance with the plans and specifications. I. Contractor shall assure that all systems have been properly installed, adjusted and tested prior to final inspection, unless, Engineer has been duly notified in writing that certain equipments are not ready for final testing and such is acceptable with Engineer. J. Additional site visits, inspections, and tests conducted by Engineer due to systems not being ready at designated time of final inspection may result in charges to Contractor by Engineer to pay for additional time of electrical inspectors not covered in Electrical Engineers scope of work. All charges will be at Engineers Standard rates. K. Contractor shall fully inspect all motors and nameplates, controls, conduit, wiring devices and other items before starting work, ordering materials or submitting shop drawings in order to verify existing conditions are as shown on plans and shall immediately notify Engineer of any discrepancies between plans & specifications and existing conditions. Failure to do so may result in responsibility for any required changes in construction. SECTION 26 05 00 Electrical Work Page 3 of 4 L. At completion of project and before final inspection, Contractor shall provide the Electrical Engineer with full size blue prints, red-lined to reflect the As-Built electrical installation. Any variation from plans shall be shown on each applicable plan sheet. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials provided under all sections of the specifications shall be new and the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. All materials shall conform to the National Electrical Code and shall be approved and listed by the Underwriters’ Laboratories. Materials described by manufacturer’s name and catalog number are selected to set a definite standard of design and quality to be required. There is not any intention to discriminate against a product of another manufacturer, which is equally durable in construction, similar in design, and will serve the purpose for which it is intended. Within 30 days after award of the contract and before any materials and equipment are placed on order, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list including catalog numbers and descriptive matter, of all materials and equipment he proposes to provide. B. Materials and equipment specifications are general in coverage and may contain reference to construction items that apply in only particular situations and may not apply as a general rule for materials installed on this project. 2.02 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Electrical plans and specifications are not intended to discriminate against any particular manufacturer. Specific values shown for a particular manufacturer’s product may vary slightly for another product. The Electrical Engineer reserves the right to interpret the electrical specifications and to make judgement as to acceptance of a product, regardless of minute details in the specifications or on the Plans. B. Specifications shall be reviewed for applicability of materials under certain conditions and in certain environments and, where not shown otherwise on plan drawings. These application directions shall be adhered to. C. Where a particular reference on drawing plans does not conform to standard acceptable construction methods for a particular type project, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and request a clarification before ordering materials or starting construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with current NEC and local codes. Conduits exposed to the weather shall be rigid galvanized steel (RGS) unless noted otherwise on plans. Conduit placed underground shall be schedule 40 PVC unless noted otherwise on plans. SECTION 26 05 00 Electrical Work Page 4 of 4 B. A fish wire shall be left in all conduits in which the permanent wiring is not installed. C. All fixtures, switch, and receptacle locations shall be approved by Engineer. D. Refer to other sections of this specification for controls. Under this section of the specifications, the Contractor shall install the control devices and provide control wiring switches, outlet boxes, and shall make all final connections. Control wiring and interlocks shall conform to wiring diagrams furnished by equipment manufacturers. E. The Contractor shall provide services of his Engineer or a factory trained technician to instruct plant-operating personnel for a period of at least one (1) full day after completion of the contract work. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. All underground conduits shall be buried to a minimum depth of 24-inches below finished grade. All trenches shall be uniform width and shall be backfilled and compacted to 95% that of original density. Any damage to underground conduits caused by other Contractors shall be repaired by this Contractor and shall be compensated accordingly by the party or parties responsible for the damage. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall upon completion of the work, remove all materials, empty containers, and any other materials that are not incorporated into the work. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 05 Selective Electrical Demolition Page 1 of 3 SECTION 26 05 05 SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical Demolition 1.02 REFERENCES A. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall he provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No.70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 305- Temporary Wiring 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Annotate existing drawings to sequence the demolition of systems, equipment removal and temporary hook-ups. B. Schedule with Engineer for required shut-downs to accommodate system demolition and installation of temporary facilities. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. By beginning demolition, installer accepts existing conditions and warrants that he will maintain service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal, and that he will return to the Owner all items and systems in good operating condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work. As specified in individual Sections. 2.02 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. The temporary electrical wiring and facilities shall be designed and constructed in strict compliance with NEC-Article No. 305. PART 3 - EXECUTION SECTION 26 05 05 Selective Electrical Demolition Page 2 of 3 3.01 REPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company to provide continuous service to operating equipment. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits. Use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Engineer at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. 3.02 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. 1. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 2. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit 6” below natural grade and cap or cut flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 3. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets, which are not removed. 4. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. 5. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 6. Repair adjacent construction and finished damaged work. 7. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 8. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work. 3.03 DISPOSAL AND SALVAGE A. Salvage electrical and instrumentation equipment removed from existing facilities for reuse as applicable. B. Material and equipment which can be reused or salvaged remains the property of the Owner unless specifically indicated in the Specifications or Drawings or as designated by the Engineer. C. Materials and equipment which cannot be reused or salvaged will be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR SECTION 26 05 05 Selective Electrical Demolition Page 3 of 3 A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 19 600-Volt Building Wire & Cable Page 1 of 4 SECTION 26 05 19 600-VOLT BUILDING WIRE & CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for 600-volt building wire and cable. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 310 - Conductors for General Wiring. B. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 1. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables 2. UL 1063: Machine Tool Wires and Cables C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, Soft D. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), ICEA S-61-402: Thermoplastic- Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy (NEMA WC-5). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Engineer’s approval. 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data 2. Instruction for handling and storage 3. Dimensions and weight 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests. Cable shall meet all the requirements of Part 6 of ICEA S-61-402. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship wire and cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Provide moisture protection by using manufacturer's standard procedure or heat shrinkable self- sealing end caps applied to both ends of the cable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS SECTION 26 05 19 600-Volt Building Wire & Cable Page 2 of 4 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Alan Wire B. American Insulated Wire Corporation C. Cerro Wire D. General Cable Company E. Houston Wire & Cable F. Okonite Company G. Interstate Wire Company H. Southwire I. Service Wire Company J. Encore Wire 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design. Provide cable designated as THWN/THHN or XHHW single conductor type and UL 83 and UL 1063 listed, rated 600 volts and certified for continuous operation at maximum conductor temperature of 90 degrees C in dry locations and 75 degrees C in wet locations while installed in underground duct, conduit or in control panels (MTW). B. Conductors. Provide conductors which are Class B, concentric stranded, annealed un-coated copper with physical and electrical properties complying with ASTM B3 and B8 and Part 2 of ICEA S-61-402. C. Insulation. Each conductor shall be PVC insulated and nylon jacketed to meet the requirements of Part 3 of ICEA S-61-402. The insulation thickness shall match the dimensions listed in NEC Table 310-13 for type THHN and THWN wire. D. Wire Marking 1. Wire marking shall be in accordance with NEC Article 310-11 and shall be printed on the wire insulation at 2-foot intervals. 2. The printing method used shall be permanent and the color shall sharply contrast with the jacket color. E. The single conductor color coding shall be as follows: System Voltage A B C Neutral 120/240 Volt 1Ph/3w Black Red White 120/208 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Red Blue White 120/240 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Orange Blue White 277/480 Volt 3Ph/4w Brown Purple Yellow Grey Motor Control 1 Black 2 Red 3 Blue Ground Green SECTION 26 05 19 600-Volt Building Wire & Cable Page 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete the cable raceway systems and underground duct banks before installing cables. B. Verify sizing of raceways and pullboxes to ensure proper accommodation for the cables. C. Check the length of the cable raceway system against the length of cable on the selected reel. D. Clean conduits of foreign matter before cables are pulled. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Wiring Methods 1. Use wiring methods indicated on the Drawings 2. In general, use THHN/THWN or XHHW building wire for lighting, power and control wiring were conductors are enclosed in raceways such as above ground conduit system, underground duct banks, or inside control panels. 3. Do not use solid conductors. 4. Use conductors not smaller than No. 12 AWG stranded for lighting circuits. 5. Use conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG for control circuits, except when part of a multiconductor cable or internal panel wiring. 6. In general, do not splice conductors unless approved by the Engineer. 7. Splices associated with taps for lighting and control circuits are allowed without approval. 8. Make splices in accessible junction boxes. 9. Use wire nuts with insulated caps for lighting wiring splices. Splice control circuit with insulated crimp connectors. B. Single Conductor in Conduit and Ductbank 1. Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and NEC Chapter 3 – Wiring Methods and Materials. Do not exceed maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum bending radius. 2. Pull cables into conduits using adequate lubrication to reduce friction. Lubricants must not be harmful to the conductor insulation. C. Preparation for Termination 1. Make 600-volt power cable terminations and splices with heat shrinkable sleeves and seals. 2. Terminal lugs and connectors for all sizes of conductors shall be crimp-on type. 3. For size 1/0 AWG and larger, crimp-on lugs shall have the long barrel with 2- hole tongues except in places where termination space is limited. SECTION 26 05 19 600-Volt Building Wire & Cable Page 4 of 4 D. Tests 1. In general, test insulation integrity of the wiring system before terminating. 2. Make sure to disconnect sensitive electronic equipment before testing insulation. 3. Use a 500 VDC megohmmeter and perform the wire system insulation test in accordance with the operating instructions. E. Termination 1. After the 600-volt wiring system has been tested with satisfactory results, reconnect wire. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors B. Equipment grounding conductors C. Bonding D. Power system grounding E. Communication system grounding F. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding G. Control equipment grounding 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wires 2. ASTM B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, Soft 3. ASTM B33: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 142-82: Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 2. IEEE 383-2.5: IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 83: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables 2. UL 467: Grounding and Bonding Equipment D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 250 - Grounding. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data 2. Installation, terminating and splicing procedure 3. Instruction for handling and storage 4. Dimensions and weight SECTION 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding Page 2 of 6 B. Submittals after construction 1. Report of field tests and observations certified by Contractor. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: 1. Use insulated cable conforming to requirements of the vertical tray flame test as described in IEEE 383-2.5. 2. Test grounding system in the field in accordance with procedures outlined in Part 3 - Execution. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship grounding cable on manufacturer's standard reel sizes unless otherwise specified. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel footage accordingly. Each reel shall contain one continuous length of cable. Provide impact protection by wood lagging or suitable barrier across the traverse of the reel. Pack and crate other materials specified to withstand normal abuse during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cable: 1. American Insulated Wire Company 2. Houston Wire & Cable 3. General Cable Company 4. Okonite Company 5. Interstate Wire Company 6. Southwire 7. Encore Wire B. Ground Rods and Connectors: 1. Blackburn 2. Copperweld 3. Thomas & Betts 4. nVent by ERICO C. Exothermic Connections: 1. Burndy Corporation (Therm-O-Weld) 2. Erico Products (Cadweld) D. Grounding Connectors: SECTION 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding Page 3 of 6 1. Burndy Corporation 2. O.Z. Gedney 3. Thomas & Betts 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Design: 1. Provide grounding cable and materials with the following characteristics: a. Use a grounding system designed in accordance with NEC Article No. 250 - Grounding, and the IEEE 142-82 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. B. Materials: 1. Use grounding conductors, bare or insulated, which are manufactured and tested in accordance with applicable standards ASTM B3, ASTM B8 and ASTM B33. 2. Where specified on Drawings, provide a main ground loop of No. 4/0 AWG, Class C stranded, bare copper cable. Small groups of isolated equipment may be grounded by a No. 2 AWG minimum insulated conductor connected to the main loop. Generally, taps shall be sized as follows: a. Main ground loop or grid: #4/0 minimum b. Switchgear, motor control centers and power transformers: #4/0 c. Motors 200 hp and above: #4/0 d. Power panels - AC and DC: #2/0 e. Control panels and consoles: #2 f. Building columns: #4/0 g. Fencing posts: #2/0 3. Where single conductor insulated grounding conductors are called for, use 600-volt insulation. Use ground conductors identified with green insulation or green tape marking. 4. Supply identifying ribbon which is PVC tape, 3 inches wide, red color, permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW" in black letters as specified in Section 26 05 53, Electrical Identification. 5. Utilize flexible copper braid across hinged chain link or fence gates to bond the movable portion to the grounded fence post. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Complete site preparation and soil compaction before trenching and driving ground rods for the underground grid. SECTION 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding Page 4 of 6 B. Verify from Drawings the exact location of stub-up points for grounding of equipment, fences and building or steel structures. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA A. Install the main ground loop at a depth of at least 30 inches below earth surface. Connect the ground loop to ground rods and to tap connections to form a complete system as indicated on the electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall give special attention to the grounding of service equipment, structures and fences to comply with the NEC, local authorities and the serving utility company. B. Electrical equipment, buildings, tanks, and other structures and equipment shall be grounded as indicated on the Drawings. Where ground rods are required, the rods shall be 10 feet long, 3/4-inch diameter, copper-clad steel ground rods, or as specified on the Drawings. Rods shall be driven vertically, and the top of the rods shall be a minimum of 18 inches below finished grade, or as specified on the Drawings. C. Local pushbutton and selector switch stations, two-wire control devices, disconnect switches, lighting transformers, panelboards, operator panels, benchboards, and the enclosures of other electrical apparatus shall be grounded through an equipment grounding conductor run with the power supply or control circuit conductors or shall be grounded as shown on the Drawings. D. Ground medium voltage motors, in addition to the grounding conductors in the motor feeder cable, with a separate No. 4/0 AWG cable to motor frame. E. Motors having power supplied by multiconductor cable shall be grounded by a separate grounding conductor in the cable and where supplied by single conductor cable in conduit by a grounding conductor pulled in the conduit. Connect ground conductors to the ground bus in the motor control center and to the ground terminal provided in the motor conduit box. F. Do not ground the insulated bearing pedestals of large motors. G. Connect ladder-type cable trays to the grounding electrode system. H. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12 inches below finished grade directly above the ground grid. I. Connect fence posts of chain link and metal fences to the main ground loop at least every 50 feet. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Grounding: 1. Make grounding connections to surfaces, which are dry and cleaned of paint, rust, oxides, scales, grease and dirt to ensure good conductivity. Clean copper and galvanized steel to remove oxide before making welds or connections. 2. Use the exothermic welding process for below-grade grounding connections, except at ground rods. Use mechanical connectors or thermal connections for above-grade grounding connections as shown on the Drawings. SECTION 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding Page 5 of 6 3. Make grounding connections to electrical equipment, vessels, mechanical equipment and ground rods in accordance with the Drawings. 4. Ground tanks and vessels by making connections to integral structural supports or to existing grounding lugs or pads, and not to the body of the tank or vessel. 5. Leave ground connections to equipment visible for inspection. Protect them with PVC non-metallic conduit as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Make connections to motor frames and ground buses with lugs attached to the equipment by means of bolts. Do not use motor anchor bolts or equipment housing for fastening lugs of grounding cable. 7. Where the wiring for lighting systems consists of single conductor cables in conduit, provide each conduit with an equipment-grounding conductor. Use a grounding conductor with green colored insulation and ground equipment in the lighting system. B. Raceway and Support Systems Grounding: 1. Install raceway, cable rack or tray and conduit so that it is bonded together and permanently grounded to the equipment ground bus, according to the Drawings. Connection to conduit may be grounding bushing or ground clamp. 2. Install raceway at low voltage motor control centers or other low voltage control equipment so that it is bonded and grounded, except that any conduit which is effectively grounded to the sheet metal enclosure by bonding bushing or hubs need not be otherwise bonded. 3. Where a grounding conductor is run in or on a cable tray, bond the grounding conductor to each section of cable tray with a cable tray ground clamp. 4. Where only grounding conductor is installed in a metal conduit, bond both ends of the conduit to the grounding conductor. 5. Provide flexible "jumpers" around raceway expansion joints. Use copper bonding straps for steel conduit. Install jumpers across cable tray joints, which have been parted to allow for expansion and any hinged cable tray connections. C. Fences and Gates: 1. Ground fences, fence posts and gates to the underground grid as shown on the Drawings. D. Power System Grounding: 1. Solidly ground the secondary neutral of the main power supply transformer either to the ground grid or through an impedance. See Drawings for details. 2. Solidly ground the neutral of lighting, instrument and control transformers. E. Cable Armor and Shields: 1. For shielded control cable, terminate and ground the shield at one end only, preferably at the control panel end for instrument and communication cable and at the supply end for electronic power cables. Maintain shield continuity SECTION 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding Page 6 of 6 by jumpering the ground shield across connection point where it is broken at junction boxes, or other splice points. Insulate these points from ground. 2. Connect the ground wire in power cable assemblies at each terminal point to a ground bus, if available, or to the equipment enclosure. Do not carry these ground wires through a "doughnut" current transformer (CT) used for ground fault relaying; do carry ground leads from stress cones through CTs. Ground power cable armor and shield at each terminal point. F. Test Wells: 1. Provide access (test wells) for testing the ground grid system at one or several ground rod locations. Make test wells of a pipe surrounding the rod and connections with a cover placed on top at grade level. See Drawings for details. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test: 1. Perform ground resistance tests after underground installation and connections to building steel are complete, unless otherwise noted on applicable Drawings. 2. Make tests at each ground test well using a "fall of potential" test method. Each ground test well shall not exceed a maximum resistance of 5 ohms. Where measured values exceed this figure, install additional ground rods as required to reduce the resistance to the specified limit. B. Inspection: 1. Inspection of the grounding system by the Engineer and the local Code Inspector must take place before the grid trenches are backfilled. 3.05 RESTORATION A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. B. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other Work to their original condition. D. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 29 Supporting Devices Page 1 of 7 SECTION 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Requirements of Division 26 "Basic Electrical Requirements" apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports B. Anchors and fasteners C. Strut D. Fittings E. Hangers F. Hanger rod G. Brackets H. Cable ties I. Spring vibration isolators. J. Concrete Equipment Pads. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with specifications: 1. Provide strut by no more than two (2) manufacturers. 2. Hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, spacing, features, and application for each required type of hanger, support, sleeve, seal, and fastener to be used. 3. Shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials. 4. Submittals in this section shall also be signed by the Structural Engineer and/or System Building Manufacturers where applicable. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following: 1. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL, ETL, CSA, or other approved, nationally recognized testing and listing agency that provides third- party certification follow-up services. 2. Comply with Federal Specification W-C-582A, FF-B-575C and FS-S-760A(2). PART 2 - PRODUCTS SECTION 26 05 29 Supporting Devices Page 2 of 7 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems: a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. American Electric c. B-Line Systems, Inc. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Unistrut Corporation 2. Hangers: a. Erico/Caddy b. Allied c. American Electric d. B-Line e. GS Metals f. Unistrut 3. Brackets: a. Erico b. Bowers c. Raco d. Steel City 4. Vibration Isolators: a. Amber/Booth b. Dynasonic c. Grinnell d. Mason Industries 2.02 COATINGS A. Coating: Strut, fittings, hangers and hanger rod shall be ASTM A123 hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Hardware fasteners and clamps shall have ASTM B633 Type III SCI electroplated zinc coatings. 2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C- clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps. Purlin hangers shall mount to the vertical member of the purlin or as otherwise required by building manufacturer and/or structural engineer. SECTION 26 05 29 Supporting Devices Page 3 of 7 B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows: 1. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using beam clamps. 2. Use steel springhead type toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. 3. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware. 4. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. 5. Do not drill structural steel members. C. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish. E. U-Channel Systems (Strut): 12-gauge steel 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" minimum channels, with 9/16" x 1-1/8" maximum short slots at 2" on center maximum. Strut shall be cold formed per ASTM A570 GR33. Joints in strut system shall be made with 4 bolt accessories as a minimum. Conduit clamps to strut shall be bolt unistrut 1100, 1200, 1400 Series or equal. F. Recessed Box Supports Brackets: Mount boxes with Erico/Caddy SGB Series, FBS Series or equal. 2.04 FIELD FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Shop or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components. B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted: a. 3-inch and smaller: 20-gauge. b. 4-inch to 6-inch: 16-gauge. c. over 6-inch: 14-gauge. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. D. All Thread Rod: Hot dip galvanized, 1/4" minimum. SECTION 26 05 29 Supporting Devices Page 4 of 7 2.05 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Hangers: Spring steel hangers shall be amber/booth BS Series or equal. B. Pads: Provide ribbed neoprene pads amber/booth Type NR or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install supporting devices to fasten electric components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC, NECA and manufacturers requirements. B. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following: 1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring- tension clamps on steel. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. 2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. 3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration and shock resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. C. Exclusions: 1. Do not fasten supports to ceiling system, pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment and conduit. 2. Tie wires and perforated pipe straps shall not be used for securing conduits. 3. Do not support loads from the bottom chord member of trusses or open web steel joists. 4. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires or ceiling tees. 5. Do not use powder-actuated anchors unless indicated by Architect or Structural Engineer. 6. Do not drill or cut structural members unless directed by Architect or Structural Engineer. D. Touch up all scratches or cuts on steel components with an approval zinc chromate or a 90 percent zinc paint. Use PVC compound on PVC coated components. 3.02 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND SLEEVES SECTION 26 05 29 Supporting Devices Page 5 of 7 A. Fabricate supports form structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nut unless otherwise noted. B. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four. C. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. D. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. Where conduit is of different sizes, use the same trapeze hanger space supports for the smallest size conduit on the rack. E. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use ¼-inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. F. Branch circuit raceways which are 1-inch or smaller may be attached to wall studs by use manufactured clips. G. Space supports for raceways in accordance with NEC. H. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. I. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire-rated wall or floor construction, apply UL-listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables. 3.03 BOXES AND WIRING DEVICES A. Structural Mounting: They shall be rigidly supported from a structural member of the building either directly or by using a metal or wood brace. Support wires that do not provide rigid support shall not be permitted as the sole support. B. Outlet or junction boxes in exposed or concealed ceilings, all thread rod, manufactured brackets shall be mounted to building structure, strut suspended from building structure. Do not support boxes with conduit only or with all thread rod. C. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. D. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box. E. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. F. Metal braces shall be protected against corrosion and formed from metal not less than .020 inch (508 micrometers) thick uncoated. SECTION 26 05 29 Supporting Devices Page 6 of 7 G. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. H. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or tees. 3.04 CABLE TRAYS A. Cable tray shall be supported with strut, all thread rod and beam clamps at intervals no longer than as specified 3.05 WIRES AND CABLES A. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors. 3.06 BUSWAY A. Provide hangers and supports by busway manufacturer at intervals 3.07 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide supports as indicated in Section 26 51 19 3.08 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. This shall include but not be limited to cabinets, enclosures, disconnect switches, panelboards, motor controllers, VFD's, small transfer switches and wireways. B. All cabinets and panelboards shall be wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboard one inch off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. 3.09 INDOOR FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. This shall include but not be limited to switchboards, dry type transformers and large transfer switches. B. Free standing equipment shall be installed on concrete pads unless noted otherwise. C. Concrete pads shall be 3" tall and be 2" wider than equipment on all 4 sides. D. Concrete shall be 3000 PSI, 28 day compressive strength. E. Concrete, forms and reinforcing shall be in accordance with Division 3. F. Floor mounted transformers shall also be provided with neoprene vibration isolation pads. 3.10 INDOOR SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment to be suspended shall be supported with strut, with all thread rod and beam clamps. SECTION 26 05 29 Supporting Devices Page 7 of 7 B. Transformers shall also have spring steel hanger vibration isolators. 3.11 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR RACK OR PEDESTAL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be rack or pedestal mounted only where indicated or required by installation. B. Mount on strut bolted to concrete or anchored with concrete base when located outside. 3.12 OUTDOOR PAD MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. This shall include but not be limited to distribution transformers, switchgear, switchboards, dry type transformers, motor control centers and generators. B. Concrete pads shall have a footprint 12" larger than equipment on all sides. C. Concrete pads shall be 6" thick with 18" deep by 12" wide grade beams on all sides. D. Concrete shall be 3000 PSI, 28 day compressive strength. E. Provide 6" wire mesh in pad. F. Provide 4#4 bar with #3 stirrups at 18" on center in grade beams. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 1 of 27 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for: a. Conduits b. Conduit fittings c. Conduit supports d. Wireways e. Outlet boxes f. Pull and junction boxes B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 1 – General Requirements 2. Section 26 05 43 – Underground Ducts & Pull Boxes 3. Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Underfloor Conduits 1. Conduits which run underground within perimeter of building walls under building floor. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. B. Duct Bank Conduits 1. Conduits which run underground outside perimeter of building walls. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. C. Underground Conduits 1. Underground conduits are both under floor conduits and duct bank conduits. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Division 1 – General Requirements for requirements for mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data: a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification Section. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 2 of 27 a. Identify dimensional size of pull and junction boxes to be used 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100 B. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA) 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware c. D2105, Standard Test Method for Longitudinal Tensile Properties of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Tube d. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems e. F512, Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) b. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) c. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit d. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. C80.1, Electric Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC) b. C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) c. C80.5, Electrical Aluminum Rigid Conduit d. OS 1, Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 3 of 27 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit b. 6, Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel c. 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations d. 360, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit e. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment f. 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes g. 514B, Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings h. 651, Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings i. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing – Steel j. 870, Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings k. 886, Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations l. 1660, Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit C. Comply with NECA "Standard of Installation" PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufactures are acceptable: 1. Rigid metallic conduits: a. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation b. Triangle PWC Inc c. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation d. Wheatland Tube Company e. LTV Steel Company f. EASCO Aluminum g. Indalex h. VAW of American, Inc. 2. PVC coated rigid metallic conduit and repair kits: a. Calbond b. KorKap c. Perma-Cote d. Rob-Roy Ind e. Raychem “GelTek” tape SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 4 of 27 f. Thomas & Betts O-Cal g. NEC Black Guard 3. Rigid non-metallic conduit: a. Carlon b. Cantex c. Heritage Plastics d. Osburn Associates e. Prime Conduit f. Champion Fiberglass g. United Fiberglass of America, Inc. h. Allied Tube & Conduit i. Atkore FRE Composites 4. Flexible metallic conduit: a. AFC Cable Systems b. Anamet, Inc. c. Carlon d. Electri-Flex e. Flexible Metal Hose Company f. International Metal Hose Company g. Triangle PWC Inc. h. LTV Steel Company 5. Flexible non-metallic conduit a. Carlon b. Carflex 6. Wireway: a. Hoffman Engineering Company b. Weigmann c. Square D 7. Conduit fittings and accessories: a. Appleton b. Carlon c. Cantex d. Crouse-Hinds e. Killark f. Osburn Associates SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 5 of 27 g. OZ Gedney Company h. RACO i. Steel City j. Thomas and Betts 8. Support systems: a. Unistrut Building Systems b. B-Line Systems Inc. c. Kindorf d. Minerallac Fastening Systems e. Caddy 9. Outlet, pull, and junction boxes: a. Appleton b. Crouse-Hinds c. Killark d. OZ Gedney Company e. Steel City f. RACO g. Bell h. Hoffman Engineering Company i. Wiegmann j. B-Line Circle AW k. Adalet l. Rittal 10. Anti-seize compound: a. Crouse-Hinds 2.02 RIGID METALLIC CONDUITS A. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) exterior coating: a. Coating: Bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to NEMA/ANSI C80.1 b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating 2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating 3. Urethane coating on threads SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 6 of 27 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings 5. Female Ends: a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2 in, whichever is less beyond the opening b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it 6. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1 B. PVC-Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit (PVC-RAC): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) exterior coating: a. Coating: Bonded to rigid aluminum conduit conforming to NEMA/ANSI C80.1 b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating 2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating 3. Urethane coating on threads 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings 5. Female Ends: a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2 in, whichever is less beyond the opening. b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it. 6. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1 C. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing 3. Threads galvanized after cutting 4. Internal coating: Backed lacquer, varnish, or enamel for smooth surface 5. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.1, UL 6 6. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) is an acceptable alternative to RGS D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing 3. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish, or enamel for a smooth surface 4. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.3, UL 797 E. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC): SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 7 of 27 1. AA Type 6063 aluminum allow, T-1 temper 2. Maximum copper content of 0.10 percent 3. Extruded, seamless 4. Standards: NEMA/ANSI C80.5, UL 6 2.03 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT A. Schedules 40 (PVC-40) and 80 (PVC-80) 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound which includes inert modifiers to improve weatherability and heat distribution. 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission 4. Shall be suitable for use with 90 DegC wire and shall be marked “maximum 90 DegC”. 5. Standards: NEMA TC 2, UL 651 B. Fiberglass: 1. Epoxy based resin system using an anhydride curing agent 2. Continuous E-glass roving 3. Winding angle approximately 54.75 degrees 4. Halogen free additive for flame spread and smoke control 5. Ultraviolet inhibitor: Carbon black 6. Two (2) step curing process 7. Tensile strength: 9000 psi per ASTM D2105 8. Integral bell and spigot 9. Conduits and fittings to be joined with an epoxy adhesive creating a water tight connection 10. Standard: UL 1684 2.04 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. Flexible Galvanized Steel Conduit (FLEX): 1. Formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked 2. Standard: UL 360 B. PVC-Coated Flexible Galvanized Steel (liquid-tight) Conduit (FLEX-LT): 1. Core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked 2. Extruded PVC outer jacket positively locked to the steel core 3. Liquid and vaportight SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 8 of 27 4. Standard: UL 360 C. Flexible non-metallic (liquid-tight) conduit (FLEX-NM): 1. Formed of a helically wound spiral of rigid PVC reinforcement embedded within a flexible PVC wall 2. Layered construction with a smooth seamless inner core of flexible PVC that is bonded to a covering of flexible PVC 3. Between the layers is a woven nylon mesh for reinforcement 4. Standard: UL1660 2.05 WIREWAY A. General: 1. Suitable for lay-in conductors 2. Designed for continuous grounding 3. Covers: a. Hinged or removable in accessible areas b. Non-removable when passing through partitions c. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer’s standard paint inside and out except for stainless steel type. d. Standards: UL 870, NEMA 250 B. General Purpose (NEMA 1 rated) Wireway: 1. 14 or 16 gage steel without knockouts 2. Cover: Non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws C. Raintight (NEMA 3R rated) Wiring Trough: 1. 14 or 16 gage galvanized steel without knockouts 2. Cover: Non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws D. Watertight (NEMA 4X rated) Wireway: 1. 14 gage type 304 or 316 stainless steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 gage stainless steel flanges 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with continuous piano hinge with three-point latch 3. Flanges: Fully Gasketed and bolted E. Dusttight (NEMA 12 rated) Wireway: 1. 14 gage steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 gage steel flanges 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with continuous piano hinge with three-point latch 3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 9 of 27 2.06 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fittings for use with RGS: 1. General: a. In hazardous locations, provide fittings listed for use in Class I, Groups C and D locations 2. Locknuts: a. Threaded steel or malleable iron b. Gasketed or non-gasketed c. Grounding or non-grounding type 3. Bushings: a. Threaded, insulated metallic b. Grounding or non-grounding type 4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection 5. Couplings: a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on b. Threadless type: Gland compression or self-threading type, concrete tight 6. Unions: Threaded galvanized steel or zinc plated malleable iron 7. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Zink plated cast iron with threaded hubs b. Standard and mogul size c. Cover: 1) Clip-on type with stainless steel screws 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron 8. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron 9. Sealing fittings: a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron with threaded hubs b. Standard and mogul size c. With or without drain and breather d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting B. Fittings for use with RAC: 1. General: SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 10 of 27 a. In hazardous locations, provide fittings listed for use in Class I, Groups C and D locations 2. Locknuts: a. Threaded stainless steel b. Gasketed or non-gasketed c. Grounding or non-grounding type 3. Bushings: a. Threaded, insulated metallic b. Grounding or non-grounding type 4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection 5. Couplings: a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on 6. Unions: Threaded copper free cast aluminum 7. Conduit bodies: a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum with threaded hubs b. Standard and mogul size c. Cover: 1) Clip-on type with stainless steel screws 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed copper free cast aluminum 8. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, copper free cast aluminum 9. Sealing fittings: a. Body: Copper free cast aluminum with threaded hubs b. Standard and mogul size c. With or without drain and breather d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting C. Fittings for use with PVC-RGS: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph “Fittings for use with RGS” and coated as defined under paragraph “PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS). D. Fittings for use with PVC-RAC: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph “Fittings for use with RAC” and coated as defined under paragraph “PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS). E. Fittings for use with EMT: SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 11 of 27 1. Connectors: a. Straight, angle and offset types furnished with locknuts b. Zinc plated steel c. Insulated gland compression type d. Concrete and raintight 2. Couplings: a. Zinc plated steel b. Gland compression type c. Concrete and raintight 3. Conduit bodies (ells and tees): a. Body: Copper free aluminum with threaded hubs b. Standard and mogul size c. Cover: 1) Screw down type with steel screws 2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel or copper free aluminum 4. Standard: UL 514B F. Fittings for use with FLEX: 1. Connector: a. Zinc plated malleable iron b. Squeeze or clamp type 2. Standard: UL 514B G. Fittings for use with FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM: 1. Connector: a. Straight or angle type b. Metal construction, insulated and gasketed c. Composed of locknut, grounding ferrule and gland compression nut d. Liquid tight 2. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B H. Fittings for use with Rigid Non-Metallic PVC Conduit: 1. Coupling, adapters, and conduit bodies: a. Same material, thickness, and construction as the conduits with which they are used b. Homogeneous plastic free from visible cracks, holes, or foreign inclusions c. Bore smooth and free of blisters, nicks or other imperfections which could damage the conductor SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 12 of 27 2. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings. 3. Standards: ASTM D2564, NEMA TC3, UL 651, UL 541B I. Fittings for use with Rigid Non-Metallic Fiberglass Conduit: 1. Coupling and adapters shall be of the same material, thickness, and construction as the conduit. 2. Epoxy adhesive for joining conduits and fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings and shall provide a water tight connection. 3. Standard: UL 1684 J. Weather and Corrosion Protection Tape: 1. PVC based tape, 10 miles thick 2. Protection against moisture, acids, alkalis, salts and sewage and suitable for direct bury. 3. Used with appropriate pipe primer 2.07 ALL RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A. Mark Products: 1. Identify the nominal trade size on the product 2. Stamp with the name or trademark of the manufacturer 2.08 OUTLET BOXES A. Metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Hot-dip galvanized steel 2. Conduit knockouts and grounding pigtail 3. Styles: a. 2 IN x 3 IN rectangle b. 4 IN square c. 4 IN octagon d. Masonry/tile 4. Accessories: a. Flat blank cover plats b. Barriers c. Extension, plaster or tile rings d. Box supporting brackets in stud walls e. Adjustable bar hangers 5. Standards: NEMA/ANSI OS 1, UL 514A SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 13 of 27 B. Cast Outlet Boxes: 1. Zinc plated cast iron or die-cast copper free aluminum with manufacturer’s standard finish. 2. Threaded hubs and grounding screw 3. Styles: a. “FS” of “FD” b. Single or multiple gang and tandem c. “EDS” or “EFS” for hazardous locations 4. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating 5. Standards: UL 514A, UL 886 C. Non-metallic Outlet Boxes: 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission 4. Suitable for use with 90 DegC wire 5. Styles: a. “FS” or “FD” b. Single or multiple gang 6. Standard: UL 514A, NEMA TC 3 D. See Specification 16140 for wiring devices, wallplates, and cover plates. 2.09 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. NEMA 1 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 gage minimum, galvanized steel or steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer’s standard paint inside and out. 2. With or without concentric knockouts on four (4) sides 3. Flat cover fastened with screws B. NEMA 3R Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 gage minimum steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer’s standard paint inside and out. 2. No knockouts 3. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth 4. Door with hinge and latch C. NEMA 4X Rated (metallic): 1. Body and cover: 14 gage type 304 or 316 stainless steel 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 14 of 27 3. No knockouts 4. External mounting flanges 5. Door with oil-resistant gasket D. NEMA 4X Rated (non-metallic): 1. Body and cover: Ultraviolet light protected fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes 2. No knockouts 3. External mounting flanges 4. Hinged door with quick release latches and padlocking hasp 5. Door with oil resistant gasket E. NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 Rated: 1. Cast gray iron allow or copper-free aluminum with manufacturer’s standard finish 2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub 3. Cover bolted down with stainless steel bolts or threaded cover with neoprene gasket 4. External mounting flanges 5. Grounding lug 6. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating F. NEMA 12 Rated: 1. Body and cover: a. 14 gage steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer’s standard paint inside and out b. Type 5052 H-32 aluminum, unpainted 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth 3. No knockouts 4. External mounting flanges 5. Non-hinged cover held closed with captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells or hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Flat door with oil resistant gasket G. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 SF or heavier than 25 LBS 2. Split covers when heavier than 25 LBS 3. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits 4. Tamper proof screws SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 15 of 27 5. Terminal blocks: Screw-post barrier-type, rated 600 volt and 20 ampere minimum H. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 50 2.10 SPECIAL PURPOSE BOXES A. Pedestal-Type Floor-Mounted or Counter-Mounted Duplex Receptacles: 1. Horizontal design housing with threaded conduit fittings in base with satin chromium finish B. Flush in Floor Duplex Receptacles: 1. Dual level, full adjustable box with power fittings and brass carpet flange 2.11 SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Multi-conduit Surface or Trapeze Type Support and Pull or Junction Box Supports: 1. Material Requirements a. Galvanized steel: ASTEM A123 or ASTM A153 b. Stainless steel: AISI Type 304 or 316 c. PVC coated galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 and 20 mil PVC coating d. Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6 e. Fiberglass: Fire-retardant polyester or vinylester resin, ASTM E84, UL 94 B. Single Conduit and Outlet Box Support Fasteners: 1. Material Requirements: a. Zinc plated steel b. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316 c. Malleable iron d. PVC coated malleable iron or steel: 20 mil PVC coating e. Steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish 2.12 RACEWAY/DUCT SEALING COMPOUND A. Use with explosion-proof fittings to separate hazardous areas from non- hazardous areas: 1. UL Listed compound 2. Crouse-Hinds Chico or approved equal 3. Use fiber dam for vertical installation B. All other areas: 1. Non-hardening, putty-like consistency workable at temperatures as low as 35 F. SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 16 of 27 2. Compound shall not slump at temperature of 300 F and shall readily adhere to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY INSTALLATION – GENERAL A. Shall be in accordance with requirements of: 1. NFPA 70- NEC 2. Manufacturer’s instructions B. Size of Raceways: 1. Raceway sizes are shown on Drawings. If not shown on the Drawings, then size in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the minimum raceway size shall be: a. Conduit: 1 IN b. Wireway: 2-1/2 IN x 2-1/2 IN C. Field Bending and Cutting of Conduits: 1. Utilize tools and equipment recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit, designed for the purpose and the conduit material to make all field bends and cuts. 2. Do not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit when making conduit bends. 3. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent damage to the PVC coating. Use strap wrenches only to tighten joints in PVC-RGS. Replace all conduit and fittings with damage to the PVC coating, such as cuts, nicks, and threader chuck jaw marks. 4. Degrease threads after threading and apply a zinc rich paint 5. Deburr interior and exterior after cutting D. Male threads of conduit systems shall be coated with an electrically conductive anti-seize compound. E. The protective coating integrity of conduits, fittings, outlet, pull and junction boxes and accessories shall be maintained. 1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint. 2. Repair painted components utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer. 3. Repair PVC coated components utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating, provided by the manufacturer of the conduit; or a self- adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked silicon composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape. SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 17 of 27 a. Total nominal thickness: 40 mil. 4. Repair surface which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation. F. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire is pulled into place. 1. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally ¼ IN smaller than the interior of the conduit, to remove obstructions. 2. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit. 3. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until wire is pulled. G. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull wire and cable in conduit systems. H. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 IN of slack at each end of the pull wire. I. Where portions of a raceway are subject to different temperatures and where condensation is known to be a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings or where passing from the interior to the exterior of a building, the raceway shall be sealed to prevent circulation of warm air to colder section of the raceway. J. Fill openings in walls, floor, and ceilings and finish flush with surface. 1. Where penetrating CMU block walls, repair with cementitious grout and paint to match. 2. Where conduit terminates at a cable tray system, fit conduit with an insulated bushing. 3. When conduits are passing through a firewall or fire-rated floor into different rooms, cabinets, or enclosures, use a fire-rated seal. K. Install explosion-proof seals in conduit runs crossing or entering a hazardous classified area. Install CSBE removable sealing fittings to seal submersible pump cables in the wet well and at the first junction box outside the well. L. Conduit Stub-ups 1. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above finished slab. 2. Transition underground conduit to aboveground conduit at 90 DEG elbow where conduit transitions from horizontal to vertical conduit. 3. Where RGC or RAC is in contact with earth or concrete, wrap conduit with corrosion protective tap to 4 IN above finished grade. 4. Stub-up connections: Extend conduits for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with finished floor. 3.02 RACEWAY ROUTING A. Raceways shall be routed in the field unless otherwise indicated. SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 18 of 27 1. Conduit and fittings shall be installed, as required, for a complete system that has a neat appearance and is in compliance with all applicable codes. 2. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angles to building lines. 3. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom. 4. Do not route conduits: a. Through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat b. In suspended concrete slabs 5. Conduit shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for operation, maintenance and repair. 6. Provide pull boxes or conduit bodies as needed so that there is a maximum of 270 degrees of bends or 3-90 degree bends in the conduit run or in long straight runs to limit pulling tensions. 7. Make changes in direction of conduit using elbows or fittings. Do not use pull boxes to make direction changes unless specifically designated otherwise. B. All rigid conduits within a structure shall be installed exposed except as follows: 1. As indicated on the Drawings 2. Concealed above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile suspended ceilings. 3. Concealed within stud frame, poured concrete, concrete block and brick walls of an architecturally finished area. 4. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor serving equipment in non- architecturally finished areas that are not locate on or near a wall or column and the ceiling height is greater than 12 FT. 5. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor slabs where shown on the Drawings or with the Engineer’s permission. C. Maintain minimum spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs in accordance with the following when runs are greater than 30 FT: 1. Between instrumentation and telecommunication: 1 IN. 2. Between instrumentation and 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc: 2 IN. 3. Between instrumentation and 600 V and less AC power or control: 12 IN. 4. Between instrumentation and greater than 600 Vac power: 12 IN. 5. Between telecommunication and 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc: 2 IN. 6. Between telecommunication and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 IN. 7. Between telecommunication and greater than 600 Vac power: 12 IN. 8. Between 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc and 600 V and less AC power or control: 1 IN. 9. Between 125 V, 48 V, and 24 Vdc and greater than 600 V power or control: 2 IN. SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 19 of 27 10. Between process, gas, air, and water pipes: 6 IN. D. Conduits shall be installed to eliminate moisture pockets. 1. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run. E. Conduit shall not be routed on the exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the Drawings. F. Where sufficient room exists within the housing of roof-mounted equipment, the conduit shall be stubbed up inside the housing. G. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. Repair penetrations to existing condition or better. H. Conduit embedded in columns and floor slabs or buried under slab-on-grade: 1. Run in the most direct, practical route. 2. Not to be installed under equipment pads unless approved by Engineer. 3. No crossovers unless approved by Engineer. 4. To be backfilled with concrete during the installation of the slab-on-grade or to be placed, backfilled, and compacted in the slab subgrade, as indicated on drawings. 5. Secured in place to prevent movement during the backfill and pour. I. Conduits and accessories embedded in concrete where shown on the Drawings: 1. Shall not be considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete except as indicated in the following: a. Conduit and fittings shall not displace more than 4 percent of the area of the cross-section of a column on which stress is calculated or which is required for fire protection. b. Size and locate sleeves or conduits passing through floors, walls, or beams so as not to significantly impair the strength of the construction. c. Sleeves or conduits passing through floors, walls or beams may be considered as replacing the displaced concrete structurally in compression. 1) Shall not be exposed to rusting or other deterioration 2) Nominal inside diameter shall not exceed 2 IN. 3) Minimum spacing: 3 DIA OC 2. Shall not be larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of the slab, column, or beam. 3. Shall have a minimum spacing of 3 DIA OC 4. In reinforced concrete construction: a. Conduit shall not be run in beams b. Place conduit after reinforcing steel has been laid SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 20 of 27 c. The reinforcement steel shall not be displaced by the conduit d. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 IN of cover over conduit, excluding surface finish. e. Conduits parallel to main reinforcement shall be run near the center of the wall. f. Conduits perpendicular to main reinforcement shall be run midway between wall or slab supports. 3.03 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Permitted Raceway Types Per Area Designations (unless specifically indicated on Drawings): 1. Dry areas: a. RGS b. RAC 2. Wet areas: a. RGS b. RAC 3. Exterior Corrosive areas (includes, but not limited to wastewater project sites): a. PVC-RGS b. PVC-RAC 4. Interior Corrosive areas (includes, but not limited to chemical rooms): a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 c. Fiberglass d. As indicated on drawings B. Permitted Raceway types per Routing Locations: 1. In stud framed walls: a. EMT 2. In concrete block or brick walls: a. PVC-40 3. Above acoustical tile ceilings: a. EMT b. NEMA 1 rated Wireway 4. Embedded in poured concrete walls and floors: a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 21 of 27 c. Fiberglass d. PVC-RGS when emerging from concrete into areas designated as exterior and corrosive. 5. Beneath floor slab-on grade: a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 c. Fiberglass 6. Direct buried conduits and ductbanks: a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 c. Fiberglass d. 90 degree elbows for transition to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS 2) Fiberglass e. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees. 1) PVC-RGS 2) Fiberglass 7. Concrete encased ductbanks: a. PVC-40 b. PVC-80 c. Fiberglass d. 90 degree elbows for transition to above grade: 1) PVC-RGS 2) Fiberglass e. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees. 1) PVC-RGS 2) Fiberglass C. FLEX conduits shall be installed for connections to light fixtures, HVAC equipment and other similar devices above the ceilings. 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 FT to light fixtures b. 3 FT to all other equipment D. FLEX-LT and FLEX-NM conduits shall be installed as the final conduit connection to light fixtures, dry type transformers, motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements, and other electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 22 of 27 1. The maximum length shall not exceed: a. 6 FT to light fixtures b. 3 FT to motors c. 2 FT to all other equipment E. NEMA 1 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in electrical rooms 2. Surface mounted above removable ceilings tiles of an architecturally finished area. F. NEMA 3R Wiring Trough: 1. Surface mounted in exterior, non-corrosive locations G. NEMA 4X Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as corrosive H. NEMA 12 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in architecturally and non- architecturally finished areas. 3.04 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Seals: 1. Install in conduit systems located in hazardous areas as required by the NEC or as shown on Drawings. B. Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings shall be joined utilizing solvent cement. 1. Immediately after installation of conduit and fitting, the fitting or conduit shall be rotated ¼ turn to provide uniform contact. C. Install Expansion Fittings: 1. Where conduits are exposed to the sun and conduit run is greater than 200 FT. 2. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings. D. Install Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. Where conduits enter a structure a. Except electrical manholes and handholes b. Except where the duct bank is tied to the structure with rebar 2. Where conduits span structural expansion joints 3. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings E. Threaded connections shall be made wrench-tight. F. Conduit joints shall be watertight: 1. Where subjected to possible submersion SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 23 of 27 2. In areas classified as wet 3. Underground G. Terminate Conduits: 1. In metallic outlet boxes: a. RGS and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut 2) Insulated bushing and two (2) locknuts 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut 2. In NEMA 1 rated enclosures: a. RGS and RAC: 1) Conduit hub and locknut 2) Insulated bushing and two (2) locknuts 3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC b. EMT: Compression type connector and locknut 3. In NEMA 12 rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut b. Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NEC 4. In NEMA 3R, 4 and NEMA 4X rated enclosures: a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut 5. In NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated enclosures: a. Into an integral threaded hub 6. When stubbed up through the floor into floor mounted equipment: a. With an insulated grounding bushing on metallic conduits b. With end bells on non-metallic conduits H. Threadless couplings shall only be used to join new conduit to existing conduit when the existing conduit end is not threaded and it is not practical or possible to cut threads on the existing conduit with a pipe threader 3.05 CONDUIT SUPPORT A. Permitted multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support system per area designations and conduit types: 1. Dry or wet and/ or hazardous areas: a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps b. Aluminum system consisting of: Aluminum channels, fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 24 of 27 c. Stainless steel system consisting of: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps 2. Corrosive areas: a. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware b. Fiberglass system consisting of: Fiberglass channel and fittings, and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware c. Stainless steel systems consisting of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit straps 3. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support system material a. Galvanized steel system may be used with RGS and EMT b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS, PVC-RGS and RAC c. PVC coated galvanized steel system may be used with PVC-RGS, RAC, PVC-40, PVC-80, and Fiberglass d. Aluminum system may be used with RAC and PVC-RGS e. Fiberglass system may be used with PVC-40, PVC-80, PVC-RGS, and Fiberglass B. Permitted single conduit support fasteners per area designations and conduit types: 1. Architecturally finished areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, or steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish b. Types of fasteners: Spring type hangers and clips, straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps c. Provide anti-rattle conduit supports when conduits are routed through metal studs 2. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, stainless steel and malleable iron b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps 3. Corrosive areas: a. Material: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel or PVC coated malleable iron or steel For indoor corrosive areas, non-metallic PVC or fiberglass straps may be used b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts, and bolt on beam clamps 4. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support fastener material a. Zinc plated steel, steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish and malleable iron fasteners may be used with RGS and EMT SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 25 of 27 b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS, PVC-RGS, and RAC c. PVC coated fasteners may be used with PVC-RGS, RAC, PVC 40, and PVC-80 d. Non-metallic fasteners may be used with PVC-40, PVC-80, and fiberglass C. Conduit Support General Requirements: 1. Maximum spacing between conduit supports per NEC 2. Support conduit from the building structure 3. Do not support conduit from process, gas, air, water piping or other conduits 4. Provide hangers and brackets to limit the maximum uniform load on a single support to 25 LBS or to the maximum uniform load Recommended by the manufacturer if the support is rated less than 25 LBS a. Do not exceed the maximum concentrated load recommended by the manufacturer on any support b. Conduit hangers: 1) Continuous threaded rods combined with struts or conduit clamps: Do not use perforated strap hangers and iron bailing wire c. Do not use suspended ceiling support systems to support raceways d. Hangers in metal roof decks: 1) Utilize fender washers 2) Not extend above top of ribs 3) Not interfere with vapor barrier, insulation, or roofing 5. Conduit support system fasteners: a. Use sleeve-type expansion anchors as fasteners in masonry wall construction b. Do not use concrete nails and powder-driven fasteners 3.06 OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions 2. Install approved thread grease on all plugs prior to installation 3. Fill unused punched-out tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs Size boxes to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed and quantity of conduits connected to the box B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Permitted uses of metallic outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices: 1) Recessed in all stud framed walls and ceilings 2) Recessed in poured concrete, concrete block, and brick walls of SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 26 of 27 architecturally finished areas and exterior building walls b. Pull or junction box: 1) Above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile ceilings 2) Above 10 FT in an architecturally finished area where there is no ceiling 2. Permitted uses of cast outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, corrosive, and hazardous areas b. Pull and junction box surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, and corrosive areas 3. Permitted uses of non-metallic outlet boxes: a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished corrosive areas b. Pull and junction boxes mounted in non-architecturally finished corrosive areas 4. Mount devices outlet boxes where indicated on the Drawings and at the following heights: a. Light switch (to center): 48 IN b. Receptacle in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 IN c. Receptacle on exterior wall of building (to center): 18 IN d. Receptacle in non-architecturally finished areas (to center): 48 IN e. Telephone outlet in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 IN f. Telephone outlet for wall-mounted phone (to center): 54 IN g. Pushbutton or selector switch control station (to center): 48 IN 5. Set device outlet boxes plumb and vertical to the floor 6. Outlet boxes recessed in walls: a. Install with appropriate stud wall support brackets or adjustable bar hangers so that they are flush with the face of the wall b. Locate in ungrouted cell of concrete block with bottom edge of box flush with bottom edge of block and flush with the face of the block 7. Place barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases 8. Back-to-back installations are not permitted 9. When an outlet box is connected to a PVC coated conduit, the box shall also be PVC coated C. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Install pull or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes Page 27 of 27 a. Make covers of boxes accessible 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted above removable ceiling tiles of an architecturally finished area b. Pull or junction box surface in a non-architecturally finished area 3. Permitted uses of NEMA 3R enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in dry and wet areas, unless stated otherwise in Drawings 4. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive 5. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X non-metallic enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in indoor areas designated as wet and/or corrosive where used with PVC-40 or PVC-80 conduit 6. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in Class I hazardous areas 1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive areas when PVC-RGS conduit is used 7. Permitted uses of NEMA 9 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in Class II hazardous areas 1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive areas when PVC-RGS conduit is used 8. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as dry END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Pull Boxes Page 1 of 5 SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND PULL BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ducts 2. Duct banks 3. Pull Boxes 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C2-93 - National Electrical Safety Code. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Duct: General term for electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, specified for use underground, embedded in earth or concrete. B. Duct Bank: Group of two or more ducts in continuous run between two points. C. Underfloor Conduits. 1. Conduits which run underground within perimeter of building walls under building floor. This may consist of one conduit, or several conduits grouped together. D. Duct Bank Conduits 1. Conduits which run underground outside perimeter of building walls may consist of 1 conduit, or several conduits grouped together. E. Underground Conduits 1. Underground conduits are both underfloor conduits and duct bank conduits. F. Pull boxes: Below-the-surface enclosure in connection with ducts into which people reach, but do not enter, for purpose of installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or wiring. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer’s approval. B. Submittals are not required if Contractor supplies materials or equipment of specified or named manufacturers. If Contractor proposes substitutions to material or equipment of specified or named manufacturers, submittals identified below are required. SECTION 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Pull Boxes Page 2 of 5 1. Product data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers of precast pull boxes shall be firms regularly engaged in manufacturing factory-fabricated pull boxes, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 yrs. B. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store precast concrete units at site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination of Work: 1. Coordinate layout and installation of pull boxes with final arrangement of ducts as influenced by actual final location of other utilities in field. 2. Coordinate elevations of duct and raceway entrances into pull boxes with final profiles of ducts and raceways as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and buildings. 3. Establish locations and elevations to suit field conditions and assure duct banks run drain to pull boxes, or as shown on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Conform to Raceways, Section 26 05 33. 2.02 DUCT BANK ACCESSORIES A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete cover depths indicated, while rigidly supporting ducts during concreting. 2.03 PULL BOXES AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Pull Boxes Page 3 of 5 A. Frames and Covers: Cast iron conforming to ANSI C2, Rule 323. Furnish with cast-in legend, "Electric" or "Signal" as appropriate. Cover-to-frame bearing surfaces machined. B. Sump Frame and Grate: Comply with FS RR-F-621, Type VII for frame, Type I for cover. C. Pulling Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with rebar fastening insert. 2-in. dia eye, 1-in. by 4-in. long bolt. Working load embedded in 6-in., 4,000 psi concrete: 13,000-lbs. minimum tension. 2.04 MASONRY (NOT USED) 2.05 PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES (NOT USED) 2.06 RACEWAY/DUCT SEALING COMPOUND A. Compound: 1. Non-hardening, putty-like consistency workable at temperatures as low as 35 F. 2. Compound shall not slump at temperature of 300 F and shall readily adhere to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING METHOD A. General: Install ducts for wiring runs indicated. Provide sizes as indicated. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation: Cut trenches neatly and uniformly, and slope uniformly to required pitch. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS A. Slope: Pitch ducts to drain towards manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Minimum slope shall be 4-in. in 100-ft. Where necessary to achieve this between manholes, slope ducts from high point in run to drain in both directions. B. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at building entrances. For other curves and bends, except as otherwise indicated, use manufactured long sweep bends with minimum radius of 25ft. in both horizontal and vertical directions. C. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. SECTION 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Pull Boxes Page 4 of 5 D. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and required duct spacing, and install in accordance with following: 1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, and secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel in such way as to form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Reinforcing: Reinforce duct banks. Size and arrange reinforcing steel as indicated on Drawings. 3. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power- driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct bank application. Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation unless approved by Engineer. Where more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in vertical plane and continue duct bank reinforcing minimum of 18-in. beyond termination of pour. 4. Forms: Walls of trench may be used to form side walls of duct bank provided soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions. Use forms where soil is not self-supporting. 5. Minimum Clearances: As Indicated on Drawings. 6. Depth: Except as otherwise indicated, top of duct bank shall be 24-in. below finished grade, minimum, in non-traffic areas, and 30 in. below finished grade, minimum, in vehicular traffic areas. E. Stub-ups: Duct stub-ups to equipment shall be rigid steel, PVC-coated rigid steel, or rigid aluminum type conduit matching the above ground conduit requirements for the area. PVC conduit is not permitted to be used. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete pads, steel conduit shall extend minimum of 5-ft. away from edge of pad. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for purpose and encased concrete. 1. For galvanized rigid steel and aluminum conduit, wrap all portions of the conduit exposed to soil or concrete to 4” above finished grade with corrosion protection tape. F. Sealing: For ducts to be wired in this Project, provide temporary closure at terminations. For spare ducts, seal bore of ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs as required to withstand 15 psi minimum hydrostatic pressure. G. Pulling Cord: Provide 100-lb test nylon cord in ducts including spares. H. Marker Tape: Provide plastic marker tape over ducts at 12 in. below finished grade. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PULL BOXES, GENERAL A. General: SECTION 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Pull Boxes Page 5 of 5 1. Provide pull boxes of sizes, shapes, and locations as indicated. 2. Determine final elevation of ducts as influenced by possible adjustments in other utilities and surface features and discovery of underground obstructions before installing pull boxes. Obtain Engineer’s approval for pull boxes installation adjustments necessitated by obstructions. 3. Install units plumb and level and with orientation and depth coordinated with arrangement of connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Elevation: 1. Pull Boxes: Install flush with grade. C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units where indicated. Arrange to coordinate with drainage provisions as indicated or specified. 3.05 CLEANING AND RESTORATION A. Clean Ducts: Clean full length of ducts with a round bristle brush with dia ½-in. greater than internal diameter of duct. B. Clean Pull Boxes: Clean internal surfaces of manholes including sump. Remove foreign material. 3.06 RESTORATION A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. B. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. C. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work to their original condition. D. Include necessary top soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 53 Electrical Identification M: 9/18/2024 26 05 53 - 1 / 7 P: 6/11/2026 SECTION 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer’s approval. B. Product Data: 1. Submit for each type of product specified. C. Samples: 1. Submit for each color, lettering style, and or graphic representation required for identification materials, samples of labels and signs. D. Miscellaneous: 1. Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with ANSI C2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: 1. Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Conform to ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway or cable size. SECTION 26 05 53 Electrical Identification M: 9/18/2024 26 05 53 - 2 / 7 P: 6/11/2026 1. Color: Black legend on orange field. 2. Legend: Indicates voltage. C. Adhesive Labels: 1. Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl. Legend is over-laminated with clear, wear and chemical resistant coating. D. Pre-tensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: 1. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic bands sized to suit diameter of line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when placed in position. E. Colored Adhesive Tape: 1. Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3-mils thick by 1 to 2-in. wide (0.08-mm thick by 25 to 51-mm wide). F. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. Permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape with following features: a. Size: Not less than 6-in. wide by 4-mils thick (152-mm wide by 0.102-mm thick). b. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. c. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. d. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line. G. Tape Markers: 1. Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. H. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: 1. Bands cut from 0.014-in. (0.4-mm) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. I. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: J. Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field printed legends. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. K. Aluminum Faced Card Stock Tags: 1. Wear resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002-in. (0.05-mm) thick, laminated with moisture resistant acrylic adhesive, and punched for fastener. Preprinted legends suit each application. SECTION 26 05 53 Electrical Identification M: 9/18/2024 26 05 53 - 3 / 7 P: 6/11/2026 L. Brass or Aluminum Tags: 1. Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2 by 2-in. (51 by 51-mm) by 0.05-in. (1.3-mm). 2.02 ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: 1. Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-in. (1.6-mm) minimum thick for signs up to 20-sq. in. (129-sq. cm), 1/8-in. (3.2-mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved Legend: Black letters on white face. 2. Punched for mechanical fasteners. C. Baked Enamel Signs for Interior Use: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size as indicated or as otherwise required for application. 1/4-in. (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. D. Exterior, Metal Backed, Butyrate Signs: 1. Wear resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-in. (1-mm), galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to application. 1/4-in. (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. E. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: 1. Self-tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws, with nuts, flat washers and lock washers. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: 1. Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, 1 piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties with following features: a. Minimum Width: 3/16-in. (5-mm). b. Tensile Strength: 50-lb (22.3 kg) minimum. c. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 185°F (Minus 4 to 85°C). d. Color: As indicated where used for color-coding. B. Paint: 1. Alkyd-urethane enamel. Primer as recommended by enamel manufacturer. SECTION 26 05 53 Electrical Identification M: 9/18/2024 26 05 53 - 4 / 7 P: 6/11/2026 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install identification devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: 1. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and or designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations used in Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. D. Sequence of Work: 1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. E. Self Adhesive Identification Products: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. F. Identify feeders over 600 V with "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2-in. (51- mm) high, stenciled with paint at 10-ft (3-m) intervals over continuous, painted orange background. Identify following: 1. Entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12-in. (305- mm) of basement or ground floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to conduits concealed within wall. 3. All accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts, exposed in building, or concealed above suspended ceilings. 4. Entire surface of exposed conduits. G. Install painted identification as follows: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime Surfaces: a. For galvanized metal, use single component, acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units, use heavy duty, acrylic resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear, alkali resistant, alkyd binder type sealer. SECTION 26 05 53 Electrical Identification M: 9/18/2024 26 05 53 - 5 / 7 P: 6/11/2026 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of silicone alkyd enamel. 4. Apply primer and finish materials according to manufacturer's instructions. H. Identify Raceways and Exposed Cables of Certain Systems with Color Banding: 1. Band exposed and accessible raceways of systems listed below for identification. a. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap around, colored plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or combination of both. Make each color band 2-in. (51- mm) wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of 2 color markings in contact, side by side. b. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-ft (15 m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-ft (7.6 m) in congested areas. c. Colors: As follows: (1) Fire Alarm System: Red. (2) Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. (3) Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. (4) Security System: Blue and yellow. (5) Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. (6) Telecommunications System: Green and yellow. I. Install Caution Signs for Enclosures Over 600 V: 1. Use pressure sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange field. Install on exterior of door or cover. J. Install Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: 1. Label externally as follows: a. Exposed Boxes: Pressure sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover. b. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card stock tags. c. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. K. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: 1. During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8-in. (150 to 200-mm) below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16-in. (400-mm), use single line marker. a. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. L. Color Code Conductors: SECTION 26 05 53 Electrical Identification M: 9/18/2024 26 05 53 - 6 / 7 P: 6/11/2026 1. Secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout secondary electrical system. a. Field applied, color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. (1) Colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for distance of 6-in. (150-mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last 2 turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-in. (25-mm) wide tape in colors as specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. 2. Colored cable ties applied in groups of 3 ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3-in. (76-mm) from terminal and spaced 3- in. (76-mm) apart. Apply with special tool or pliers, tighten to snug fit, and cut off excess length. System Voltage A B C Neutral 120/240 Volt 1Ph/3w Black Red White 120/208 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Red Blue White 120/240 Volt 3Ph/4w Black Orange Blue White 277/480 Volt 3Ph/4w Brown Purple Yellow Gray Motor Control 1 Black 2 Red 3 Blue Ground Green M. Power Circuit Identification: 1. Use metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms. a. Legend: ¼-in. (6.4-mm) steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations. b. Fasten tags with nylon cable ties; fasten bands using integral ears. N. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color coding for voltage and phase indication of secondary circuit. 3. Multiple Control and Communications Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use consistent system of tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape. O. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows: SECTION 26 05 53 Electrical Identification M: 9/18/2024 26 05 53 - 7 / 7 P: 6/11/2026 1. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where indicated or required to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. 2. Emergency Operating Signs: a. Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-in. (9-mm) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and or emergency operations. P. Install identification as follows: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text with ½-in. (13-mm) high lettering on 1-1/2-in. (38-mm) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use lettering 2-in. (51-mm) high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of following categories of equipment: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Electrical substations. e. Motor control centers. f. Motor starters. g. Push button stations. h. Power transfer equipment. i. Contactors. j. Remote controlled switches. k. Dimmers. l. Control devices. m. Transformers. n. Inverters. o. Rectifiers. p. Frequency converters. q. Battery racks. r. Power generating units. s. Telephone switching equipment. t. Clock/program master equipment. 2. Apply designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, push buttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 1 of 10 SECTION 26 05 73 SHORT CIRCUIT COORDINATION AND ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The ELECTRICAL ENGINEER, Baird Gilroy & Dixon, LLC shall furnish Short- Circuit and Protective Device Evaluation, Protective Device Coordination, and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis studies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The Electrical Engineer shall furnish the studies as a construction allowance as indicated on the bid form of the contract documents. The studies will be developed per NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D. References. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 1. IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 2. IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 3. IEEE 399 – Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis 4. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings 5. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 6. IEEE 1584-2018 – Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI C57.12.00 – Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers 2. ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures 3. ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis 4. ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories 5. ANSI C37.5 – Methods for Determining the RMS Value of a Sinusoidal Current Wave and Normal-Frequency Recovery Voltage, and for Simplified Calculation of Fault Currents D. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 2 of 10 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, latest edition 2. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. The studies shall be submitted to the design engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of equipment drawings for manufacturing. If formal completion of the studies may cause delay in equipment manufacturing, approval from the engineer may be obtained for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device and characteristics will be satisfactory. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR CONSTRUCTION A. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report in PDF format. The report shall be submitted in PDF format. The final report shall be signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas. B. The report shall include the following sections: 1. One-line diagram showing protective device ampere ratings and associated designations, cable size & lengths, transformer kVA & voltage ratings, motor & generator kVA ratings, and switchgear/switchboard/panelboard designations. 2. Descriptions, purpose, basis and scope of the study. 3. Tabulations of the worst-case calculated short circuit duties as a percentage of the applied device rating (automatic transfer switches, circuit breakers, fuses, etc.); the short circuit duties shall be upward-adjusted for X/R ratios that are above the device design ratings 4. Protective device time versus current coordination curves with associated one line diagram identifying the plotted devices, tabulations of ANSI protective relay functions and adjustable circuit breaker trip unit settings. 5. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout. 6. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations. 7. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed. 8. Executive Summary including source of information and assumptions made. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be conducted under the supervision and approval of a Licensed Professional Electrical Engineer skilled in performing and interpreting the power system studies. The Licensed Professional Electrical Engineer shall be licensed in the state in which the project is located, and a full-time employee of the Engineering Services Organization. SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 3 of 10 PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 STUDIES A. Short-Circuit and Protective Device Evaluation, Protective Device Coordination, and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis studies shall be provided per the requirements listed below in this specification. 2.02 DATA COLLECTION A. The studies will cover the entire three-phase electrical system for the facility. Data is required for all existing and proposed equipment. For existing facilities, the Electrical Contractor shall complete a survey of all existing equipment and conductors. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all existing and proposed field data as required by the power system studies listed below. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to eliminate unnecessary delays and assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing. 1. Utility Fault Duty and Protection Data a. Primary Voltage b. Positive Sequence X/R ratio c. Zero Sequence X/R ratio d. Positive Sequence Resistance and Reactance e. Zero Sequence Resistance and Reactance f. Three-Phase Symmetrical Primary Fault Current g. Phase-Ground Symmetrical Primary Fault Current h. Transformer Primary Fuse i. Transformer KVA and Configuration j. Transformer Secondary Voltage k. Transformer Impedance l. Secondary Fault Current 2. Overcurrent Protection Device Information a. Provide the following for each three-phase main, feeder, motor protection, and branch circuit overcurrent device in the system: (1) Fuse size, type, and manufacturer (2) Breaker size, model number, short circuit rating, manufacturer, and trip unit model number. 3. Generator Information a. Provide the following information for each generator: (1) Nameplate data including Model Number, Manufacturer, KW, KVA, and voltage. SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 4 of 10 (2) Breaker size, model number, short circuit rating, manufacturer, and trip unit model number. (3) Alternator data (a) Direct-axis Subtransient Reactance (b) Direct-axis Transient Reactance (c) Negative Sequence Reactance (d) Zero Sequence Reactance (e) Armature Resistance 4. Conductor Information a. Provide the following for each three-phase main, feeder, motor circuit, and branch circuit: (1) Conductor Size (2) Number of Conductors Per Phase (3) Conductor Insulation Type (4) Conductor Length 5. Switchgear and MCC Information (1) Provide the following for each switchgear or MCC: (2) Short Circuit Rating (3) Bus Ampacity (4) Circuit Breaker/ Fuse Ratings (symmetrical and asymmetrical) (5) Catalog Number (6) CT Ratio for Each CT (7) Accuracy Class for each CT (8) Catalog Number of Relay(s) being used (9) Schematic of Control Circuit (10) Switchgear/MCC Nameplate 6. Motor Information a. Provide the following for each motor 50HP and larger: Nameplate Information: (1) Voltage (2) HP (3) Service Factor (4) Transient and Sub-transient Reactances (5) Type of Load (6) NEMA Code Letter (7) Amperage (8) Locked Rotor Amps (9) Efficiency (10) Max KVAR (11) Motor nameplate 7. Transformers a. Provide the following information for all three-phase transformers: (1) KVA (2) Impedance (3) X/R ratio (4) Type of Coolant (5) Transformer nameplate. SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 5 of 10 8. Panelboards a. Provide the following information for all three-phase panelboards: (1) Brand of Panel (2) Short Circuit Rating (3) Main Breaker and Three-Phase Breakers (a) Breaker size, model number, manufacturer, short circuit rating, and trip unit model number. 9. Transfer Switches a. Manufacturer and Model Number b. Ampere Rating c. Voltage Rating d. Short Circuit Rating 10. Disconnect Switches a. Manufacturer and Model Number b. Ampere Rating c. Voltage Rating d. Short Circuit Rating 2.03 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY A. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances based on IEEE Standards 141, latest edition. B. Transformer design impedances and standard X/R ratios shall be used when test values are not available. C. Provide the following: 1. Calculation methods and assumptions. 2. Selected base per unit quantities. 3. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated with available fault at each bus, and interrupting rating of devices noted. 4. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution characteristics. 5. Typical calculations. 6. Tabulations of calculated quantities. 7. Results, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each: 1. Electric utility’s supply termination point. 2. Incoming switchgear. SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 6 of 10 3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals. 4. Low voltage switchgear. 5. Motor control centers. 6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 7. Branch circuit panelboards. 8. Control Panels. 9. Disconnect Switchers. 10. Terminal Boxes. 11. Other significant locations throughout the system. E. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study. F. Protective Device Evaluation: 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings. 2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bracing to withstand short-circuit stresses. 3. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short-circuit stresses. 4. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating. 5. Notify Owner in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current. 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves shall be graphically displayed on log-log scale paper. B. Include on each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered. C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed. D. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended. E. Plot the following characteristics on the curve sheets, where applicable: 1. Electric utility’s protective device. 2. Medium voltage equipment relays. 3. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands. 4. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance bands. SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 7 of 10 5. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI transformer withstand parameters. 6. Conductor damage curves. 7. Ground fault protective devices, as applicable. 8. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points. 9. Pertinent generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point. 10. Other system load protective devices for the largest branch circuit and the largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center. F. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is provided, while providing proper protection. 2.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2018, Annex D. B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Alternative methods shall be presented in the proposal. C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway, control panels, and terminal boxes) where work could be performed on energized parts. D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all MV, 575v, & 480v locations and three-phase 240 volt and 208 volt systems. E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2. F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full- load conditions. G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations, where necessary. H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2. 2.06 REPORT SECTIONS A. Input Data: SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 8 of 10 1. Utility three-phase and line-to-ground available contribution with associated X/R ratios 2. Short-circuit reactance of rotating machines with associated X/R ratios 3. Cable type, construction, size, # per phase, length, impedance and conduit type 4. Bus duct type, size, length, and impedance 5. Transformer primary & secondary voltages, winding configurations, kVA rating, impedance, and X/R ratio 6. Reactor inductance and continuous ampere rating 7. Aerial line type, construction, conductor spacing, size, # per phase, and length B. Short-Circuit Data: 1. Source fault impedance and generator contributions 2. X/R ratios 3. Asymmetry factors 4. Motor contributions 5. Short circuit kVA 6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents C. Recommended Protective Device Settings: 1. Phase and Ground Relays: a. Current transformer ratio. b. Current setting. c. Time setting. d. Instantaneous setting. e. Specialty non-overcurrent device settings. f. Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable. 2. Circuit Breakers: a. Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground). b. Adjustable time-current characteristic. c. Adjustable instantaneous pickup. d. Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable. D. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations. 1. Arcing fault magnitude 2. Device clearing time 3. Duration of arc SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 9 of 10 4. Arc flash boundary 5. Working distance 6. Incident energy PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD ADJUSTMENT A. The Electrical Contractor shall adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings table provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments to be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion. B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies. C. Notify Owner in writing of any required major equipment modifications. 3.02 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. weatherproof thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed. B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, “WARNING, ARC FLASH HAZARD”, and shall include the following information: 1. Location designation 2. Nominal voltage 3. Flash protection boundary 4. Incident energy 5. Working distance 6. Issue date C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings. D. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based on recommended overcurrent device settings. 1. For each 600, 480, and applicable 240 or 208-volt three-phase panelboards and disconnects, one arc flash label shall be provided 2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided. 3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided. 4. For each switchgear, one arc flash label shall be provided. 5. For each control panel, one arc flash label shall be provided. 6. For each terminal box, one arc flash label shall be provided. 7. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label shall be provided. SECTION 26 05 73 Short Circuit Coordination and Arc Flash Hazard Study Page 10 of 10 E. Labels shall be field installed by the Electrical Contractor on the exterior of each piece of equipment in a clearly visible location. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 27 16 Cabinets and Enclosures Page 1 of 3 SECTION 26 27 16 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for cabinets and enclosures for housing of control panels and motor controls. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum). a. NEMA 3R - Enclosures for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against wind-blown dust, rain, and sleet; undamaged by formation of ice on the enclosure. b. NEMA 12 - Enclosures for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping non-corrosive liquids. c. NEMA 4X – Enclosures for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against wind-blown dust, rain, sleet, hose directed water, and corrosion; undamaged by formation of ice on the enclosure. B. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 373 - Cabinets, Cutout Box, and Meter Socket Enclosures. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), UL 50 - Safety for Cabinets and Boxes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data. 2. Instruction for handling and storage. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Dimensions and weights. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Have cabinets and enclosures packed and crated to permit ease of handling and to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The EMF Company B. Hennessey Products, Inc. SECTION 26 27 16 Cabinets and Enclosures Page 2 of 3 C. Hoffman Industrial Products D. Pauluhn Electric Manufacturing Company E. Weigman Company F. Rose Enclosure G. N.E.M.A. Enclosure Mfg. Co. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Sheet Metal Boxes: 1. Provide enclosures manufactured in accordance with NEMA 250 and NEC Article 373. Fabricate outdoor NEMA 3R and NEMA 4X panels from 0.125- inch thick type 5052 H32 aluminum or 14 gauge, 316 stainless steel. NEMA 12 indoor panels shall be painted steel. 2. Dimensions and special features are shown on the Drawings. 3. Construct outdoor enclosures with continuously welded seams ground smooth. 4. Additional material thickness and bracing requirements shall be determined by the manufacturer to provide the strength required by the standard listed. The bracing shall be provided in such a way as to minimize the protrusion into the wiring and the equipment spaces. 5. Install the door with a stainless steel continuous hinge, stainless steel padlock handle with gasket and stainless steel hardware. 6. Furnish the door with oil-resistant neoprene gasket attached with oil-resistant adhesive and held in place with aluminum retaining strips. 7. Use a single, 3/4-inch minimum, door handle that provides a 3-point latching through latch rods with rollers. Provide rollers with at least 3/4-inch diameter. 8. Gasketed overlapping doors may be used instead of a center post. 9. Provide heavy duty lifting eyes of suitable material. 10. Fabricate the enclosure with a stud-mounted panel inside. Make panels from 12-gauge steel painted with white enamel finish. 11. Equip NEMA 12, NEMA 3R, and NEMA 4X enclosures with thermostatically controlled space heaters and corrosion inhibitors. Provide heaters rated for 240V for 120V operation. 12. Weld mounting feet to the enclosure if called for on the Drawing. 13. Include a high impact plastic data pocket in the enclosure. 14. Provide ground connections on the enclosures to enable grounding of the enclosure with a No. 2 AWG conductor. 15. Equip free-standing outdoor cabinets with inner and outer door restraint bars to prevent door swing during windy conditions. SECTION 26 27 16 Cabinets and Enclosures Page 3 of 3 16. Supply indoor enclosures with filtered passive air intake and exhaust openings, 4-inch square in the side near the top and near the bottom of the adjacent side panel. B. Hardware: 1. Mounting Hardware: Stainless steel 2. Conduit Connectors: Watertight as manufactured by Myers Hubs, or equal. 2.03 TESTING A. Test cabinets and enclosures in accordance with UL 50 so unit qualifies for a UL label. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Review Drawings and determine how many enclosures of each kind are required and check if supplied quantity is sufficient. B. Check the mounting pads or foundations for proper mounting dimensions and features, including grounding conductor stub-up. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use enclosures described in this specification only above grade. B. Install enclosures in accordance with NEC Article 373 in locations as indicated on the Drawings. C. Install enclosures in readily accessible locations to facilitate general operations, wire pulls, maintenance and repair. D. Plug unused conduit openings. E. Make conduit connections to the enclosures with watertight conduit connectors. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 27 26 Wiring Devices Page 1 of 3 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for wiring devices including: 1. Receptacles. 2. Wall switches. 3. Wall plates and cover plates. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA): 1. NEMA WD1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD6 - Dimensional Requirements. B. Federal Specifications (WC-596F). C. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Articles 210 Branch Circuits, 250 Grounding and 410, Paragraphs 56, 57 and 58. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all products covered under this specification for Engineer’s approval: 1. Manufacturer's product literature and specifications including dimensions, weights, certifications and instructions for handling, storage and installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack and crate devices to permit ease of handling and protect from damage during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bryant Electric B. Crouse-Hinds, Arrow Hart Division C. Hubbel Inc. Wiring Devices Division D. Leviton Manufacturing Company E. Pass & Seymour/Legrand. SECTION 26 27 26 Wiring Devices Page 2 of 3 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Standards: Conform to NEMA WD1 for general requirements and NEMA WD6 for dimensional requirements. B. Manufacture devices to heavy-duty industrial specification grade with brown nylon bodies (orange for isolated-ground receptacles) back and side wiring provisions and green-colored grounding screws. C. Receptacles: 1. Duplex-type receptacles: Rated 20 amps at 120 volts. 2. Contacts: Brass or phosphor bronze. 3. Receptacle grounding system: Extend to the mounting strap unless isolated ground is indicated or required. 4. GFI or GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter) receptacles: Provide feed- through type with test and reset button. D. Wall Switches: 1. Toggle switches: Rated 20 amps at 120/277 volts AC rated for both resistive and inductive loads. 2. Contacts: Silver cadmium oxide construction to prevent sticking, welding and excessive pitting. E. Cover Plates: 1. Receptacles: a. In outdoor areas, provide cover plates of cast metal, in-use type with stainless steel hardware. b. In indoor, corrosive and/or wet areas, provide cover plates of polycarbonate type with stainless steel hardware. c. All other plates: Type 302 stainless steel. 2. Wall Switches a. In outdoor or corrosive or wet locations, provide cover plates of cast metal, gasketed with spring-loaded hinged covers and stainless steel hardware. b. All other plates: Type 302 stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that device boxes are correctly placed. B. Verify that the correct quantity, size and type of wires are pulled to each device box. C. Verify that wiring has been checked at both ends. D. Prepare wire ends for connection to devices. SECTION 26 27 26 Wiring Devices Page 3 of 3 E. Inspect each wiring device for defects. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductors clockwise around screw terminals. G. Install cover plates on switch, receptacle and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Energize and test devices for proper operation. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 28 00 Overcurrent Protective Devices Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 28 00 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) rated 600 V and below and switching devices commonly used with them. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 1. NEMA AB1-86 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70-90 - National Electrical Code (NEC). C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 1. UL 98-87 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches. 2. UL 486A-80 - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. Seventh Edition. 3. UL 489-86 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures. Seventh Edition. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): Device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains interruption of power in circuit it protects. B. Ampere-Squared-Seconds: Expression of available thermal energy resulting from current flow. With regard to current-limiting fuses and circuit breakers, ampere-squared-seconds during fault current interruption represents energy allowed to flow before fuse or breaker interrupts fault current within its current limiting range. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Components and Installation: SECTION 26 28 00 Overcurrent Protective Devices Page 2 of 6 a. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code (NEC)." b. Local codes and ordinances. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar OCPDs from single manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDS), GENERAL A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers; and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units. B. All OCPDs 1,000A or more shall be provided with ground fault protection of equipment unless noted otherwise on plans. C. All OCPDs 1,200A or more shall be installed with an arc energy reduction maintenance bypass switch and indicating light. 2.02 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers except as indicated: 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Or approved equal B. UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. C. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers in load-center-type panelboards and breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal. D. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole. E. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low-trip-setting current values. F. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in switchboard or panelboards where indicated. G. Enclosure for Switchboard or Motor Control Center Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated. H. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, as indicated or required to suit environment where located. I. Combination Circuit Breakers and Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters: UL 943 arranged for sensing and tripping for ground-fault current in addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. SECTION 26 28 00 Overcurrent Protective Devices Page 3 of 6 1. Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear identification of ground fault trip function. 2. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as Class A, Type 1 device. 3. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 30 milliamperes. J. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let-through ampere-squared- seconds during fault conditions to value less than ampere-squared-seconds of one-half-cycle wave of prospective symmetrical fault current. Circuit breaker shall use no fusible devices in its operation. Current-limiting characteristic shall be in addition to normal time-delay and instantaneous-trip characteristics and other features as indicated. K. Circuit Breakers With Solid-State Trip Devices: Provide indicated circuit breakers with solid-state trip devices having following features: 1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20C and plus 55C. 2. Adjustability: Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by operation of controls on front panel of breaker, by change of plug-in element without removing breaker from mounting, or by combination of 2 methods. 3. Ground-Fault Tripping: Adjustable for pick-up and time-delay values. Provide for indicated units. 4. Provide clear plastic shield limiting access to rating plug and adjustments on solid state trip circuit breaker. Seal by attaching sealing wire through hole in posts provided. With wire seal installed, circuit breaker rating plug and adjustments shall not be "readily accessible." 2.03 INSULATED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. General Electric 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Or approved equal B. UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. C. Ratings: Continuous-current, interrupting, and short-time-current ratings, and voltage and frequency ratings as indicated. D. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with following features: 1. Moving Contacts Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. E. Circuit-Breaker Trip Devices: Solid-state overcurrent trip device system that includes 1 integrally mounted current transformer or sensor per phase, release mechanism, and following features: SECTION 26 28 00 Overcurrent Protective Devices Page 4 of 6 1. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions, which are independent of each other in both action and adjustment. 2. Temperature compensation to assure accuracy and calibration stability from minus 20°C to plus 55°C. 3. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. 4. Current Adjustability: Effected by operating controls on front panel or by changing plug-in elements or current transformers or sensors. 5. Three bands for long-time- and short-time-delay functions marked "minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." 6. Five pickup points, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. 7. Six pickup points, minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions. 8. Ground fault protection with at least 3 short-time-delay settings and 37 trip- time-delay bands. Adjustable current pickup. 9. Trip Indication: Labeled lights or mechanical indicators on trip device shall indicate type of fault causing breaker trip. If lights are used, integral power source shall maintain indication for 60 hrs, minimum. F. Auxiliary Contacts for Remote Indication: Where remote indication of breaker position is indicated, provide spare auxiliary switch in addition to other auxiliary switches required for normal breaker operation. Spare auxiliary switch shall consist of 2 Type "a" and 2 Type "b" stages (contacts), wired to terminal block in breaker housing. G. Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Include following: 1. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least 2 padlocks on each breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of draw out mechanism. 2. Operating Handle: Provide 1 for each manually operated breaker. No handle ties are permitted. 3. Electric Close Button: Provide 1 for each electrically operated breaker. 4. Indicating Lights: Contacts for "Breaker Open" and "Breaker Closed," for main and bus tie circuit breakers, and for other indicated breakers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONNECTIONS A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. B. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.02 GROUNDING SECTION 26 28 00 Overcurrent Protective Devices Page 5 of 6 A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. B. Ground in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Reports: Prepare certified written reports on tests and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made. 2. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible person. 3. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least 1 week's advance notification. 4. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of system, perform following preparations for tests: a. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. b. Make continuity tests of circuits. c. Include full updating on final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents. d. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs. 5. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include following inspections and related work. a. Overcurrent-Protective-Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. Where discrepancies are found, test organization shall recommend final protective device ratings and settings. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make final system adjustments. b. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current single line diagram. c. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. d. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPDs with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. e. Clean OCPDs using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. f. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPDs. SECTION 26 28 00 Overcurrent Protective Devices Page 6 of 6 6. Electrical Tests: Include following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: a. Insulation resistance test of OCPD conducting parts. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. b. Verify trip unit reset characteristics for insulated-case circuit breakers. c. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices. d. Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or undervoltage relays, to verify operation of shunt-trip devices. e. Check stored-energy charging motors for proper operation of motor, mechanism, and limit switches. f. Check operation of electrically operated OCPDs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. g. Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence. Make closing attempts on locked-open and opening attempts on locked-closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters. h. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest. Verify by system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.04 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPDs. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. END OF SECTION SECTION 26 32 13 Diesel Engine Generator & Controls (Installation) Page 1 of 3 SECTION 26 32 13 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR & CONTROLS (INSTALLATION) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies the installation of a pre-procured packaged electric generating plant. 1.02 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Inspect generator for damage upon arrival and report to Engineer before installation; document with photos. B. Furnish and install all interconnecting raceways, conductors, terminations, and lug kits between the generator, existing ATS, SCADA, accessory load center, and fuel system — including power feeders, ATS engine auto‑start/control wiring, status/alarm wiring, the fuel filter panel, and remote E‑stop wiring. C. Furnish all diesel fuel. Provide ULSD per ASTM D975 for all testing, and leave the sub‑base tank filled to capacity at substantial completion. D. Furnish and install all other consumables and fluids required for a complete, operational unit: engine oil, 50/50 coolant/antifreeze, batteries (install, fill, activate, charge), and initial filters — unless documented as factory‑furnished/filled. E. Coordinate enclosure/housing dimensions and the generator base/anchor‑bolt pattern with the manufacturer before forming the concrete pad. Verify NEC 110.26 working clearances in the field. F. Maintain the facility online during construction; schedule and obtain Owner approval for any outage per the project general notes (1‑week advance minimum). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Generator Pad layout and Installation/setting drawings, anchorage, conduit/termination plan, and grounding plan. B. Manufacturer's field startup/commissioning report, all field test reports (signed), O&M manuals, as‑built record drawings, and warranty documentation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The generator will be pre-purchased directly by the Owner to be installed by the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for complete installation of the generator and SECTION 26 32 13 Diesel Engine Generator & Controls (Installation) Page 2 of 3 shall coordinate with the owner for schedule and delivery. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Transport, handle and install generator in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain NEC required clear front (or rear if applicable) working space free from obstructions or grounded components. C. Ground in accordance with Section 26 05 26- Grounding and Bonding. D. Label all wires with heat shrink markers per Section 26 05 53. E. Mount the assembled packaged unit on the structural pad. Prime all exposed metal parts with a rust inhibitor and finish in durable machinery enamel (Design for mounting on subbase tank). F. Vibration isolators shall be provided with elastomeric isolator pads integral to the generator, unless the engine manufacturer requires the use of steel spring isolation. G. Contractor to coordinate with manufacturer on housing size prior to constructing concrete pad. 3.02 STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING A. Manufacturer startup services are included as part of the Generator package, Startup shall be performed by a factory‑authorized/certified technician. Contractor shall schedule, coordinate, and support startup, and shall be responsible for arranging it as part of this contract. Notify Engineer and Owner a minimum of 48 hours prior. B. Perform pre‑start installation checks per the manufacturer and NFPA 110 Chapter 5/7 (connections, torque per UL 486A values, fluid levels, battery charge, jacket‑water heater operation, alignment/anchorage). 3.03 FIELD TESTS A. Insulation‑resistance (megger) test of feeders, verify phase rotation, and verify the ground‑resistance/grounding electrode per 26 05 26 before energizing. B. Perform field tests at the site after installation is complete and in the presence of the Owner’s representative. C. Perform sequence start-up of plant and demonstrate compliance with specifications. D. Fuel polishing system: verify operation and remote annunciation. E. Perform on site resistive load bank testing to the full capacity of the generator set for a SECTION 26 32 13 Diesel Engine Generator & Controls (Installation) Page 3 of 3 minimum of two (2) continuous hours. Verify adequate generator cooling, fuel flow, metering, and operation. Contractor shall contact Engineer at least 48 hours prior to commencement of testing. F. Simulated utility‑failure test: open the normal source and verify engine cranking/start time, voltage and frequency stabilization, ATS transfer, time delays (start, transfer, retransfer, cooldown), and return to normal. G. Alarm and shutdown verification: individually prove low oil pressure, high coolant temp, overspeed, overcrank, low fuel, low coolant level/temp, and emergency stop — and verify each shutdown requires manual/mechanical reset. H. SCADA/remote verification: confirm every status/alarm point lands and reads correctly at the Town's SCADA — generator run, common alarm, low fuel, ATS normal, ATS emergency, ATS alarm, Fuel Filter Run & Fail, and the 4‑20mA fuel level. 3.04 TRAINING A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited to 3 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. 3.05 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. Within 50 mile of the job site, the supplier shall maintain; a minimum of 6 factory trained and qualified field technicians; a proper supply of spare parts for the supplied equipment; a shop with overhaul capabilities; and be able to provide 24 hour, 7 day per week, 365 day per year field service capability. END OF SECTION Appendix A – Generator Procurement Package Project Name: Project Number: Contractor:TOWN OF WESTLAKE 25‐0079 City of Westlake Pump Station / 700kw / Sourcewell Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco Submittal rev1 (1)Caterpillar Generator Set 700 KW/ 480V/ 3ph/60 Hz CAT Sound Attenuated Enclosure/ 1200 A Circuit Breakers Represented by: Project Manager Jessica Aikhionbare Submitted by: HOLT CAT 5665 SE Loop 817.307.8410 512‐431‐3956 Ronnie Tyler Sales Representative San Antonio, TX 78222‐3903 Power Systems Division Ronald.Tyler@holtcat.com 210.843.2606 Ashley.Chapa@holtcat.com Ron Logsdon Field Service 972.721.5890 Ronald.Logsdon@holtcat.com Ashley Chapa Product Sales Support Representative Jessica.Aikhionbare@holtcat.com This submittal was prepared based on the customer quote and is to meet the intent of the customer supplied specification Rev 1 Submittal comments Jeff Hensley Re: 25-0079 City of Westlake Pump Station / 700kw / Water / Sourcewell Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco Fill out Attachment A – Submittal Data Sheet that is located at the end of Generator Specification. Attachment A has been added to the submittal on page 25. Verify that fuel tank can provide 48 hours of fuel capacity when generator is running 100% loaded. 50.7 g @100% =2433.6 gallons to operate for 48hrs. Fuel tank usable gallons is 2640. Verify spill containment meets requirements of Generator Specification, paragraph 2.08.C.11 that calls for 7.5 gallon. Submittal has been updated to reflect 7.5 gallon. Please referecne page 71. Provide generator sizing analysis. Criteria: 15% voltage dip and continuous operation in 113 deg F temperature. Sizing analysis has been added to the submittal on page 28. The C18 700kW comes with a PMG excitation. Thermal damage data is included on page 35 of the submittal. Provide cutsheets for all equipment listed in Generator Specification, 26 32 13, paragraph 1.04.C.9. Provide project specific interconnection diagrams for wiring. Wiring that is not applicable to this project shall not be shown. Provide detailed list of spare parts being provided in accordance with generator specification requirements. For generator excitation system what does AREP mean? Is this diferent than PMG. What type of excitation system is provided? Provide thermal damage curve for generator Switches- Not provided by HOLT CAT does not supply. Please refer wire pull drawings on page 122-123 for type and number of wires to pull. HOLT CAT tech will land wires. Site specific wiring drawings supplied with close out docs. Will provide air filters, fuel filter, Oil filter Field verify that existing ATS is compatible with new generator. Provide written documentation of Ronnie has confirmed that the existing ATS will work. Verify tank has low fuel alarm with dry contacts The fuel tank alarm is open contact-digital input Access platforms shall be provided with access stairs at each end of the platform on both sides of the generator. Platforms have been revised, please see page 106 of the submittal Verify generator can communicate via Modbus RTU and Ethernet for communications to customer’s SCADA system. Control Panel Modbus schedule has been added to Drop Box link for ease of use. Panelboard shall be 208Y/120V and have tin plated copper bussing. Panelboard shall meet the requirements of generator specification, paragraph 2.19. Please reference the electrical drawings marked AC optional shore power. Highlighed on page 110 Provide panelboard schedule for 208Y/120V panel and show circuits wired to miscellaneous equipment – battery charger, block heater, fuel polishing system, etc. Please reference schematics on page 120 Submittal has been updated on page 47 to indicate (2) 1200AMP breakers. Submittal has been updated to include this information, please reference pages 72-73. Provide information on load bank breaker Provide information/wiring diagram for 4-20mA fuel tank continuous fuel level monitoring and cutsheets on level transmitter Provide details and physical space information for where both 1200A breakers – one associated with generator and one associated with load bank, are located. Provide details on 480V terminations. Drawings have been updated to reflect these measurements, please reference pages 100-102. Provide overall dwg that shows generator total dimensions and overall weight – dry and wet. Show height of tank. Drawings have been updated, please reference pages 95-104 On tank drawing clarify what the difference is between tank stub up area and electrical stub up area. Stubup is complete open air for conduit. Electrical stubup area is the exact location of the bottom of the circuit breaker that needs to be terminated to. Clarify location for 4-20mA fuel level transmitter In the fuel tank Provide specific details where fuel polishing system is physically located on generator enclosure. Not mounted on generator. Stand alone cabinet as ref pg 125. Installation and plumbing by others. The drop tube needs to be installed about 1” from the bottom of the tank and no less than ¾” round. Installation schematic included in submittal. Generator enclosure drawings shall show physical location of batteries, battery charger, lights, receptacles, control panel, etc. Show physical location of light switch. Submittal have been updated to reflect detailed mechanical drawings, please reference pages 95-104 Sincerely, Prathyusha Mondru Project Engineer Holt CAT Power Systems Division Verify reactive load bank testing and start-up commissioning and training are provided per requirements of Generator Specification. Blank startup document has been added to Drop Box Link. Clearly indicate elevation to main circuit breaker handle and load bank circuit breaker handle. Drawings have been updated to reflect these measurements, please reference pages 100-102. Clearly indicate vertical distance between lugs/terminations at the main breaker load bank breaker to bottom of breaker enclosure. We do not have that data. Rev 2 Submittal comments Jeff Hensley Re: 25-0079 City of Westlake Pump Station / 700kw / Water / Sourcewell Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco 2. Per pre-submittal held on 7/2/25 with CAT, CAT was to provide cutsheet on level 20mA fuel level to customer and provide generator panelboard wiring diagram. FNI provided examples to Holt CAT on 7/6/2025 via email to use as a go by. This information was not provided in resubmittal. Provide cutsheet on level transmitter that outputs a 4-20mA signal and provided for all electrical loads associated with generator that are wired to panelboard including Fuel Polishing system. The optional AC Shore power dwg and schematic shown in the electrical drawings in the submittal does not show all 120V loads wired out. Please refer to page 63 -67 for spec sheet of 4-20mA output Fuel level sensor that is 1000mm long and can be cut to fit any size tank. 3. Show on electrical drawings where customer connects to terminal blocks to remotely read 4-20mA fuel level signal. Refer page 103-105. Drawings will be available once our technician completes the configuration and programming the communications during startup. 1. Approved as noted. Additional information required. Provide revised data per review comments. Formally respond in writing to all comments. A conference call shall be set up between CAT and Freese and Nichols to go over submittal review comments. 5. Panelboard shall have tin plated copper bussing. Data sheet shows aluminum bussing.option. 4. Clarify if the jacket water heater that is rated for 240VAC, single phase operation, can operate o< of 208VAC, single phase. On another project that had a 500kW unit on it, CAT mentioned that when powering it at 208VAC, would result in a 75% reduction to 1875W. Is 1875W enough to properly operate the jacket water heater. YES Refer page 118 Refer page 132. You will have two breakers instead of one. 6. Provide AIC rating of panelboard and associated breakers. 7. To eliminate the need for such a long generator pad with having stairs at both ends of the access platform, the preference is to have stairs at one end. Provide overall layout of generator showing access platforms on both sides of generator enclosure. A conference call shall be held between CAT and Freese and Nichols to discuss how the access platforms will be physically arranged prior to final approval. 8. Update Attachment A – Submittal Data Sheet to reflect final dimensions, weights, etc. The current overall dimensions are shown to be 181.54” wide. Clarify how this was determined. 9. Update generator layout drawings to show light switch for lights. Show physical location of battery charger. 10. Is there a one-line for the generator that shows how the generator breaker and load bank breaker are electrically connected. Included in Page 68-69 Refer pĂŐĞϭ25-127 Ref Pg 118-119, 4 X12 = 48 X 2(both sides) + 85.43 = 181.43 Sincerely, Prathyusha Mondru Project Engineer Holt CAT Power Systems Division Updated as requested Please refer page 131. 11. Update electrical drawings to show only what is being used on this project by crossing out what is not being used. 12. Clearly show terminal blocks for remote start signal from ATS. 13. Clarify if the fuel polishing system just needs one (1) 120VAC power source or does it need two (2). It appears from the vendor’s drawings that two are needed. One for Power and one for control power. It will be 2 power sources, one for the pump and motor, and one for the control, the heater is incorporated into the control power. Input voltage will be coming from their power source from the building 20AMP. Please see attached dwg in page 137 TABLE OF CONTENTS General Information Genset Section Generator Circuit Breaker Controls Enclosure Fuel System Attachments Genset Drawings AUSTIN 9601 So. IH-35 (512) 282-2011 CORPUS CHRISTI 1319 S. Padre Island (361) 852-2200 (Rental) (361) 698-5742 IRVING 2000 E. Airport Freeway (972) 721-2000 FORT WORTH 549 North Jim Wright Freeway (817) 246-6651 (Rental) (817) 847-8880 LAREDO 14300 FM 1472 (956) 722-0075 (Rental) (956) 722-0075 LONGVIEW 5110 W. Loop 281 (903) 758-6175 LONGVIEW Rental 5036 W. Loop 281 (903) 234-4747 SAN ANTONIO5665 SE LOOP 410 (210) 648-1111 (Rental) (210) 333-8505 TEXARKANA (NASH) 6263 Mall Drive (903) 832-7535 (Rental) (903) 832-7535 TYLER 12218 State Hwy 31 W (903) 595-6424 (Rental) (903) 595-6424 VICTORIA 203 Holt Rd. (361) 573-2438 (Rental) (361) 573-2438 WACO 1700 W. Loop 340 (254) 662-4911 WESLACO 725 East St. Hwy 83 (956) 968-2161 (Rental) (956) 447-9105 EDINBURG Truck Service & Industrial Engine 1320 So. 25th St (956) 289-7600 PFLUGERVILLE Truck Service & Industrial Engine 16013 North IH-35 (512) 252-1133 NORTH DALLAS 10950 Plano Rd. (214) 342-6700 (Rental) (214) 342-6710 PFLUGERVILLE 16017 North IH 35 (512) 990-7743 (Rental) (512) 252-9696 IRVING Industrial Engine 2001 N. Loop 12 (972) 721-5800 BRIDGEPORT 707 W. Hwy 380 (940) 683-6297 WACO Truck Service 1800 W. Loop 340 (254) 662-7386 (Rental) (254) 662-7373 IRVING Truck Service 1601 E 356 at Irving Blvd. (972) 830-4200 LONGVIEW Industrial Engine 2210 Neiman Marcus Parkway (903) 553-4300 SONORA 707 Glasscock (325) 387-5303 LEWISVILLE 1800 East Hwy 121 (214) 483-2500 (Rental) (214) 483-2590 Your Service Locations Customer FT. WORTH TYLER LONGVIEW BRIDGEPORT NORTH DALLAS TEXARKANA IRVING LEWISVILLE LAREDO Index of Store Capabilities Machine Sales, Rentals, Parts & Service Machine Parts & Service Industrial Engine Parts & Service Industrial Engine Sales, Parts & Service & Generator Rental Truck Parts & Service Truck & Industrial Engine Parts Marine Engine Sales, Parts & Service Ag Sales, Parts & Service SAN ANTONIO AUSTIN VICTORIA WACO SONORA PFLUGERVILLE EDINBURG WESLACO CORPUS CHRISTI ® ® ® ®Power Systems © H O LT C A T . A l l R i ght s R e s e r ve d . 2-24-11 SULPHUR SPRINGS SULPHUR SPRINGS 1109 W. Industrial Dr. (903) 885-0626 Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco Quote No: 31455409 C Quote Date: January 23, 2025 Expires: February 23, 2025 Sourcewell Contract no: 092222-CAT Re: West Lake Pump Station 1-C18 Caterpillar 700kw diesel generator set 1-Free Stand fuel polisher system We are pleased to submit the following confirmation of our quote. Holt Power Systems proposes to furnish this equipment at the attached quoted price. We will arrange for initial start-up services at no additional charge. These services include a check of wiring continuity, safety shutoffs and controls; including automatic transfer switches or paralleling gear on and related to the unit that we supply. A load bank test is also included per the specifications. We will arrange for the load banks and the personnel to conduct the test, however we look to you to provide the fuel for the test. All work is to be conducted during normal Holt working hours (Monday –Friday, 7:30 AM – 4:30 PM, excluding national holidays) unless otherwise stated with in this quotation. (Please provide at least two-week notification before startups). Installation is to be by others. Thank you for the opportunity of quoting this project. Holt Power Systems remains at your disposal for any additional information or assistance that you may require. Sincerely yours, Ronnie Tyler Engine Sales Representative Phone: 817/307-8410 E-mail: Ronald.tyler@holtcat.com CATERPILLAR C18 700KW Standby RATED TIER II STANDBY POWER EPA/CARB TIER II UL 2200 LISTED PACKAGE GEN SET NO IBC CERTIFICATION 60HZ 480 VOLT (WYE) 60 Hz, 700 kW W/Fan C18 480V 60 HZ PKG 500 CERTF II LC7224L AREP ALT ECS 100 CONTROL PANEL ENGLISH INSTRUCTION LANGUAGE YEAR GOLD POLICY ESC (WARRANTY) GENERAL EPG CONSTRUCTION STANDBY POWER STANDARD ELECTRONIC GOVERNOR CONTRO PANEL MOUNTING LEFT LOCAL ANNUNCIATOR 1500:5 CT RATIO SINGLE CIRCUIT BREAKER 1200A SINGLE MANUAL CB LS/I GENERATOR TESTED AT FLC POWER CENTER - RH MOUNTED NEUTRAL BAR NDTS1 CB CABLE GP ABB/T6-1200 NEUTRAL CABLE GP 1200A WIDE BASE GEN MOUNTING DUCT PLATE SOUND ATTENUATED CAT ENCLOSURE STANDARD RADIATOR FLEXIBLE EXHAUST CONNECTION AIR CLEANER – STANDARD DUTY INTEGRATED VOLTAGE REGULATOR STANDARD WET BATTERY STD TESTING - GENERATOR SET CAT DECALS PGS TEST REPORT @ 0.8 PF HOLT SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES UL142 48HOUR BASE TANK Start up after installation by others On site load banking Cable for load banking Travel for tech Miles for tech Local, state or TERP taxes, which may be applicable, are not included. Budgets for periodic maintenance programs: PM contracts are based upon the level of service expected as well as accessibility to the package with maintenance vehicles etc. However, estimates would be as follows: Assuming good accessibility: quarterly checks and filter changes as recommended by the manufacturer, along with a 2 hour annual load bank test Notes: The above proposal is based upon our review of specifications section WSK24577. Please see the specifications review comments, which are a part of this proposal under separate cover. Load banks. Load bank service is not included but is available for additional cost upon request. It is assumed that the generator set(s) for this project are easily accessible, and within a short distance from the area where the test load bank is to be placed. 50 feet of cable per phase (unless stated otherwise in this quote) has been allowed for this test. If longer or tougher distances are expected we will need to be notified of this and our quote will need to be adjusted accordingly. Commissioning: No commissioning of the generator equipment is included at this time but is available upon request for additional cost. Additional trips will be charged at the prevailing field service rate appropriate for the time and date the service is rendered. The proposed generator set above is capable of paralleling with other generator sets. It includes on board paralleling controls which will work in conjunction with the on board, electrically operated circuit breaker which also serves as the paralleling breaker. Because of this arrangement a second on board breaker can not be provided. However, an option is shown for a free-standing docking station with cam loc lugs. This arrangement would provide for both load banking as well as future paralleling without issue. (A common point of coupling would be needed in the future when paralleling is planned). HOLT POWER SYSTEMS TERMS & CONDITIONS Proposal This proposal is provided to meet the spirit and intention of the project equipment requirements. Some interpretational differences between our proposal and the specifications may exist, therefore the above bill of material contains our offer for this project, none other is expressed or implied unless stated in writing. Pricing Recently the cost of some of our vendor products has experienced severe price swings in the upward direction. Therefore it has become increasingly difficult to hold our prices for a prolonged period of time. If our quote is older than 20 days please call to verify our price. Taxes The above price(s) does(do) not include state and local taxes unless otherwise specifically stated. A 1-1/2% additional ser charge is required by the state of Texas for all stationary engine equipment due to emission restrictions. This is in addition to any state and local taxes that may be required. Lead Time Standard delivery of proposed Caterpillar Generator Set to jobsite will be confirmed after receipt of order and submittals are approved and credit terms are agreed. Automatic transfer switch(es) is(are) quoted to jobsite in approximately __ weeks after receipt of order and approved submittals and approved credit terms are agreed. The above quoted lead-times are standard lead-times from the factory at the time of this quotation. In some cases lead-times maybe able to be improved to assist in customer needs. Please call and inquire about possible improved lead-times. Please note: The Caterpillar factory has mandatory factory shutdowns for two weeks in December/January and one week in July. The length of those shutdowns will extend lead-times on orders entered at those times. Orders, which include non-standard features, may require additional time before shipment. Consult with your Caterpillar dealer at the time of order. Holt Power Systems has made a significant commitment to ensuring we are able to quickly respond to opportunities by maintaining a substantial inventory that may reduce the lead-time above. Special Notes Please verify the voltage, number of poles in ATS, terminal conductor sizes and other Bill of Material items quoted above as compared to the requirements of this project. Lugs for terminations above 1200A are not included. Fuel Tank Increasingly we are seeing dramatic changes occur at the municipal level in regard to fire code requirements. They are too numerous and variable to keep track of for each of the area municipalities. Unless otherwise stated within the body of this quotation, the fuel tank included is as specified by the written specifications of this project (if specifications were supplied at the time of quotation). The specifications may be in conflict with City Fire Codes for the location of the project. We will make every attempt to notify you of specification variances with local codes when known, however responsibility for compliance lies with the specifying engineer and those that pull the permit for the project. Payment Terms are NET 30 DAYS at the time of shipment to jobsite based on Holt credit department approval, otherwise terms are C.O.D. Term's Payment due in full Net 30 after delivery with approved Holt credit or COD at time of shipment. Sales tax will be added to invoice. Resale tax certificate must be on file with the Holt credit department for tax-exempt sales. Warranty Caterpillar standard (5year warranty applies for standby applications. Standard manufacturer’s warranty applies to all non-Caterpillar equipment. Copies of warranty statements are available upon. GOLD POLICY Cancellation There will be a minimum 25% cancellation fee for orders cancelled, once placed and accepted by Holt Power Systems. Cost of custom components, completed fabrication, or any other work performed at the time of cancellation will be added to the cancellation fee. If all material have been acquired the cancellation fees will be 100%. Caterpillar content, 14 days after orders placed will be 100% of the order. Other Holt Power Systems is an equipment supplier only. No fuel, wiring, connecting, hook-up, plumbing, or other installation type labor is included in the proposal unless noted herein. This would include any control wiring to and from the generator set(s) to any automatic transfer switch(es), paralleling gear or other devices which we may or may not provide. The customer is responsible for any and all installation of the above equipment. Holt personnel will perform an installation audit prior to start-up. Unless stated otherwise in this proposal, service and/or maintenance for this equipment are not included. Our company product support service group will be glad to quote the end user of this equipment for those services under a separate proposal. All equipment needed to perform any loading or unloading of the equipment supplied by Holt Power Systems is the responsibility of the buyer. Holt Power Systems limits the scope of supply for this quotation to the equipment and services listed in our bill of material. Unless specifically listed in our bill of material, equipment not indicated is to be supplied by others. We have detailed the equipment proposed in the bill of material. Please carefully review it to be certain it meets your requirements. No NETA, infrared scanning, meg-testing or other third party testing is included unless expressly indicating in writing above. We reserve the right to correct any errors or omissions. Contracts which include penalty or liquidated damage clauses for failure to meet promised shipping dates are not acceptable or binding on Holt Power Systems, unless accepted and confirmed in writing by an officer of Holt Power Systems and it's headquarters. Holt Power Systems standard terms and conditions are included in the quotation and hereby become part of this quotation. These same terms need to be noted on any purchase order received by Holt Power Systems. Holt Power Systems will not be responsible for any labor or material charged by others associated with the start-up and installation of this equipment unless previously agreed upon in writing by Holt Power Systems. Star-ups are to be conducted between Monday through Friday during normal business hours and excluding nights, weekends, or holidays unless agreed otherwise in writing. Otherwise our standard overtime rates will apply. All permits are to be by others. We value your confidence in us, and the products we represent and appreciate your business. If there are any terms, conditions, or any other aspect of this quotation you do not understand, please contact us immediately and we will gladly clarify. Paralleling Unless otherwise explicitly stated above, it is assumed that the above proposal is for a single unit generator application. Startup labor, controls conversion or additions and load banking for the above equipment for a system arrangement has not been included. Coordination Studies Coordination studies, unless specifically shown above to be included, is the responsibility of others. Ask about our Caterpillar UPS Systems, Transfer Switches, or Paralleling Switchgear systems! “The sweetness of a low price evaporates as soon as the bitterness of low quality begins” Thank you for the opportunity of quoting this project. Holt Power Systems remains at your disposal for any additional information or assistance that you may require. Sincerely yours, Ronnie Tyler Holt Power Systems Engine Sales Representative Phone: 817/307-8410 Fax: 972/721-5844 Purchase Agreement signatures: __________________________ Signature _____________________ Position ___________________________ Print ____/___/______ Date Equipment Purchase amount: $ ____________________________________ Additional Optional Purchase(s) $_______________ Item ___________ $ _______________ Item ___________ $ _______________ Item ___________ Total Purchase Amount $ _________________________ Purchase Order or other Nomenclatures:____________________________ CAT® PROTECTS YOUR INVESTMENT AT NO ADDITIONAL COST COOLING SYSTEM GOLD Thermostat Housing ✔ Water Manifold Housing ✔ Jacket Water Precooler ✔ Jacket Water Pump ✔ FUEL SYSTEM Steel Fuel Lines ✔ Fuel Shutoff Solenoid ✔ Fuel Injectors ✔ LUBRICATION SYSTEM Pan, Pump Cooler ✔ ELECTRIC SYSTEM Control Module (ECM)✔ Sensors: All Engine Sensors ✔ ALTERNATOR END Alternator, including Rotor Stator and Exciter ✔ Generator Controls ✔ Power Center ✔ 5 YEAR GOLD EXTENDED SERVICE COVERAGE (ESC) NOW INCLUDED WITH YOUR CAT GC STANDBY GENERATOR SET PURCHASE* *Applicable to diesel D40 GC - D1250 GC gensets only Your operation depends on reliable power. That’s why you trust Cat® generator sets. With Gold level ESC, you receive just the right coverage. ESC protects your investment and your peace of mind. Gold level ESC is a reliable coverage from Caterpillar. It covers key engine components, major castings, turbochargers, fuel injectors and water pumps. It also offers Additional Allowances. Some exclusions apply. AIR INDUCTION AND EXHAUST GOLD Exhaust Manifolds, Studs & Gaskets ✔ Inlet Air Heater Relay ✔ Intake Manifold ✔ Turbocharger(s)✔ SHORT BLOCK Cylinder Block Casting ✔ Crankshaft ✔ Connecting Rod Assembly ✔ Piston, Wrist Pin, Retainer Clip & Piston Rings ✔ CYLINDER HEAD Cylinder Head ✔ Intake & Exhaust Valves ✔ Valve Mechanism ✔ Camshaft, Camshaft Bearings, Key, Gear ✔ FRONT & REAR COVERS Front Cover / Plate / Housing / Gears & Gaskets ✔ Vibration Damper ✔ Flywheel Housing & Gasket ✔ AFTERTREATMENT (FACTORY INSTALLED) Diesel Particulate Filter ✔ Selective Catalytic Reduction ✔ UPGRADING YOUR ESC You may choose to upgrade to Platinum or Platinum Plus coverage level or extend to a maximum 120 month term. Work with your local Cat dealer to price and register the ESC extension and get the protection and peace of mind you deserve. Platinum and Platinum Plus levels cover the as-shipped consist of the generator set from the factory and include the following Additional Allowances. TRAVEL / MILEAGE LIMITATIONS Up to 7.5 liters 4 hr/200 mi Over 7.5 liters up to 32 liters 8 hr/320 mi EMERGENCY FREIGHT $500 USD ✔ GOLD ESC ADDITIONAL ALLOWANCES TRAVEL / MILEAGE LIMITATIONS RENTAL CRANE & RIGGING OVERTIME Engine Displacement Platinum Platinum Plus Platinum Platinum Plus Platinum Plus Platinum Plus Up to 7.5 liters 4 hr / 200 mi 10 hr / 500 mi $5,000 USD $10,000 USD $1,000 USD $3,000 USD Over 7.5 liters up to 32 liters 8 hr / 320 mi 10 hr / 500 mi $10,000 USD $20,000 USD $5,000 USD $3,000 USD Based on Engine Displacement in Liters. © 2021 Caterpillar. All Rights Reserved. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. This marketing tool does not represent a contract or obligation of any kind between Caterpillar Inc., its subsidiaries or affiliates, and the equipment owner. For details on any dealer agreement, including a complete description of the terms, conditions, and/or exclusions, contact your local Cat dealer. All graphics and lists in this marketing tool are provided solely for general information purposes and are not intended to be a solicitation or an offer to sell any product or service. CAT® PROTECTS YOUR INVESTMENT AT NO ADDITIONAL COST Dates & Program Eligibility What are the effective dates of the program? The program is effective for new generator sets ordered in USA or Canada on or after April 5th, 2021 and will continue until further notice, subject to regular review. What models are eligible for the program? The following generator set models ordered with a Standby rating are eligible. Cat Models: C4.4, C7.1, C9, C13, C15, C18, C18 Tier 4 Final, C27, C32 and Gas C18. Cat GC Models: D40 GC, D50 GC, D60 GC, D80 GC, D100 GC, D125 GC, D150 GC, D175 GC, D200 GC, D250 GC, D300 GC, D350 GC, D400 GC, D450 GC, D500 GC, D550 GC, D600 GC, D800 GC, D1000 GC, D1250 GC. Does the program include the C18 Tier 4F model? Yes. In addition to Platinum ESC coverage, the program also covers after-treatment components (DPF-Diesel Particulate Filter & SCR-Selective Catalytic Reduction) for the C18 Tier 4 model with a Standby rating. What models are NOT included in the program? Gas generator sets (with exception of Gas C18), generator sets larger than C32, generator sets ordered with a Prime rating and XQ (rental) generator sets are all excluded from the program. What level of ESC coverage will be applied? Cat models receive 60 months/2,500 hours Platinum level ESC. Cat GC models receive 60 months/2,500 hours Gold level ESC. How do I ensure I receive this coverage? Coverage must be registered appropriately to the generator set End-User / Owner to enable timely and accurate processing in the event of a claim. If you would like to submit or update your information, please email us at CatESC@cat.com with the following: [Generator set Serial Number, Company Name, Contact Name, Address, Email, Phone]. Where can I learn more about ESC? Please visit our website cat.com/EP-ESC-NA to learn more. © 2021 Caterpillar. All Rights Reserved. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. 5 YEAR GOLD EXTENDED SERVICE COVERAGE (ESC) NOW INCLUDED WITH YOUR CAT GC STANDBY GENERATOR SET PURCHASE FTSR.AU3508 - Engine Generators Model(s): C175-20, C27 Series Model D800GC, C32 Series D1000GC, C32 Series Model D1250GC, D20 (1PH), D20 (3PH), D25 (1PH), D25 (3PH), D30 (1PH), D30 (3PH), DG350-DG500 DG350-DG500 (350-500kW) Model(s): DG 100 DG followed by 100 may be followed by -2 or -4. Model(s): DG 125 DG followed by 125 may be followed by -2 or -4. Model(s): G3516 3-Phase Models – Series G3516 (1500-1580kw standby) Stationary engine generator assemblies, Model(s): 3500 Global Series, 3508, 3508B, 3512, 3512B, 3512B HD, 3512C, 3516, 3516B, 3516B HD, 3516C, 3516C-HD, 3516E, C15, C175-16, C18, C9 Stationary engine generator assemblies, "C15 Series", Model(s): GS533 Stationary engine generator assemblies, "C27 Series", Model(s): GS534, GS603 Stationary engine generator assemblies, "C32 Series", Model(s): GS277, GS471, GS471 LS Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase, Model(s): C13 (350-400kW), C15 (350-550kW), C18 (500 KW, Aftertreatment), C18 (500-750 kW), D125, D150, D175, D200, G3412 (500KW standby), G3500 (750-1500kW standby), G3520 (2000-2600KW standby) Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase, Model(s): C13GC - D350GC & D400GC (350-400 kW Standby) Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase, Model(s): C15GC - D450GC & D500GC (450-500 kW Standby) Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase, Model(s): C18GC - D550GC & D600GC (550-600 kW Standby) Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase, Model(s): C9GC - D250GC & D300GC (250-300 kW Standby) Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase, Model(s): DG, followed by 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, 125 or 150, may be followed by -2 or -4. Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase and single phase, Model(s): D100, D100GC, D125GC, D150GC, D175GC, D200GC, D40GC, D50GC, D60GC, D80, D80GC Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase and single phase, Model(s): D, followed by 40, 50 or 60, maybe followed by -, maybe followed by a number designated x, maybe followed by letter designated XX. Stationary engine generator assemblies, 3 phase and single phase, "Verizon Series", Model(s): D40, D50 Stationary engine generator assemblies, Medium Voltage and High Voltage, NG fueled for outdoor and indoor use, Model(s): 3-Phase Models - Series G3512 (750-1500kW) Engine Generators CATERPILLAR INC 560 REHOBOTH RD GRIFFIN, GA 30224-7618 United States AU3508 Stationary engine generator assemblies, Medium Voltage and High Voltage, NG fueled for outdoor and indoor use, Model(s): 3-Phase Models – Series G3516 (1500-2000kW) Stationary engine generator assemblies, Medium Voltage and High Voltage, NG fueled for outdoor and indoor use, Model(s): 3-Phase Models – Series G3520 (2000-2600kW) Stationary engine generator assemblies, single phase, Model(s): D100GC, D40GC, D50GC, D60GC, D80GC Stationary engine generator assemblies, single phase, Model(s): DG, followed by 30, 40, 50, 60, 80 or 100, may be followed by -2 or -4. *- With an optional one or two letter prefix. The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under UL Solutions' Follow - Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL Solutions' Follow - Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product. UL Solutions permits the reproduction of the material contained in Product iQ subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from Product iQ with permission from UL Solutions" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: "©2023 UL LLC." Caterpillar Inc. or any of its subsidiaries (“Caterpillar”) warrants new and remanufactured engines and electric power generation products (new and new with Cat Reman Engines) sold by it (including any products of other manufacturers packaged and sold by Caterpillar), to be free from defects in material and workmanship. This warranty does not apply to engines sold for use in on-highway vehicle or marine applications; engines in machines manufactured by or for Caterpillar; C175, 3500 and 3600 series engines used in locomotive applications; 3000 Family engines, C0.5 through C4.4 and ACERT™ (C6.6, C7, C7.1, C9, C9.3, C11, C13, C15, C18, C27, and C32) engines used in industrial, mobile agriculture and locomotive applications; or Cat® batteries; or Electric Power Generation products manufactured or assembled and sold in India except GC models, which are covered by this warranty. These products (except for GC models) are covered by other Caterpillar warranties. This warranty is subject to the following: Warranty Period • For industrial engines, engines in a petroleum applications or Petroleum Power Systems (excluding petroleum fire pump application), or engines in a Locomotive application, or Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems, the warranty period is 12 months after date of delivery to the first user. • For engines used in petroleum fire pump and mobile agriculture applications the warranty period is 24 months after date of delivery to the first user. • For controls only (EPIC), configurable and custom switchgear products, and automatic transfer switch products, the warranty period is 24 months after date of delivery to the first user. • For new CG132, CG170 and CG260 series power generation products the warranty period is 24 months after date of delivery to first user, but not to exceed 36 months from shipment from the Caterpillar place of manufacture. • For electric power generation products other than CG132, CG170 and CG260 series in prime or continuous applications the warranty period is 12 Effective with sales to the first user on or after June 1, 2024 CATERPILLAR LIMITED WARRANTY Industrial, Petroleum, Locomotive, and Agriculture Engine Products and Electric Power Generation Products Worldwide months. For standby applications the warranty period is 24 months/1000 hours. For emergency standby applications the warranty period is 24 months/400 hours. All terms begin after date of delivery to the first user. • For other manufacturer branded selective catalytic reduction systems (OMB-SCR) sold thru Caterpillar and installed by Caterpillar or a Cat dealer for use in select Cat 3500 generator sets sold and operating in the United States, the warranty period is 12 months beginning on the date of commissioning of the OMB-SCR. The maximum inventory or time the product is undelivered after receipt by the dealer or customer site is 6 months. • For all other applications the warranty period is 12 months after date of delivery to the first user. Caterpillar Responsibilities If a defect in material or workmanship is found during the warranty period, Caterpillar will, during normal working hours and at a place of business of a Cat dealer or other source approved by Caterpillar: • Provide (at Caterpillar’s choice) new, Remanufactured, or Caterpillar approved repaired parts or assembled components needed to correct the defect. Note: New, remanufactured, or Caterpillar approved repaired parts or assembled components provided under the terms of this warranty are warranted for the remainder of the warranty period applicable to the product in which installed as if such parts were original components of that product. Items replaced under this warranty become the property of Caterpillar. • Replace lubricating oil, filters, coolant, and other service items made unusable by the defect. • Provide reasonable and customary labor needed to correct the defect, including labor to disconnect the product from and reconnect the product to its attached equipment, mounting, and support systems, if required. For new 3114, 3116, and 3126 engines and, new and Caterpillar rebuild electric SELF5731-04 Page 1 of 4 power generation products (which includes the following: any new products of other manufacturers packaged and sold by Caterpillar) • Provide travel labor, up to four hours round trip, if in the opinion of Caterpillar, the product cannot reasonably be transported to a place of business of a Cat dealer or other source approved by Caterpillar (travel labor in excess of four hours round trip, and any meals, mileage, lodging, etc. is the user’s responsibility). For all other products: • Provide reasonable travel expenses for authorized mechanics, including meals, mileage, and lodging, when Caterpillar chooses to make the repair on-site. User Responsibilities The user is responsible for: • Providing proof of the delivery date to the first user. • Labor costs, except as stated under “Caterpillar Responsibilities,” including costs beyond those required to disconnect the product from and reconnect the product to its attached equipment, mounting, and support systems. • Travel or transporting costs, except as stated under “Caterpillar Responsibilities.” • Premium or overtime labor costs. • Parts shipping charges in excess of those that are usual and customary. • Local taxes, if applicable. • Costs to investigate complaints, unless the problem is caused by a defect in Caterpillar material or workmanship. • Giving timely notice of a warrantable failure and promptly making the product available for repair. • Performance of the required maintenance (including use of proper fuel, oil, lubricants, and coolant) and items replaced due to normal wear and tear. • Allowing Caterpillar access to all electronically stored data. Limitations Caterpillar is not responsible for: • Failures resulting from any use or installation that Caterpillar judges improper. • Failures resulting from attachments, accessory items, and parts not sold or approved by Caterpillar. • Failures resulting from abuse, neglect, and/or improper repair. PLEASE SEE IMPORTANT TERMS AND CONDITIONS ON PAGE 3 & 4 • Failures resulting from user’s delay in making the product available after being notified of a potential product problem. • Failures resulting from unauthorized repairs or adjustments, and unauthorized fuel setting changes. • Damage to parts, fixtures, housings, attachments, and accessory items that are not part of the engine, Cat Selective Catalytic Reduction System or electric power generation product (including any products of other manufacturers packaged and sold by Caterpillar). • Repair of components sold by Caterpillar that is warranted directly to the user by their respective manufacturer. Depending on type of application, certain exclusions may apply. Consult your Cat dealer for more information. SELF5731-04 (Continued on reverse side…) This warranty covers every major component of the products. Claims under this warranty should be submitted to a place of business of a Cat dealer or other source approved by Caterpillar. For further information concerning either the location to submit claims or Caterpillar as the issuer of this warranty, write Caterpillar Inc., 100 N.E. Adams St., Peoria, IL USA 61629, telephone 1 (309) 675-1000, or go to URL, www.cat.com, Find Your Dealer. Caterpillar’s obligations under this Limited Warranty are subject to, and shall not apply in contravention of, the laws, rules, regulations, directives, ordinances, orders, or statutes of the United States, or of any other applicable jurisdiction, without recourse or liability with respect to Caterpillar. A) For products operating outside of Australia, Fiji, Nauru, New Caledonia, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, the Solomon Islands, and Tahiti, the following is applicable: NEITHER THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTY NOR ANY OTHER WARRANTY BY CATERPILLAR, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS APPLICABLE TO ANY ITEM CATERPILLAR SELLS THAT IS WARRANTED DIRECTLY TO THE USER BY ITS MANUFACTURER. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT CATERPILLAR EMISSION-RELATED COMPONENT WARRANTIES FOR NEW ENGINES, WHERE APPLICABLE. REMEDIES UNDER THIS WARRANTY ARE LIMITED TO THE PROVISION OF MATERIAL AND SERVICES, AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. CATERPILLAR IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CATERPILLAR EXCLUDES ALL LIABILITY FOR OR ARISING FROM ANY NEGLIGENCE ON ITS PART OR ON THE PART OF ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, OR REPRESENTATIVES IN RESPECT OF THE MANUFACTURE OR SUPPLY OF GOODS OR THE PROVISION OF SERVICES RELATING TO THE GOODS. IF OTHERWISE APPLICABLE, THE VIENNA CONVENTION ON CONTRACTS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS IS EXCLUDED IN ITS ENTIRETY. For personal or family use engines or electric power generation products, operating in the USA, its territories and possessions, some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last nor allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, the previously expressed exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights, which vary by jurisdiction. To find the location of the nearest Cat dealer or other authorized repair facility, call (800) 447-4986. If you have questions concerning this warranty or its applications, call or write: In USA and Canada: Caterpillar Inc, 100 N.E. Adams St., Peoria, IL USA 61629, Attention: Customer Service Manager, Telephone 1 (309) 675-1000. Outside the USA and Canada: Contact your Cat dealer, go to URL, www.cat.com, Find Your Dealer. B) For products operating in Australia, Fiji, Nauru, New Caledonia, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, the Solomon Islands, and Tahiti, the following is applicable: THIS WARRANTY IS IN ADDITION TO WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS IMPLIED BY STATUTE AND OTHER STATUTORY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS THAT BY ANY APPLICABLE LAW CANNOT BE EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED, OR MODIFIED (“MANDATORY RIGHTS”). ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (BY STATUTE OR OTHERWISE), ARE EXCLUDED. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING PROVISIONS OF THIS PARAGRAPH, WHERE A PRODUCT IS SUPPLIED FOR BUSINESS PURPOSES, THE CONSUMER GUARANTEES UNDER THE CONSUMER GUARANTEES ACT 1993 (NZ) WILL NOT APPLY. NEITHER THIS WARRANTY NOR ANY OTHER CONDITION OR WARRANTY BY CATERPILLAR, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (SUBJECT ONLY TO THE MANDATORY RIGHTS), IS APPLICABLE TO ANY ITEM CATERPILLAR SELLS THAT IS WARRANTED DIRECTLY TO THE USER BY ITS MANUFACTURER. IF THE MANDATORY RIGHTS MAKE CATERPILLAR LIABLE IN CONNECTION WITH SERVICES OR GOODS, THEN TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER THE MANDATORY RIGHTS, THAT LIABILITY SHALL BE LIMITED AT CATERPILLAR’S OPTION TO (a) IN THE CASE OF SERVICES, THE SUPPLY OF THE SERVICES AGAIN OR THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE SERVICES SUPPLIED AGAIN AND (b) IN THE CASE OF GOODS, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS, THE SUPPLY OF EQUIVALENT GOODS, THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF SUCH REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OR THE ACQUISITION OF EQUIVALENT GOODS. CATERPILLAR EXCLUDES ALL LIABILITY FOR OR ARISING FROM ANY NEGLIGENCE ON ITS PART OR ON THE PART OF ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES IN RESPECT OF THE MANUFACTURE OR SUPPLY OF GOODS OR THE PROVISION OF SERVICES RELATING TO THE GOODS. CATERPILLAR IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES UNLESS IMPOSED UNDER MANDATORY RIGHTS. IF OTHERWISE APPLICABLE, THE VIENNA CONVENTION ON CONTRACTS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS IS EXCLUDED IN ITS ENTIRETY. C) For products supplied in Australia: IF THE PRODUCTS TO WHICH THIS WARRANTY APPLIES ARE: I. PRODUCTS OF A KIND ORDINARILY ACQUIRED FOR PERSONAL, DOMESTIC OR HOUSEHOLD USE OR CONSUMPTION; OR II. PRODUCTS THAT COST AUD 100,000 OR LESS, WHERE THOSE PRODUCTS WERE NOT ACQUIRED FOR THE PURPOSE OF RE-SUPPLY OR FOR THE PURPOSE OF USING THEM UP OR TRANSFORMING THEM IN THE COURSE OF PRODUCTION OR MANUFACTURE OR IN THE COURSE OF REPAIRING OTHER GOODS OR FIXTURES, THEN THIS SECTION C APPLIES. THE FOLLOWING MANDATORY TEXT IS INCLUDED PURSUANT TO THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW AND INCLUDES REFERENCES TO RIGHTS THE USER MAY HAVE AGAINST THE DIRECT SUPPLIER OF THE PRODUCTS: OUR GOODS COME WITH GUARANTEES THAT CANNOT BE EXCLUDED UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. YOU ARE ENTITLED TO A REPLACEMENT OR REFUND FOR A MAJOR FAILURE AND (Continued on reverse side…) COMPENSATION FOR ANY OTHER REASONABLY FORESEEABLE LOSS OR DAMAGE. YOU ARE ALSO ENTITLED TO HAVE THE GOODS REPAIRED OR REPLACED IF THE GOODS FAIL TO BE OF ACCEPTABLE QUALITY AND THE FAILURE DOES NOT AMOUNT TO A MAJOR FAILURE. THE INCLUSION OF THIS TEXT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE ANY REPRESENTATION OR ACCEPTANCE BY CATERPILLAR OF LIABILITY TO THE USER OR ANY OTHER PERSON IN ADDITION TO THAT WHICH CATERPILLAR MAY HAVE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. TO THE EXTENT THE PRODUCTS FALL WITHIN THIS SECTION C BUT ARE NOT OF A KIND ORDINARILY ACQUIRED FOR PERSONAL, DOMESTIC OR HOUSEHOLD USE OR CONSUMPTION, CATERPILLAR LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO THE EXTENT IT IS PERMITTED TO DO SO UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW TO, AT ITS OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCTS, THE SUPPLY OF EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS, OR THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF SUCH REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OR THE ACQUISITION OF EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS. THE WARRANTY SET OUT IN THIS DOCUMENT IS GIVEN BY CATERPILLAR INC. OR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES, 100 N. E. ADAMS ST, PEORIA, IL USA 61629, TELEPHONE 1 309 675 1000,THE USER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH MAKING A CLAIM UNDER THE WARRANTY SET OUT IN THIS DOCUMENT, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS DOCUMENT, AND THE USER IS REFERRED TO THE BALANCE OF THE DOCUMENT TERMS CONCERNING CLAIM PROCEDURES, CATERPILLAR RESPONSIBILITIES AND USER RESPONSIBILITIES. TO THE EXTENT PERMISSIBLE BY LAW, THE TERMS SET OUT IN THE REMAINDER OF THIS WARRANTY DOCUMENT (INCLUDING SECTION B) CONTINUE TO APPLY TO PRODUCTS TO WHICH THIS SECTION C APPLIES. © 2024 Caterpillar. All Rights Reserved. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK,their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Generator Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco ŶŐŝŶĞ'ĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌƐϮϲϯϮϭϯͲϮϵ t^<Ϯϰϱϳϳʹ'ĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌ ĂƌůLJWƌŽĐƵƌĞŵĞŶƚWĂĐŬĂŐĞ dd,D EdͲ^hD/dd>d^, d&KZ ϮϲϯϮϭϯ͕ E'/E ' E ZdKZ^ ^ƵďŵŝƚƚŚĞĨŽůůŽǁŝŶŐĚĂƚĂǁŝƚŚŝĚWƌŽƉŽƐĂůĂŶĚǁŝƚŚ^ŚŽƉƌĂǁŝŶŐ͗ /ƚĞŵEŽ͘ĞƐĐƌŝƉƚŝŽŶϰϴϬs'ĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌĨŽƌWƵŵƉ^ƚĂƚŝŽŶ ϭ DĂŶƵĨĂĐƚƵƌĞƌŽĨ'ĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌ͗CAT Ϯ 'ĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌŬt͗700kW ϯ dŽƚĂů ƋƵŝƉŵĞŶƚŝŵĞŶƐŝŽŶƐĨŽƌ 'ĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌŝŶĐůƵĚŝŶŐƐĞƌǀŝĐĞƉůĂƚĨŽƌŵƐ ;ŝŶĐŚĞƐͿ͗ >ĞŶŐƚŚdžtŝĚƚŚdž,ĞŝŐŚƚ 392.625" x 181.54"x 124" ϰ dŽƚĂů;ǁĞƚͿtĞŝŐŚƚ;ůďƐ͘Ϳ͗39,224.2# ϱ &ƵĞůŽŶƐƵŵƉƚŝŽŶ;ŐĂůůŽŶƐͬŚŽƵƌͿ ͺͺ15.7ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺĂƚϮϱйŐĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌ<tƌĂƚŝŶŐ ͺͺ 26.5ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺĂƚϱϬйŐĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌ<tƌĂƚŝŶŐ ͺͺͺ39ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺĂƚϳϱйŐĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌ<tƌĂƚŝŶŐ ͺͺͺ50ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺĂƚϭϬϬйŐĞŶĞƌĂƚŽƌ<tƌĂƚŝŶŐ ϲ ĂƉĂĐŝƚLJŽĨ&ƵĞůdĂŶŬ;ŐĂůůŽŶƐͿTotal: 2,702 Useable: 2640 EK&^ d/KE Cat® DIESEL GENERATOR SETS Engine Model Cat® C18 ATAACTM In-line 6, 4-cycle diesel Bore x Stroke 145mm x 183mm (5.7in x 7.2in) Displacement 18.13 L (1106.3 in³) Compression Ratio 14:1 Aspiration Turbocharged Air-to-Air Aftercooled Fuel Injection System Electronic Unit Injection Governor Electronic ADEM™ A4 Model Standby Prime C18 700 ekW 875 kVA 794 kVA EPA TIER II Performance Standby Prime Frequency, Hz 60 60 Genset Power Rating, kVA 875 794 Gen set power rating with fan @ 0.8 power factor, ekW 700 635 Fuelling strategy EPA TIER II EPA TIER II Performance Number EM3840 EM3841 Fuel Consumption 100% load with fan, L/hr, gal/hr 75% load with fan, L/hr, gal/hr 50% load with fan, L/hr, gal/hr 25% load with fan, L/hr, gal/hr Cooling System1 Radiator air flow restriction (system), kPa, in. Water 0.12, 0.48 0.12, 0.48 Radiator air flow, m3/min, cfm 900, 31783 900, 31783 Engine coolant capacity, L, gal 20.8, 5.5 20.8, 5.5 Radiator coolant capacity, L, gal 77, 20.3 77, 20.3 Total coolant capacity, L, gal 97.8, 25.8 97.8, 25.8 Inlet Air Combustion air inlet flow rate, m³/min, cfm 66.5, 2348 64.7, 2285 Max. Allowable Combustion Air Inlet Temp, °C, °F 49, 120 49,120 Exhaust System Exhaust stack gas temperature, °C, °F 441.1, 826 417.9, 784 Exhaust gas flow rate, m³/min, cfm 166, 5863 155.5, 5489 Exhaust system backpressure (maximum allowable) kPa, in. water 10.0, 40.0 10.0, 40.0 Heat Rejection Heat rejection to jacket water, kW, Btu/min 219, 12454 202, 11487 Heat rejection to exhaust (total) kW, Btu/min 706, 40149 640, 36396 Heat rejection to aftercooler, kW, Btu/min 263, 14946 242, 13762 Heat rejection to atmosphere from engine, kW, Btu/min 131, 7450 119, 6767 PACKAGE PERFORMANCE Standby & Prime: 6 0Hz APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS: AS1359, CSA C22.2 No100-04, UL142, UL489, UL869, UL2200, NFPA37, NFPA70, NFPA99, NFPA110, IBC, IEC60034-1, ISO3046, ISO8528, NEMA MG1-22, NEMA MG1-33, 2006/95/EC, 2006/42/EC, 2004/108/EC. Note: Codes may not be available in all model configurations. Please consult your local Cat Dealer representative for availability. Output available with varying load for the duration of the interruption of the normal source power. Average power output is 70% of the standby power rating. Typical operation is 200 hours per year, with maximum expected usage of 500 hours per year. Output available with varying load for an unlimited time. Average power output is 70% of the prime power rating. Typical peak demand is 100% of prime rated ekW with 10% overload capability for emergency use for a maximum of 1 hour in 12. Overload operation cannot exceed 25 hours per year Ratings are based on SAE J1349 standard conditions. These ratings also apply at ISO3046 standard conditions. For ambient and altitude capabilities consult your Cat dealer. Air flow restriction (system) is added to existing restriction from factory. Emissions data measurement procedures are consistent with those described in EPA CFR 40 Part 89, Subpart D & E and ISO8178-1 for measuring HC, CO, PM, NOx. Data shown is based on steady state operating conditions of 77° F, 28.42 in HG and number 2 diesel fuel with 35° API and LHV of 18,390 BTU/lb. The nominal emissions data shown is subject to instrumentation, measurement, facility and engine to engine variations. Emissions data is based on 100% load and thus cannot be used to compare to EPA regulations which use values based on a weighted cycle. UL 2200 Listed packages may have oversized generators with a different temperature rise and motor starting characteristics. Generator temperature rise is based on a 40° C ambient per NEMA MG1-32. www.Cat.com/electricpower ©2018 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, ADEM, S•O•S, BUILT FOR IT, “Caterpillar Yellow”, the “Power Edge” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Cat® DIESEL GENERATOR SETS LEHE1771-03-ISO3046 (09/18) Emissions (Nominal)2 NOx, mg/Nm³, g/hp-hr 2190, 4.89 2027, 4.53 CO, mg/Nm³, g/hp-hr 116, 0.26 83.6, 0.19 HC, mg/Nm³, g/hp-hr 38.5, 0.10 33.8, 0.09 PM, mg/Nm³, g/hp-hr 14.1, 0.04 12.1, 0.03 Alternator3 Voltages, V 208V 220V 240V 480V 600V Motor Starting Capability @ 30% Voltage Dip, skVA 1917 2142 2147 2147 2512 Current, amps 2428.8 2296.3 2104.9 1052.5 842 Frame Size LC7224L LC7224L LC7224L LC7224L LC7224L Excitation AREP AREP AREP AREP AREP Project Sizing Report Sizing Id 11155262 Electricity Supply 60 Hz 480/277 V Project Name Westlake Pump Station Connection STAR Customer Name Freese and Nichols Max. Ambient Temperature 113.0 F Region U.S.Altitude 660.0 Ft. A.S.L Prepared By Ronald Tyler Humidity 30% Modified Date 14-Jul-2025 Project Description Load Analysis Summary Max Transient Load Step 848.0 SkVA / 203.5 SkW Peak Transient Load Step 1,054.5 SkVA / 469.5 SkW Final Running Load 498.0 kVA / 443.5 kW / 0.89 PF Max Running Non Linear Load 230.2 RkVA Selection Criteria Step 3 Voltage dip restriction Project THDI 9.9% Performance data shown in this report are representative of an engine performance at normal operating temperature, which may differ from cold engine performance. To ensure proper operation, please contact your local Cat Dealer or Caterpillar A&I team for further guidance on cold engine transient performance. Generator Set Engine Model (1) of C18 Nameplate Rating 700.0 ekW / 875.0 kVA / 0.8 PF Package Model 700 Site Output Rating 700 ekW / 875 kVA Voltage Regulator and Slope IVR 2:1 slope;Rating Type Standby Feature Code C18PD1B Open / Enclosure Open Fuel Diesel UL Listed No Sizing Methodology Conventional Capacity Used 63.4% Project THDV 8.8%Generator Set Type Stationary Engine Make / Model C18 Emissions / Certifications EPA ESE Aspiration TA Governor ELEC Cylinder Configuration INLINE - 6 Aftercooler Type ATAAC Speed 1800 RPM Displacement 1,106 Cubic Inch / 18 Liter Engine Performance Number EM3840 Bore 145 Fuel Consumption at 100% Load 51.7 gph Stroke 183 Alternator Alternator Type/Frame Size LC / LC7224H Insulation Class H Alternator Winding Pitch 0.6667 Temperature Rise 150 C Excitation/Winding Type AREP / RANDOM Number Of Poles 4 Alternator Arrangement Number 5475946 Number of Leads 12 Subtransient Reactance X''d 0.1344 Rated Amps 1,052.5 **** See your Caterpillar dealer and/or Spec Sheet for technical information. ***** Package Power Tolerance: +/- 5% Block Load(Only) Transient Response * Load Change %FDip %VDip %Recovery Time (sec) 0 - 25 <5%<5%< 3 0 - 50 6.1 11.5 < 3 0 - 75 12.1 23.5 3.0 0 - 100 17.7 34.6 3.5 0 - 100 Load Change % 0 3.5 Recovery Time (sec) Transient Performance Block Load (only) Transient Response values are at factory conditions with a resistive load. This information is representative of a typical Cat generator set, but is not guaranteed. Generator set block load capabilities at site conditions may vary from factory transient response test results due to site altitude, site ambient, and engine to engine variation. Load Report Project Name Westlake Pump Station Electricity Supply 60 Hz 480/277 V Customer Name Freese and Nichols Rating Type Standby Region U.S.Max. Ambient Temperature 113.0 F Prepared By Ronald Tyler Altitude 660.0 Ft. A.S.L Modified Date 14-Jul-2025 Humidity 30% Engine Model (1) of C18 Nameplate Rating 700.0 ekW / 875.0 kVA / 0.8 PF Load Details Permitted Predicted Transient Inrush Running Resultant Peak Cumulative Running Load Step Load Description FDip VDip FDip VDip SkVA SkW kVA kW SkVA SkW kVA kW Step 1 1.1 2x1.50 HP - 1.5 hp fans: NEMA, 3-Phase Motor, Across the line, Loaded, NEMA K 5%15%25.5 17.1 3.8 2.9 1.2 1x1.00 HP - MOVs 1 hp : NEMA, 3-Phase Motor, Across the line, Loaded, NEMA L 5%15%9.5 6.6 1.4 1.0 1.3 1x10.00 Refrigerant Tons - Three Phase Air Conditioning Load: NEMA, 3-Phase Air Conditioning, Across the line, Intermittent, Loaded, Single Operating Point 5%15%79.5 38.2 13.1 10.9 1.4 1x30.00 kVA - Transformer Load 30 Kva: Steady State Magnetization, 95% Efficiency, 208V Secondary Voltage --0.0 0.0 1.5 0.1 1.5 1x24.00 kW - misc load on transformer 80% : Miscellaneous, Non-Motor, Linear 5%15%30.0 24.0 30.0 24.0 Adjustment for transformer losses - Transformer Load 30 Kva 35%40%0.0 0.0 1.5 1.2 Step 1 Total 5%15%<5%<5%142.3 85.9 50.8 40.1 Total Through Step 1 142.3 85.9 50.8 40.1 Step 2 2.1 1x250.00 HP - 250 hp : NEMA, 3-Phase Motor, VFD, 110% Current Limit, Single Operating Point, 18 Pulse , 9.9 THDI%5%15%23.0 20.7 230.2 207.1 Step 2 Total 5%15%<5%<5%23.0 20.7 280.1 247.3 Total Through Step 2 301.6 268.0 280.1 247.3 Step 3 3.1 1x250.00 HP - 250 hp RVAT 80% tap: NEMA, 3-Phase Motor, Autotransformer 80%5%15%848.0 203.5 218.0 196.2 Step 3 Total 5%15%<5%14.5%848.0 203.5 498.0 443.5 Total Through Step 3 1,054.5 450.7 498.0 443.5 Intermittent Step 4.1 1x10.00 Refrigerant Tons - Three Phase Air Conditioning Load: NEMA, 3-Phase Air Conditioning, Across the line, Intermittent, Loaded, Single Operating Point 5%15%79.5 38.2 13.1 10.9 Step 4 Total 5%15%<5%<5%79.5 38.2 511.1 454.4 Total Through Step 4 550.9 481.6 498.0 443.5 Load Analysis Summary : Generator set is user selected and meets site requirements Maximum Step Maximum Peak Final Running SkVA SkW SkVA SkW kVA kW 848.0 203.5 1,054.5 469.5 498.0 443.5 2,347.77 ft³/min 0.32 ft² 31,735.00 ft³/min 0.22 ft² 5,863.36 ft³/min 0.03 lb/ft³ Engine Room Tools Summary Project Name Westlake Pump Station Electricity Supply 60 Hz 480/277 V Customer Name Freese and Nichols Rating Type Standby Region U.S.Max. Ambient Temperature 113.0 F Prepared By Ronald Tyler Altitude 660.0 Ft. A.S.L Modified Date 14-Jul-2025 Humidity 30% Engine Model (1) of C18 Nameplate Rating 700.0 ekW / 875.0 kVA / 0.8 PF Fuel Tank Summary Running Hours hr Fuel Tank Size Data coming soon Oversize Factor %Usable Capacity Data coming soon Fuel Consumption @ 100% Load 51.65 US gal/hr Radiator Duct and Room Fresh Air Louver Designer Summary Duct Dimensions from Radiator Side (Length)124.01 in Combustion Airflow Duct Dimensions from Radiator Side (Width)92.78 in Minimum Louver Area Heat Radiation from Engine & Alternator 169.90 kW Temp Rise 19.67 Deg. F Engine & Alternator Airflow Radiator Duct Area Exhaust Back Pressure Summary Total Straight Pipe Length 0 ft Exhaust Gas Flow Total Number Of 90 Deg Long Radius Elbow 0 Muffler Pressure Drop Data coming soon Total Number Of 90 Deg Short Radius Elbow 0 Pressure Drop in Exhaust 0.00 psi Total Number Of 45 Deg Elbow 0 Max Allowable Pressure Drop Data coming soon Minimum Exhaust Pipe Diameter 0.00 in Stack Temperature 826.01 Deg. F Gas Density Disclaimer: These engine room design calculations are intended for general information and guidance purpose only. A professional engineer, licensed in the appropriate field of engineering, should be consulted for a formal evaluation. Caterpillar disclaims all representations and warranties of any kind and shall have no liability in law or equity for damages consequential or otherwise arising from the use of these calculations. Generator Data Selected Model Engine: C18 Generator Frame: LC7234N Genset Rating (kW): 700.0 Line Voltage: 480 Fuel: Diesel Generator Arrangement: 5475954 Genset Rating (kVA): 875.0 Phase Voltage: 277 Frequency: 60 Excitation Type: Permanent Magnet Pwr. Factor: 0.8 Rated Current: 1052.5 Duty: STANDBY Connection: SERIES STAR Application: EPG Status: Current Version: 42423 /42947 /43269 /8196 Spec Information Generator Specification Frame: LC7234N Type: LC No. of Bearings: 1 Winding Type: RANDOM WOUND Flywheel: 14.0 Connection: SERIES STAR Housing: 1 Phases: 3 No. of Leads: 12 Poles: 4 Wires per Lead: 0 Sync Speed: 1800 Generator Pitch: 0.6667 Generator Efficiency Per Unit Load kW Efficiency % 0.25 175.0 91.4 0.5 350.0 94.2 0.75 525.0 95.2 1.0 700.0 95.3 Reactances Per Unit Ohms SUBTRANSIENT - DIRECT AXIS X''d 0.0911 0.0240 SUBTRANSIENT - QUADRATURE AXIS X''q 0.0999 0.0263 TRANSIENT - SATURATED X'd 0.1139 0.0300 SYNCHRONOUS - DIRECT AXIS Xd 2.3793 0.6265 SYNCHRONOUS - QUADRATURE AXIS Xq 1.4276 0.3759 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE X2 0.0957 0.0252 ZERO SEQUENCE X0 0.0004 0.0001 Time Constants Seconds OPEN CIRCUIT TRANSIENT - DIRECT AXIS T'd0 2.0915 SHORT CIRCUIT TRANSIENT - DIRECT AXIS T'd 0.1000 OPEN CIRCUIT SUBSTRANSIENT - DIRECT AXIS T''d0 0.0124 SHORT CIRCUIT SUBSTRANSIENT - DIRECT AXIS T''d 0.0100 OPEN CIRCUIT SUBSTRANSIENT - QUADRATURE AXIS T''q0 0.1427 SHORT CIRCUIT SUBSTRANSIENT - QUADRATURE AXIS T''q 0.0100 EXCITER TIME CONSTANT Te 0.0258 ARMATURE SHORT CIRCUIT Ta 0.0150 Short Circuit Ratio: 0.6 Stator Resistance = 0.004 Ohms Field Resistance = 0.4715 Ohms Voltage Regulation Voltage level adjustment: +/-5.0% Voltage regulation, steady state: +/-0.5% Voltage regulation with 3% speed change: +/-0.5% Waveform deviation line - line, no load: less than 2.0% Telephone influence factor: less than 50 Generator Excitation No Load Full Load, (rated) pf Series Parallel Excitation voltage:18.47 Volts 63.79 Volts Volts Excitation current 1.17 Amps 3.32 Amps Amps Caterpillar Generator Data Selected Model Engine: C18 Generator Frame: LC7234N Genset Rating (kW): 700.0 Line Voltage: 480 Fuel: Diesel Generator Arrangement: 5475954 Genset Rating (kVA): 875.0 Phase Voltage: 277 Frequency: 60 Excitation Type: Permanent Magnet Pwr. Factor: 0.8 Rated Current: 1052.5 Duty: STANDBY Connection: SERIES STAR Application: EPG Status: Current Version: 42423 /42947 /43269 /8196 Generator Mechanical Information Center of Gravity Dimension X 0.0 mm 0.0 IN. Dimension Y 0.0 mm 0.0 IN. Dimension Z 0.0 mm 0.0 IN. "X" is measured from driven end of generator and parallel to rotor. Towards engine fan is positive. See General Information for details "Y" is measured vertically from rotor center line. Up is positive. "Z" is measured to left and right of rotor center line. To the right is positive. Generator WT =1837 kg * Rotor WT =684 kg * Stator WT =1153 kg 4,050 LB 1,508 LB 2,542 LB Rotor Balance = 0.0508 mm deflection PTP Overspeed Capacity = 125% of synchronous speed Generator Torsional Data J1 = Coupling and Fan J2 = Rotor TOTAL J = J1 + J2 + J3 J3 = Exciter End K1 = Shaft Stiffness between J1 + J2 (Diameter 1) K2 = Shaft Stiffness between J2 + J3 (Diameter 2) J1 K1 Min Shaft Dia 1 J2 K2 Min Shaft Dia 2 J3 12.8 LB IN. s2 89.1 MLB IN./rad 5.5 IN.80.1 LB IN. s2 77.9 MLB IN./rad 5.7 IN.4.5 LB IN. s2 1.441 N m s2 10.06768 MN m/rad 140.0 mm 9.05 N m s2 8.8 MN m/rad 145.0 mm 0.503 N m s2 Total J 97.3 LB IN. s2 10.994 N m s2 Selected Model Engine: C18 Generator Frame: LC7234N Genset Rating (kW): 700.0 Line Voltage: 480 Fuel: Diesel Generator Arrangement: 5475954 Genset Rating (kVA): 875.0 Phase Voltage: 277 Frequency: 60 Excitation Type: Permanent Magnet Pwr. Factor: 0.8 Rated Current: 1052.5 Duty: STANDBY Connection: SERIES STAR Application: EPG Status: Current Version: 42423 /42947 /43269 /8196 Caterpillar Generator Data Generator Cooling Requirements - Temperature - Insulation Data Cooling Requirements: Temperature Data: (Ambient 40 0C) Heat Dissipated:34.5 kW Stator Rise:105.0 0C Air Flow:72.0 m3/min Rotor Rise:105.0 0C Insulation Class: H Insulation Reg. as shipped: 100.0 MΩ minimum at 40 0C Thermal Limits of Generator Frequency:60 Hz Line to Line Voltage:480 Volts B BR 80/40 912.0 kVA F BR -105/40 1037.4 kVA H BR - 125/40 1140.0 kVA F PR - 130/40 1140.0 kVA H PR - 150/40 1208.4 kVA H PR27 - 163/27 1255.0 kVA Selected Model Engine: C18 Generator Frame: LC7234N Genset Rating (kW): 700.0 Line Voltage: 480 Fuel: Diesel Generator Arrangement: 5475954 Genset Rating (kVA): 875.0 Phase Voltage: 277 Frequency: 60 Excitation Type: Permanent Magnet Pwr. Factor: 0.8 Rated Current: 1052.5 Duty: STANDBY Connection: SERIES STAR Application: EPG Status: Current Version: 42423 /42947 /43269 /8196 Starting Capability & Current Decrement Motor Starting Capability (0.6 pf) SKVA Percent Volt Dip 187 2.5 384 5.0 592 7.5 811 10.0 1,042 12.5 1,288 15.0 1,548 17.5 1,824 20.0 2,118 22.5 2,432 25.0 2,768 27.5 3,127 30.0 3,513 32.5 3,929 35.0 4,378 37.5 4,864 40.0 Caterpillar Generator Data Current Decrement Data E Time Cycle AMP 0.0 11,512 1.0 8,365 2.0 6,891 3.0 5,876 4.0 5,060 5.0 4,378 7.5 3,630 10.0 3,845 12.5 4,114 15.0 4,365 20.0 4,364 25.0 4,165 30.0 4,068 35.0 4,046 40.0 4,055 45.0 4,071 Instantaneous 3 Phase Fault Current: 11512 Amps Instantaneous Line - Line Fault Current: 9729 Amps Instantaneous Line - Neutral Fault Current: 16822 Amps Selected Model Engine: C18 Generator Frame: LC7234N Genset Rating (kW): 700.0 Line Voltage: 480 Fuel: Diesel Generator Arrangement: 5475954 Genset Rating (kVA): 875.0 Phase Voltage: 277 Frequency: 60 Excitation Type: Permanent Magnet Pwr. Factor: 0.8 Rated Current: 1052.5 Duty: STANDBY Connection: SERIES STAR Application: EPG Status: Current Version: 42423 /42947 /43269 /8196 Generator Output Characteristic Curves Open Circuit Curve Field Current Line - Line Volt 0.0 0 17.0 288 20.5 336 25.1 384 32.7 432 47.7 480 81.6 528 163.2 576 366.0 624 876.1 672 Caterpillar Generator Data Short Circuit Curve Field Current Armature Current 0.0 0 39.2 631 45.7 737 52.3 842 58.8 947 65.3 1,052 71.9 1,158 78.4 1,263 84.9 1,368 91.5 1,473 Selected Model Engine: C18 Generator Frame: LC7234N Genset Rating (kW): 700.0 Line Voltage: 480 Fuel: Diesel Generator Arrangement: 5475954 Genset Rating (kVA): 875.0 Phase Voltage: 277 Frequency: 60 Excitation Type: Permanent Magnet Pwr. Factor: 0.8 Rated Current: 1052.5 Duty: STANDBY Connection: SERIES STAR Application: EPG Status: Current Version: 42423 /42947 /43269 /8196 Generator Output Characteristic Curves Zero Power Factor Curve Field Current Line - Line Volt 65.3 0 80.3 240 83.5 288 87.3 336 92.7 384 102.3 432 122.2 480 168.7 528 282.2 576 565.8 624 Caterpillar Generator Data Air Gap Curve Field Current Line - Line Volt 0.0 0 16.5 288 19.2 336 22.0 384 24.7 432 27.5 480 30.2 528 33.0 576 35.7 624 38.5 672 Selected Model Engine: C18 Generator Frame: LC7234N Genset Rating (kW): 700.0 Line Voltage: 480 Fuel: Diesel Generator Arrangement: 5475954 Genset Rating (kVA): 875.0 Phase Voltage: 277 Frequency: 60 Excitation Type: Permanent Magnet Pwr. Factor: 0.8 Rated Current: 1052.5 Duty: STANDBY Connection: SERIES STAR Application: EPG Status: Current Version: 42423 /42947 /43269 /8196 Reactive Capability Curve Caterpillar Generator Data Caterpillar Confidential: Green Content Owner: Commercial Processes Division General Information GENERATOR INFORMATION (DM7900) ------------------------------------------------------------- 1. Motor Starting Motor starting curves are obtained in accordance with IEC60034, and are displayed at 0.6 power factor. 2. Voltage Dip Prediction of the generator synchronous voltage dip can be made by consulting the plot for the voltage dip value that corresponds to the desired motor starting kVA value. 3. Definitions A) Generator Keys Frame: abbreviation of generator frame size Freq: frequency in hertz. PP/SB: prime/standby duty respectively Volts: line - line terminal voltage kW: rating in electrical kilo watts Model: engine sales model B) Generator Temperature Rise The indicated temperature rises are the IEC/NEMA limits for standby or prime power applications. The quoted rise figures are maximum limits only and are not necessarily indicative of the actual temperature rise of a given machine winding. C) Centre of Gravity The specified centre of gravity is for the generator only. For single bearing, and two bearing close coupled generators, the center of gravity is measured from the generator/engine flywheel-housing interface and from the centreline of the rotor Shaft. For two bearing, standalone generators, the center of gravity is measured from the end of the rotor shaft and from the centerline of the rotor shaft. D) Generator Current Decrement Curves The generator current decrement curve indicates the generator armature current arising from a symmetrical three-phase fault at the generator terminals. Generators equipped with AREP or PMG excitation systems will sustain 300% of rated armature current for 10 seconds. E) Generator Efficiency Curves The efficiency curve is displayed for the generator only under the given conditions of rating, voltage, frequency and power factor. This is not the overall generating set efficiency curve. Caterpillar Generator Data Automatic Voltage Regulator D350AVR The D350, Digital Voltage Regulator is used to regulate alternators with a field current of less than 5 A in continuous operations, and 10 A maximum in the event of short-circuit for 10 seconds maximum. Its design is in accordance with mounting in a generator terminal box or a control cabinet. It is required, at a minimum, to follow the local protection and safety standards, especially those specific to electrical installations for voltages of 300 VAC phase-to-neutral maximum. NFLink™ configuration module The D350 is equipped with NFC technology for communication and configuration purposes. The configuration module is placed over the two dedicated positioning holes on the plastic enclosure as shown below. Once the configuration is done, the NF Link must be removed as it is not supposed to be left on the D350 when it is in continuous operation. Automatic Voltage Regulator Technical Characteristics D350 regulator can be used to perform the following functions: Voltage regulation •With or without reactive droop compensation (Reactive droop to allow parallel operation) •With or without line droop compensation Regulation of the field current, or manual mode, which allows direct control of the field current. The D350 can also be used to: •Adjust the reference for the regulation mode in progress, using an analogue input (0 – 10V and potentiometer) •Monitoring of temperature sensor (Pt100 or CTP) •Limit the minimum field current delivered to the exciter field •Monitoring of the maximum stator current limit •Loss of voltage sensing •Withstand a sudden short-circuit for 10 seconds maximum in AREP, PMG •Signals monitoring (events logger) •2 digital outputs for various trip, regulation mode and measurement data Alternator voltage sensing: •3 phases without neutral, 2 phases or 1 phase with neutral •Three-phase range 0 – 530 VAC •Consumption < 2 VA Stator current measurement with CT: •Range 0 –1A or 0 – 5A •Consumption < 2 VA Power supply: •4 terminals for PMG, AREP, SHUNT •Range 50 – 277 VAC •Consumption max < 3000 VA Field excitation: •Rated 0 – 5A •Short-circuit 10A max Automatic Voltage Regulator Frequency: •Range 10-100 Hz •Regulation accuracy: +/-0.25% of the average of the three phases on a linear load, with harmonic distortion less than 5% •Voltage adjustment range: 0 to 150% of the rated voltage •Quadrature droop adjustment range: -20% to 20% •Under frequency protection: integrated, adjustable threshold, slope adjustable from 0.5 to 3V/Hz in steps of 0.1 V/Hz •Excitation ceiling: adjustable by configuration at 3 points • Environment: ambient temperature from -40°C to +65°C, relative humidity of less than 95% non-condensing, mounted in a cabinet or in a terminal box Easy Reg Advanced: • All the D350 settings are entered/configured using the “EasyReg Advanced” software • This program is only compatible with computers running WINDOWS® versions of Windows 7 Windows 10 , Windows 11 and above operating systems. Dimensions: •Height: 52.9 mm •Width: 125 mm •Length: 140 mm Mounting: •Holes spacing on the Length: 115 mm •Holes spacing on the width: 100 mm Weight: •0.45 kg Conformity to standards: •EMC: IEC 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-4 •Humidity: IEC 60068-1 and test in accordance with IEC 60068-2-14 •Dry heat: IEC 60068-2-2 •Damp heat: IEC 60028-2-30 •Cold: IEC 600068-2-1 Automatic Voltage Regulator LEHE1923-01 (03/25) www.cat.com/electricpower ©2025 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. D350 AVR and NFLink™ Dimensions G E N E R A T O R S AVR12 – PERMANENT MAGNET GENERATOR The permanent magnet generator (PMG) option upgrades the excitation system of the generator from the standard self-excited system to a separately-excited system. The PMG couples to the non-drive end of the generator and provides an independent source of excitation power that ensures initial voltage build-up. The PMG improves the voltage response of the generator during transient load application, such as motor starting, and provides a sustained short-circuit current for the operation of protective devices. Isolation of the excitation power ensures that regulation is not affected by non-linear distorting loads. www.cat-ElectricPower.com Market: N. America Information contained in this publication may be considered confidential. © 2005 Caterpillar LEHE4015 (01-05) Discretion is recommended when distributing. All Rights Reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. GENERATOR SPACE HEATER Picture shown may not reflect actual configuration Space Heaters Connection Diagram Series * for North American Region Circuit Breaker Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco Circuit Breakers C9, C13, C15, C18 Circuit Breakers Manually Operated Circuit Breakers Current (A)Frame Number of Poles Interrupting Ratings (kA ms)Trip Unit (Lugs) Cable Size Range / Phase Auxilliary Options240V480V600V 100 H 3 65 35 18 Electronic LSI 8-3/0 AWG Form C (1 NO + 1 NC) Shunt Trip 24 VDC250J3653518(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 400 XT5 3 65 35 18 Electronic LS/I (S or I) or LSI (2) 2/0 – 500 kcmil 1 Form C + 1 Bell Alarm 60 VAC/VDC Shunt Trip 24 VDC600XT63653520(3) 2/0 – 400 kcmil 800 XT6 3 65 35 20 (3) 2/0 – 400 kcmil 1200 XT7 3 65 50 25 (4) 4/0 – 500 kcmil 1 Form C + 1 Bell Alarm Shunt Trip 24 VAC/VDC 1600 T8 3 65 35 18 Electronic LSI BUS BAR Form C (1 NO + 1 NC) Shunt Trip 24 VDC 2000 T8 3 65 35 18 BUS BAR 2500 T8 3 65 35 18 BUS BAR 3000 T8 3 65 35 18 BUS BAR Moulded Case Circuit Breakers: 100 A – 3000 A 200 kW – 750 kW Gensets Features •100% UL Listing •Electronic Trip Units •Double insulation •Clear indication of breaker status • Can be used in normal operation in an ambient of –25°and+70° C •Auxiliary contacts available • Insulating case constructed from fiberglass reinforced synthetic resin •Anti-corrosion treatment on all metal parts •Optional 2 or 3 Circuit Breakers Conformity with International Standards Circuit Breakers have been designed to comply with these major standards: •UL 489 •CSA22.2 •IEC 60947-2 •NEMA AB1 x2 Circuit Breakers Electrically Operated Circuit Breakers Current (A)Frame Number of Poles Interrupting Ratings (kA ms)Trip Unit (Lugs) Cable Size Range / Phase Auxilliary Options240V480V600V 800 XT7M 3 65 50 25 Electronic LSI (4) 4/0 – 500 kcmil 2 Form C + 1 Bell Alarm 24 VDC 1200 XT7M 3 65 50 25 Electronic LSI (4) 4/0 – 500 kcmil 2 Form C + 1 Bell Alarm 24 VDC 2000 T 8M-S 3 125 125 100 Electronic LSI BUS BAR 2 Form C + 1 Bell Alarm 24 VDC 3000 T 8M-S 3 125 125 100 Electronic LSI BUS BAR 2 Form C + 1 Bell Alarm 24 VDC L-I Mode • Long Time / Overload Protection, “L“ has an adjustable trip threshold and adjustable time delay. • Instantaneous Short Circuit Protection, “I“ has an adjustable short circuit trip threshold and once exceeded will cause the circuit breaker to trip instantaneously. L-S Mode • Long Time / Overload Protection, “L“ has an adjustable trip threshold and adjustable time delay. • Short Circuit Protection, “S“ has an adjustable short circuit trip threshold and adjustable time delay if necessary for coordinating with downstream loads. • Instantaneous Short Circuit Protection, “I“ is still included, but the threshold level is not adjustable and exists at a predeter- mined level. Electronic L-S-I Trip Units • Long Time/Overload Protection, “L“ has an adjustable trip threshold and adjustable time delay. • Short Circuit Protection, “S“ has an adjustable short circuit trip threshold and adjustable time delay if necessary for coordinating with downstream loads. • Instantaneous Short Circuit Protection, “I“ has an adjustable short circuit trip threshold and once exceeded will cause the circuit breaker to trip instantaneously. Circuit Breakers Single Breaker Options (250 – 3000A) Model Current (A)Operation C9 100 Manually Operated C9 250 Manually Operated C9 400 Manually Operated C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 600 Manually Operated C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 800 Manually Operated or Electrically Operated C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 1200 Manually Operated or Electrically Operated C13 , C15 , C18 1600 Manually Operated C15 , C18 2000 Manually Operated or Electrically Operated C18 2500 Manually Operated C18 3000 Manually Operated or Electrically Operated Multiple Breaker Options Model Main Breaker Box Auxiliary Box Breaker (Amps) Manually Operated1st Breaker (Amps) Manually Operated 2nd Breaker (Amps) Manually Operated C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 100 100, 250, 400, 600, 800, or 1200 3rd Breaker: 100, 250 or 400 (Not availabe if 1st & 2nd Breaker = 1200A) C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 250 C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 400 C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 600 C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 800 C9 , C13 , C15 , C18 1200 C13 , C15 , C18 1600 Not Available 2nd Breaker: 100, 250 or 400 C15 , C18 2000 C18 2500 C18 3000 Circuit Breakers XT7 – XT7 M Ekip Dip LSI L-S-I Functions XT7 – XT7 M Ekip Dip LS/I L-I Functions XT7 – XT7 M Ekip Dip LS/I L-S Functions Figure 10 Full Load Current Full Load Current Table for the Circuit Breakers ©20 20 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Three Phase – 60 Hz Power Voltage kW KVA 40.0 50.0 48.1 60.1 120.3 131.2 138.8 50.0 62.5 60.1 75.2 150.4 164.0 173.5 60.0 75.0 72.2 90.2 180.4 196.8 208.2 80.0 100.0 96.2 120.3 240.6 262.4 277.6 100.0 125.0 120.3 150.4 300.7 328.0 347.0 125.0 156.3 150.4 187.9 375.9 410.1 433.7 150.0 187.5 180.4 225.5 451.1 492.1 520.5 175.0 218.8 210.5 263.1 526.2 574.1 607.2 200.0 250.0 240.6 300.7 601.4 656.1 694.0 250.0 312.5 300.7 375.9 751.8 820.1 867.4 300.0 375.0 360.9 451.1 902.1 984.1 1040.9 350.0 437.5 421.0 526.2 1052.5 1148.2 1214.4 400.0 500.0 481.1 601.4 1202.8 1312.2 1387.9 500.0 625.0 601.4 751.8 1503.6 1640.2 1734.9 550.0 687.5 661.6 827.0 1653.9 1804.3 1908.4 600.0 750.0 721.7 902.1 1804.3 1968.3 2081.9 635.0 793.8 763.8 954.8 1909.5 2083.1 2203.3 650.0 812.5 781.9 977.3 1954.6 2132.3 2255.3 680.0 850.0 817.9 1022.4 2044.8 2230.7 2359.4 700.0 875.0 842.0 1052.5 2105.0 2296.3 2428.8 750.0 937.5 902.1 1127.7 2255.3 2460.4 2602.3 kW KVA 40.0 50.0 166.67 50.0 50.0 208.33 57.0 57.0 237.50 60.0 60.0 250.00 80.0 80.0 333.33 100.0 100.0 416.67 Single Phase – 60 Hz Controls Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco GCCP 1.2 Control Panel Image shown may not reflect actual configuration. GCCP 1.2 – Control Panel GCCP 1.2 is an Auto Start Control Module suitable for a wide variety of diesel gen-set applications. Monitoring an extensive number of engine parameters, the modules will display warnings, shutdown and engine status information on the back-lit LCD screen, illuminated LEDs and remote PC. Description The controller is compatible with electronic (CAN) and non-electronic (magnetic pick-up/alternator sensing) engines and offer an extensive number of flexible inputs, outputs and extensive engine protections so the system can be easily adapted to meet the most demanding industry requirements. The extensive list of features includes enhanced event and performance monitoring, remote communications & PLC functionality. The modules can be easily configured using a configuration suite PC software. Full Range of Attachments • Wide range of system expansion attachments, designed specifically to work with the GCCP controller •Flexible packaging options for easy and cost effective installation Benefits • Hours counter provides accurate information for monitoring and maintenance periods •User-friendly set-up and button layout for ease of use • Multiple parameters are monitored & displayed simultaneously for full visibility • The module can be configured to suit a wide range of applications for user flexibility • PLC editor allows user configurable functions to meet user specific application requirements • RS485 Communication port can be used for the Remote Monitoring Communication (Compatible with Cat PLG) World Wide Product Support •Cat dealers provide extensive pre and post sale support • Cat dealers have over 1,600 dealer branch stores operating in 200 countries Features • 4-line back-lit LCD text display • Multiple display languages • Five-key menu navigation • LCD alarm indication • Customisable power-up text and images • Data logging facility • Internal PLC editor • Protections disable feature • Fully configurable via PC using USB & RS485 communication • Front panel configuration with PIN protection • Power save mode • 3-phase generator sensing and protection • Generator current and power monitoring (kW, kvar, kVA, pf) kW and kvar overload and reverse power alarms • Over current protection • Unbalanced load protection • Breaker control via fascia buttons • Fuel and start outputs configurable when using CAN Support for 0V to 10V & 4 mA to 20 mA sensors • 8 Configurable digital inputs (3 available for Customer use) • 8 Configurable digital outputs (5 available for Customer use) • 4 Configurable analogue inputs (3 available for Customer use) • CAN, MPU and alternator frequency speed sensing in one variant • Real time clock • Engine pre-heat and post-heat functions • Engine run-time scheduler • Engine idle control for starting & stopping • Fuel usage monitor and low fuel level alarms • 3 Configurable maintenance alarms •MODBUS RTU support •User configurable MODBUS pages GCCP 1.2 Control Panel Electric Power SPECIFICATIONS DC SUPPLY CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE RATING 8V to 35V continuous 5V for upto 1 minute CRANKING DROPOUTS Able to survive 0V for 100 mS, providing supply was at least 10V before dropout and supply recovers to 5V. This is achieved without the need for internal batteries. LEDs and backlight will not be maintained during cranking MAXIMUM OPERATING CURRENT 260 mA at 12V, 150 mA at 24V MAXIMUM STANDBY CURRENT 145 mA at 12V, 85 mA at 24V CHARGE FAIL/EXCITATION RANGE 0V to 35V GENERATOR & MAINS (UTILITY) VOLTAGE RANGE 15V to 415 V AC (Ph to N) 26 V to 719 V AC (Ph to Ph) MAGNETIC PICK-UP VOLTAGE RANGE +/- 0.5 V to 70 V FREQUENCY RANGE 10,000 Hz (max) SPECIFICATIONS INPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS A TO H Negative switching ANALOGUE INPUTS A TO D Configurable as: Negative switching digital input 0-10V sensor 4 mA to 20 mA Resistive Sensor ANALOGUE INPUTS A TO C Configurable as: Negative switching digital input Resistive Sensor OUTPUTS OUTPUT A and B (FUEL & START) 15 A DC at supply voltage AUXILIARY OUTPUTS C, D, E, F, G, H, I & J 2 A DC at supply voltage DIMENSIONS OVERALL 216 mm x 158 mm x 43 mm 8.5” x 6.2” x 1.5” PANEL CUTOUT 184 mm x 137 mm 7.2” x 5.3” MAXIMUM PANEL THICKNESS 8 mm 0.3” OPERATING TEMPERATURE -30ºC to +70ºC -22ºF to +158ºF STORAGE TEMPERATURE RANGE -40ºC to +85ºC -40ºF to +185ºF STANDARDS UL, cUL Listed NFPA 70# Electro-Magnetic Compatibility: BS EN 61000-6-2/6-4 Electrical Safety: BS EN 60950 Temperature: BS EN 60068-2-1, BS EN 60068-2-2 Vibration: BS EN 60068-2-6 Humidity: BS EN 60068-2-30, BS EN 60068-2-78 Shock: BS EN 60068-2-27 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures: BS EN 60529 Ingress Protection: IP65 – Front of module when installed into the control panel with the optional sealing gasket # Applicable codes and standards facilitate compliance to NFPA 70 GCCP 1.2 Control Panel Electric Power www.cat.com/electricpower ©2025 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. OPTIONAL MODULES Remote annunciator The Remote annunciator with an integral sounder is an output LED expansion module is designed to display a maximum of eight individual LED indications up to a maximum distance of 1 km (0.6 miles). The annunciator will consist of two modules to provide a 16 Channel Fault annunciation. The Panels are fitted with removable label cards which can be used to identify the standard NFPA alarms. Key Features: •Panel mount •Vertical design •In-built alarm •Alarm mute button •Max of 80 configurable LED’s Input Expansion Module The Input Expansion module is used in conjunction with supported GCCP controllers to provide additional, flexible, input functionality. The module’s ID switch is configurable from the module and the 10 inputs can be configured from within the ‘host controller’. The inputs can be configured in a number of ways to connect to digital switches, resistive sensors, 0-10V DC signals or 4-20 mA signals. Key Features: •DIN rail & chassis mount •Power on/link lost LED •1.2 km (0.75 Mile) working range •Connect maximum of 4 x Input Modules to a single host controller •Max of 40 configurable inputs Output Expansion Module The output relay expansion module for use with compatible GCCP control modules has been designed to extend a host module’s output capabilities. A maximum of 10 relays can be connected to an individual module at any one time. All outputs are configurable via the host controller. Key Features: •Power On/Link Lost LED ID SWITCH •10 Expansion modules can be connected to 1 host controller at a time •8 Configurable relay contacts with LED indicators: o 4 Normally Open (N/O) o 4 Change Over (C/O) •Terminal strip connection for quick and easy set-up Engine Controller Features Reliable, Durable All ADEM A4 controllers are designed to survive the harshest environments. ● Environmentally sealed, die-cast aluminum housing solates and protects electronic components from moisture and dirt contamination ● Rigorous vibration testing ensures product reliability and durability ● Accuracy maintained from –40°C to 85°C ● Electrical noise immunity to 100 volts / meter ● Internal circuits are designed to withstand shorts to + battery and – battery Simple Servicing Each ADEM A4 system works in combination with the Cat® ET service tool software to keep the engine operating at peak performance. ● Displays measured parameters ● Retrieves active and logged event code documenting abnormal system operation ● Performs calibrations and diagnostic tests ● Supports flash programming of new software into the ADEM A4 ECM ADEM™ A4 Engine Controller The ADEM™ A4 is the main Electronic Control Module (ECM) used on select diesel engines. The ADEM A4 provides a higher degree of control over a large number of combustion variables. The ADEM A4 is designed to control/interface Electronic Unit Injector (EUI) equipped engines. The ADEM A4 engine system is composed of the ADEM A4 ECM, control software, sensors, actuators, fuel injectors, and interface to the generator system. The prime benefit of an ADEM A4 engine system is to better control and maintain the particulate emissions, both steady state and transient, while improving engine performance. Self Diagnostics Each ADEM A4 ECM has a full compliment of diagnostics. The ECM can detect faults in the electrical system and report those faults to the service technician for quick repair. ● Self-diagnostic capability pinpoints operational prob-lems in need of attention. Advanced Features ● Enhanced performance from fuel injection timing and limiting ● Adjustable monitoring of vital engine parameters ● Programmable speed acceleration ramp rate ● Data link interfaces Engine Controller Description The ECM is housed in an environmentally sealed cast-ing. All wiring connections to the ECM are made using two sealed connectors: a single seventy-pin connector and a single one hundred twenty-pin connector. Engine Speed Governing Desired engine speed is calculated by the ECM and held within ±0.2 Hz for isochronous and droop mode. The ECM accounts for droop that is requested. The proper amount of fuel is sent to the injectors due to these calculations. The ECM also employs cooldown/shutdown strategies, acceleration delays on startup, acceleration ramp times and speed reference. Fuel Limiting Warm and cold fuel-air ratio control limits are con-trolled by the ECM. Electronic monitoring system derates, torque limit, and cranking limit, programmable torque scaling, and cold cylinder cutout mode are standard features. Fuel Injection Timing Master timing for injection is controlled by the ECM control. Temperature dependencies are accounted for in the fuel injection calculations. Electronic Monitoring Electronic monitoring of vital engine parameters can be programmed. Warning, derate, and shutdown event conditions may be customized by the user. Information Management The ECM stores information to assist with electronic troubleshooting. Active and logged diagnostic codes, active events, logged events, fuel consumption, engine hours, and instantaneous totals aid service technicians when diagnosing electronic faults and scheduling preventive maintenance. Calibrations Engine performance is optimized through injection timing. Auto/manual sensor calibrations are standard features. On-Board System Tests System tests are available to assist in electronic trou-bleshooting. These tests include: injector activation, injector cutout, and override of control outputs. Data Link Interfaces The ADEM A4 communicates with the EMCP via a dedicated communication network. Electronic Sensing The following sensing is available on the ADEM A4: oil pressure, fuel pressure, fuel temperature, atmospheric pressure, air inlet temperature, turbo outlet pressure, engine coolant temperature, engine speed, throttle, position, exhaust temperature, oil filter pressure differential, fuel filter pressure differential, air filter pressure differential and crankcase pressure. Engine Controller Information contained in this publication may be considered confidential. Discretion is recommended when distributing. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow,” the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. www.cat,com/electricpower ©2019 Caterpillar All rights reserved. SPECIFICATIONS Impervious to: Salt spray, fuel, oil and oil additives, coolant, spray cleaners, chlorinated solvents, hydrogen sulfide and methane gas, and dust. Input and output protection All inputs and outputs are protected against short circuits to +battery and –battery Input voltage range (24 VDC nominal) 18 to 32 VDC Mounting Engine mounted Reverse polarity protected Shock, withstands 20g Temperature range Operating: –40°C to 85°C (–40°F to 185°F) Storage: –50°C to 120°C (–58°F to 248°F) Vibration Withstands 8.0g @ 24 to 2 kHz Rochestersensors.com Since the suitability of these products depends upon a wide range of factors not in our control, Rochester Sensors expects and understands that you will conduct the testing and evaluation necessary to determine that these products are suitable for your application. Whilst every effort is made to ensure the above details are correct at the time of printing. Rochester Sensors reserves the right to make materials changes and or technical changes without notice Liquid Types Non-conductive fuels: Diesel, Petrol, Kerosene, Gasolene and HVO. Electrical Supply Voltage: Supply Current: Connection: Outputs Resistive: Ω Ω (3Ω Resolution: 3Ω, Current: Resolution: 20µA, Ω Voltage: 12VDC 24VDC system: any values between 0 -10V & 10-0V. Resolution: 10mV, Max Load: 10mA source (dependent on min supply voltage) for probe lengths 300mm and above. Accuracy: Voltage & Current: ±2% of probe length @ 20°C in diesel. Resistance: ±2% rounded to the nearest multiple of 3 ±0.5Ω Alarm Output: Max 100mA. C/K16 with terminals to suit wire range 0.75mm² to 1.5mm². S/K155 Cut to length kit: End cap, spacer & calibration tool. 316 Stainless Steel. for low volume. Accessories: Construction Probe: Wetted Materials: Light Tube: End Cap: Probe Length: Environmental Ratings Ingress: Max. Pressure: 1 Bar. Temperature Range: -40ºC to +85ºC. Weight: 300g (1000mm long sensor). EMC: Vibration: BS EN 60068-2-64:2008. Shock: Drop Test: TLL15X X - XXXX - XX - TLL155 Resistive, Ω N, NPT 0500, 500mm 70,18Ω 73 330Ω TLL156 Voltage, V B, BSPT 1000, 1000mm 80, 81, TLL157 90, TLL155 Capacitive Fuel Level Sensor variable resistive, voltage or current output suitable for driving industry standard fuel gauges or connecting into PLCs. It is supplied in standard probe lengths of 500mm or 1000mm and can be cut to suit the length required at site. For volume production requirements we will manufacture to the length & output you require. SPECIFICATION 5X Ø5.3 SAE MOUNTING HOLES ON Ø54 PCD Standard part numbers and options. Contact Rochester Sensors for other length and output variants. Superseal 1.5 Connector (282088-1) PIN 4 PIN 3 PIN 2 PIN 1 Output Signal Low-level Alarm V- V+ #2. if there is already a Fuel Level Transmitter installed then it should already be wired into the Control Panel to Analog Input A, B, C or D. Usually C. Terminals 16-19 on back of the GCCP 1.2 Deep Sea 6310/GCCP 1.2 Control Panel Pinout TERMINAL DESCRIPTION NOTES Batt- Connect to Ground where applicable Batt+ F, G & H E-STOP Input B Digital Output A (Fuel Relay) rated fixed as fuel relay if electronic engine is not configured Digital Output B (Start) for Mechanical rated Fixed as start relay if electronic engine is not configured. Battery Charger Fail/Excitation If charge alternator is not fitted, leave this terminal disconnected. DC Output C rated. Running) rated. 9 DC Output E rated. DC Output F rated. DC Output G rated. DC Output H rated. Analog Input D Configurable) Ω Ω Ω DSENet Expansion B Ω DESNet Expansion A Ω DSENet Expansion Screen Use only 120 Ω CAN or RS485 approved cable 29 Voltage Sensing L1 (Recommend 2 A fuse) Voltage Sensing L2 (Recommend 2 A fuse) Voltage Sensing L3 (Recommend 2 A fuse) CT Common monitoring CTs and ground CT Common monitoring CTs and ground Configurable Digital Input A Switch To Negative Configurable Digital Input B Switch To Negative Configurable Digital Input C Switch To Negative Configurable Digital Input D Switch To Negative Configurable Digital Input E Switch To Negative 47 Configurable Digital Input F Switch To Negative Configurable Digital Input G Switch To Negative Configurable Digital Input H Switch To Negative Ω RS-485 B (+) Use only 120 Ω CAN or RS485 approved cable RS-485 A (-) Use only 120 Ω CAN or RS485 approved cable #6. Per engineering, the 125A panel has a total of 8 slots for breakers. The circuit breakers are installed for each option. It has (3) 20A breakers and (1) 30A breaker. 20A breaker- Interrupt capacity:22000 Amps 30A breaker-Interrupt capacity: 22000 Amps Enclosure Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco Enclosures C13/C15/C18 SOUND ATTENUATED ENCLOSURES US Sourced Diesel Generator Set 350 - 750 ekW 60 Hz Features Robust/Highly Corrosion Resistant Construction • Factory installed on skid base •Environmentally friendly, polyester powder baked paint •14 gauge steel •Interior zinc plated fasteners •Exterior stainless steel fasteners •Internally mounted exhaust silencing system • Designed and tested to comply with UL 2200 Listed generator set package •Compression door latches providing solid door seal Excellent Access •Large cable entry area for installation ease •Accommodates side mounted single or multiple breakers •Three doors on both sides • Vertically hinged allow 180° opening rotation and retention with door stays • Lube oil and coolant drains piped to the exterior of the enclosure base •Radiator fill cover Security and Safety • Lockable access doors which give full access to control panel and breaker •Cooling fan and battery charging alternator fully guarded •Fuel fill, oil fill and battery can only be reached via lockable access •Externally mounted emergency stop button •Designed for spreader bar lifting to ensure safety •Stub-up area is rodent proof Transportability These enclosures are of extremely rugged construction to withstand outdoor exposure and rough handling common on many construction sites. Options • Enclosure constructed with 14 gauge steel • Enclosure constructed with 12 gauge aluminum (5052 grade) • Caterpillar yellow and white paint • Control panel viewing window# • UL Listed integral fuel tank with 670, 400, and 300 gallon capacities • UL Listed sub base fuel tank with 660, 1000, 1800, and 2200 gallon capacities. • Seismic certification per applicable building codes: IBC 2000, IBC 2003, IBC 2006, IBC 2009, IBC 2012, IBC 2015 CBC 2007, CBC 2010 • IBC Certification for 150 mph wind loading • AC/DC lighting package • 5 kW Canopy space heater to facilitate compliance with NFPA 110 • Motorized louvers and gravity discharge damper • 125A Load Center • GFCI outlets # Not available with aluminum enclosures. Picture shown may not reflect actual configuration 700 ekW Enclosures Level 1 Sound Attenuated Enclosure (Steel) Sound Levels Sound Attenuated Enclosure (Aluminum) Sound Levels Model Standby eKW Cooling Air Flow Rate Ambient Capability*Sound Pressure Levels (dBA) at 7m (23 ft) m3/s cfm ˚C ˚F 100% Load C13 350 8.5 18010 57 135 74 400 8.5 18010 56 133 75 C15 350 10.4 22072 59 138 73 400 10.4 22072 51 124 73 450 10.4 22072 46 115 74 500 12.5 26415 48 118 75 C18 550 8.1 17234 45 113 75 600 8.1 17234 43 109 75 650 12.7 26909 51 123 75 700 12.7 26909 48 118 75 750 12.7 26909 48 118 75 Model Standby eKW Cooling Air Flow Rate Ambient Capability*Sound Pressure Levels (dBA) at 7m (23 ft) m3/s cfm ˚C ˚F 100% Load C13 350 8.5 -57 135 75 400 8.5 -56 133 75 C15 350 10.4 22072 59 138 72 400 10.4 22072 51 124 73 450 10.4 22072 46 115 74 500 12.5 26415 48 118 75 C18 550 8.1 17234 45 113 76 600 8.1 17234 43 109 76 650 12.7 26909 51 123 76 700 12.7 26909 48 118 76 750 12.7 26909 48 118 76 Enclosures Level 2 Sound Attenuated Enclosure (Steel) Sound Levels Component Weights to Calculate Package Weight Sound Attenuated Enclosure on Skid Base Model Standby eKW Cooling Air Flow Rate Ambient Capability*Sound Pressure Levels (dBA) at 7m (23 ft) m3/s cfm ˚C ˚F 100% Load C13 350 7.2 15256 50 122 70 400 7.2 15256 50 122 70 C15 350 10.4 22071 50 122 72 400 10.4 22071 50 122 72 450 10.4 22071 50 122 72 500 12.5 26415 50 122 72 Model Standby eKW Narrow Skid Base Wide Skid Base Sound Attenuated Enclosure (Steel) Sound Attenuated Enclosure (Aluminum) kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb C13 350 253 578 579 1276 1245 2745 765 1687400 C15 350 273 602 465 1025 1245 2745 765 1687400 450 500 C18 550 301 664 466 1027 1301 2868 817 1801600 650 286 630 637 1404 1393 3071 887 1955700 750 Model Standby eKW Length “L”Width “W”Height “H” mm in mm in mm in C13 350 4948 194.8 2014 79.3 2320 91.3400 C15 350 4948 194.8 2014 79.3 2320 91.3400 450 500 C18 550 5183 204.0 2014 79.3 2262 89.0600 650 5230 205.9 2315 91.1 2253 88.7700 750 *Cooling system performance at sea level. Consult your Cat® dealer for site specific ambient and altitude capabilities. Note: Sound level measurements are subject to instrumentation, installation and manufacturing variability, as well as ambient site conditions. Enclosures LEHE0465-10 (07/24) www.cat.com/electricpower © 2024 Caterpillar. All Rights Reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. 7/7 Sound Attenuated Enclosure on a UL Listed 1800 & 2200 Gallon Sub-Base Fuel Tank Base Model Standby eKW Length “L”Width “W”Height “H” mm in mm in mm in C13 350 6382 251.2 2056 80.9 3209 126.3400 C15 350 6382 251.2 2056 80.9 3209 126.3400 450 500 C18 550 7271 286.2 2056 80.9 3151 124.1600 Fuel System Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco Features C13 / C15 / C18 Integral and Sub-Base Fuel Tanks US Sourced Diesel Generator Set 350 – 750 ekW 60 Hz Picture shown may not represent actual package. ATTACHMENTS • UL Listed for United States (UL 142) and Canada (CAN/ULC S601) • Facilitates compliance with NFPA 30 code, NFPA 37 and 110 standards and CSA C282 code • Dual wall • Lockable fuel fill cap, 4” (101.6 mm) NPT • Low fuel level warning standard, customer configurable warning or shutdown • Primary tank leak detection switch in containment basin • Tank design provides capacity for thermal expansion of fuel • Fuel supply dip tube is positioned so as not to pick up fuel sediment • Fuel return and supply dip tube is separated by an internal baffle to prevent immediate re-supply of heated return fuel • Pressure washed with an iron phosphate solution • Interior tank surfaces coated with a solvent-based thin-film rust preventative • Heavy gauge steel gussets with internal lifting rings • Primary and secondary tanks are leak tested at 20.7 kPa (3 psi) minimum • Compatible with open packages and enclosures • Gloss black polyester alkyd enamel exterior paint • Welded steel containment basin (minimum of 110% of primary tank capacity) • Direct reading fuel gauge with variable electrical output • Emergency vents on primary and secondary tanks are sized in accordance with NFPA 30 Sub-Base • The Sub-Base fuel tank mounts below the generator set wide base Integral • Integral diesel fuel tank is incorporated into the generator set base frame • Robust base design includes linear vibration isolators between tank base and engine generator Options • Audio/visual fuel level alarm panel • 5 gal (18.9 L) spill containment • 5 gal (18.9 L) spill containment with fuel fill drop tube with in 6” (152 mm) from bottom of tank • 5 gal (18.9 L) spill containment with overfill prevention valve and fuel fill drop tube with in 6” (152 mm) from bottom of tank • ULC Listed 7.5 gal (28.4 L) spill containment with vent extensions, vent whistle, and drop tube facilitating compliance with CSA B139-09 • ULC Listed 7.5 gal (28.4 L) spill containment with overfill prevention valve, vent extensions, vent whistle and drop tube facilitating compliance with CSA B139-09 700 ekW ATTACHMENTS Integral & Sub-Base Fuel Tank Base Useable Capacities with Fuel Tank Dimensions & Weights Integral – Width (W) 2014 mm (79.3 in) Sub-base – Width (W) 2056 mm (81.0 in) Integral* – Width(W) 2315 mm (91.2 in) Sub-base* – Width(W) 2357 mm (92.7in) C13 Tank Design Feature Code Total Capacity Useable Capacity Tank Only Overall Package Height with Tank Dry Weight Height ‘H’Length ‘L’Open Enclosure Liter Gallon Liter Gallon kg lb mm in mm in mm in mm in Integral FTDW013 2646 699 2540 671 1569 3450 762 30.0 5461 215 2552 100.5 2743 108.0 Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 3941 1041 3876 1024 1659 3657 635 25.0 5550 218.5 2763 108.8 2955 116.3 Sub-Base FTDW006 6980 1844 6818 1801 2228 4483 889 35.0 6184 243.5 3017 118.8 3209 126.3 Sub-Base FTDW007 8339 2203 8244 2178 2150 5052 889 35.0 7074 278.5 2291 117.8 3789 149.2 Sub-Base FTDW011 2476 654 2435 643 1468 3236 635 25.0 3810 150.0 2763 108.8 2955 116.3 C15 Tank Design Feature Code Total Capacity Useable Capacity Tank Only Overall Package Height with Tank Dry Weight Height ‘H’Length ‘L’Open Enclosure Liter Gallon Liter Gallon kg lb mm in mm in mm in mm in Integral FTDW002 1283 339 1262 333 1015 2237 635 25.0 3814 150.1 2426 95.5 2619 103.0 Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 3941 1041 3876 1024 1659 3657 635 25.0 5550 218.5 2763 108.8 2955 116.3 Sub-Base FTDW006 6980 1844 6818 1801 2228 4912 889 35.0 6184 243.5 3017 118.8 3209 126.3 Sub-Base FTDW008 2476 654 2435 643 1468 3236 635 25.0 3810 150.0 2763 108.8 2955 116.3 Sub-Base FTDW034 10887 2876 9899 2615 2847 6277 914 36 7747 305 3043 119.8 3233 127.3 C18 Tank Design Feature Code Total Capacity Useable Capacity Tank Only Overall Package Height with Tank Dry Weight Height ‘H’Length ‘L’Open Enclosure Liter Gallon Liter Gallon kg lb mm in mm in mm in mm in Integral FTDW004 1446 382 1422 376 1015 2237 635 25.0 3814 150.1 2426 95.5 2560 100.8 Integral*FTDW030 2498 660 2381 629 1681 3703 762 30.0 4995 196.6 2670 105.1 2675 105.3 Integral*FTDW031 5175 1367 4997 1320 2046 4510 762 30.0 6737 265.3 2670 105.1 2675 105.3 Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 3941 1041 3876 1024 1659 3657 635 25.0 5550 218.5 2763 108.8 2955 116.3 Sub-Base FTDW007 8339 2203 8244 2178 2150 4134 889 35.0 7074 278.5 2291 117.8 3159 124.4 Sub-Base FTDW008 2476 654 2435 643 1468 3236 635 25.0 3810 150.0 2739 107.9 2905 114.4 Sub-Base*FTDW032 10228 2702 10112 2640 2638 5816 889 35.0 7368 290 3127 123.1 3132 123.3 *For Ratings 650, 700 &750 ekW only ATTACHMENTS Integral & Sub-Base Fuel Tank Base Useable Capacities with Fuel Tank Dimensions & Weights Integral - Width(W) 2014 mm (79.3 in) Sub-base - Width(W) 2056 mm (81 in) Integral* - Width(W) 2315 mm (91.2 in) Sub-base*-Width(W) 2357 mm (92.7in) Sound Attenuated Enclosure C13 Tank Design Feature Code Total Capacity Useable Capacity Tank Only Overall Package Height with Tank Dry Weight Height ‘H’Length ‘L’Open Enclosure Liter Gallon Liter Gallon kg lb mm in mm in mm in mm in Integral FTDW013 2646 699 2540 671 1569 3450 762 30.0 5461 215.0 NA NA 2743 108.0 Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 3941 1041 3876 1024 1659 3657 635 25.0 5550 218.5 NA NA 2955 116.3 Sub-Base FTDW006 6980 1844 6818 1801 2033 4483 889 35.0 6184 243.5 NA NA 3209 126.3 Sub-Base FTDW007 8339 2203 8244 2178 2292 5052 889 35.0 7074 278.5 NA NA 3209 126.3 Sub-Base FTDW011 2476 654 2435 643 1468 3236 635 25.0 3810 150.0 NA NA 2955 116.3 C15 Tank Design Feature Code Total Capacity Useable Capacity Tank Only Overall Package Height with Tank Dry Weight Height ‘H’Length ‘L’Open Enclosure Liter Gallon Liter Gallon kg lb mm in mm in mm in mm in Integral FTDW001 1283 339 1262 333 1015 2237 639 25.0 4746 186.9 NA NA 2619 103.0 Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 3941 1041 3876 1024 1659 3657 635 25.0 5550 218.5 NA NA 2955 116.3 Sub-Base FTDW006 6980 1844 6818 1801 2228 4912 889 35.0 6184 243.5 NA NA 3209 126.3 Sub-Base FTDW011 2476 654 2435 643 1468 3236 635 25.0 3810 150.0 NA NA 2955 116.3 Sub-Base FTDW034 10887 2876 9899 2615 2847 6277 914 36 7747 305 NA NA 3233 127.3 C18 Tank Design Feature Code Total Capacity Useable Capacity Tank Only Overall Package Height with Tank Dry Weight Height ‘H’Length ‘L’Open Enclosure Liter Gallon Liter Gallon kg lb mm in mm in mm in mm in Integral FTDW003 1446 382 1422 376 1015 2237 635 25.0 3814 150.1 NA NA 2560 100.8 Integral*FTDW030 2498 660 2381 629 1681 3703 762 30.0 4995 196.6 2670 105 2675 105.3 Integral*FTDW031 5175 1367 4997 1320 2046 4510 762 30.0 6737 265.3 NA NA 2675 105.3 Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 3941 1041 3876 1024 1659 3657 635 25.0 5550 218.5 NA NA 2905 114.3 Sub-Base FTDW007 8339 2203 8244 2178 2150 4134 889 35.0 7074 278.5 NA NA 3209 126.3 Sub-Base FTDW011 2476 654 2435 643 1468 3236 635 25.0 3810 150.0 NA NA 2905 114.3 Sub-Base*FTDW032 10228 2702 9994 2640 2638 5816 889 35.0 7368 290 NA NA 3132 123.3 *For Ratings 650, 700 &750 ekW only ATTACHMENTS The heights listed above do not include lumber used during manufacturing and shipping. Estimated Run Times (Hours) at 100% Load C13 Tank Design Feature Code Standby Ratings (ekW)Prime Ratings (ekW) 400 350 ––350 320 –– Integral Tank FTDW013 24 27 ––25 29 –– Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 36 41 ––38 43 –– Sub-Base FTDW006 65 72 ––72 77 –– Sub-Base FTDW007 77 87 ––81 93 –– Sub-Base FTDW011 23 25 ––24 27 –– C15 Tank Design Feature Code Standby Ratings (ekW)Prime Ratings (ekW) 500 450 400 350 455 410 365 320 Integral Tank FTDW001 / FTDW002 9 9 11 11 10 10 11 12 Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 28 29 32 36 30 31 35 38 Sub-Base FTDW006 50 52 57 63 54 56 62 67 Sub-Base FTDW008 / FTDW011 17 18 20 22 19 20 22 24 Sub-Base FTDW034 72 75 82 91 78 81 90 97 C18 Tank Design Feature Code Standby Ratings (ekW)Prime Ratings (ekW) 750 700 650 600 550 680 635 600 545 500 Integral FTDW003 / FTDW004 –––8 9 –––9 10 Integral*FTDW030 11 12 13 ––12 13 14 –– Integral*FTDW031 24 25 27 ––26 27 29 33 36 Sub-Base FTDW005 / FTDW016 –––24 25 –––25 27 Sub-Base FTDW007 –––51 54 –––54 59 Sub-Base FTDW008 / FTDW011 –––15 16 –––16 17 Sub-Base*FTDW032 49 51 54 ––53 55 58 –– *For Ratings 650, 700 &750 ekW only ATTACHMENTS Tanks with full electrical stub-up area include removable end channel. Tanks with RH stub-up include stub- up area directly below the circuit breaker or power terminal strips. Dimensions include weather-protective enclosure exhaust system. Dual wall sub-base tanks are UL Listed and constructed in accordance with UL Standard for Safety UL 142, Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids and Canada CAN/ULC S601, Standard for Shop Fabricated Steel Aboveground Horizontal Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids. Fuel tanks and applicable options facilitate compliance with the following United States NFPA Code and Standards: NFPA 30: Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code NFPA 37: Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines NFPA 110: Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems Fuel tanks and applicable options facilitate compliance with the following Canadian Standard and Code: CSA C282 – Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings CSA B139-09 - Installation Code for Oil-Burning Equipment The following sub-base fuel tanks meet Chicago code for containment and labelling: FTDW005 FTDW008 FTDW011 LEHE0467-09 (04/21) ©2021 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow” the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Overfill Prevention Valve Overfill Prevention Valve for use with 5 and 7.5 Gallon Spill Containment The overfill prevention valve is installed at the fill port of a fuel tank. Used in a pressurized tight fill application, the valve helps prevent tank overfills by closing when the liquid level reaches shut off capacity level. The overfill prevention valve can eliminate hazardous liquid spills. Image shown may not reflect actual configuration Features Code Compliance •Installs in a 2" NPT or 4" NPT opening •Accepts pressure delivery of product • Provides tanks with large fuel storage capacity at shutoff height •Provides positive shut off of fuel •Retro-fits to an existing AST* • Mechanical in operation – no user interface required •Compatible with diesel fuel •Minimum operating pressure of 5 PSI *Aboveground Storage Tank •UL listed, ULC listed www.Cat-ElectricPower.com ©2016 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow”, the “Power Edge” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Maximum operating pressure of 40 PSI• Features 7.5 Gallon Mild Steel Spill Containment Box Offset Style Durable spill containment box designed for containment of small spills during filling of an above ground storage tank. Image shown may not reflect actual configuration Spill Containment Box • ULC listing • The base and lid made of 12 gauge mild steel • Nylon washers at contact points to prevent rust • Spun construction minimizes leakage • Weather deflecting lid lip • Push drain • Cover lock • Offset drain style • Rolled lip on base Dimensions • Height: 11.28" • Height with pipe: 15.97" • Width: 20.81" • Body diameter: 16.00" LEHE0981-00 (12-15) www.Cat-ElectricPower.com ©2015 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow”, the “Power Edge” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Features Image shown may not reflect actual configuration Fuel Level Gauge and Sender • A magnetic drive allows a signal from the float mechanism inside the tank to be transmitted through a solid bulkhead. • The dial is designed to allow a second magnetic coupling. This is a coupling from the pointer magnet, through the sealed lens and into the Hall Effect Module. • The magnetic connection of the Hall Effect sensor is more reliable than systems that depend on the sliding contact of variable resistor devices. • Hall Effect is a solid state technology with no moving contacts. It counts on the fact that a magnet bends the path of electrons moving through a semiconductor. The bending of the electrons can be detected and converted into an electrical signal. • The dial is able to provide an electrical output which can be utilized for remote monitoring of tank levels. • The dial case is hermetically sealed by ultrasonic welding to melt and fuse the case into one solid piece. This keeps weather out, ensuring “no-fog” read ability while greatly extending mechanical life. • The seal is a high reliability, no-gasket design. • The plastic case is far more resistant to corrosion than any metal-cased version and is capable of withstanding broad variations in temperature. The lens and case are a special, UV stabilized plastic material. Fuel Level Gauge and Sender The unit consists of a magnetically driven dial for direct reading with a snap fi t Hall Effect Module attached to the lens. This module sends an electrical signal to a remote fuel level monitor. The module can provide ratiometric voltage output proportional to the liquid volume inside the tank. Remote-ready Dial, with Hall Effect Module Hall Effect Module Fuel Level Gauge and Sender www.Cat-ElectricPower.com ©2015 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow”, the “Power Edge” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. General and Functional Specifications* • Conformity: ±3% at 5 VDC • Operating temperature: -40° to 80°C (-40°F to 176°F) • Accuracy: ±4% of full scale. (float gauge errors not included.) • Repeatability: ±1%. • Operational voltage range: 3.5 to 6.0 VDC • Output voltage: ratiometric 10−90% of input voltage @ 10−90% volume • Resolution – infinite • Operating current: 4.5 mA • Output current: ± 1 mA • Hall Effect modules are UL classified as intrinsically safe for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D (hazardous locations) Gauge Materials of Construction* Dial Materials of Construction* • Head – die cast aluminum. • Center shaft, support tube, and float rod – tempered aluminum • Gears, cross stud, and bearing – stainless steel • Drive magnet – alnico • Gear housing – acetal • Float – nitrile rubber • Crystal and case: polycarbonate. • Dial – painted aluminum * Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. Ratings subject to change due to temperature and other environmental considerations. Accessories Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco Cat ®Batteries Caterpillar.The difference counts.™ Cat Dealers define world – class product support. We offer you the right parts and service solutions, when and where you need them. The Cat Dealer network of highly trained experts keeps your entire fleet up and running to maximize your equipment investments. Cat Batteries – Greater Starting Power – Lower Maintenance – Longer Life Cat Premium High Output (PHO) batteries are used in all Caterpillar Machines and Engine Gen-Sets. They are designed to meet stringent Caterpillar design specifications, which provide industry leading cold cranking amp (CCA) capability and maximum vibration resistance. Maintenance Free or low maintenance designs are available in wet and dry configurations. General Service Line batteries are available in Maintenance Free or low maintenance designs and in wet or dry configurations. Wide selections of BCI group sizes are available for automotive, light truck, bus, industrial, agricultural, marine, recreational and valve regulated (VRLA-AGM & Gel) applications. Premium High Output – Maximum Vibration Resistance •Vibration Resistance...five times the Industry Standard •Exclusive “flat top” BCI group 4D & 8D batteries are Maintenance Free and have the industries highest cold cranking amps (CCA) •Popular BCI group 31 Maintenance Free batteries with industry leading cold cranking amps...up to 1000 (CCA), for electric power, machine or on-highway truck and bus applications. Deep cycle models available for truck, marine or recreational usage BCI Cold Reserve Amp Hr.Add Water Nominal Group Cranking Capacity Capacity Maintenance Length Width Height Wet Dry Acid to Fill Size Part No. Amps” Minutes’ Volts @ 20 Hrs. Construction Check Hours In (mm) In (mm) In (mm) Lb (kg) Lb (kg) Qt (liter) 8D 153-5720 1500 465 12 210 C MF 20.47 (520) 10.8 (275) 9.76 (248) 132 (60) – – 8D 101-4000 1400 400 12 190 LAC+ 1000 20.7 (526.5) 10.96 (278) 9.76 (248) 132 (60) 86 (39) 18.0 (17.0) 4D 153-5710 1400 425 12 200 C MF 20.47 (520) 8.58 (218) 9.76 (248) 119 (54) – – 4D 153-5700 1125 305 12 145 C MF 20.47 (520) 8.58 (218) 9.76 (248) 101 (46) – – 4D 9X-9730 1300 400 12 190 LAC+ 1000 20.75 (527) 8.58 (218) 9.76 (248) 119 (54) 81 (37) 14.8 (14.0) 4D 9X-9720 1000 275 12 140 LAC+ 1000 20.75 (527) 8.58 (218) 9.76 (248) 101 (46) 59 (27) 15.9 (15.0) 31 175-4390 1000 180 12 90 C/S MFA 12.9 (328.4) 6.74 (171.2) 9.29 (236) 60 (27) – – 31 175-4370 825 190 12 100 C/S** MFA 12.9 (328.4) 6.74 (171.2) 9.29 (236) 60 (27) – – 31 175-4360 710 185 12 100 C/S*** MFA 12.9 (328.4) 6.74 (171.2) 9.29 (236) 60 (27) – – 31 250-0480 710 185 12 100 C/SDT*** MF 12.9 (328.4) 6.74 (171.2) 9.29 (236) 60 (27) – – 31 115-2422 1000 170 12 90 C SAE MFA 12.9 (328.4) 6.74 (171.2) 9.46 (240.3) 60 (27) – – 31 115-2421 950 170 12 90 C SAE + MFA 12.9 (328.4) 6.74 (171.2) 9.46 (240.3) 60 (27) 44 (20) 6.6 (6.2) 31 9X-3404 950 165 12 100 C SAE MF 13 (330.2) 6.77 (172) 9.46 (240.3) 58 (26) – – 31 3T-5760 750 165 12 100 C SAE MF 13 (330.2) 6.77 (172) 9.46 (240.3) 55 (25) – – 24 153-5656 650 110 12 52 SC MF 10.98 (278.9) 6.85 (174) 9.0 (229.1) 39 (18) – – 65 230-6368 880 140 12 80 SC MF 11.9 (303.4) 7.5 (190.8) 7.5 (191.4) 45.5 (21) – – 74 153-5660 650 110 12 52 SC* MF 10.98 (278.9) 7.0 (178.2) 8.15 (206.9) 39 (18) – – 58 175-4280 500 70 12 35 SC MF 9.96 (253.1) 7.2 (182.5) 6.9 (176) 31 (14) – – 2 153-5690 765 210 6 90 LAC+ 1000 10.24 (260) 6.8 (173) 8.72 (221.6) 37 (17) 22 (10) 4.8 (4.5) Construction Notes: LAC = Low Maintenance, Hybrid Construction C = Calcium Lead Alloy Grid Design MF = Maintenance Free MFA = Maintenance Free with Accessible Vent Caps S = Stud Terminals + = Shipped Dry Only * = Side Terminals ** = Starting and Deep Cycle Battery *** = Deep Cycle and Starting Battery " = For 30 seconds at 0° F (-18° C) ' = Minimum of 25 amp output at 80° F (27° C) SAE = Uses SAE Posts SDT = Dual, Top mounted Terminals, Stud and SAE Post, Marine Deep Cycle/Starting Battery SC = Silver (Ag) Calcium Alloy Grids for resistance to high underhood temperatures BCI Overall Dimensions Nominal Weight Specifications for Cat Premium High Output Batteries – Available Worldwide Rugged Design – Built Tough – Reliable Starting •Positive and Negative plates are anchored to container bottom and locked at the top of cell element for maximum vibration resistance. •Heavy-duty forged terminal post bushings provide maximum strength and resistance to acid seepage. •Hefty full-frame grids, no sharp edges, optimum acid/paste combination provides better charge acceptance after deep discharge. •Manifold vented cover with built-in Flame Arrestor…a safety feature that directs corrosive gases away from the battery and hold-downs. • Thick, robust container resists rugged treatment typical of heavy-duty commercial use. Embossed part number & descriptors for easy serviceability. World’s Toughest Batteries Battery Information Battery Accessories Group 31 – Charging Posts for Stud Terminals – Part # 4C-5637 Screw-in Charging Posts for Side Terminals – Part # 4C-5638 Wing Nut – Part # 2B-9498 for Part #’s 175-4390/175-4370/175-4360/8C-3628 Wing Nut – Part # 3B-0723 for Part #’s 8C-3638 and 8C-3639 Digital Battery Analyzer – Part # 177-2330 Battery Voltmeter – Part # 4C-6600 Battery Load Tester – Part # 4C-4911 Booster Cable 12' (3.66 m) – Part # 4C-4933 Booster Cable 20' (6.00 m) – Part # 4C-4937 Heavy Duty Commercial Fast Charger (110V) – Part # 4C-4921 Heavy Duty Commercial Fast Charger (220V) – Part # 4C-4910 Extra Vent Caps (6) for Dry Batteries – Part # 7N-0060 Note: Ratings and Part Numbers are subject to change without notice. Transit Bus Terminal for 8D Part # 250-0473 One piece end terminal. Right end of Battery. 1/2" - 13 Steel Positive Stud 3/8" - 16 Steel Negative Stud BCI Terminal Locations Cat Premium High Output Batteries – Built Tough to Exceed Demanding Performance Test Requirements: 100 hour Vibration Testing – Five Times the Industry Standard •Battery must be able to withstand vibration forces without suffering mechanical damage, loss of capacity, loss of electrolyte or without developing internal/external leaks •Battery must pass a high rate discharge test after the vibration testing Five 72-hour Deep Discharge/Recharge Test Cycles •Battery must recover to 25 charging amps within 20 minutes and meet Industry Electrical Performance Standards 30 Day Complete Discharge Test •Battery must recover to 25 charging amps within 60 minutes and meet Industry Electrical Performance Standards after recharging SAE J2185 Life Cycle Test •Battery subject to deeper discharge and charge cycles at extreme temperatures not normally encountered in starting a machine or vehicle Cold Soak Test •Battery cold soaked at sub-freezing temperatures and then tested by starting an equally cold engine Recycle all scrap batteries. We accept lead-acid batteries for recycling. GP 2E 3 EH 4EH GP 3EE & 3ET GP 4D 6D 8D 4B GP 4DLT GP 31 28 GP21R, 22R, 22F, 22HF, 22NF, 24F, 24R, 26R, 27F, 27R, 33, 34R, 35, 36R, 47, 48,49, 51R, 54, 55, 56, 58R, 85, U1R(L), 22NL, 29 HR, 30HR, 27 HF, 29NF 6-Volt GP 1,2,3,4 5D, 7D, GC2, GC2H, 3D, 17 HF, 19L GP 40R, 41, 42, 43 96R, 97R, 98R Side Terminal GP70, 71, 72, 73, 74 75, 76, 77, 78, 101 GP21, 24, 24H, 25, 26, 27, 27H, 29H, 30H,34,50, 51, 52, 57, 58, 59, 65, 86, U1, 12T, 24T U2(L TERMINAL) Type B Cat Batteries World Wide Application Flexibility Marine Commercial Vessels Maintenance Free 4D, 8D and Group 31 Batteries. General Service Line Line valve regulated (VRLA) Gel batteries. High Marine Cranking Amps (MCA) and Deep Cycling capabilities. Automotive-Truck-Bus & RV A wide selection of popular BCI group sizes. Maintenance Free, Severe Service and Deep Cycle models. Application Specific Group 31 Truck Batteries. Commercial & Recreational A wide selection of premium batteries in most BCI group sizes for light commercial, recreational, agricultural and industrial applications. Marine Pleasure Craft Premium High Output BCI Group 31, Dual Terminal Deep Cycle Batteries. General Service Line BCI group 24M, 27M and 8V sizes. Electric Power Generation Premium High Output Maintenance Free and Accessible batteries in BCI group 4D, 8D, & 31 sizes. High Cold Cranking Amp (CCA) Capability. General Service Line valve regulated (VRLA) AGM batteries for UPS or stationary power applications. Construction & Mining Premium High Output Maintenance Free batteries. BCI group 4D, 8D and 31 Sizes. Industry leading cold cranking amps (CCA) and maximum vibration resistance. Cat Batteries Heavy-duty Forged Terminal Post Bushings Built-in Flame Arrestor Robust Reinforced Case Vibration Resistant Plates & Elements Heavy-duty Grids Rugged Separators For more information, see us today or visit our web site at www.cat.com Robust Components = Long Life + Reliable Starts •Heavy-duty forged terminal post bushings provide maximum strength and resistance to acid seepage that causes corrosion and black posts. Thicker internal terminal posts provide lower electrical resistance and higher cold cranking amp output. •Rugged microporous polyethylene envelope separators protect against “shorts” and vibration damage. Deep Cycle batteries utilize double insulated Glass mat separators for longer cycling life. •Maintenance Free batteries utilize calcium lead alloy on both positive and negative plates that reduces gassing and water consumption. Automotive batteries have Silver (Ag) Calcium Alloy Grids for resistance to high underhood temperatures. •Heavy-duty, full frame battery grids with no sharp edges. An optimum acid/paste combination provides better charge acceptance after a deep discharge. • Positive and Negative plates are anchored to the container bottom and the cell element is locked at the top for maximum vibration resistance. Straps are thicker, heavier and cast (not welded) into the plates. • Manifold vented cover with built-in Flame Arrestor…a safety feature that directs corrosive gases away from the battery and hold-downs. •Robust reinforced case provides extra strength in all temperature extremes. Brickwork design on sides reduces chance of punctures and case flexing. Embossed part number and descriptors for easy serviceability. Caterpillar.The difference counts.™ PEHJ0073-01 Printed in the U.S.A. © 2005 Caterpillar All Rights Reserved CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos and “Caterpillar Yellow,” as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Battery Charger Features ● Electronically current limited at 105% of rated output ● Alarm system ● Digital display ● Lightning and voltage transient protection ● Protection of connected equipment against load dump protection ● Constant voltage, current limited, 4-rate automatic equalization ● IP 20 housing ● Temperature compensation ● On board temperature sensor with remote port ● Auto AC line compensation ● Output regulated by sensed battery voltage Standards ● C-UL listed to UL 1236 ● NFPA 70, NFPA 110 ● CSA 22.2 No 107 certified ● CE DOC to EN 60335 ● IBC Seismic Certification UL 10 Amp Battery Charger This battery charger offers accurate, automatic charging of lead-acid and nickel cadmium batteries. The output voltage automatically adjusts to changing input, load, battery and ambient conditions. This prevents battery over-charging and consequent loss of battery electrolyte. Standard features include AC line compensation, precision voltage regulation, current limiting, automatic 2-rate charging, voltmeter and ammeter, temperature compensation and UL Listing. The user interface is easy to understand with digital metering, NFPA 110 alarms and a battery fault alarm. Image Shown may not Reflect Actual Package. Battery Charger Information contained in this publication may be considered confidential. Discretion is recommended when distributing. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow,” the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. www.cat,com/electricpower ©2019 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Specifications Input supply 110 – 120 V 208 – 240 V AC and DC fuses 2 input and 2 output) Output voltage 24V Output amps 10 Frequency 50 / 60 Hz Operating temperature -20°C ( -4°F) to +60°C (140°F) Housing constructed of rustproof anodized Aluminum Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight 195 mm (7.66 in)165 mm (6.5 in)318 mm (12.5 in)10.4 kg (23 lb) NFPA 110 alarm package as follows: ● AC on Green led (indication) ● AC fail Red led and form C contact (2A) ● Float mode LED ● Fast charge LED ● Temp comp active LED ● Low battery volts Red led and Form C conta ● High Battery Volts Red led and Form C conta ● Charger fail Red led and Form C conta ● Battery fault Red led and Form C conta ● Battery disconnected ● Battery polarity reversed ● Mismatched charger battery voltage ● Open or high resistance charger to battery connection ● Open battery cell or excessive internal resistance Feature Codes: BTC1024 BTC1028 BTC1035 BTC1025 BTC1032 Pump Style Jacket Water Heater Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow”, the “Power Edge” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. www.Cat-ElectricPower.com ©2016 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Pump Style Jacket Water Heater Image shown may not reflect actual package. Single Phase 2500 Watts Pump style jacket water heater is a complete coolant preheater. It features an integrated pump that combines the benefits of forced circulation with a compact design that can mount to a variety of small engine applications. Forced circulation of the coolant delivers uniform heating throughout the entire engine, extends element life and offers a significant reduction in electrical consumption. UL Listed , ULc Listed 240V Installation provided with shut-off valves 125 Amp Load Center Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow”, the “Power Edge” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. www.Cat-ElectricPower.com ©2016 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Image shown may not reflect actual package. SPECIFICATIONS Line Rated Current 125 A Number of spaces 8 Number of circuits 16 Number of tandem circuit breakers 8 System Voltage 120/240 V AC NEMA degree of protection NEMA 3R outdoor Electrical connection Lugs Wiring configuration 3-wire Material Tin plated aluminium busbar Enclosure material Galvannealed steel Cover finish Gray baked enamel Product certifications UL Listed 125 Amp Load Center LED Lights Features AC/DC Lighting Kit • Capable of AC and DC operation with provided selector switch • DC operation has a 60-minute timer switch to limit battery drain • AC operation is enabled by transformer • Low voltage, low energy circuit and operation • Installation includes one single LED light. Technical Data Theoretical Lumens Output 1600 lm Operational Lumens Output 1000 lm Color Temperature 5700 K Lens PC Body Aluminum Weight 0.6 kg IP Rating IP68, IP6K9K EMC CISPR 25 Class 3, EN 12895, ISO 13766, ISO 14982, ISO 7637-2 Operating Temperatures -40°C to +85°C (Overheat protected) Image shown may not reflect actual package. LED Lights www.Cat-ElectricPower.com ©2022 Caterpillar All rights reserved. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, "Caterpillar Corporate Yellow", the "Power Edge" and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Telematics Hardware Cat® PL444 4G LTE Radio (Model: PL444 NA) Telematics Hardware Product Description The Caterpillar PL444 system is a Telematics product that is designed to record and store data from multiple datalinks (CAN J1939, Modbus RS485) present on higher level systems, then transmit the data offboard via wireless communications (cellular) to back office sys- tems for end customer use. Design Specifications: • 4G LTE Category 4 Radio • GNSS signal tracking • CAN datalink communication • Modbus datalink communication • Durable IP66/67-rated enclosure Features Radio Connections / Pinout A B C D E F G K L M 1 CAN_H CAN_L Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used KSW Batt+ 2 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Wireless Disable Not used Batt- 3 RS485 RTN Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used LSD1 Not used Not used Not used 4 RS485_A RS485_B Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used CAN_H: CAN HighCAN_L: CAN Low KSW: Keyswitch (Ignition) – Wakes the device up when tied to Batt+ voltage Batt+: 12/24V InputBatt-: Ground/Return Wireless Disable: When pulled to ground, disables all RF transmissions (Cellular) LSD1/2: Low Side Drivers 1 and 2. Connects a load with a voltage source, to ground when enabled, completing the circuitRS485 RTN: RS-485 Shield RS485A/B: RS-485 Modbus connections *All dimensions are in inches. 8.5 7.1 4.7 0.7 2.8 0.6 0.7 3.5 0.7 5.6 1.4Radio Dimensions Telematics Hardware Input Voltage Voltage Range ..........................................................9 to 32V DC Protection ...........................................................Reverse polarity Current Consumption Idle Current (non-transmitting)......................................< 300 mA Peak Current ........................................................................< 6A Sleep Current ....................................................................<3 mA Physical Specifications Enclosure Material ..........................Plastic (PBT+ASA GF30 FR) Aluminum (AIMg2.5 / H22; H23) Dimensions (in)......................................................8.5 x 5.6 x 1.4 Weight ..............................................................................0.45 kg Interface Connectors ...............................................48 pin Molex Environment Operating/Storage Temp .....................................-40°C to +85°C Ingress Protection............................................................IP66/67 Humidity......................................................................SAE J1455 Vibration ...........9.8 Grms random (24-2000 Hz), up to 0.5 g2/Hz Regulatory Compliance FCC, IC, CE RED, EN/UL/CSA 62368-1, RoHS, WEEE, REACH LEDs Orange GNSS (Solid: GNSS Fix, 1Hz: Searching/no lock, Off: Fault) Blue Datalink (Flashing: Activity on J1939 or Modbus Off: Fault or No Connection) Yellow Cellular (Solid: Data connection established, Flashing: Searching for signal, Off: Modem off or Fault) White Bluetooth® (Solid: Connection established, Flashing: Advertising mode, Off: Bluetooth off or Fault) Secure Key Injection Security...................................Unique and cryptographic identity Communications Datalink .....................................................................J1939/CAN Datalink............................................................Modbus (RS-485) Wireless ...........................................4G LTE with 2G/3G fallback Wireless ........................................................Bluetooth®/BLE 5.0 I/O Low Side Drivers (300 mA max) .................................................2 Switch to Ground ........................................................................1 Keyswitch ...................................................................................1 Positioning (GNSS) Signal Tracking .........................GPS/Galileo/GLONASS/BeiDou Antenna ............................................................................Internal Cellular Communications LTE Bands/Frequencies Band Frequencies (Uplink / Downlink) (MHz) 2 1850-1910 / 1930-1990 4 1710-1755 / 2110-2155 5 824-849 / 869-894 7 2500-2570 / 2620-2690 12/17 699-716 / 729-746 13 777-787 / 746-756 3G (UMTS) Bands/Frequencies Band Frequencies (Uplink / Downlink) (MHz) 2 1850-1910 / 1930-1990 4 1710-1755 / 2110-2155 5 824-849 / 869-894 2G (GSM) Bands/Frequencies Band Frequencies (Uplink / Downlink) (MHz) 2 1850-1910 / 1930-1990 5 824-849 / 869-894 Antennas ...................................2x internal (Primary + Diversity) to support 2x2 MIMO SIM ............................................................................eUICC chip Operating Temperature ........................................-30°C to +70°C Bluetooth® Communications Frequencies .....................................................2402 – 2480 MHz Version.............................................................................BLE 5.0 Antenna ............................................................................internal Technical Specifications www.cat.com/electricpower ©2021 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow” the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Controls GROUND FAULT RELAY (GFR) GENERAL DESCRIPTION GFR is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for resistance- and solidly-grounded systems. In addition to common systems, it is uniquely suited for use on systems with significant harmonic content. GFR can provide main-plant protection, feeder-level protection, or individual-load protection. Proper current transformer selection provides the desired pickup range. The output contacts can be connected for use in protective tripping circuits or in alarm indication circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter. FEATURES & BENEFITS Benefits •Trip setting based on input CT primary, allows use with any CT. Minimum 50 mA with EFCT Series. •Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination •Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits •Alarms when CT is not connected •Compatible with variable-speed drives •Eliminates nuisance tripping •Retains trip state while de-energized to simplify troubleshooting •No calibration required, saves on maintenance cost Features •Adjustable pickup (1-99%) •Adjustable time delay (50 ms - 2.5 s) •Output contacts •Analog output (0 - 5 V) •CT-Loop monitoring •Selectable DFT or peak detection filtering •Harmonic filtering •Non-volatile trip memory •Microprocessor based •Universal power supply Picture shown may not reflect actual configuration •Allows operation in application where one side of PT is faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications Controls FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS Ground-fault trip level Ground-fault trip time Reset Test The TEST button is used to test the ground- fault circuit, the indication, and the output relay. When the TEST button is pressed for one second, a test signal is applied to the ground-fault-detection circuit, the circuit will trip, the TRIP LED will light, and the output relay will operate. If high-current inhibit has been selected, the INHB LED will light. Front-panel indication •Power The green LED labelled PWR indicates the presence of supply voltage. •Trip The red LED labelled TRIP indicates a trip. A solid red LED indicates a ground-fault trip. A flashing LED indicates a trip initiated by a CT fault. Two fast flashes indicate a diagnostic trip. Self diagnostics A diagnostic trip is indicated by two fast flashes of the TRIP LED. It can be caused by a diagnostic problem detected by the watchdog timer or from an incorrect reading from non-volatile memory. Press RESET or cycle supply voltage. •Trip inhibit The yellow LED labelled INHB indicates that output relay operation was inhibited during a high-current ground fault. When a ground- fault trip occurs during a high-current ground fault, both the TRIP and INHB LED’s will be ON. Inhibit indication is reset when the ground-fault trip is reset. Inhibit operation and indication will not respond if the trip-inhibit switch is in the OFF position. SPECIFICATIONS •IEEE Device Numbers - Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) •Dimensions o H 75 mm (3.0") o W 55 mm (2.2") o D 115 mm (4.5") •Trip Level Settings - 1-99% CT-Primary Rating •Trip Time Settings - 0.05-2.5 s •Contact Operating Mode - Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe •Output Contacts Isolated Form A and Form B •Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), C- Tick (Australian) •Analog Output 0-5 V Controls 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 L2N L1 16 1 2 3 4 5 876 S1 S2 RS EFCT ANALOGOUTPUTRESET1A/5A CT 1A 5A C 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 6 7 8 9 6 7 8 9 5 0 .50 .05 .40 .30 .20 .10 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 5 0 % CT PRIMARY TIME (s) GROUND-FAULT MONITOR TEST RESET PWR INHB TRIP 55.0 (2.17) 37.5 (1.48) 8.7 (0.34) CONFIGURATION SWITCHES RESET MODE FILTER SELECTION CT VERIFICATION TRIP INHIBIT RELAY OPERATING MODE LATCHING FIXED FREQUENCY OFF OFF FAIL-SAFE AUTORESET VARIABLE FREQUENCY ON ON NON-FAIL-SAFE 5 4 3 2 1 NOTE 5 NOTE 2 61 . 2 (2 . 4 1 ) 75 . 0 (2 . 9 5 ) 6. 9 (0 . 2 7 ) TOP 55.0 (2.17) 75 . 0 (2 . 9 5 ) FRONT BOTTOM (4.65) 110.0 (4.33)6.3 (0.25) NOTES: SIDE 1.DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (INCHES). 2.MOUNTING SCREWS: M4 OR 8-32. 3.OVERALL DIMENSION WHEN MOUNTED ON DINEN50022 35 mm x 7.5 mm TOP-HAT RAIL. 4.ADJUSTMENT KNOBS ARE REMOVABLE. 5.CONFIGURATION SWITCHES SHOWN IN DEFAULT POSITION. OFF ON FAIL-SAFE LATCHING NON-FAIL-SAFE AUTORESET 3 4 5 2 1 CONFIGURATION SWITCHES RESET MODE CT VERIFICATION RELAY OPERATING MODE FIXED FREQUENCY VARIABLE FREQUENCY FILTER SELECTION OFF ON TRIP INHIBIT OUTLINE AND MOUNTING DETAILS MOUNTING DETAIL Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow,” the “Power Edge” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. cat.com/electricpower ©2017 Caterpillar All rights reserved. 118.0 (NOTE 3) GFCI Receptacles Features and Benefits • Automatically tests the GFCI every time the reset button is pushed in. The GFCI will not reset if the GFCI circuit is not functioning properly. • By blocking reset of the GFCI if protection has been compromised, SmartLockPRO reduces the possibility of end-users incorrectly assuming that a reset GFCI outlet is providing ground fault protection when it actually is not. • A line-load reversal diagnostic feature is provided which prevents the GFCI from being reset and stops power from being fed to the GFCI receptacle face or through to downstream devices. A green LED indicator on the GFCI’s face also illuminates to alert the installer to the line-load wiring reversal. Weather-Resistant GFCIs • Meet UL 498 requirements for weather- resistant receptacles. Tamper-Resistant GFCIs • Shutter mechanism inside the receptacle blocks access to the contacts unless a two- prong plug is inserted, helping ensure foreign objects will be locked out. Product Features • Grounding: GFCI ground fault • Feature: Weather and tamper-resistant • Amperage: 20 Amp • Voltage: 125 Volt • NEMA: 5-20R • Trip Level: Class A, 5mA plus or minus 1mA • Pole: 2 • Wire: 3 • Color: White Standards and Certifications • NEMA: WD-6 • ANSI: C-73 • UL498: File E13399 • CSA C22.2 No. 42: File LR-57811 • NOM: 057 • UL 943: File E48380 Image shown may not reflect actual configuration. 20A Tamper-Resistant, Weather-Resistant GFCI Receptacles Receptacles contained in a weather resistant box and in-use cover. www.Cat-ElectricPower.com ©2016 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow”, the “Power Edge” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. Input Expansion Module ENVIRONMENTAL TESTING STANDARD ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY BS EN 61000-6-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard for the Industrial Environment BS EN 61000-6-4 EMC Generic Emission Standard for the Industrial Environment ELECTRICAL SAFETY BS EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business Equipment TEMPERATURE BS EN 60068-2-1 Ab/Ae Cold Test -30 °C BS EN 60068-2-2 Bb/Be Dry Heat +70°C VIBRATION BS EN 60068-2-6 Ten sweeps in each of three major axes 5 Hz to 8 Hz @ +/-7.5 mm, 8 Hz to 500 Hz @ 2 gn SHOCK BS EN 60068-2-27 Three shocks in each of three major axes 15 gn in 11 Ms HUMIDITY BS EN 60068-2-30 Db Damp Heat Cyclic 20/55°C @ 95% RH 48 Hours BS EN 60068-2-78 Cab Damp Heat Static 40°C @ 93% RH 48 Hours DEGREES OF PROTECTION PROVIDED BY ENCLOSURES BS EN 60529 IP21 SPECIFICATION CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE RATING 8 V to 35 V Continuous CRANKING DROPOUTS Able to survive 0 V for 50 mS, providing supply was at least 10 V before dropout and supply recovers to 5 V. This is achieved without the need for internal batteries. LEDs light will not be maintained during cranking. MAXIMUM OPERATING CURRENT 292 mA at 12 V, 167 mA at 24 V mA at 24 V MAXIMUM STANDBY CURRENT 101 mA at 12 V, 167 mA at 24 V INPUTS 10 inputs configurable for digital/resistive (3k ohms) 4 – 20 mA and 0 – 10 V DC DIMENSIONS OVERALL 165 mm x 76 mm x 49 mm STROAGE TEMPERATURE RANGE -40ºC to + 85ºC Input Expansion Module The Ratiometric Input Expansion module is used in conjunction with supported controllers to provide additional, flexible, input functionality. The module’s ID switch is configurable from the module and the 10 inputs can be configured from within the ‘host controller’. The ratiometric inputs can be configured in a number of ways to connect to digital switches, resistive sensors, 0 – 10 V DC signals or 4 – 20 mA signals. LED indication is provided for ‘Power On’ and ‘Link Lost’. Features • Power On/Link Lost LED • 10 inputs configurable for digital/resistive 4 – 20 mA and 0 – 10 V DC • A maximum of 4 modules can be connected to 1 host control module to provide up to 40 additional configurable inputs • Works up to 1.2 km (0.75 miles) from the host controller • Terminal strip connection for quick and easy set-up Picture shown may not reflect actual configuration. www.cat.com/electricpower ©2023 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. C2 7 a n d C 3 2 G e n e r a t o r S e t w i t h JS J 1 - U P 2A 3 1 - U P TZ 9 1 - U P TZ J 1 - U P Fe b r u a r y 2 0 2 5 M0 1 6 9 9 9 8 - 0 1 El e c t r i c a l S y s t e m GC C P 1 . 2 a n d G C C P 1 . 3 C o n t r o l l e r PU B L I C A T I O N S . C A T . C O M Pr e s s u r e Sy m b o l T Te m p e r a t u r e Sy m b o l Le v e l Sy m b o l Fl o w Sy m b o l Ci r c u i t B r e a k e r Sy m b o l Ha r n e s s a n d W i r e S y m b o l s Sy m b o l s Sy m b o l s a n d D e f i n i t i o n s Ha r n e s s A n d W i r e E l e c t r i c a l S c h e m a t i c S y m b o l s Fu s e : A c o m p o n e n t i n a n e l e c t r i c a l c i r c u i t t h a t w i l l o p e n t h e c i r c u i t i f t o o m u c h c u r r e n t f l o w s th r o u g h i t . Sw i t c h ( N o r m a l l y O p e n ) : A s w i t c h t h a t w i l l c l o s e a t a s p e c i f i e d p o i n t ( t e m p , p r e s s , e t c . ) . T h e cir c l e i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e c o m p o n e n t h a s s c r e w t e r m i n a l s a n d a w i r e c a n b e d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m i t . Sw i t c h ( N o r m a l l y C l o s e d ) : A s w i t c h t h a t w i l l o p e n a t a s p e c i f i e d p o i n t ( t e m p , p r e s s , e t c . ) . No c i r c l e i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e w i r e c a n n o t b e d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m t h e c o m p o n e n t . Gr o u n d ( W i r e d ) : T h i s i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e c o m p o n e n t i s c o n n e c t e d t o a g r o u n d e d w i r e . T h e gr o u n d e d w i r e i s f a s t e n e d t o t h e m a c h i n e . Gr o u n d ( C a s e ) : T h i s i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e c o m p o n e n t d o e s n o t h a v e a w i r e c o n n e c t e d t o g r o u n d . It i s g r o u n d e d b y b e i n g f a s t e n e d t o t h e m a c h i n e . Re e d S w i t c h : A s w i t c h w h o s e c o n t a c t s a r e c o n t r o l l e d b y a m a g n e t . A m a g n e t c l o s e s t h e co n t a c t s o f a n o r m a l l y o p e n r e e d s w i t c h ; i t o p e n s t h e c o n t a c t s o f a n o r m a l l y c l o s e d r e e d s w i t c h . Se n d e r : A c o m p o n e n t t h a t i s u s e d w i t h a t e m p e r a t u r e o r p r e s s u r e g a u g e . T h e s e n d e r me a s u r e s t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o r p r e s s u r e . I t s r e s i s t a n c e c h a n g e s t o g i v e a n i n d i c a t i o n t o th e g a u g e o f t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o r p r e s s u r e . T Re l a y ( M a g n e t i c S w i t c h ) : A r e l a y i s a n e l e c t r i c a l c o m p o n e n t t h a t i s a c t i v a t e d b y e l e c t r i c i t y . It h a s a c o i l t h a t m a k e s a n e l e c t r o m a g n e t w h e n c u r r e n t f l o w s t h r o u g h i t . T h e ele c t r o m a g n e t c a n o p e n o r c l o s e t h e s w i t c h p a r t o f t h e r e l a y . Ma g n e t i c L a t c h S o l e n o i d : A m a g n e t i c l a t c h s o l e n o i d i s a n e l e c t r i c a l c o m p o n e n t t h a t i s ac t i v a t e d b y e l e c t r i c i t y a n d h e l d l a t c h e d b y a p e r m a n e n t m a g n e t . I t h a s t w o c o i l s ( l a t c h a n d u n l a t c h ) th a t m a k e e l e c t r o m a g n e t w h e n c u r r e n t f l o w s t h r o u g h t h e m . I t a l s o h a s a n i n t e r n a l s w i t c h t h a t p l a c e s th e l a t c h c o i l c i r c u i t o p e n a t t h e t i m e t h e c o i l l a t c h e s . So l e n o i d : A s o l e n o i d i s a n e l e c t r i c a l c o m p o n e n t t h a t i s a c t i v a t e d b y e l e c t r i c i t y . I t h a s a co i l t h a t m a k e s a n e l e c t r o m a g n e t w h e n c u r r e n t f l o w s t h r o u g h i t . T h e e l e c t r o m a g n e t ca n o p e n o r c l o s e a v a l v e o r m o v e a p i e c e o f m e t a l t h a t c a n d o w o r k . 1 2 AG - C 4 11 1 - 7 8 9 8 L- C 1 2 3E - 5 1 7 9 9X - 1 1 2 3 Co m p o n e n t Pa r t N u m b e r Pi n o r S o c k e t N u m b e r Pa r t N u m b e r : f o r C o n n e c t o r R e c e p t a c l e Pa r t N u m b e r : fo r C o n n e c t o r P l u g Ha r n e s s I d e n t i f i c a t i o n L e t t e r ( s ) : (A , B , C , . . . , A A , A B , A C , . . . ) Pl u g 32 5 - A G 1 3 5 P K - 1 4 Wi r e C o l o r Wi r e G a u g e * Re c e p t a c l e 1 12 2 Su r e - S e a l c o n n e c t o r : T y p i c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of a S u r e - S e a l c o n n e c t o r . T h e p l u g a n d r e c e p t a c l e co n t a i n b o t h p i n s a n d s o c k e t s . De u t s c h c o n n e c t o r : T y p i c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of a D e u t s c h c o n n e c t o r . T h e p l u g c o n t a i n s a l l so c k e t s a n d t h e r e c e p t a c l e c o n t a i n s a l l p i n s . Fu s e (5 A m p s ) 5A Ha r n e s s i d e n t i f i c a t i o n c o d e : Th i s e x a m p l e i n d i c a t e s w i r e g r o u p 3 2 5 , wir e 1 3 5 i n h a r n e s s " A G " . L- C 1 2 3E - 5 1 7 9 Wi r e , C a b l e , o r H a r n e s s As s e m b l y I d e n t i f i c a t i o n : In c l u d e s Ha r n e s s I d e n t i f i c a t i o n L e t t e r s a n d Ha r n e s s C o n n e c t o r S e r i a l i z a t i o n Co d e s ( s e e s a m p l e ) . Ha r n e s s C o n n e c t o r S e r i a l i z a t i o n C o d e : Th e " C " s t a n d s f o r " C o n n e c t o r " a n d t h e nu m b e r i n d i c a t e s w h i c h c o n n e c t o r i n t h e ha r n e s s ( C 1 , C 2 , C 3 , . . . ) . *W i r e g a u g e i s s h o w n i n A W G ( A m e r i c a n W i r e G a u g e ) bu t c o u l d a l s o b e s h o w n i n m e t r i c d e n o t e d w i t h m m © 2 0 2 5 C a t e r p i l l a r . A l l R i g h t s R e s e r v e d . C A T , C A T E R P I L L A R , L E T ’ S D O T H E W O R K , t h e i r r e s p e c t i v e l o g o s , “ C a t e r p i l l a r C o r p o r a t e Y e ll o w ” , t h e “P o w e r E d g e ” a n d C a t “ M o d e r n H e x ” t r a d e d r e s s a s w e l l a s c o r p o r a t e a n d p r o d u c t i d e n t i t y u s e d h e r e i n , a r e t r a d e m a r k s o f C a t e r p i l la r a n d m a y n o t be u s e d w i t h o u t p e r m i s s i o n . Ca t e r p i l l a r : N o n - C o n f i d e n t i a l . 42 Page, (Dimensions: 56 inches x 35 inches) M0169998-01 640 - 5 3 6 5 640 - 5 3 6 5 57 2 - 0 7 7 4 51 9 - 8 7 5 6 64 0 - 5 3 6 5 33 6 - 9 1 8 5 583-6373 583-6374 33 6 - 9 1 8 5 583-6375 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 33 6 - 9 1 8 5 583-6374 314-9098 314-9098 443-0512 443-0512 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 301-8313 9X - 1 3 4 3 13 3 - 0 9 7 0 15 5 - 2 2 6 9 3 E - 3 3 6 4 15 5 - 2 2 6 9 DE S C R I P T I O N F U N C T I O N DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 1 - ( D I A ) R E M O T E S T A R T DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 2 - ( D I B ) C I R C U I T B R E A K E R - 1 A U X I L I A R Y N O DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 3 - ( D I C ) C I R C U I T B R E A K E R - 2 A U X I L I A R Y N O DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 4 - ( D I D ) F U E L L E A K ( E N C L O S U R E ) DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 5 - ( D I E ) A C B A T T E R Y C H A R G E R F A I L U R E ( E N C L O S U R E ) DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 6 - ( D I F ) S P A R E DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 7 - ( D I G ) S P A R E DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 8 - ( D I H ) S P A R E E- S T O P I N P U T - ( P O R T 3 ) E M E R G E N C Y S T O P A N D P O W E R S U P P L Y T O D O A A N D D O B DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 1 - ( D O A ) F U N C T I O N A L S A F E T Y ( E C M P O W E R R E L A Y ) DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 2 - ( D O B ) S P A R E DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 3 - ( D O C ) C O M M O N S H U T D O W N ( S H U N T T R I P R E L A Y ) DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 4 - ( D O D ) D I S A B L E A U X A C S U P P L Y ( E N G I N E R U N R E L A Y ) DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 5 - ( D O E ) S P A R E DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 6 - ( D O F ) S P A R E DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 7 - ( D O G ) S P A R E DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 8 - ( D O H ) B U Z Z E R AN A L O G I N P U T 0 1 - ( A I A ) F U E L L E V E L S E N S O R ( E N C L O S U R E ) AN A L O G I N P U T 0 2 - ( A I B ) S P A R E AN A L O G I N P U T 0 3 - ( A I C ) S P A R E AN A L O G I N P U T 0 4 - ( A I D ) S P A R E MA G N E T I C P I C K U P S P A R E CH A R G E F A I L / E X C I T E S P A R E SH E E T I N D E X D E S C R I P T I O N SH E E T 1 H A R N E S S L A Y E R I N D E X GE N E R A L N O T E S CO N T R O L P A N E L V I E W S SH E E T 2 G C C P 1 . 2 / 1 . 3 P A N E L W I R I N G VR P A N E L W I R I N G AN N U N C I A T O R M O D U L E RT D E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E IN P U T A N D O U T P U T M O D U L E S ( W I T H R T D M O D U L E ) IN P U T A N D O U T P U T M O D U L E S ( W I T H O U T R T D M O D U L E ) PL 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S SH E E T 3 A 6 N 2 ( P L E 7 0 2 ) T E L E M A T I C S ME D I U M V O L T A G E C T S E N S I N G C3 2 B N A J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R RE M O T E C O N T R O L P A N E L C I R I C U I T B R E A K E R W I R I N G SH I P P E D L O O S E B A T T E R Y C H A R G E R C O N N E C T I O N S ( R E C O M M E N D E D ) C3 2 / C 2 7 E N C L O S U R E O P T I O N S SH E E T 4 C U S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - M A I N T E R M I N A L B L O C K SH E E T 5 C U S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - T E L E M A T I C S , I N P U T A N D O U T P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E SH E E T 6 C U S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - G C C P 1 . 2 / 1 . 3 C O N T R O L L E R DE F A U L T I N P U T A N D O U T P U T C O N F I G U R A T I O N SH E E T 7 V R P A N E L L A Y O U T A N D C U S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S SH E E T 8 R E M O T E M O U N T E D P A N E L I N T E R F A C I N G SH E E T 9 E S T O P A N D C A N C O M M U N I A C A T I O N S C I R C U I T S CO N T R O L P A N E L ( A L L O P T I O N S S H O W N ) CO N T R O L P A N E L O P E N P O S I T I O N ( A L L O P T I O N S S H O W N ) SH E E T 1 LFAUX-NO LFAUX-NC LFAUX-COM LF-CLOSE LF-OPEN LF-TRIP RTAUX-NO RTAUX-NC RTAUX-COM RT-CLOSE RT-OPEN RT-TRIP ESTOP NO DO 6 CB-POS CB-NEG CB1-D1 03 CB2-D1 04 ESTOP-A ESTOP-B SFT-ESTOP RM-STOP START AI-RTN AI A GND GND GND B-NEG-1 B-NEG-1 B-NEG-1 B-NEG-1 B-NEG-1 B-POS-1 B-POS-1 B-POS-1 B-POS-1 B-POS-1 20 20 4 PWR AUX2 PWR AUX1 F1 THRT/PWM DIG-RTN DO D R-1 CAN + CAN - CAN SCR DI D DI E DI F B-NEG-2 B-NEG-2 B-POS-2 B-POS-2 CB LF-SHUNT CB RT-SHUNT TRIP RELAY TRIP RELAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 1 22 23 24 25 CUSTOMER SUPPLIED CUSTOMER SUPPLIEDCUSTOMER SUPPLIED CUSTOMER SUPPLIED CUSTOMER SUPPLIEDCUSTOMER SUPPLIED CUSTOMER LOAD CUSTOMER LOAD (CUSTOMER DC RETURN) (CUSTOMER DC SUPPLY) CUSTOMER LOAD CUSTOMER LOAD (CUSTOMER DC RETURN) (CUSTOMER DC SUPPLY) 52G 'a'52G 'b' 52G 'a' 'b' 52G CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D RE M O T E S T A R T S I G N A L CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D SP E E D C O N T R O L I N P U T T O E N G I N E E C M 50 0 H z , 5 V P W M ( 7 % t o 9 4 % ) CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D DIG I T A L I N P U T CU S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - M A I N T E R M I N A L B L O C K SH E E T 4 NO MA X 3 0 0 m A CU S T O M E R L O A D 00 00 TE L B + TE L B - TE L D O - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 IN P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E OU T P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E +-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-+-A B C D E F G H I J - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TE L E L M A T I C S T E R M I N A L B L O C K BT R Y - ( N E G ) BT R Y + ( P O S ) DS E N E T S C R DS E N E T A DS E N E T B BT R Y - ( N E G ) BT R Y + ( P O S ) DS E N E T S C R DS E N E T A DS E N E T B (C U S T O M E R D C R E T U R N ) (C U S T O M E R D C S U P P L Y ) (C U S T O M E R D C S U P P L Y ) 4-2 0 m A 4-2 0 m A V + -0 T O 1 0 V 0-4 8 0 O H M CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D (C U S T O M E R D C R E T U R N ) MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A TE L E M A T I C S IN P U T A S H O W N W I R E D AS D I G I T A L I N P U T IN P U T E S H O W N W I R E D AS 0 - 1 0 V I N P U T IN P U T C S H O W N W I R E D AS R E S I S T I V E S E N S O R I N P U T IN P U T G S H O W N W I R E D AS 4 - 2 0 m A I N P U T ( S E L F P O W E R E D ) IN P U T I S H O W N W I R E D AS 4 - 2 0 m A I N P U T ( L O O P P O W E R E D ) (T H E I N P U T S A T O J C A N B E C O N F I G U R E D A S E I T H E R A D I G I T A L I N P U T , RE S I S T I V E I N P U T , 0 - 1 0 V I N P U T O R 4 - 2 0 m A I N P U T (C U S T O M E R D C S U P P L Y MA X 3 0 V D C ) TE L E M A T I C S C O N F I G U R A T I O N A N D SO F T W A R E U P L O A D SH E E T 5 CU S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - T E L E M A T I C S T E R M I N A L B L O C K - I N P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E - O U T P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E EN C L O S U R E B A T C H A R G E R 20 8 - 2 4 0 V J W H CD V R SP A C E H E A T E R L1 (8-2 AWG)LEFT INPUT (10-6 AWG)RIGHT INPUT (14-6 AWG)OUTPUTS LOAD BLOCK L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L2 (8-2 AWG)LEFT INPUT (10-6 AWG)RIGHT INPUT (14-6 AWG)OUTPUTS LOAD BLOCK L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 ST D A C B L K - V R P A N E L : 6 3 4 - 5 2 6 0 / 6 4 2 - 6 8 0 0 BLOCK AS: 491-4001 / 641-9528 BLOCK AS: 542-9116 WIRING GP:521-1498 WIRING GP: 498-0007 WIRING GP: 491-3996 31 21 11 A1 A2 12 14 22 24 32 34 63A 10A 31 21 11 A1 A2 12 14 22 24 32 34 20A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 31 21 11 A1 A2 12 14 22 24 32 34 10A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 20 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V A C (C U S T O M E R S U P P L I E D ) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED V (FAULT RESET MOMENTARY INPUT) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED (VAr/PF CONTROL ACTIVE WHEN CLOSED) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED (SET POINT ADJUSTMENT MOMENTARY INPUTS) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED (EXCITATION DISABLED WHEN CLOSED) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SETPOINT CONTROL INPUT +/-10V DC CONTACT SENSE - COMMON CDVR: P9-6 CONTACT SENSE - FAULT RESET CDVR: P9-8 CONTACT SENSE - VAR/PF ENABLE CDVR: P9-9 CONTACT SENSE - RAISE CDVR: P9-5 CONTACT SENSE - LOWER CDVR: P9-4 CONTACT SENSE - EXCITATION DISABLE CDVR: P9-7 DRIVER SUPPLY (50) (24V, 100 mA)CDVR: P12-9 FAULT SHUTDOWN DRIVER (24V, 100 mA) CDVR: P12-5 ALARM OUTPUT DRIVER (24V, 100 mA)CDVR: P12-4 +/-10V DC INPUT (B), - CDVR: P12-3 +/-10V DC INPUT (A), + CDVR: P12-6 SH O R E P O W E R I N P U T JW H CR 2 2 CB3 CB2 SP A C E H E A T E R CR 2 1 CB1 JWH-21 JWH-A1 H4 H2 H3 H1 EN C L B A T C H R G R CR 2 3 CB4 BC-2 BC-1 PWR L2 PWR L2 PWM-SH PWM-NEG PWM-POS CT-COM 1A GEN 1B GEN 1C GEN SPARE BTRY- BTRY- BTRY- ENG-RUN ENG-RUN BTRY+ BTRY+ BTRY+ GND GND VS-T1 VS-T2 VS-T3 VDC-A VDC-B ALM FSD DS-50 EX-DS V-LWR V-RISE V/PF F-RES COM COM COM L1 L2 L3 N BT R Y - ( N E G ) CUSTOMER LOAD CUSTOMER LOAD CUSTOMER LOAD BT R Y - ( N E G ) CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D AN A L O G I N P U T S CUSTOMER LOAD MAX 2A 59 7 - 4 3 5 0 / 5 7 4 - 8 7 4 3 GC C P 1 . 2 / G C C P 1 . 3 C O N T R O L L E R US B CO N T R O L L E R C O N F I G U R A T I O N AN D M O N I T O R I N G GC C P 1 . 2 / 1 . 3 D E F A U L T I N P U T A N D O U T P U T C O N F I G U R A T I O N 2A FUSE 2A FUSE 2A FUSE L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N A B C D E F G H RS485 SCR RS485+ RS485- L1 L2 L3 COM COM A B C D E F G H CHARGE FAIL/EXCITE BTRY- BTRY+ E STOP C D MAG PICKUP- MAG PICKUP SCR ECU CAN+ ECU CAN- ECU CAN SCR DSENET B MAG PICKUP+ RETURN A B DSENET A DSENET SCR OU T P U T S A N A L O G I N P U T S DIG I T A L I N P U T S MAX 5A MAX 2A MAX 2A STANDARD TERMINAL BLOCK (OUTPUT B - SUPPLIED FROM TERMINAL 3) CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D BU S V O L T A G E S E N S I N G (A U T O M A I N S F A I L U R E I N G C C P 1 . 3 O N L Y ) GE N E R A T O R VO L T A G E LIN E VO L T A G E CU R R E N T T R A N S F O R M E R US E S C R E E N E D T W I S T E D P A I R C A B L E W I T H 1 2 0 O H M I M P E D A N C E FO R R S 4 8 5 C O M M U N I C A T I O N S . F I T 1 2 0 O H M R E S I S T O R B E T W E E N TE R M I N A L S 5 1 A N D 5 2 I F T H E C O N T R O L L E R I S T H E F I R S T O R L A S T DE V I C E O N T H E R S 4 8 5 P H Y S I C A L L I N K . DI G I T A L I N P U T S A T O H : S W I T C H T O N E G A T I V E DI G I T A L O U T P U T S A & B : S W I T C H E S T O S U P P L Y P O S I T I V E F R O M T E R M I N A L 3 DI G I T A L O U T P U T S C T O H : S W I T C H E S T O S U P P L Y P O S I T I V E F R O M T E R M I N A L 2 AN A L O G I N P U T S A & D : C A N B E C O N F I G U R E D A S R E S I S T I V E , 0 - 1 0 V O R 4 - 2 0 m A I N P U T AN A L O G I N P U T S B & C : R E S I S T I V E I N P U T AL L A N A L O G I N P U T S C A N B E C O N F I G U R E D A S D I G I T A L I N P U T S AI-RTN 1 1 1 1229B-A47 WH-18 CU S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - G C C P C O N T R O L L E R IN P U T A N D O U T P U T C O N F I G U R A T I O N SH E E T 6 SH E E T 7 SH O W I N G A L L A V A I L A B L E O P T I O N S VO L T A G E R E G U L A T O R P A N E L T E R M I N A L B L O C K L A Y O U T F7 1 2 F8 1 2 F9 1 2 14 1 1 R1 L2L1 EL E C T R I C A L L Y O P E R A T E D C B (L E F T , R I G H T O R R E A R O F G E N S E T ) FO R S E C O N D C B 14 11 ST R EM A X 2 MA S T E R P A C T VO L A T G E R E G U L A T O R S U B P A N E L (R E A R O F G E N S E T ) J1 9 3 9 C A B L E US E 1 5 3 - 2 7 0 7 O R E Q U I V A L E N T CU S T O M E R SU P P L I E D 20 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V A C US E 1 6 9 - 8 6 7 0 C O N N E C T O R WIT H 1 5 5 - 2 2 7 6 W E D G E 29 30 31 32 37 38 39 40 8 A- C 1 EN G I N E I N T E R F A C E H A R N E S S FO R S E C O N D C B A1 A2 DC SU P P L Y CU S T O M E R SU P P L I E D CU S T O M E R SU P P L I E D (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) SU P P L I E D CU S T O M E R SU P P L I E D CU S T O M E R AU X - N O , N C A N D C O M I S C O M M O N F O R IN T E R F A C E C O N N E C T O R DC P O W E R S U P P L Y GC C P 1 . 2 / 1 . 3 (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (8 A W G ) (8 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (E N G - R U N ) WA L L M O U N T P A N E L (1 8 A W G ) 14 11 (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) L F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R (L E F T , R I G H T , O R R E A R O F G E N S E T ) P & R F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R MA N U A L O P E R A T E D (L E F T , R I G H T , O R R E A R O F G E N S E T ) P F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R EL E C T R I C A L L Y O P E R A T E D (L E F T , R I G H T , O R R E A R O F G E N S E T ) TE E R E C (1 6 A W G ) P,R , L F R A M E B R E A K E R A2 A1ST R ST R (E N G - R U N ) R1 CU S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - R E M O T E M O U N T I N G P A N E L I N T E R F A C I N G F1 F2 B2 A2 C2 C2 24 B1 A1 C1 21 11 12 14 K2 K1 U1 C1 C1 1 C1 1 24 U2 C2 C1 2 21 11 12 14 1 2 0V +2 4 V 1 2 CB B - P O S CB - C L S CB - O P E N CB - T R I P CB 1 - D I 0 3 CB - B N E G CB 1 - D I 0 4 AU X - C AU X - N C AU X - N O A B C A B C A B C A B C CO N N E C T S T O A - C 3 (3 E - 3 3 7 0 ) V-N E U T CO N N E C T S T O V G - C 3 ( 3 E - 3 3 8 2 ) US E 1 5 5 - 2 2 7 3 C O N N E C T O R WIT H 1 5 5 - 2 2 6 3 W E D G E 123456 123456 GN D GN D BT R Y P O S BT R Y N E G EN G R U N GN D BT R Y P O S BT R Y N E G BT R Y N E G 4 C B O P E N - A 4 ( D C + ) 3 C B C L O S E - A 2 ( D C + ) 2 S P R I N G C H A R G E M O T O R - A 1 ( D C - ) 1 S P R I N G C H A R G E M O T O R - B 4 ( D C + ) 1 S H U N T T R I P - C 2 ( D C + ) 2 S H U N T T R I P - C 1 ( D C - ) 3 A U X - C O M ( 1 1 ) 4 A U X - N O ( 1 4 ) 5 A U X - N C ( 1 2 ) 6 T R I P U N I T P O W E R - F 2 ( D C + ) 7 T R I P U N I T P O W E R - F 1 ( D C - ) 8 1 2 AU X - N C CB 1 - D I 0 3 AU X - N O CB - B P O S CB - C L S CB - T R I P CB - O P E N AU X - C O M CB B - N E G ES T O P N O CB 2 - D I 0 4 DO 6 1 S H U N T T R I P - C 2 ( D C + ) 2 S H U N T T R I P - C 1 ( D C - ) 3 A U X - C O M ( 1 1 ) 4 A U X - N O ( 1 4 ) 5 A U X - N C ( 1 2 ) 6 7 8 1 S H U N T T R I P - C 2 ( D C + ) 2 S H U N T T R I P - C 1 ( D C - ) 3 A U X - C O M ( 1 1 ) 4 A U X - N O ( 1 4 ) 5 A U X - N C ( 1 2 ) 6 T R I P U N I T P O W E R - F 2 ( D C + ) 7 T R I P U N I T P O W E R - F 1 ( D C - ) 8 ES T O P N O DO - D CB - B N E G DO 6 SH E E T 8 SY M B O L D E S C R I P T I O N BL A D E , S P A D E , R I N G O R S C R E W TE R M I N A L CI R C U I T C O N N E C T E D CI R C U I T N O T C O N N E C T E D EL E C T R I C A L C O N N E C T I O N T O MA C H I N E S T R U C T U R E IN T E R N A L E L E C T R I C A L C O N N E C T I O N TO S U R F A C E O F C O M P O N E N T CO N N E C T O R AT C H W I R E , C A B L E , C O M P O N E N T SP L I C E CI R C U I T G R O U P I N G D E S I G N A T I O N H# AB B R E V RD WH OR YL PK BK GY PU BR GN BU CO L O R RE D WH I T E OR A N G E YE L L O W PIN K BL A C K GR A Y PU R P L E BR O W N GR E E N BL U E / Do n o t o p e r a t e o r w o r k o n t h i s p r o d u c t u n l e s s y o u h a v e re a d a n d u n d e r s t o o d t h e i n s t r u c t i o n a n d w a r n i n g s i n t h e re l e v a n t O p e r a t i o n a n d M a i n t e n a n c e M a n u a l s a n d re l e v a n t s e r v i c e l i t e r a t u r e . F a i l u r e t o f o l l o w t h e i n s t r u c - ti o n s o r h e e d t h e w a r n i n g s c o u l d r e s u l t i n i n j u r y o r de a t h . P r o p e r c a r e i s y o u r r e s p o n s i b i l i t y . OT H E R C O L O R D E S C R I P T I O N S HIG H W A Y S Co m p o n e n t s a r e s h o w n i n s t a l l e d o n a f u l l y o p e r a b l e g e n e r a t o r s e t i n a n o n p o w e r e d s t a t e . Re f e r t o t h e a p p r o p r i a t e S e r v i c e M a n u a l f o r T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , S p e c i f i c a t i o n s a n d S y s t e m s O p e r a t i o n s . SC H E M A T I C P A R T N U M B E R : 6 3 4 - 4 1 2 3 , C H A N G E : 0 0 , V E R S I O N : - TH I S S C H E M A T I C I S F O R T H E C 2 7 A N D C 3 2 G E N E R A T O R S E T W I T H GC C P 1 . 2 A N D G C C P 1 . 3 C O N T R O L L E R E L E C T R I C A L S Y S T E M ME D I A N U M B E R : M 0 1 6 9 9 9 8 - 0 1 Re f e r t o t h e P a r t s M a n u a l u s i n g a s p e c i f i c s e r i a l n u m b e r p r e f i x i n S I S b e f o r e o r d e r i n g p a r t s f r o m t h i s s c h e m a t i c . M0169998-01 42 Page, (Dimensions: 56 inches x 35 inches) ABCDEF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 GHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 11 5 - A 1 3 R D - 1 4 22 9 A - A 5 G Y - 1 6 22 9 A - A 6 G Y - 1 6 22 9 A - A 7 G Y - 1 6 22 9 A - A 8 G Y - 1 4 33 8 - A 1 9 W H - 1 8 CB L - A 3 : Y 7 9 7 - A 2 Y L - 1 8 CB L - A 3 : Y 7 9 8 - A 1 G N - 1 8 CB L - A 3 : Y 7 9 9 - A 3 C U - 1 8 22 9 A - A 9 G Y - 1 4 89 3 - A 3 4 O R - 1 8 89 2 - A 3 5 B R - 1 8 22 9 C - A 6 4 W H - 1 8 A7 7 4 - A 1 W H - 1 8 87 9 - A 5 0 W H - 1 8 11 5 - A 1 0 R D - 1 6 11 5 - A 1 1 R D - 1 6 11 8 - A 2 0 R D - 1 6 11 8 - A 2 2 R D - 1 6 1 1 8 - A 2 3 R D - 1 4 87 9 - A 2 4 W H - 1 8 A7 7 5 - A 2 6 W H - 1 6 A7 7 5 - A 2 5 W H - 1 6 22 9 A - A 4 G Y - 1 6 CB L - A 6 : G 4 0 6 - A 3 C U - 1 8 CB L - A 6 : G 4 0 5 - A 2 B K - 1 8 CB L - A 6 : G 4 0 4 - A 1 R D - 1 8 229A-A28 GY-18 229A-A27 GY-18 101-A16 RD-18 N756-A48 WH-18 892-A63 BR-18 CBL-A5:Y797-A2 YL-18 Y797-A38 YL-18 CBL-A5:Y798-A1 GN-18 CBL-A5:Y799-A3 CU-18 Y799-A39 WH-18 Y798-A40 GN-18 CBL-A7:Y797-A2 YL-18 CBL-A7:Y798-A1 GN-18 CBL-A7:Y799-A3 CU-18 893-A62 OR-18 893-A37 OR-18 893-A37 OR-18 892-A36 BR-18 892-A36 BR-18 229A-A14 GY-18 229A-A15 GY-18 101-A18 RD-16 229A-A27 GY-18 101-A17 RD-16 CBL-A4:Y797-A2 YL-18 CBL-A4:Y798-A1 GN-18 CBL-A4:Y799-A3 CU-18 CBL-A2:Y797-A2 YL-18 CBL-A2:Y798-A1 GN-18 CBL-A2:Y799-A3 CU-18 A775-A43 WH-18 229C-A45 WH-18 101-A53 RD-16 893-A34 OR-18 E486-VC13 WH-16 E487-VC14 WH-16 E488-VC15 WH-16 F409-VC16 WH-16 892-A35 BR-18 229A-A14 GY-18 101-A17 RD-16 CBL-A4:Y797-A2 YL-18 CBL-A4:Y798-A1 GN-18 CBL-A4:Y799-A3 CU-18 A775-A44 WH-18 A775-A44 WH-18 A774-A46 WH-18 229B-A47 WH-18 N756-A48 WH-18 879-A54 WH-16 R956-A55 WH-18 R957-A61 WH-18 879-A50 WH-18 CBL-A1:G407-A2 BK-18 CBL-A1:G408-A1 RD-18 CBL-A1:G409-A4 CU-18 Y973-A30 WH-18 CBL-A1:A380-A3 GY-18 CBL-A6:G404-A1 RD-18 CBL-A6:G405-A2 BK-18 CBL-A6:G406-A3 CU-18 CB L - D B 2 : A 3 8 0 - D B 3 R E F G Y - 1 8 CB L - D B 2 : G 4 0 7 - D B 2 R E F B K - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : G 4 0 9 - D B 4 R E F C U - 1 8 CB L - D B 2 : G 4 0 9 - D B 4 R E F C U - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : G 4 0 9 - D B 4 R E F C U - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : G 4 0 8 - D B 1 R E F R D - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : G 4 0 7 - D B 2 R E F B K - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : A 3 8 0 - D B 3 R E F G Y - 1 8 G4 0 7 - D C 5 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 8 - D C 4 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 9 - D C 3 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 7 - D C 6 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 8 - D C 7 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 9 - D C 3 R E F W H - 1 8 10 4 - D C 2 R E F R D - 1 6 22 9 A - D C 1 R E F G Y - 1 6 10 4 - D B 1 R E F R D - 1 6 22 9 A - D B 2 R E F G Y - 1 6 104-DA3 RD-16 104-DA4 RD-16 229A-DA5 GY-16 229A-DA6 GY-16 CBL-DA3:G408-DA1 RD-18 CBL-DA3:G407-DA2 BK-18 CBL-DA3:G409-DA4 CU-18 CBL-DA1:G408-DA1 RD-18 CBL-DA1:G407-DA2 BK-18 CBL-DA1:G409-DA4 CU-18 CBL-DA1:A380-DA3 GY-18 CBL-DA3:A380-DA3 GY-18 879-A49 WH-18 Y985-A59 WH-18 Y986-A60 WH-18 104-DA3 RD-16 104-DA4 RD-16 229A-DA5 GY-16 229A-DA6 GY-16 104-DA1 RD-16 229A-DA2 GY-16 E498-VC6 WH-16 F448-VC12 WH-16 F452-VC10 WH-16 F450-VC11 WH-16 CBL-DA2:G409-DA4 CU-18 CBL-DA2:G408-DA1 RD-18 CBL-DA2:G407-DA2 BK-18 CBL-DA1:G407-DA2 BK-18 CBL-DA1:G408-DA1 RD-18 CBL-DA1:G409-DA4 CU-18 CBL-DA1:A380-DA3 GY-18 CBL-DA2:A380-DA3 GY-18 Y987-A31 WH-18 Y988-A32 WH-18 Y989-A33 WH-18 CBL-DA3:G408-DA1 RD-18 CBL-DA3:G407-DA2 BK-18 CBL-DA3:G409-DA4 CU-18 CBL-DA2:G409-DA4 CU-18 CBL-DA2:G407-DA2 BK-18 CBL-DA2:G408-DA1 RD-18 CBL-DA3:A380-DA3 GY-18 CBL-DA2:A380-DA3 GY-18 10 4 - P A 1 W H - 1 8 22 9 A - P A 4 W H - 1 8 87 9 - P A 5 W H - 1 8 Y7 9 7 - P A 6 Y L - 1 8 Y7 9 8 - P A 7 G N - 1 8 10 4 - P A 2 W H - 1 8 10 4 - P A 3 W H - 1 8 G4 0 7 - D C 6 W H - 1 8 G4 0 8 - D C 7 W H - 1 8 G4 0 9 - D C 8 W H - 1 8 10 4 - D C 2 R D - 1 6 22 9 A - D C 1 G Y - 1 6 G4 0 7 - D C 5 W H - 1 8 G4 0 8 - D C 4 W H - 1 8 G4 0 9 - D C 3 W H - 1 8 CB L - D B 2 : G 4 0 7 - D B 2 B K - 1 8 CB L - D B 2 : G 4 0 8 - D B 1 R D - 1 8 CB L - D B 2 : G 4 0 9 - D B 4 C U - 1 8 10 4 - D B 1 R D - 1 6 22 9 A - D B 2 G Y - 1 6 CB L - D B 2 : A 3 8 0 - D B 3 G Y - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : G 4 0 7 - D B 2 B K - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : G 4 0 8 - D B 1 R D - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : G 4 0 9 - D B 4 C U - 1 8 CB L - D B 1 : A 3 8 0 - D B 3 G Y - 1 8 879-A58 WH-18 879-A58 WH-18 A774-A1 WH-18 A775-A26 WH-16 A775-A25 WH-16 879-PA5 WH-18 229B-A42 WH-18 229D-VW3 GY-18 101-A41 RD-16 A775-A43 WH-18 A774-A46 WH-18 229B-A47 WH-18 879-A49 WH-18 879-A54 WH-16 R956-A55 WH-18 104-A56 RD-16 229A-A57 GY-18 Y985-A59 WH-18 Y986-A60 WH-18 200-VC3 GN-YL-14 879-A24 WH-18 Y973-A30 WH-18 101-A3 RD-14 101-A3 RD-14 229A-A15 GY-18 101-A18 RD-16 101-A41 RD-16 104-A52 RD-14 101-A53 RD-16 101-VC4 RD-16 229A-VC2 GY-16 229A-A29 GY-16 229A-A8 GY-14 229A-A51 GY-18 229A-PA4 WH-18 229A-VW2 GY-16 229A-TL14 GY-16 115-A13 RD-14 338-A19 WH-18 229C-A64 WH-18 118-A23 RD-14 R957-A2 WH-18 104-PA1 WH-18 229B-A42 WH-18 101-VW1 RD-16 101-TL13 RD-16 K4 0 0 - T 1 W H - 1 8 K4 0 1 - T 2 W H - 1 8 K4 0 3 - T 4 W H - 1 8 K4 0 4 - T 5 W H - 1 8 K4 0 2 - T 7 W H - 1 8 K4 0 6 - T 8 W H - 1 8 K4 0 7 - T 9 W H - 1 8 K4 0 9 - T 1 1 W H - 1 8 K4 1 0 - T 1 2 W H - 1 8 K4 0 8 - T 1 4 W H - 1 8 K4 1 2 - T 1 5 W H - 1 8 K4 1 3 - T 1 6 W H - 1 8 K4 1 5 - T 1 8 W H - 1 8 K4 1 6 - T 1 9 W H - 1 8 K4 1 4 - T 2 1 W H - 1 8 K4 1 8 - T 2 2 W H - 1 8 K4 2 1 - T 2 4 W H - 1 8 K4 2 2 - T 2 7 W H - 1 8 K4 1 9 - T 2 6 W H - 1 8 K4 2 0 - T 2 8 W H - 1 8 K4 0 2 - T 3 W H - 1 8 K4 0 5 - T 6 W H - 1 8 K4 0 8 - T 1 0 W H - 1 8 K4 1 1 - T 1 3 W H - 1 8 K4 1 4 - T 1 7 W H - 1 8 K4 1 7 - T 2 0 W H - 1 8 K4 1 9 - T 2 3 W H - 1 8 K4 2 2 - T 2 5 W H - 1 8 G4 0 7 - D C 5 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 8 - D C 4 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 9 - D C 3 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 7 - D C 6 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 8 - D C 7 R E F W H - 1 8 G4 0 7 - D C 8 R E F W H - 1 8 10 4 - D C 2 R E F R D - 1 6 22 9 A - D C 1 R E F G Y - 1 6 F449-VC9 WH-16 E498-VC6 WH-16 F453-VC8 WH-16 F451-VC7 WH-16 F448-VC12 WH-16 F452-VC10 WH-16 F450-VC11 WH-16 E498-VC17 GN-YL-14 CBL-A3:Y797-A2 YL-18 CBL-A3:Y798-A1 GN-18 CBL-A3:Y799-A3 CU-18 R957-A2 WH-18 229A-A51 GY-18 Y797-PA6 YL-18 Y798-PA7 GN-18 Y797-TL19 YL-18 Y798-TL20 GN-18 CBL-A2:Y797-A2 YL-18 CBL-A2:Y798-A1 GN-18 CBL-A2:Y799-A3 CU-18 229C-A45 WH-18 229A-A57 GY-18 R957-A61 WH-18 Y943-VC1 WH-16 229A-A29 GY-16 Y987-A31 WH-18 Y988-A32 WH-18 Y989-A33 WH-18 104-A52 RD-14 104-A56 RD-16 104-DA1 RD-16 229A-DA2 GY-16 229D-VW3 GY-18 229A-A9 GY-14 104-DB1 RD-16 229A-DB2 GY-16 104-DC2 RD-16 229A-DC1 GY-16 104-DC2 1 RD-16 229A-DC1 1 GY-16 101-VW1 RD-16 229A-VW2 GY-16 101-VC4 RD-16 229A-VC2 GY-16 200-VC3 GN-YL-14 Y943-VC1 WH-16 E486-VC13 WH-16 E487-VC14 WH-16 E488-VC15 WH-16 F409-VC16 WH-16 E498-VC17 GN-YL-14 20 0 - V C 5 G N - Y L - 1 4 Y7 9 9 C U Y7 9 8 G N Y7 9 7 Y L A7 7 5 W H 87 9 W H 10 1 R D 10 1 R D 22 9 C W H A7 7 4 W H 87 9 W H 57 9 W H A7 7 5 W H A7 7 5 W H A7 7 5 W H 11 5 R D 22 9 C W H A7 7 4 W H 87 9 W H 22 9 G Y A7 7 5 W H A7 7 5 W H 11 5 R D 22 9 C W H A7 7 4 W H 87 9 W H 87 9 W H 22 9 G Y 11 5 - R D Y7 9 8 G N Y7 9 9 C U Y7 9 7 Y L N8 7 3 C U F7 1 2 G N F7 1 1 Y L A7 7 4 22 9 N8 7 3 C U F7 1 2 G N F7 1 1 Y L N8 7 3 Y L F7 1 2 G N F7 1 1 Y L 22 9 A - T L 4 G Y - 1 8 Y9 9 3 - T L 5 W H - 2 0 10 1 - T L 2 1 R D - 1 8 15 0 0 - T L 7 Y L - 1 8 15 0 1 - T L 8 O R - 1 8 15 0 2 - T L 9 W H - 1 8 15 0 3 - T L 1 0 G N - 1 8 89 3 - T L 1 1 O R - 1 8 89 3 - T L 1 1 O R - 1 8 89 2 - T L 1 2 B R - 1 8 89 2 - T L 1 2 B R - 1 8 15 1 5 - T L 1 5 Y L - 1 8 15 1 6 - T L 1 6 O R - 1 8 15 1 7 - T L 1 7 W H - 1 8 15 1 8 - T L 1 8 G N - 1 8 Y7 9 8 - T L 2 0 G N - 1 8 Y7 9 8 - T L 2 0 G N - 1 8 Y7 9 7 - T L 1 9 Y L - 1 8 Y7 9 7 - T L 1 9 Y L - 1 8 10 1 - T L 2 2 W H - 1 8 22 9 A - T L 1 G Y - 1 8 10 1 - T L 2 R D - 1 8 10 1 - T L 3 R D - 1 8 N9 7 3 - T L 6 B R - 1 8 N9 7 3 - T L 6 B R - 1 8 22 9 A - T L 4 G Y - 1 8 22 9 A - T L 1 G Y - 1 8 10 1 - T L 2 R D - 1 8 15 0 0 - T L 7 Y L - 1 8 15 0 1 - T L 8 O R - 1 8 15 0 2 - T L 9 W H - 1 8 15 0 3 - T L 1 0 G N - 1 8 10 1 - T L 2 1 R D - 1 8 10 1 - T L 2 2 W H - 1 8 Y9 9 3 - T L 5 W H - 2 0 15 1 5 - T L 1 5 Y L - 1 8 15 1 6 - T L 1 6 O R - 1 8 15 1 7 - T L 1 7 W H - 1 8 15 1 8 - T L 1 8 G N - 1 8 E4 9 4 - M T 1 W H - 1 6 E4 9 8 - M T 2 W H - 1 6 E4 9 5 - M T 3 W H - 1 6 E4 9 6 - M T 5 W H - 1 6 E4 9 8 - M T 4 W H - 1 6 E4 9 8 - M T 6 W H - 1 6 E4 9 5 - M T 3 W H - 1 6 E4 9 8 - M T 4 W H - 1 6 E4 9 6 - M T 5 W H - 1 6 E4 9 8 - M T 6 W H - 1 6 E4 9 4 - M T 1 W H - 1 6 E4 9 8 - M T 2 W H - 1 6 101-TL13 RD-16 229A-TL14 GY-16 JW H - L 1 - J 1 G Y - 8 JW H - L 2 - J 2 G Y - 8 JW H - G N D - J 5 G N - Y L - 8 AC 1 1 6 - J V 1 G Y - 8 AC 1 1 5 - J V 2 G Y - 8 JW H - G N D - J 5 G N - Y L - 8 104-MY5 RD-18 104-MY5 RD-18 N759-MY4 WH-18 N759-MY4 WH-18 N759-MY3 WH-18 N759-MY3 WH-18 R956-MY1 WH-18 229A-MY2 GY-18 22 9 - K G 6 G Y - 1 8 Y9 8 8 - K G 5 G Y - 1 8 CB L - K G 1 : P 7 3 7 - K G 1 R D - 1 8 CB L - K G 1 : P 7 3 8 - K G 2 B K - 1 8 CB L - K G 1 : P 5 5 0 - K G 3 G Y - 1 8 CB L - K G 1 : P 5 4 3 - K G 4 C U - 1 8 22 9 - B N 9 W H - 1 6 BC L 2 - B N 4 B K - 1 4 BC L 1 - B N 3 B K - 1 4 10 1 - B N 1 R D - 1 6 Y9 4 3 - B N 2 W H - 1 6 AC 1 1 7 - B N 5 B K - 1 4 AC 1 1 8 - B N 6 B K - 1 4 AC118-BN8 BK-14 AC117-BN7 BK-14 BC G N D - K C 3 G N - Y L - 1 4 20 2 - K C 5 G Y - 1 8 G4 8 8 - K C 6 G Y - 1 8 BC L 1 - K C 1 B K - 1 4 BC L 2 - K C 2 B K - 1 4 99 8 38 7 11 5 11 9 15 0 63 4 - 4 1 2 3 6 2 6 - 0 6 6 1 4 9 1 - 3 9 6 0 63 4 - 5 2 5 6 63 4 - 5 2 5 0 63 4 - 5 2 5 8 56 7 - 8 9 3 3 56 6 - 2 8 9 9 56 6 - 2 9 0 2 56 6 - 2 8 9 9 56 7 - 8 9 3 4 56 6 - 2 8 9 9 56 6 - 2 9 0 3 56 6 - 2 9 0 3 56 7 - 8 9 3 8 56 7 - 8 9 3 8 56 7 - 8 9 3 9 56 6 - 2 9 0 2 56 7 - 8 9 4 0 56 6 - 2 9 0 3 57 3 - 8 0 1 9 57 3 - 8 0 2 0 57 3 - 9 0 1 3 57 3 - 9 0 1 2 50 0 - 8 7 8 9 49 8 - 1 4 4 4 42 2 - 9 0 0 1 52 1 - 1 4 9 8 56 5 - 1 5 4 7 56 5 - 1 4 5 6 56 9 - 6 7 4 2 63 5 - 7 3 3 5 63 6 - 1 5 1 1 63 5 - 7 3 3 9 63 6 - 1 5 1 3 63 7 - 4 1 4 9 63 5 - 7 3 4 0 63 7 - 4 1 5 0 63 7 - 4 1 4 9 49 8 - 1 3 3 2 49 8 - 1 3 3 1 49 9 - 2 9 6 7 49 9 - 2 9 6 5 49 9 - 2 9 6 8 49 9 - 2 9 6 6 52 1 - 1 5 0 8 52 1 - 1 5 0 7 62 9 - 2 8 7 7 62 9 - 3 9 3 4 50 0 - 6 2 4 4 50 0 - 6 2 4 3 49 1 - 3 9 9 7 49 1 - 3 9 9 6 49 8 - 1 4 5 8 49 8 - 1 4 5 6 62 8 - 8 1 5 9 62 9 - 2 8 5 6 64 0 - 6 2 8 3 64 0 - 6 2 8 4 49 8 - 1 3 1 7 49 8 - 1 3 1 6 49 8 - 1 3 2 0 49 8 - 1 3 1 9 49 7 - 9 9 9 3 49 7 - 9 9 9 2 49 8 - 0 0 0 8 49 8 - 0 0 0 7 55 7 - 8 2 1 2 55 7 - 8 2 1 3 56 5 - 6 7 1 3 56 0 - 0 4 7 1 49 7 - 9 9 9 7 49 7 - 9 9 9 4 49 8 - 1 3 2 1 49 8 - 1 3 1 8 56 3 - 3 7 7 1 56 3 - 3 7 6 9 64 0 - 6 9 9 7 64 0 - 6 2 8 4 49 4 - 8 2 1 1 49 4 - 8 2 1 0 52 1 - 1 4 9 8 52 0 - 5 1 3 2 52 1 - 1 4 9 7 52 1 - 1 4 9 8 52 0 - 5 1 3 1 52 0 - 5 1 3 2 52 1 - 1 5 0 1 52 1 - 1 5 0 2 52 1 - 1 4 9 9 52 1 - 1 5 0 0 49 1 - 4 0 1 5 49 1 - 4 0 1 4 64 5 - 3 4 9 6 62 9 - 3 8 8 9 63 9 - 9 9 6 8 49 1 - 4 0 1 3 49 1 - 4 0 1 2 61 3 - 2 5 5 2 64 5 - 3 4 9 5 63 9 - 9 9 6 7 63 9 - 9 9 6 8 64 5 - 3 5 9 1 64 5 - 3 5 8 8 63 7 - 1 3 9 0 63 7 - 1 3 8 9 63 7 - 2 3 4 6 63 7 - 4 8 3 1 63 7 - 4 8 3 0 63 7 - 4 8 3 3 54 2 - 9 1 1 6 63 9 - 9 9 6 8 62 9 - 3 8 4 7 52 2 - 1 0 2 0 63 7 - 2 1 0 5 63 6 - 1 5 1 3 64 0 - 0 4 6 4 64 0 - 0 4 6 3 63 4 - 5 2 6 1 63 4 - 5 2 6 0 64 2 - 6 8 0 0 62 9 - 3 8 4 9 62 9 - 3 8 4 7 56 5 - 3 1 6 0 56 5 - 3 1 5 8 56 5 - 3 1 6 1 56 5 - 3 1 6 0 62 9 - 3 8 4 6 54 9 - 6 9 2 6 54 9 - 6 9 2 5 62 0 - 4 8 9 8 62 9 - 3 5 4 2 58 1 - 5 4 2 9 62 9 - 3 5 4 4 63 7 - 4 8 3 2 63 9 - 9 9 7 6 17 4 - 3 0 1 6 17 4 - 3 0 1 6 62 9 - 3 3 7 5 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 16 9 - 8 6 7 0 16 9 - 8 6 7 0 16 9 - 8 6 7 0 3E - 3 3 7 0 17 4 - 0 5 0 2 17 4 - 0 5 0 2 23 4 - 1 8 5 7 9X - 1 3 3 9 9X - 1 3 4 3 9X - 1 3 3 9 8T - 9 8 3 4 8T - 9 8 3 4 8T - 9 8 3 4 8T - 9 8 3 4 9W - 1 9 5 1 60 7 - 9 8 3 0 48 3 - 2 7 6 3 8T - 8 7 3 6 3E - 5 2 3 9 16 0 - 7 6 8 9 16 0 - 7 6 8 9 9X - 1 3 4 3 13 3 - 0 9 7 0 13 3 - 0 9 7 0 572 - 0 7 7 3 57 2 - 0 7 7 3 13 4 - 2 5 4 0 46 6 - 8 3 0 0 644-0869 63 9 - 9 9 7 6 62 9 - 3 5 4 2 571-7288 9W-1951 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 9X - 1 3 4 3 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 314-9086 324-8967 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 155-2273 453 - 8 1 7 9 169-8670 37 1 - 5 0 2 9 16 9 - 8 6 7 0 3E - 3 3 7 0 169-8670 3E-3370 16 9 - 8 6 7 0 3E - 3 3 7 0 3E-3370 60 7 - 9 8 3 0 57 2 - 0 7 7 4 51 9 - 8 7 5 6 3E - 3 3 7 0 16 9 - 8 6 7 0 9X - 1 3 3 9 324-8967 3E-3364 57 2 - 0 7 7 4 51 9 - 8 7 5 6 3E - 3 3 7 0 169-8670 3E-3370 16 9 - 8 6 7 0 49 4 - 6 4 7 2 64 4 - 0 8 6 9 33 9 - 5 9 9 6 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 48 3 - 2 7 6 3 48 3 - 2 7 6 2 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 35 0 - 3 4 5 9 30 1 - 8 3 1 3 3E - 3 3 8 2 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 37 1 - 5 0 2 9 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 301-8313 61 2 - 9 4 6 4 24 4 - 9 6 7 5 44 3 - 0 5 1 2 44 3 - 0 5 1 2 15 5 - 2 2 6 9 24 7 - 8 1 9 5 58 3 - 6 3 7 4 33 6 - 9 1 8 5 31 4 - 9 0 9 8 31 4 - 9 0 9 8 31 4 - 9 0 8 6 31 4 - 9 0 8 6 44 3 - 0 5 1 2 44 3 - 0 5 1 2 33 1 - 3 5 8 2 17 6 - 2 9 4 6 26 9 - 8 2 2 2 24 4 - 9 6 7 5 ID E N T D I A G R A M D I A G R A M _ 1 D I A G R A M _ 2 H A R N E S S H A R N E S S D E S C R I P T I O N S H E E T L O C A T I O N G R O U P G R O U P D E S C R I P T I O N U S A G E PA R T PA R T NO T E A N O T E B N O T E B N U M B E R NU M B E R A X H A R N E S S A S ( M A I N H A R N E S S G C C P ) 2 P A N E L G P GC C P 1 . 3 C O N T R O L P A N E L 2 P A N E L G P GC C P 1 . 2 C O N T R O L P A N E L AC X H A R N E S S A S ( S E C O N D A R Y ) 1 0 C - 1 7 1 W I R I N G G P OP E N D E L T A P T C O N N E C T I O N X 10 J - 1 6 7 W I R I N G G P WY E C O N N E C T E D - S I N G E P T X 10 C - 1 7 7 W I R I N G G P WY E C O N N E C T E D - T H R E E P T AE X H A R N E S S A S ( P R I M A R Y ) 1 0 C - 1 7 1 W I R I N G G P OP E N D E L T A P T C O N N E C T I O N X 10 C - 1 7 6 W I R I N G G P WY E C O N N E C T E D - T H R E E P T X 10 C - 1 7 6 W I R I N G G P WY E C O N N E C T E D - T H R E E P T AF X H A R N E S S A S ( M V - B u s ) 1 0 C - 1 7 1 W I R I N G G P OP E N D E L T A P T C O N N E C T I O N AH X H A R N E S S A S ( M V - B U S ) 1 0 J - 1 6 4 W I R I N G G P WY E C O N N E C T E D - S I N G L E P T AG X H A R N E S S A S ( M V - B u s ) 1 0 C - 1 7 7 W I R I N G G P WY E C O N N E C T E D - T H R E E P T AK X H A R N E S S A S 10 B - 1 7 9 W I R I N G G P BR E A K E R C O N N E C T I O N F R O M P T AM X H A R N E S S A S 10 B - 1 7 4 W I R I N G G P BR E A K E R C O N N E C T I O N F R O M P T AV X M E D V O L T B U S 1 0 D - 1 6 8 W I R I N G G P ( M E D V O L T P T ) M E D I U M V O L T A G E - 3 3 0 0 V / 4 1 6 0 V BC X H A R N E S S A S CO N N E C T I O N G P - E L E C T R I C A L ( B A T T E R Y C H A R G E R ) E N C L O S U R E - B A T T E R Y C H A R G E R CT X H A R N E S S A S . ( M V D I F F C T S ) 1 0 F - 1 7 1 W I R I N G G P ( M V D I F F C T S ) D I F F C T W I R I N G X 10 F - 1 7 1 W I R I N G G P ( M V D U A L D I F F C T S ) D U A L D I F F C T W I R I N G DA X H A R N E S S A S ( M E D - V G C C P A N N U N C I A T O R ) 2 K - 1 2 W I R I N G G P ( M E D - V G C C P A N N U N C I A T O R ) A N N U N C I A T O R M O D U L E S W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L DB X H A R N E S S A S ( D S E N E T E X P - L O N G ) 2 E - 9 W I R I N G G P ( G C C P R T D M O D U L E ) R T D E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L 2 D - 1 2 W I R I N G G P ( M E D - V G C C P I O W / O R T D ) D I O E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E S W I T H O U T R T D O P T I O N ( G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L ) DC X H A R N E S S A S ( D S E N E T E X P - S H O R T ) 2 B - 1 1 W I R I N G G P ( M E D - V G C C P I O W I T H R T D ) D I O E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E S W I T H R T D O P T I O N ( G C C P C O N T R O L P A NE L ) 2 B - 1 2 W I R I N G G P ( M E D - V G C C P I O W / O R T D ) D I O E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E S W I T H O U T R T D O P T I O N ( G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L ) EE X C 2 7 / C 3 2 E N G I N E I N T E R F A C E P K G M O U N T 7 E - 1 1 9 W I R I N G G P - E N G I N E ( C 3 2 / C 2 7 E N G I N E I N T E R F A C E ) C 2 7 / C 3 2 W I T H P A C K A G E M O U N T E D P A N E L EH X C 2 7 / C 3 2 E N G I N E I N T E R F A C E E X T E R N A L 7 . 5 M 6 H - 9 9 W I R I N G G P - E N G I N E ( R E M O T E P A N E L C 3 2 - 2 7 7 . 5 M ) C 2 7 / C 3 2 W I T H R E M O T E M O U N T E D P A N E L X C 2 7 / C 3 2 E N G I N E I N T E R F A C E E X T E R N A L 2 0 M WI R I N G G P - E N G I N E ( R E M O T E P A N E L C 3 2 - 2 7 2 0 M ) C 2 7 / C 3 2 W I T H R E M O T E M O U N T E D P A N E L X C 2 7 / C 3 2 E N G I N E I N T E R F A C E E X T E R N A L WI R I N G G P - E N G I N E ( I C E C 2 7 - C 3 2 ) C 2 7 / C 3 2 W I T H E N C L O S U R E P A C K A G E M O U N T E D P A N E L ES X H A R N E S S A S . ( E N G I N E E - S T O P ) 4 J - 5 W I R I N G G P ( E N G I N E E - S T O P ) E N G I N E M O U N T E D E - S T O P ( U S E D W I T H R E M O T E M O U N T E D P A N E L ) FV X H A R N E S S A S . ( M E D V O L T 2 4 0 0 V P T ) 8 E - 9 9 W I R I N G G P ( M E D I U M V O L T P T - 2 4 0 0 V ) M E D I U M V O L T A G E - 2 4 0 0 V GH X S P A C E H E A T E R ( P A C K A G E M O U N T C O N T R O L S ) 1 0 I - 1 7 7 W I R I N G G P ( S P A C E H T R - P K G M O U N T E D C O N T R O L S ) 2 4 0 V G E N E R A T O R S P A C E H E A T E R O P T I O N GN X G R O U N D W I R E ( P K G M O U N T E D P A N E L T O G N D B A R ) 3 C - 4 3 W I R I N G G P ( P K G M O U N T E D P A N E L T O G N D B A R ) P A C K A G E M O U N T E D C O N T R O L P A N E L X E C S 1 0 0 - P A N E L G R O U N D 2 A - 9 W I R I N G G P - P A N E L G N D C O N T R O L P A N E L T O G N D B A R - A L L O N P K G C O N T R O L P A N E L S J X H A R N E S S A S ( C 3 2 B , 2 4 0 V J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R ) 3 K - 5 W I I R N G G P ( J W H 2 4 0 V , C 3 2 B ) 2 4 0 V J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R W I T H C 3 2 B P A C K A G E JA X H A R N E S S A S . ( 4 8 0 V J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R ) 1 0 G - 1 7 9 W I R I N G G P ( J W H 4 8 0 V ) 3 5 1 2 1 4 0 x , 1 4 2 x , 1 4 4 x 1 B R G X H A R N E S S A S . ( 4 8 0 V J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R ) WI R I N G G P ( J W H 4 8 0 V ) 1 4 6 x , 1 4 8 x , 1 6 2 x , 1 6 4 x , 1 6 6 x 1 B R G , O R 1 6 0 x , 1 6 2 x , 1 6 4 x , 1 6 6 x , 1 8 2 x 2 B R G JH X H A R N E S S A S . ( 2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R ) 1 0 F - 1 7 8 W I R I N G G P ( J W H 2 0 8 - 2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V ) 3 5 1 2 1 4 0 x , 1 4 2 x , 1 4 4 x 1 B R G X H A R N E S S A S . ( 2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R ) W I R I N G G P ( J W H 2 0 8 - 2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V ) C 2 7 / C 3 2 , 1 2 x x / 1 4 x x F R A M E G E N E R A T O R X H A R N E S S A S . ( J W H 2 0 8 - 2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V I C E ) WI R I N G G P ( J W H 2 0 8 - 2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V I C E ) X H A R N E S S A S ( J W H 2 4 0 V I C E ) WI R I N G G P ( J W H 2 4 0 V I C E ) JM X H A R N E S S A S . ( 3 5 1 2 / 3 5 1 6 , 2 7 0 0 F R J W H , 2 0 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V ) 8 G - 1 3 9 W I R I N G G P ( 3 5 1 2 / 3 5 1 6 , 2 7 0 0 F R J W H , 2 0 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V ) 3 5 1 2 / 3 5 1 6 , 2 7 0 0 F R A M E G E N E R A T O R X H A R N E S S A S . ( C 3 2 , 2 7 0 0 F R J W H , 2 0 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V ) WI R I N G G P ( C 3 2 , 2 7 0 0 F R J W H , 2 0 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V ) C 3 2 , 2 7 0 0 F R A M E G E N E R A T O R JU X H A R N E S S A S ( D U A L J W H J U M P E R - I C E ) 5 F - 8 9 W I R I N G G P ( D U A L J W H J U M P E R - I C E ) JV X H A R N E S S A S ( C 3 2 B , 2 4 0 V J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R ) 3 K - 6 W I I R N G G P ( J W H 2 4 0 V , C 3 2 B ) 2 4 0 V J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R W I T H C 3 2 B P A C K A G E JW X H A R N E S S A S . ( J W H 2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V J U M P E R ) 1 0 F - 1 7 9 W I R I N G G P ( J W H O P T I O N 2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V ) P A C K A G E M O U N T E D C O N T R O L P A N E L KC X 13 C O N N E C T I O N G P KG X 13 W I R I N G G P EN C ( K C ) X H A R N E S S A S CO N N E C T I O N G P - E L E C T R I C A L ( B A T T E R Y C H A R G E R ) E N C L O S U R E - B A T T E R Y C H A R G E R EN C ( K G ) X H A R N E S S A S WI R I N G G P ( F U E L T A N K S E N S O R ) E N C L O S U R E - F U E L L E A K S E N S O R EN C ( K R ) X H A R N E S S A S CO N N E C T I O N G P - E L E C T R I C A L ( D C L O U V E R ) E N C L O S U R E - D C L O U V E R EN C ( K S ) X H A R N E S S A S CO N N E C T I O N G P - E L E C T R I C A L ( D I S T R I B U T I O N ) E N C L O S U R E - A C S H O R E P O W E R MC X H A R N E S S A S . ( E M C P 4 . 2 B - 4 . 3 M A S T E R P A C T C I R C U I T B R E A K E R ) 2 E - 2 6 W I R I N G G P ( M A S T E R P A C T 4 2 B - 4 3 C I R C U I T B R E A K E R ) M A S T E R P A C T C I R C U I T B RE A K E R W I T H E M C P 4 . 2 B / E M C P 4 . 3 P A N E L X WI R I N G G P ( M A S T E R P A C T , A B B E M A X C I R C U I T B R E A K E R - G C C P ) M A S T E R P A C T A N D A B B E M A X C I R C U I T B R E A K E R W I T H G C C P P A N E L MD X M V 3 3 0 0 - 4 1 6 0 V ( L S ) ( C D V R O N L Y ) 7 H - 1 3 W I R I N G G P - G C C P M V C D V R B U S ME X H A R N E S S A S . ( P , R , L F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R S ) 2 C - 2 8 W I R I N G G P ( P - R - L F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R ) P / R / L - F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R W I T H E M C P 4. 2 B / E M C P 4 . 3 P A N E L X H A R N E S S A S . ( I C E C B P - R - L F R A M E ) WI R I N G G P ( P - R - L F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R - G C C P ) P / R / L - F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R S W I T H G C C P P A N E L MT X H A R N E S S A S ( M E D - V G C C P M V C D V R ) 3 E - 1 2 W I R I N G G P ( M E D - V G C C P M V C D V R ) M V C D V R S E N S I N G W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L MY X H A R N E S S A S ( R M T P N L C B I N T F C G C C P ) 3 C - 1 0 W I R I N G G P ( R M T P N L C B I N T F C G C C P ) E X T E R N A L C I R C U I T B R E A K E R I N T E R F A C E O P T I O N W I T H G C C P CO N T R O L P A N E L PA X H A R N E S S A S ( P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S ) 2 A - 8 W I R I N G G P ( N A ) ( P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S ) P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S M O D U L E W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L I N N A R E G I ON X WI R I N G G P ( R O W ) ( P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S ) P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S M O D U L E W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L O U T S I D E N A R E G I O N HA R N E S S A S ( P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S , E N C L ) WI R I N G G P ( N A ) ( E N C L P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S ) P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S M O D U L E W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L E N C L O S E D P A C K A G E I N N A R E G I O N WI R I N G G P ( R O W ) ( E N C L P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S ) P L 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S M O D U L E W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L E N C L O S E D P A C K A G E O U T S I D E N A R E G I O N RD X I C E C A N 1 - C D V R I N T F C 6 G - 1 6 W I R I N G G P - G C C P M V C D V R - B U S M V C D V R S E N S I N G W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L X 7 D - 1 4 W I R I N G G P - E C S L V C D V R - B U S X WI R I N G G P ( C D V R - I C E ) T X H A R N E S S A S ( R T D A D A P T O R ) 2 F - 4 W I R I N G G P ( G C C P R T D M O D U L E ) R T D E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L TL X H A R N E S S A S ( P L E T E L E M A T I C S ) 3 L - 1 6 W I R I N G G P ( P L E M E D - V G C C P ) P L E T E L E M A T I C S M O D U L E W I T H G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L VC X H A R N E S S A S ( V R P N L T O G C C P P N L ) 2 C - 3 W I R I N G G P ( M E D - V G C C P V R P A N E L 6 0 0 V ) G C C P V O L T A G E R E G U L A T O R P A N E L ( 6 0 0 V A P P L I C A T I O N S ) WI R I N G G P ( M E D - V G C C P V R P A N E L 4 8 0 V ) G C C P V O L T A G E R E G U L A T O R P A N E L ( 4 8 0 V A N D L O W E R A P P L I C A T I O N S ) VD X G E N V O L T A G E S E N S I N G - L V , C D V R 6 K - 1 6 W I R I N G G P - E C S - L V C D V R - B U S VG X H A R N E S S A S . ( L V S E N S I N G ) 10 K - 1 7 8 W I R I N G G P ( B U S L V 1 2 0 0 - 1 4 0 0 O D ) M O D U L A R C O N T R O L S ( D I E S E L , G A S , I V R , C D V R ) X WI R I N G G P ( B U S L V 1 4 0 0 C D - 1 8 0 0 ) X H A R N E S S A S . ( L V S E N S I N G ) 5 L - 1 1 W I R I N G G P - E C S - L V I V R , C D V R S E N S I N G L V C D V R S E N S I N G VN X G R O U N D W I R E ( V R P A N E L D I N R A I L T O G R O U N D S T U D ) 1 0 J - 1 7 5 M O U N T I N G G P ( V R P A N E L W I T H R E M O T E M O U N T E D E M C P ) L V / M V W I T H R E M O T E M O U N T E D E M C P O P T I O N VU X D C - D C C O N V E R T E R - C B 2 I - 5 W I R I N G G P - E C S 2 4 V D C C O N V - P W R 2 4 V D C S U P P L Y F O R T R I P U N I T VV X 2 4 V D C R E G U L A T O R - D U A L C B 2 J - 5 W I R I N G G P - C B 2 4 V D C C O N V 2 4 V D C S U P P L Y O U T P U T W I R I N G F O R T R I P U N I T VW X H A R N E S S A S ( F U E L S N S R P S P L Y M E D - V ) 2 I - 2 W I R I N G G P ( F U E L S N S R P S P L Y M E D - V ) 5 V D C F U E L S E N S O R P O W E R S U P P L Y W I T H G C C P P A N E L I N E N C L OS E D P A C K A G E ABCDEFGHIJKL CA N S C R CA N - CA N + CA N - CA N + ES T O P B ES T O P A DIG - R T N SF - E S T O P RM - S T O P B-P O S - 1 B- N E G - 1 ES T O P - N O AU X 1 2 0 A CD V R PL E T E L E M A T I C S MO D U L E O P T I O N ES T O P NC NC NO CA N C O M M U N I C A T I O N S C I R C U I T EF - C 7 R E F 12 0 O H M T E R M I N A T I N G RE S I S T O R VR P A N E L CO N T R O L P A N E L ED U C A N S C R ED U C A N - ED U C A N + DS E 6 3 1 0 / D S E 6 3 2 0 MO D U L E O P T I O N PL 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S EN G I N E I N T E R F A C E H A R N E S S RE S I S T O R 12 0 O H M T E R M I N A T I N G EF - C 7 R E F CA N - CA N + CA N S H I E L D DIG I T A L R E T U R N E-S T O P BA T T E R Y + BA T T E R Y + BA T T E R Y + BA T T E R Y + BA T T E R Y + KE Y S T A R T S W I T C H EC M EC M EN G I N E W I R I N G EM E R G E N C Y S T O P C I R C U I T DS E 6 3 1 0 / D S E 6 3 2 0 EM E R G E N C Y S T O P CO N T R O L P A N E L M O U N T E D E - S T O P S W I T C H FU S E : 9 W - 1 4 4 6 (JU M P E R B E T W E E N T E R M I N A L S EST O P - A A N D E S T O P - B I S R E M O V E D WH E N A N E N G I N E / E N C L O S U R E E-S T O P S W I T C H I S C O N N E C T E D ) EN G / E N C L E S T O P N C EN G / E N C L E S T O P N C EN G / E N C L E S T O P N O EN G S H U T D O W N - 1 ( H A R D E - S T O P ) EM C P B + EM C P B + DIG I T A L R E T U R N SH U T D O W N - D BA T T E R Y - CO N N E C T I O N T O CB S H U N T T R I P C O I L SE R V I C E CO N N E C T O R SE R V I C E C O N N E C T O R NO T E G (C O N N E C T I O N P R E S E N T IN P A C K A G E M O U N T E D PA N E L O P T I O N S ) ES T O P NC NC NO EN G I N E M O U N T E D E - S T O P S W I T C H (C O N N E C T I O N S P R E S E N T I N R E M O T E MO U N T E D P A N E L O P T I O N S ) 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 A A B B C C D D E E F F G G H H I I J J K K L L ES T O P A N D C A N C O M M U N I C A T I O N S C I R C U I T S ABC VD - C 2 1 R E F ABC RD - C 2 R E F ABC RD - C 1 R E F ABC A-C 3 R E F ABC EF - C 5 R E F ABC EF - C 4 R E F ABC VD - C 1 4 R E F 123 EE - C 1 R E F 1 3123191715262527 A- C 1 R E F 1 4 812 15 17 1920 23 25 EE - C 1 R E F 353638 EF - C 1 4 R E F 1 31231917152625 EE - C 5 R E F 1 4 812 15 17 1920 23 25 EF - C 1 4 R E F 353638 EE - C 5 R E F 353638 A- C 2 R E F CFG 232425 3 4 YLGNCU CU CU GN GN YL YL PA - C 1 R E F A1B1 TL - C 1 R E F 4 5 GNYL YL YL GN GN CU CU EF - C 1 3 R E F CFG CUGNYL CU GNYL ABC EC M R E L A Y 87 87 A 30 8586 EF - C 1 R E F ( J 1 ) 3442 50 EF - C 2 R E F ( J 1 ) 5 23 48 52 53 55 57 70523485253555770 42 34 50 20A ECM BREAKER 20A AUX BREAKER CUGNYL A-C 1 R E F 38 36 35 3 W A Y C O N N 3 W A Y C O N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6332-4611C-SE 4 5 21 3C-HE2522-551 6332-4611C-SE 9 8 1 3C-HE2522-551 9 8 1 BTRY - BTRY + EMERGENCY STOP DC OUTPUT A DC OUTPUT B CHARGE FAIL/EXCITE DC OUTPUT C DC OUTPUT D DC OUTPUT E DC OUTPUT F DC OUTPUT G DC OUTPUT H SENSOR COMMON RETURN ANALOG INPUT A ANALOG INPUT B ANALOG INPUT C ANALOG INPUT D MAGNETIC PICKUP + MAGNETIC PICKUP - MAGNETIC PICKUP SCR ECU CAN + ECU CAN - ECU CAN SCR DSENET B DSENET A DSENET SCR GEN L1 VOLATGE SENSING GEN L2 VOLATGE SENSING GEN L3 VOLATGE SENSING GEN NEUTRAL BUS L1 VOLTAGE SENSING BUS L2 VOLTAGE SENSING BUS L3 VOLTAGE SENSING BUS NEUTRAL CT SECONDARY L1 CT SECONDARY L2 CT SECONDARY L3 CT COMMON CT COMMON DIGITAL INPUT A DIGITAL INPUT B DIGITAL INPUT C DIGITAL INPUT D DIGITAL INPUT E DIGITAL INPUT F DIGITAL INPUT G DIGITAL INPUT H RS485 SCR RS485 + RS485 - BU Z Z E R ESTOP AN N U N C I A T O R 1 SE R V C E C O N N E C T O R PWR AUX1 EM C P B + (C 2 7 ) A U X P O W E R 4 + / ( C 3 2 ) E M C P B + EM C P B + CA T D A T A L I N K + CA T D A T A L I N K - DIG I T A L R E F E R E N C E SH U T D O W N - D TH R O T T L E (H A R D E S T O P ) E N G I N E S H U T D O W N - 1 BAT T E R Y - (H A R D E S T O P ) E N G I N E S H U T D O W N - 2 BAT T E R Y - BAT T E R Y - BAT T E R Y - CA N D A T A L I N K + CA N D A T A L I N K - CA N D A T A L I N K S H I E L D AU X P O W E R + PWR AUX2 GC C P 1 . 2 ( D S E 6 3 1 0 ) 5 7 4 - 8 7 4 3 CA N C O N N E C T I O N T O C D V R VR PANEL GND STUD BLOCK AS: 491-4001/641-9528 GC C P 1 . 3 ( D S E 6 3 2 0 ) 5 9 7 - 4 3 5 0 VR P A N E L W I R I N G CONNECT TO C27/C32 ENGINE INTERFACE HARNESS 63 4 - 5 2 6 0 W I R I N G G P ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 4 - 5 2 6 1 ) 442-6219 SHROUD, 226-6446 SWITCH 566-9853 CONTACT (N/O), 566-9854 CONTACT (N/C) 24 1 - 3 1 1 4 B U Z Z E R FUSE HOLDER: 618-6246 F7 VS-T1 F8 VS-T2 F9 VS-T3 NC N C NO AU X P O W E R + AU X P O W E R + EN G I N E E S T O P N O EN G I N E E S T O P N C EN G I N E E S T O P N C FUSE: 9W-1446 BATTERY - BATTERY + DSENET SCR DSENET A DSENET B AN N U N C I A T O R 2 DSENET B DSENET A DSENET SCR BATTERY + BATTERY - OP T I O N A L C B T E R M I N A L S NO T E D CO N N E C T T O A - C 4 F1 FUSE: 636-1920 FUSE HOLDER: 618-6246 TE R M I N A T I N G R E S I S T O R MP U S H I E L D MP U C O M M O N MP U S I G N A L NO T E E PL 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S WIR I N G G P ( N A ) : 6 3 7 - 1 3 8 9 , WIR I N G G P : 6 3 6 - 1 5 1 1 ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 5 - 7 3 3 5 ) AN N U N C I A T O R M O D U L E S O P T I O N IN P U T A N D O U T P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E S O P T I O N ( W I T H R T D M O D U L E O P T I O N ) WIR I N G G P : 6 3 7 - 4 1 5 0 ( Q T Y 2 O F H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 5 - 7 3 4 0 ) WIR I N G G P : 6 3 6 - 1 5 1 3 ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 5 - 7 3 3 9 , H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 7 - 2 1 0 5 ) RT D E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E O P T I O N NO T E C NO T E D NO T E D WIR I N G G P ( R O W ) : 6 3 7 - 2 3 4 6 , DS E N E T B DS E N E T A DS E N E T S C R BA T T E R Y + BA T T E R Y - CH A N N E L S G & H R T D W I R E - 3 (F R O N T B R G ) C H A N N E L H - (F R O N T B R G ) C H A N N E L H + (R E A R B R G ) C H A N N E L G - (R E A R B R G ) C H A N N E L G + (P H - B - 2 ) C H A N N E L E - (P H - C - 2 ) C H A N N E L F + (P H - C - 2 ) C H A N N E L F - CH A N N E L S E & F R T D W I R E - 3 (P H - A - 2 ) C H A N N E L D + (P H - A - 2 ) C H A N N E L D - CH A N N E L S C & D R T D W I R E - 3 (P H - B - 2 ) C H A N N E L E + (P H - B - 1 ) C H A N N E L B - CH A N N E L S A & B R T D W I R E - 3 (P H - C - 1 ) C H A N N E L C + (P H - C - 1 ) C H A N N E L C - (P H - A - 1 ) C H A N N E L A + (P H - A - 1 ) C H A N N E L A - (P H - B - 1 ) C H A N N E L B + RT D M O D U L E NO T E E (C 2 7 O N L Y ) L O W I D L E S W I T C H BLOCK AS: 634-5253 WIR I N G G P ( P - R - L F R A M E ) : 6 4 5 - 3 4 9 5 WIR I N G G P ( M P - E M A X ) : 6 4 5 - 3 4 9 6 BLOCK AS: 618-6257 CD L C O N N E C T O R Vo +: 1 Vo -: 2 3 :- Vin 4 :+ Vin OPTION - 5V DC CONVERTER ENCLOSURE FUEL LEVEL SENSORWIR I N G G P : WIR I N G G P ( E N C L O S U R E N A ) : 6 3 7 - 4 8 3 0 WIR I N G G P ( E N C L O S U R E R O W ) : 6 3 7 - 4 8 3 3 63 7 - 4 8 3 2 ) (H A R N E S S A S : WIR I N G G P : 6 3 7 - 4 1 4 9 ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 5 - 7 3 3 9 , H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 5 - 7 3 4 0 ) IN P U T A N D O U T P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E S O P T I O N ( W I T H O U T R T D O P T I O N ) NO T E D (20A) (20A) (4A) 64 2 - 6 8 0 0 W I R I N G G P ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 4 - 5 2 6 1 ) WIR I N G G P ( E M A X M O , X T 7 ) : 6 2 3 - 1 5 3 9 (P L E T E L E M A T I C S ) 62 0 - 4 8 9 8 ) WIR I N G G P : (H A R N E S S A S : CB 24V DC CONVERTER (R E F E R D I A G R A M 6 2 6 - 0 6 6 1 ES H A R N E S S F O R C O N N E C T I O N S ) Vo +: 1 Vo -: 1 Vo +: 2 Vo -: 2 - Vin + Vin 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 ABCDEFGHIJKL CO N N E C T T O D A - C 2 I F USE D W I T H A N N U N C I A T O R OP T I O N . C O N N E C T T O A-C 4 O T H E R W I S E . CO N N E C T T O D B - C 2 F O R DS E N E T E X P A N S I O N UP T O T W O B R E A K E R O P T I O N S P O S S I B L E . TE R M I N A L S , R E L A Y A N D H A R N E S S A R E PAR T O F T H E W I R I N G G R O U P . CO N N E C T T O D A - C 2 IF U S E D W I T H AN N U N C I A T O R OP T I O N . C O N N E C T TO A - C 4 O T H E R W I S E . TE R M I N A T E D C - T 6 O N B-P O S - 2 A N D D C - T 7 O N B-N E G - 2 T E R M I N A L S O N TH E B L O C K A S S E M B L Y . TE R M I N A T E D B - T 6 O N B-P O S - 2 A N D D B - T 7 O N B-N E G - 2 T E R M I N A L S O N TH E B L O C K A S S E M B L Y . CO N N E C T S T O V G - C 3 IN W I R I N G G P 6 2 9 - 3 8 4 6 (R E F . : 6 2 6 - 0 6 6 1 D I A G R A M - W I R I N G ) (S H E E T 5 A N D S H E E T 6 V G H A R N E S S , L V I V R A N D C D V R O P T I O N ) (R E F E R D I A G R A M 4 9 1 - 3 9 6 0 MG , M C A N D M E H A R N E S S E S FO R C I R C U I T B R E A K E R C O N N E C T I O N S ) NO T E F NOTE G 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 A-C2 A B C D E F G H J ESTOP NO 1 1 1 1 DO 6 1 1 1 1 CB-POS 1 1 1 1 CB-NEG 1 1 1 1 CB1-DI 03 1 1 1 1 CB2-DI 04 1 1 1 1 ESTOP A 1 1 1 1 ESTOP B 1 1 1 1 SF-ESTOP 1 1 1 1 RM-STOP 1 1 1 1 START 1 1 1 1 AI A 1 1 1 1 GND 1 1 1 1 GND 1 1 1 1 GND 1 1 1 1 B-NEG-1 1 1 1 1 B-NEG-1 1 1 1 1 B-NEG-1 1 1 1 1 B-NEG-1 1 1 1 1 B-NEG-1 1 1 1 1 B-POS-1 1 1 1 1 B-POS-1 1 1 1 1 B-POS-1 1 1 1 1 B-POS-1 1 1 1 1 B-POS-1 1 1 1 1 CB1AUX-NO 1 1 1 1 CB1AUX-NC 1 1 1 1 CB1AUX-COM 1 1 1 1 CB1-CLOSE 1 1 1 1 CB1-OPEN 1 1 1 1 CB1-TRIP 1 1 1 1 THRT 1 1 1 1 DIG-RTN 1 1 1 1 DO-D 1 1 1 1 CAN +1 1 1 1 CAN -1 1 1 1 CAN SCR 1 1 1 1 DI D 1 1 1 1 DI E 1 1 1 1 DI F 1 1 1 1 A- C 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 AI-RTN 1 1 1 1 B-POS-2 1 1 1 1 B-POS-2 1 1 1 1 B-NEG-2 1 1 1 1 B-NEG-2 1 1 1 1 ENG-RUN 1 1 1 GND 1 1 1 BTRY-NEG 1 1 1 BTRY-POS 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 V-NEUT 1 1 1 VC-C1 1 2 3 4 5 6 R1 EN G R U N 14 12 11 A2- A1+ DA-C2 A B C RB 1 - C B - 1 14 12 11 A2- A1+ 12345 DB - C 2 AB C DB - C 1 AB C A-C4 A B C DA-C1 A B C 12345 DC - C 2 AB C DC - C 1 AB C A-C3 A B C PL 4 4 4 M O D U L E 60 4 - 9 5 8 0 / 6 0 4 - 9 5 8 1 RE M O T E S T A R T BA T T - BA T T + KE Y S W I T C H CA N L O W CA N H I G H PA - C 1 A1 B1 H3L1M1M2 IN P U T E X P A N S I O N BA T T E R Y - BA T T E R Y + DS E N E T S C R DS E N E T A DS E N E T B OU T P U T E X P A N S I O N BA T T E R Y - BA T T E R Y + DS E N E T S C R DS E N E T A DS E N E T B DC - C 1 R E F AB C 12345 DC - C 2 R E F AB C 678910111213141516171819202122232425 T-C 1 13468911131416181921232426293133343639 GND 1 1 1 A-C5 1 2 IN P U T E X P A N S I O N BA T T E R Y - BA T T E R Y + DS E N E T S C R DS E N E T A DS E N E T B 12345 OU T P U T E X P A N S I O N BA T T E R Y - BA T T E R Y + DS E N E T S C R DS E N E T A DS E N E T B 12345 DB - C 1 R E F AB C DB-C2 REF A B C DC-C1 REF A B C DC - C 2 R E F AB C SH3-[12,F] SH3-[12,F] SH3-[13,K] SH3-[13,K] +VRX - +V R E T U R N TX + TX - RX + BL O C K A S : 6 3 4 - 5 2 5 3 PL E T E L E M A T I C S O P T I O N WIR I N G G P : 6 4 0 - 0 4 6 3 ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 4 0 - 0 4 6 4 ) A6 N 2 ( P L E 7 0 2 ) WIR I N G G P : 6 3 9 - 9 9 6 8 ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 3 9 - 9 9 6 7 , H A R N E S S A S : 6 2 9 - 3 8 8 9 , H A R N E S S A S : 5 4 2 - 9 1 1 6 ) ME D I U M V O L T A G E C T S E N S I N G CD L C O N N E C T O R CO N N E C T T O A - C 5 CA N 1 L O W CA N 1 H I G H CD L - CD L + 300 m A S I N K BA T T E R Y + BA T T E R Y - 10 / 1 0 0 B A S E - T ( T X D ) 4 + 10/ 1 0 0 B A S E - T ( T X D ) 4 - 10/ 1 0 0 B A S E - T ( R X D ) 4 + 10/ 1 0 0 B A S E - T ( R X D ) 4 - 10 / 1 0 0 B A S E - T ( T X D ) 1 + 10/ 1 0 0 B A S E - T ( T X D ) 1 - 10/ 1 0 0 B A S E - T ( R X D ) 1 + 10/ 1 0 0 B A S E - T ( R X D ) 1 - DT R ( R A D I O W A K E U P ) CE L L R A D I O E T H E R N E T (C O N N E C T T O C O N N E C T O R - 1 CE L L R A D I O P O W E R OF P L 2 4 3 O R C - C 3 O F T H E (C O N N E C T T O C O N N E C T O R - 2 OF P L 2 4 3 O R C - C 1 O F T H E KEY S W I T C H TO C A N + O N M A I N T B EX T E N S I O N H A R N E S S ) OF E X T E N S I O N H A R N E S S ) TO C A N - O N M A I N T B BLOCK AS: 618-6257 RE M O T E C O N T R O L P A N E L C I R C U I T B R E A K E R O P T I O N WIR I N G G P : 6 4 5 - 3 5 8 8 ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 4 5 - 3 5 9 1 ) TO F1(4A) FUSE ON MAIN TB TO B-NEG-1 ON MAIN TB BLOCK AS: 634-5253 STANDARD TERMINAL BLOCK L1(8-2 A W G ) LEF T I N P U T (10- 6 A W G ) RIG H T I N P U T (14 - 6 A W G ) OUT P U T S LOA D B L O C K L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1(8-2 A W G ) LEF T I N P U T (10- 6 A W G ) RIG H T I N P U T (14 - 6 A W G ) OUT P U T S LOA D B L O C K L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 VR P A N E L T E R M I N A L B L O C K EX C I T E R X2 T3 X1 Z2 Z1 +- HEA T E R H E A T E R T1 T 2 A B C H1 H 2 H3 H 4 PM G CO N N E C T S T O V C - C 1 JA C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R 2 4 0 V , 6 0 H z O P T I O N ( C 3 2 B N A O N L Y ) WIR I N G G P : 6 4 0 - 6 2 8 4 ( H A R N E S S A S : 6 0 7 - 4 0 3 6 , H A R N E S S A S : 6 0 7 - 4 0 3 9 ) C3 2 / C 2 7 E N C L O S U R E O P T I O N S BA T T E R Y C H A R G E R O P T I O N CO N N E C T I O N G P : 5 2 1 - 1 4 9 8 ( H A R N E S S A S : 5 2 1 - 1 4 9 7 ) WIR I N G G P : 5 2 0 - 5 1 3 2 ( H A R N E S S A S : 5 2 0 - 5 1 3 1 ) FU E L T A N K S E N S O R O P T I O N BA T T E R Y C H A R G E R C O N T R O L WIR I N G G P : 5 8 8 - 8 2 8 3 ( H A R N E S S A S : 5 8 8 - 8 2 8 2 ) BA T T E R Y C H A R G E R FU E L L E A K S E N S O R FU E L L E V E L S E N S O R CLI P P E D S H I L E D Vin - : 3 Vi n + : 4 2:- V o 1:+ V o L1(8- 2 A W G ) LEF T I N P U T (10 - 6 A W G ) RIG H T I N P U T (14 - 6 A W G ) OUT P U T S LO A D B L O C K L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1(8- 2 A W G ) LEF T I N P U T (10 - 6 A W G ) RIG H T I N P U T (14 - 6 A W G ) OUT P U T S LO A D B L O C K L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 TB 5 TB 1 4 6 L N GN D 24 V D C T O 5 V D C EN G - R U N BT R Y - P O S BA T T E R Y C H A R G E R - S H I P P E D L O O S E ( R E C O M M E N D E D C O N N E C T I O N S ) CH A R G E R : 6 4 5 - 6 3 5 9 , 6 4 5 - 6 3 6 0 , 6 4 5 - 6 3 6 1 , 6 4 5 - 6 3 6 2 PO W E R B L O C K PO W E R B L O C K L2 L1 SH O R T P O W E R I N P U T 20 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V A C (C U S T O M E R S U P P L I E D ) VR P A N E L T E R M I N A L B L O C K 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 A A B B C C D D E E F F G G H H I I J J K K L L UP T O T W O B R E A K E R O P T I O N S PO S S I B L E . T E R M I N A L S , R E L A Y AN D H A R N E S S A R E P A R T O F T H E WIR I N G G R O U P CO N N E C T S T O M D - C 5 IN W I R I N G G P 6 2 9 - 3 8 8 8 (R E F . : 6 2 6 - 0 6 6 1 D I A G R A M - W I R I N G ) (S H E E T 7 , M D H A R N E S S , M V C D V R O P T I O N ) CO N N E C T S T O M D - C 4 IN W I R I N G G P 6 2 9 - 3 8 8 8 (R E F . : 6 2 6 - 0 6 6 1 D I A G R A M - W I R I N G ) (S H E E T 7 , M D H A R N E S S , M V C D V R O P T I O N ) VR P A N E L T E R M I N A L B L O C K TE R M I N A L S B N - T 1 7 A N D BN - T 1 8 A R E N O T CO N N E C T E D . I N S U L A T E AN D T I E B A C K . VR P A N E L T E R M I N A L B L O C K STA N D A R D T E R M I N A L B L O C K BL O C K A S : 6 3 4 - 5 2 5 3 ST A N D A R D T E R M I N A L B L O C K BL O C K A S : 6 3 4 - 5 2 5 3 TL - C 1 ( C I R C L E ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 29 30 31 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 44 TL - C 2 ( T R I A N G L E ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 26 27 28 29 31 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 TE L B - 1 1 1 1 TE L B + 1 1 1 1 ET H E R N E T P O R T 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TE L D O - 1 1 1 1 1 SH2-[5,G] SH2-[6,G] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 29 30 31 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 44 MT - C 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 16 17 18 19 21 22 29 31 34 35 36 37 39 41 42 441215262728323843 SH 2 - [ 3 , G ] SH 2 - [ 4 , G ] ESTOP NO 1 1 1 1 DO 6 1 1 1 1 CB-POS 1 1 1 1 CB-NEG 1 1 1 1 CB1-DI 03 1 1 1 1 CB2-DI 04 1 1 1 1 RB 1 - C B - 1 14 12 11 A2- A1+ CB1AUX-NO 1 1 1 1 CB1AUX-NC 1 1 1 1 CB1AUX-COM 1 1 1 1 CB1-CLOSE 1 1 1 1 CB1-OPEN 1 1 1 1 CB1-TRIP 1 1 1 1 JA C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R 60 7 - 5 0 1 4 ( 2 4 0 V , 6 0 H z , 6 K W ) 1 2 3 CB 3 40 A J W H C I R C U I T B R E A K E R BA R - G R O U N D 1 2 3 4 PW R - L 2 PW R - L 1 NE U T GE N E R A T O R CT 1 VO L - S E L C 1 2 CT 2 VO L - S E L C 1 2 CT 3 VO L - S E L C 1 2 CT 2 - D R O O P VO L - S E L C 1 2 RE F E R T O S H E E T 7 O F D I A G R A M W I R I N G 6 2 6 - 0 6 6 1 ME D I U M V O L T A G E C D V R O P T I O N FO R D R O O P C T C O N N E C T I O N S ( M D H A R N E S S ) B-N E G - 2 1 1 1 GN D 1 1 1 DI E 1 1 1 BC - 1 1 1 1 BC - 2 1 1 1 KG - C 2 12 KG - C 1 A B C B-N E G - 2 1 1 1 DI D 1 1 1 GN D 1 1 1 AI A 1 1 1 AI- R T N 1 1 1 CB 4 CR 2 3 31 21 11 A1 A2 12 14 22 24 32 34 BC - 2 1 1 BC - 1 1 1 BT R Y - P O S 1 1 1 EN G - R U N 1 1 1 PW R - L 1 PW R - L 2 TL - C 3 1 2 TL - C 5 1 2 3 4 TL - C 4 A B C CB(C U S T O M E R S U P P L I E D ) AC I N DC O U T DC P O S ( + ) DC N E G ( - ) 4( C O M ) 6( F A I L ) BT R Y - ( N E G ) AC / C H A R G E R F A I L S I G N A L 1 8 A W G 18 A W G BA T T E R Y C H A R G E R L1 L2 GN D 1 1 BA R - G R O U N D 9 10 11 12 1 1 AC / C H A R G E R FA I L A L A R M TB - 1 BA T T E R Y + + RE L A Y (C U S T O M E R S U P P L I E D ) 3 4 12576 8 16 A W G 16 A W G 14 A W G NO T E A : T H I S D I A G R A M I S P R I M A R I L Y F O R T H E G C C P C O N T R O L P A N E L W I T H C 2 7 / C 3 2 C R I T I C A L AN D C 3 2 B G E N E R A T O R S E T S . T H I S I S A P A R T I A L S Y S T E M D I A G R A M A N D I S T O B E R E A D I N CO N J U N C T I O N W I T H 6 2 6 0 6 6 1 A N D 4 9 1 3 9 6 0 D I A G R A M S . NO T E B : 6 2 6 0 6 6 1 A N D 4 9 1 3 9 6 0 I N F O R M A T I O N L I S T E D F O R R E F E R E N C E FO L L O W I N G D E T A I L S A R E L O C A T E D O N 6 2 6 0 6 6 1 : VO L T A G E A N D C U R R E N T S E N S I N G W I R I N G LO W V O L T A G E C D V R W I R I N G ME D I U M V O L T A G E C D V R W I R I N G EN G I N E E - S T O P W I T H E X T E R N A L P A N E L O P T I O N CB D C C O N V E R T E R W I R I N G FO L L O W I N G D E T A I L S A R E L O C A T E D O N 4 9 1 3 9 6 0 : EN G I N E I N T E R F A C E W I R I N G JA C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R W I R I N G ME D I U M V O L T A G E P T W I R I N G NE U T R A L C T W I R I N G MA S T E R P A C T , P - R - L F R A M E A N D A B B E M A X C B W I R I N G NO T E C : M O V E T E R M I N A T I N G R E S I S T O R T O T H E N E X T E X P A N S I O N C O N N E C T O R W H E N A D D I N G O P T I O N A L M O D U L E NO T E D : A T T A C H T E R M I N A T I N G R E S I S T O R I F N O F U R T H E R D S E N E T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E S A R E C O N N E C T E D NO T E E : S E T D S E N E T I D O F A N N U N C I A T O R 1 T O " 0 1 " A N D A N N U N C I A T O R 2 T O " 0 0 " U S I N G T H E D S E N E T I D SE L E C T O R D I A L O N T H E R E A R S I D E O F T H E M O D U L E NO T E F : R E M O T E E S T O P J U M P E R , R E M O V E T H E T E R M I N A L B L O C K B R I D G E W H E N R E M O T E E S T O P I S I M P L E M E N T E D . NO T E G : F O R C U S T O M E R R E M O T E E S T O P S W I T C H , R E M O V E C O N N E C T I O N 1 0 1 - A 4 1 A N D C O N N E C T " N C " C O N T A C T S BE T W E E N T E R M I N A L B L O C K S E S T O P A A N D B - P O S - 1 . FO R E N C L O S U R E S P E C I F I C W I R I N G , R E F E R T O 4 3 0 2 8 0 3 . ME D - V : M E D I U M V E E E N G I N E SH E E T 2 SH E E T 9 SH E E T 3 Output Expansion Module ENVIRONMENTAL TESTING STANDARD ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY BS EN 61000-6-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard for the Industrial Environment BS EN 61000-6-4 EMC Generic Emission Standard for the Industrial Environment ELECTRICAL SAFETY BS EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business Equipment TEMPERATURE BS EN 60068-2-1 Ab/Ae Cold Test -30 °C BS EN 60068-2-2 Bb/Be Dry Heat +70°C VIBRATION BS EN 60068-2-6 Ten sweeps in each of three major axes 5 Hz to 8 Hz @ +/-7.5 mm, 8 Hz to 500 Hz @ 2 gn SHOCK BS EN 60068-2-27 Three shocks in each of three major axes 15 gn in 11 Ms HUMIDITY BS EN 60068-2-30 Db Damp Heat Cyclic 20/55 °C @ 95% RH 48 Hours BS EN 60068-2-78 Cab Damp Heat Static 40 °C @ 93% RH 48 Hours SPECIFICATION CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE RATING 8 V to 35 V Continuous CRANKING DROPOUTS Able to survive 0 V for 50 mS, providing supply was at least 10 V before dropout and supply recovers to 5 V. This is achieved without the need for internal batteries. LEDs and backlight will not be maintained during cranking. MAXIMUM OPERATING CURRENT 325 mA at 12 V, 152 mA at 24 V MAXIMUM STANDBY CURRENT 70 mA at 12 V, 32 mA at 24 V AUXILIARY RELAY CONTACTS 2 Amp DC rated voltage free DIMENSIONS OVERALL 165 mm x 76 mm x 49 mm 6.5” x 3” x 1.9” Output Expansion Module Output relay expansion module for use with compatible control modules. The Output Expansion module has been designed to extend a host module’s output capabilities. A maximum of 10 Output Expansion modules can be connected to an individual module at any one time. All outputs are configurable via the host controller. The module will work up to 1 KM (0.6miles) from the host control module. Features • Power On/Link Lost LED ID SWITCH • 10 expansion modules can be connected to 1 host controller at a time • 8 configurable relay contacts with LED indicators • 4 Normally Open (N/O) • 4 Change Over (C/O) • Terminal strip connection for quick and easy set-up Picture shown may not reflect actual configuration. www.cat.com/electricpower ©2023 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. D E E P S E A E L E C T R O N I C S DSE2131 Input Expansion Installation Instructions Introduction DSE2131 input expansion module is used in conjunction with supported DSE controllers to provide additional input functionality (10 x digital input, 10 x resistive input, 10 x 0-10V input or 10 x 4-20mA input). The inputs are configured in the ‘host controller’, the DSE2131 module is not itself configured apart from the ‘ID switch’ detailed below. For further details on configuring the ‘host controller’ you are referred to the relevant configuration software manual. Controls and indications LED Indications Function Colour Action Power on / Link lost RED Steady when DC supply is connected and data is being received from the host controller. Flashing when the DC supply is connected and the data connection to the host controller is not operating. ID switch The rotary ID switch is used to select the ‘Identification’ of the DSE2131 expansion module as the host controller is capable of giving instructions to a number of DSE2131 expansion modules at the same time (consult relevant modules instructions for further details on number of supported expansion units). The enclosure cover must be unclipped and removed to gain access to the switch. The switch should be operated using a small screwdriver and set to match the required address. NOTE : The NOTE : The NOTE : The NOTE : The IDIDIDID must be set to be a unique number, different from the must be set to be a unique number, different from the must be set to be a unique number, different from the must be set to be a unique number, different from the ID ID ID ID of any other of any other of any other of any other DSEDSEDSEDSE2131213121312131 input expansion module connected on the DSEnet. input expansion module connected on the DSEnet. input expansion module connected on the DSEnet. input expansion module connected on the DSEnet. NOTE : The selection of the NOTE : The selection of the NOTE : The selection of the NOTE : The selection of the ID ID ID ID of other types of expansion modules WILL NOT of other types of expansion modules WILL NOT of other types of expansion modules WILL NOT of other types of expansion modules WILL NOT interfere/clash with the interfere/clash with the interfere/clash with the interfere/clash with the ID ID ID ID of the of the of the of the DSE2131DSE2131DSE2131DSE2131. For instance if the . For instance if the . For instance if the . For instance if the DSE2131DSE2131DSE2131DSE2131 is set to is set to is set to is set to ID ID ID ID 4444, it is , it is , it is , it is acceptable to have a different type of expansion module (for instance acceptable to have a different type of expansion module (for instance acceptable to have a different type of expansion module (for instance acceptable to have a different type of expansion module (for instance DSEDSEDSEDSE2222157157157157) set to ) set to ) set to ) set to ID ID ID ID 4444 also.also.also.also. ID Switch Power on / Link lost LED 053-125 ISSUE 1.1 Typical wiring diagrams Deep Sea Electronics Plc. Tel:+44 (0)1723 890099 Fax: +44 (0)1723 893303 Email: sales@deepseaplc.com Web: www.deepseaplc.com Deep Sea Electronics Inc. Phone: +1 (815) 316-8706 Fax: +1 (815) 316- 8708 TOLL FREE (USA only) : Tel: 1 866 636 9703 Email: sales@deepseausa.com Web: www.deepseausa.com Dimensions Overall size 164.6mm x 76.4mm x 48.9mm (6.48” x 3.01” x 1.93”) Mounting type DIN rail or chassis mounting Din rail type EN 50022 35mm type only Mounting holes M4 clearance Mounting hole centres 152.37mm x 64.50mm (6.00” x 2.54”) D E E P S E A E L E C T R O N I C S 2157 Output Expansion Installation Instructions Introduction DSE2157 relay expansion module is used in conjunction with the DSE7000 series controllers to provide additional relay output functionality. The relay outputs are configured in the ‘host controller’, the DSE2157 module is not itself configured apart from the ‘ID switch’ detailed below. For further details on configuring the ‘host controller’ you are referred to the relevant configuration software manual. Controls and indications LED Indications Function Colour Action Power on / Link lost RED Steady when DC supply is connected and data is being received from the host controller. Flashing when the DC supply is connected and the data connection to the host controller is not operating. Status 1-8 RED Lit when the corresponding relay is active ID switch The rotary ID switch is used to select the ‘ID’ of the 2157 expansion module as the host controller is capable of giving instructions to a number of 2157 expansion modules at the same time (consult relevant modules instructions for further details on number of supported expansion units). The enclosure cover must be unclipped and removed to gain access to the switch. The switch should be operated using a small screwdriver and set to match the required ID. NOTE : The ID must be a unique number, different from the ID of any other 2157 module connected to the host controller. If two or more 2157 controllers are required to ‘mimic’ each other then they should be configured with different IDs, and both configured the same in the host controller. NOTE : The selection of the ID of other types of expansion modules WILL NOT interfere/clash with the ID of the 2548. For instance if the 2548 is set to ID 4, it is acceptable to have a different type of expansion module (for instance 2130) set to ID 4 also. 053-034 ISSUE 2 ID Switch Power on / Link lost LED 8 x Status LED (1 LED per relay) Typical wiring diagrams NOTE : Configuration of the outputs is performed in the host controller. Dimensions Overall size 164.6mm x 76.4mm x 48.9mm (6.48” x 3.01” x 1.93”) Mounting type DIN rail or chassis mounting Din rail type EN 50022 35mm type only Mounting holes M4 clearance Mounting hole centres 152.37mm x 64.50mm (6.00” x 2.54”) Deep Sea Electronics Plc. Tel:+44 (0)1723 890099 Fax: +44 (0)1723 893303 LO CALL (from UK BT landlines) : Telephone 0845 260 8900 Email: sales@deepseaplc.com Web: www.deepseaplc.com Deep Sea Electronics Inc. Phone: +1 (815) 316-8706 Fax: +1 (815) 316- 8708 TOLL FREE (USA only) : Tel: 1 866 636 9703 Email: sales@deepseausa.com Web: www.deepseausa.com Deep Sea Electronics Plc. (Far East) Tel:+66 2 670 6228 Fax: +66 2 678 3028 Email: sales@deepseaplc.com Web: www.deepseaplc.com C2 7 a n d C 3 2 G e n e r a t o r S e t w i t h JS J 1 - U P 2A 3 1 - U P TZ 9 1 - U P TZ J 1 - U P Fe b r u a r y 2 0 2 5 M0 1 6 9 9 9 8 - 0 1 El e c t r i c a l S y s t e m GC C P 1 . 2 a n d G C C P 1 . 3 C o n t r o l l e r PU B L I C A T I O N S . C A T . C O M Pr e s s u r e Sy m b o l T Te m p e r a t u r e Sy m b o l Le v e l Sy m b o l Fl o w Sy m b o l Ci r c u i t B r e a k e r Sy m b o l Ha r n e s s a n d W i r e S y m b o l s Sy m b o l s Sy m b o l s a n d D e f i n i t i o n s Ha r n e s s A n d W i r e E l e c t r i c a l S c h e m a t i c S y m b o l s Fu s e : A c o m p o n e n t i n a n e l e c t r i c a l c i r c u i t t h a t w i l l o p e n t h e c i r c u i t i f t o o m u c h c u r r e n t f l o w s th r o u g h i t . Sw i t c h ( N o r m a l l y O p e n ) : A s w i t c h t h a t w i l l c l o s e a t a s p e c i f i e d p o i n t ( t e m p , p r e s s , e t c . ) . T h e cir c l e i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e c o m p o n e n t h a s s c r e w t e r m i n a l s a n d a w i r e c a n b e d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m i t . Sw i t c h ( N o r m a l l y C l o s e d ) : A s w i t c h t h a t w i l l o p e n a t a s p e c i f i e d p o i n t ( t e m p , p r e s s , e t c . ) . No c i r c l e i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e w i r e c a n n o t b e d i s c o n n e c t e d f r o m t h e c o m p o n e n t . Gr o u n d ( W i r e d ) : T h i s i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e c o m p o n e n t i s c o n n e c t e d t o a g r o u n d e d w i r e . T h e gr o u n d e d w i r e i s f a s t e n e d t o t h e m a c h i n e . Gr o u n d ( C a s e ) : T h i s i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e c o m p o n e n t d o e s n o t h a v e a w i r e c o n n e c t e d t o g r o u n d . It i s g r o u n d e d b y b e i n g f a s t e n e d t o t h e m a c h i n e . Re e d S w i t c h : A s w i t c h w h o s e c o n t a c t s a r e c o n t r o l l e d b y a m a g n e t . A m a g n e t c l o s e s t h e co n t a c t s o f a n o r m a l l y o p e n r e e d s w i t c h ; i t o p e n s t h e c o n t a c t s o f a n o r m a l l y c l o s e d r e e d s w i t c h . Se n d e r : A c o m p o n e n t t h a t i s u s e d w i t h a t e m p e r a t u r e o r p r e s s u r e g a u g e . T h e s e n d e r me a s u r e s t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o r p r e s s u r e . I t s r e s i s t a n c e c h a n g e s t o g i v e a n i n d i c a t i o n t o th e g a u g e o f t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o r p r e s s u r e . T Re l a y ( M a g n e t i c S w i t c h ) : A r e l a y i s a n e l e c t r i c a l c o m p o n e n t t h a t i s a c t i v a t e d b y e l e c t r i c i t y . It h a s a c o i l t h a t m a k e s a n e l e c t r o m a g n e t w h e n c u r r e n t f l o w s t h r o u g h i t . T h e ele c t r o m a g n e t c a n o p e n o r c l o s e t h e s w i t c h p a r t o f t h e r e l a y . Ma g n e t i c L a t c h S o l e n o i d : A m a g n e t i c l a t c h s o l e n o i d i s a n e l e c t r i c a l c o m p o n e n t t h a t i s ac t i v a t e d b y e l e c t r i c i t y a n d h e l d l a t c h e d b y a p e r m a n e n t m a g n e t . I t h a s t w o c o i l s ( l a t c h a n d u n l a t c h ) th a t m a k e e l e c t r o m a g n e t w h e n c u r r e n t f l o w s t h r o u g h t h e m . I t a l s o h a s a n i n t e r n a l s w i t c h t h a t p l a c e s th e l a t c h c o i l c i r c u i t o p e n a t t h e t i m e t h e c o i l l a t c h e s . So l e n o i d : A s o l e n o i d i s a n e l e c t r i c a l c o m p o n e n t t h a t i s a c t i v a t e d b y e l e c t r i c i t y . I t h a s a co i l t h a t m a k e s a n e l e c t r o m a g n e t w h e n c u r r e n t f l o w s t h r o u g h i t . T h e e l e c t r o m a g n e t ca n o p e n o r c l o s e a v a l v e o r m o v e a p i e c e o f m e t a l t h a t c a n d o w o r k . 1 2 AG - C 4 11 1 - 7 8 9 8 L- C 1 2 3E - 5 1 7 9 9X - 1 1 2 3 Co m p o n e n t Pa r t N u m b e r Pi n o r S o c k e t N u m b e r Pa r t N u m b e r : f o r C o n n e c t o r R e c e p t a c l e Pa r t N u m b e r : fo r C o n n e c t o r P l u g Ha r n e s s I d e n t i f i c a t i o n L e t t e r ( s ) : (A , B , C , . . . , A A , A B , A C , . . . ) Pl u g 32 5 - A G 1 3 5 P K - 1 4 Wi r e C o l o r Wi r e G a u g e * Re c e p t a c l e 1 12 2 Su r e - S e a l c o n n e c t o r : T y p i c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of a S u r e - S e a l c o n n e c t o r . T h e p l u g a n d r e c e p t a c l e co n t a i n b o t h p i n s a n d s o c k e t s . De u t s c h c o n n e c t o r : T y p i c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of a D e u t s c h c o n n e c t o r . T h e p l u g c o n t a i n s a l l so c k e t s a n d t h e r e c e p t a c l e c o n t a i n s a l l p i n s . Fu s e (5 A m p s ) 5A Ha r n e s s i d e n t i f i c a t i o n c o d e : Th i s e x a m p l e i n d i c a t e s w i r e g r o u p 3 2 5 , wir e 1 3 5 i n h a r n e s s " A G " . L- C 1 2 3E - 5 1 7 9 Wi r e , C a b l e , o r H a r n e s s As s e m b l y I d e n t i f i c a t i o n : In c l u d e s Ha r n e s s I d e n t i f i c a t i o n L e t t e r s a n d Ha r n e s s C o n n e c t o r S e r i a l i z a t i o n Co d e s ( s e e s a m p l e ) . Ha r n e s s C o n n e c t o r S e r i a l i z a t i o n C o d e : Th e " C " s t a n d s f o r " C o n n e c t o r " a n d t h e nu m b e r i n d i c a t e s w h i c h c o n n e c t o r i n t h e ha r n e s s ( C 1 , C 2 , C 3 , . . . ) . *W i r e g a u g e i s s h o w n i n A W G ( A m e r i c a n W i r e G a u g e ) bu t c o u l d a l s o b e s h o w n i n m e t r i c d e n o t e d w i t h m m © 2 0 2 5 C a t e r p i l l a r . A l l R i g h t s R e s e r v e d . C A T , C A T E R P I L L A R , L E T ’ S D O T H E W O R K , t h e i r r e s p e c t i v e l o g o s , “ C a t e r p i l l a r C o r p o r a t e Y e ll o w ” , t h e “P o w e r E d g e ” a n d C a t “ M o d e r n H e x ” t r a d e d r e s s a s w e l l a s c o r p o r a t e a n d p r o d u c t i d e n t i t y u s e d h e r e i n , a r e t r a d e m a r k s o f C a t e r p i l la r a n d m a y n o t be u s e d w i t h o u t p e r m i s s i o n . Ca t e r p i l l a r : N o n - C o n f i d e n t i a l . 42 Page, (Dimensions: 56 inches x 35 inches) M0169998-01 640 - 5 3 6 5 640 - 5 3 6 5 57 2 - 0 7 7 4 51 9 - 8 7 5 6 64 0 - 5 3 6 5 33 6 - 9 1 8 5 583-6373 583-6374 33 6 - 9 1 8 5 583-6375 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 33 6 - 9 1 8 5 583-6374 314-9098 314-9098 443-0512 443-0512 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9086 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 314-9098 301-8313 9X - 1 3 4 3 13 3 - 0 9 7 0 15 5 - 2 2 6 9 3 E - 3 3 6 4 15 5 - 2 2 6 9 DE S C R I P T I O N F U N C T I O N DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 1 - ( D I A ) R E M O T E S T A R T DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 2 - ( D I B ) C I R C U I T B R E A K E R - 1 A U X I L I A R Y N O DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 3 - ( D I C ) C I R C U I T B R E A K E R - 2 A U X I L I A R Y N O DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 4 - ( D I D ) F U E L L E A K ( E N C L O S U R E ) DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 5 - ( D I E ) A C B A T T E R Y C H A R G E R F A I L U R E ( E N C L O S U R E ) DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 6 - ( D I F ) S P A R E DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 7 - ( D I G ) S P A R E DI G I T A L I N P U T 0 8 - ( D I H ) S P A R E E- S T O P I N P U T - ( P O R T 3 ) E M E R G E N C Y S T O P A N D P O W E R S U P P L Y T O D O A A N D D O B DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 1 - ( D O A ) F U N C T I O N A L S A F E T Y ( E C M P O W E R R E L A Y ) DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 2 - ( D O B ) S P A R E DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 3 - ( D O C ) C O M M O N S H U T D O W N ( S H U N T T R I P R E L A Y ) DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 4 - ( D O D ) D I S A B L E A U X A C S U P P L Y ( E N G I N E R U N R E L A Y ) DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 5 - ( D O E ) S P A R E DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 6 - ( D O F ) S P A R E DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 7 - ( D O G ) S P A R E DI G I T A L O U T P U T 0 8 - ( D O H ) B U Z Z E R AN A L O G I N P U T 0 1 - ( A I A ) F U E L L E V E L S E N S O R ( E N C L O S U R E ) AN A L O G I N P U T 0 2 - ( A I B ) S P A R E AN A L O G I N P U T 0 3 - ( A I C ) S P A R E AN A L O G I N P U T 0 4 - ( A I D ) S P A R E MA G N E T I C P I C K U P S P A R E CH A R G E F A I L / E X C I T E S P A R E SH E E T I N D E X D E S C R I P T I O N SH E E T 1 H A R N E S S L A Y E R I N D E X GE N E R A L N O T E S CO N T R O L P A N E L V I E W S SH E E T 2 G C C P 1 . 2 / 1 . 3 P A N E L W I R I N G VR P A N E L W I R I N G AN N U N C I A T O R M O D U L E RT D E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E IN P U T A N D O U T P U T M O D U L E S ( W I T H R T D M O D U L E ) IN P U T A N D O U T P U T M O D U L E S ( W I T H O U T R T D M O D U L E ) PL 4 4 4 T E L E M A T I C S SH E E T 3 A 6 N 2 ( P L E 7 0 2 ) T E L E M A T I C S ME D I U M V O L T A G E C T S E N S I N G C3 2 B N A J A C K E T W A T E R H E A T E R RE M O T E C O N T R O L P A N E L C I R I C U I T B R E A K E R W I R I N G SH I P P E D L O O S E B A T T E R Y C H A R G E R C O N N E C T I O N S ( R E C O M M E N D E D ) C3 2 / C 2 7 E N C L O S U R E O P T I O N S SH E E T 4 C U S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - M A I N T E R M I N A L B L O C K SH E E T 5 C U S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - T E L E M A T I C S , I N P U T A N D O U T P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E SH E E T 6 C U S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - G C C P 1 . 2 / 1 . 3 C O N T R O L L E R DE F A U L T I N P U T A N D O U T P U T C O N F I G U R A T I O N SH E E T 7 V R P A N E L L A Y O U T A N D C U S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S SH E E T 8 R E M O T E M O U N T E D P A N E L I N T E R F A C I N G SH E E T 9 E S T O P A N D C A N C O M M U N I A C A T I O N S C I R C U I T S CO N T R O L P A N E L ( A L L O P T I O N S S H O W N ) CO N T R O L P A N E L O P E N P O S I T I O N ( A L L O P T I O N S S H O W N ) SH E E T 1 LFAUX-NO LFAUX-NC LFAUX-COM LF-CLOSE LF-OPEN LF-TRIP RTAUX-NO RTAUX-NC RTAUX-COM RT-CLOSE RT-OPEN RT-TRIP ESTOP NO DO 6 CB-POS CB-NEG CB1-D1 03 CB2-D1 04 ESTOP-A ESTOP-B SFT-ESTOP RM-STOP START AI-RTN AI A GND GND GND B-NEG-1 B-NEG-1 B-NEG-1 B-NEG-1 B-NEG-1 B-POS-1 B-POS-1 B-POS-1 B-POS-1 B-POS-1 20 20 4 PWR AUX2 PWR AUX1 F1 THRT/PWM DIG-RTN DO D R-1 CAN + CAN - CAN SCR DI D DI E DI F B-NEG-2 B-NEG-2 B-POS-2 B-POS-2 CB LF-SHUNT CB RT-SHUNT TRIP RELAY TRIP RELAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 1 22 23 24 25 CUSTOMER SUPPLIED CUSTOMER SUPPLIEDCUSTOMER SUPPLIED CUSTOMER SUPPLIED CUSTOMER SUPPLIEDCUSTOMER SUPPLIED CUSTOMER LOAD CUSTOMER LOAD (CUSTOMER DC RETURN) (CUSTOMER DC SUPPLY) CUSTOMER LOAD CUSTOMER LOAD (CUSTOMER DC RETURN) (CUSTOMER DC SUPPLY) 52G 'a'52G 'b' 52G 'a' 'b' 52G CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D RE M O T E S T A R T S I G N A L CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D SP E E D C O N T R O L I N P U T T O E N G I N E E C M 50 0 H z , 5 V P W M ( 7 % t o 9 4 % ) CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D DIG I T A L I N P U T CU S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - M A I N T E R M I N A L B L O C K SH E E T 4 NO MA X 3 0 0 m A CU S T O M E R L O A D 00 00 TE L B + TE L B - TE L D O - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 IN P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E OU T P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E +-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-+-A B C D E F G H I J - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TE L E L M A T I C S T E R M I N A L B L O C K BT R Y - ( N E G ) BT R Y + ( P O S ) DS E N E T S C R DS E N E T A DS E N E T B BT R Y - ( N E G ) BT R Y + ( P O S ) DS E N E T S C R DS E N E T A DS E N E T B (C U S T O M E R D C R E T U R N ) (C U S T O M E R D C S U P P L Y ) (C U S T O M E R D C S U P P L Y ) 4-2 0 m A 4-2 0 m A V + -0 T O 1 0 V 0-4 8 0 O H M CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D CU S T O M E R L O A D (C U S T O M E R D C R E T U R N ) MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A MA X 2 A TE L E M A T I C S IN P U T A S H O W N W I R E D AS D I G I T A L I N P U T IN P U T E S H O W N W I R E D AS 0 - 1 0 V I N P U T IN P U T C S H O W N W I R E D AS R E S I S T I V E S E N S O R I N P U T IN P U T G S H O W N W I R E D AS 4 - 2 0 m A I N P U T ( S E L F P O W E R E D ) IN P U T I S H O W N W I R E D AS 4 - 2 0 m A I N P U T ( L O O P P O W E R E D ) (T H E I N P U T S A T O J C A N B E C O N F I G U R E D A S E I T H E R A D I G I T A L I N P U T , RE S I S T I V E I N P U T , 0 - 1 0 V I N P U T O R 4 - 2 0 m A I N P U T (C U S T O M E R D C S U P P L Y MA X 3 0 V D C ) TE L E M A T I C S C O N F I G U R A T I O N A N D SO F T W A R E U P L O A D SH E E T 5 CU S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - T E L E M A T I C S T E R M I N A L B L O C K - I N P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E - O U T P U T E X P A N S I O N M O D U L E EN C L O S U R E B A T C H A R G E R 20 8 - 2 4 0 V J W H CD V R SP A C E H E A T E R L1 (8-2 AWG)LEFT INPUT (10-6 AWG)RIGHT INPUT (14-6 AWG)OUTPUTS LOAD BLOCK L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L2 (8-2 AWG)LEFT INPUT (10-6 AWG)RIGHT INPUT (14-6 AWG)OUTPUTS LOAD BLOCK L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 ST D A C B L K - V R P A N E L : 6 3 4 - 5 2 6 0 / 6 4 2 - 6 8 0 0 BLOCK AS: 491-4001 / 641-9528 BLOCK AS: 542-9116 WIRING GP:521-1498 WIRING GP: 498-0007 WIRING GP: 491-3996 31 21 11 A1 A2 12 14 22 24 32 34 63A 10A 31 21 11 A1 A2 12 14 22 24 32 34 20A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 31 21 11 A1 A2 12 14 22 24 32 34 10A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 20 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V A C (C U S T O M E R S U P P L I E D ) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED V (FAULT RESET MOMENTARY INPUT) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED (VAr/PF CONTROL ACTIVE WHEN CLOSED) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED (SET POINT ADJUSTMENT MOMENTARY INPUTS) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED (EXCITATION DISABLED WHEN CLOSED) CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SETPOINT CONTROL INPUT +/-10V DC CONTACT SENSE - COMMON CDVR: P9-6 CONTACT SENSE - FAULT RESET CDVR: P9-8 CONTACT SENSE - VAR/PF ENABLE CDVR: P9-9 CONTACT SENSE - RAISE CDVR: P9-5 CONTACT SENSE - LOWER CDVR: P9-4 CONTACT SENSE - EXCITATION DISABLE CDVR: P9-7 DRIVER SUPPLY (50) (24V, 100 mA)CDVR: P12-9 FAULT SHUTDOWN DRIVER (24V, 100 mA) CDVR: P12-5 ALARM OUTPUT DRIVER (24V, 100 mA)CDVR: P12-4 +/-10V DC INPUT (B), - CDVR: P12-3 +/-10V DC INPUT (A), + CDVR: P12-6 SH O R E P O W E R I N P U T JW H CR 2 2 CB3 CB2 SP A C E H E A T E R CR 2 1 CB1 JWH-21 JWH-A1 H4 H2 H3 H1 EN C L B A T C H R G R CR 2 3 CB4 BC-2 BC-1 PWR L2 PWR L2 PWM-SH PWM-NEG PWM-POS CT-COM 1A GEN 1B GEN 1C GEN SPARE BTRY- BTRY- BTRY- ENG-RUN ENG-RUN BTRY+ BTRY+ BTRY+ GND GND VS-T1 VS-T2 VS-T3 VDC-A VDC-B ALM FSD DS-50 EX-DS V-LWR V-RISE V/PF F-RES COM COM COM L1 L2 L3 N BT R Y - ( N E G ) CUSTOMER LOAD CUSTOMER LOAD CUSTOMER LOAD BT R Y - ( N E G ) CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D AN A L O G I N P U T S CUSTOMER LOAD MAX 2A 59 7 - 4 3 5 0 / 5 7 4 - 8 7 4 3 GC C P 1 . 2 / G C C P 1 . 3 C O N T R O L L E R US B CO N T R O L L E R C O N F I G U R A T I O N AN D M O N I T O R I N G GC C P 1 . 2 / 1 . 3 D E F A U L T I N P U T A N D O U T P U T C O N F I G U R A T I O N 2A FUSE 2A FUSE 2A FUSE L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N A B C D E F G H RS485 SCR RS485+ RS485- L1 L2 L3 COM COM A B C D E F G H CHARGE FAIL/EXCITE BTRY- BTRY+ E STOP C D MAG PICKUP- MAG PICKUP SCR ECU CAN+ ECU CAN- ECU CAN SCR DSENET B MAG PICKUP+ RETURN A B DSENET A DSENET SCR OU T P U T S A N A L O G I N P U T S DIG I T A L I N P U T S MAX 5A MAX 2A MAX 2A STANDARD TERMINAL BLOCK (OUTPUT B - SUPPLIED FROM TERMINAL 3) CU S T O M E R S U P P L I E D BU S V O L T A G E S E N S I N G (A U T O M A I N S F A I L U R E I N G C C P 1 . 3 O N L Y ) GE N E R A T O R VO L T A G E LIN E VO L T A G E CU R R E N T T R A N S F O R M E R US E S C R E E N E D T W I S T E D P A I R C A B L E W I T H 1 2 0 O H M I M P E D A N C E FO R R S 4 8 5 C O M M U N I C A T I O N S . F I T 1 2 0 O H M R E S I S T O R B E T W E E N TE R M I N A L S 5 1 A N D 5 2 I F T H E C O N T R O L L E R I S T H E F I R S T O R L A S T DE V I C E O N T H E R S 4 8 5 P H Y S I C A L L I N K . DI G I T A L I N P U T S A T O H : S W I T C H T O N E G A T I V E DI G I T A L O U T P U T S A & B : S W I T C H E S T O S U P P L Y P O S I T I V E F R O M T E R M I N A L 3 DI G I T A L O U T P U T S C T O H : S W I T C H E S T O S U P P L Y P O S I T I V E F R O M T E R M I N A L 2 AN A L O G I N P U T S A & D : C A N B E C O N F I G U R E D A S R E S I S T I V E , 0 - 1 0 V O R 4 - 2 0 m A I N P U T AN A L O G I N P U T S B & C : R E S I S T I V E I N P U T AL L A N A L O G I N P U T S C A N B E C O N F I G U R E D A S D I G I T A L I N P U T S AI-RTN 1 1 1 1229B-A47 WH-18 CU S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - G C C P C O N T R O L L E R IN P U T A N D O U T P U T C O N F I G U R A T I O N SH E E T 6 SH E E T 7 SH O W I N G A L L A V A I L A B L E O P T I O N S VO L T A G E R E G U L A T O R P A N E L T E R M I N A L B L O C K L A Y O U T F7 1 2 F8 1 2 F9 1 2 14 1 1 R1 L2L1 EL E C T R I C A L L Y O P E R A T E D C B (L E F T , R I G H T O R R E A R O F G E N S E T ) FO R S E C O N D C B 14 11 ST R EM A X 2 MA S T E R P A C T VO L A T G E R E G U L A T O R S U B P A N E L (R E A R O F G E N S E T ) J1 9 3 9 C A B L E US E 1 5 3 - 2 7 0 7 O R E Q U I V A L E N T CU S T O M E R SU P P L I E D 20 8 / 2 2 0 / 2 4 0 V A C US E 1 6 9 - 8 6 7 0 C O N N E C T O R WIT H 1 5 5 - 2 2 7 6 W E D G E 29 30 31 32 37 38 39 40 8 A- C 1 EN G I N E I N T E R F A C E H A R N E S S FO R S E C O N D C B A1 A2 DC SU P P L Y CU S T O M E R SU P P L I E D CU S T O M E R SU P P L I E D (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) SU P P L I E D CU S T O M E R SU P P L I E D CU S T O M E R AU X - N O , N C A N D C O M I S C O M M O N F O R IN T E R F A C E C O N N E C T O R DC P O W E R S U P P L Y GC C P 1 . 2 / 1 . 3 (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (8 A W G ) (8 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 4 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (1 6 A W G ) (E N G - R U N ) WA L L M O U N T P A N E L (1 8 A W G ) 14 11 (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) (1 8 A W G ) L F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R (L E F T , R I G H T , O R R E A R O F G E N S E T ) P & R F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R MA N U A L O P E R A T E D (L E F T , R I G H T , O R R E A R O F G E N S E T ) P F R A M E C I R C U I T B R E A K E R EL E C T R I C A L L Y O P E R A T E D (L E F T , R I G H T , O R R E A R O F G E N S E T ) TE E R E C (1 6 A W G ) P,R , L F R A M E B R E A K E R A2 A1ST R ST R (E N G - R U N ) R1 CU S T O M E R C O N N E C T I O N S - R E M O T E M O U N T I N G P A N E L I N T E R F A C I N G F1 F2 B2 A2 C2 C2 24 B1 A1 C1 21 11 12 14 K2 K1 U1 C1 C1 1 C1 1 24 U2 C2 C1 2 21 11 12 14 1 2 0V +2 4 V 1 2 CB B - P O S CB - C L S CB - O P E N CB - T R I P CB 1 - D I 0 3 CB - B N E G CB 1 - D I 0 4 AU X - C AU X - N C AU X - N O A B C A B C A B C A B C CO N N E C T S T O A - C 3 (3 E - 3 3 7 0 ) V-N E U T CO N N E C T S T O V G - C 3 ( 3 E - 3 3 8 2 ) US E 1 5 5 - 2 2 7 3 C O N N E C T O R WIT H 1 5 5 - 2 2 6 3 W E D G E 123456 123456 GN D GN D BT R Y P O S BT R Y N E G EN G R U N GN D BT R Y P O S BT R Y N E G BT R Y N E G 4 C B O P E N - A 4 ( D C + ) 3 C B C L O S E - A 2 ( D C + ) 2 S P R I N G C H A R G E M O T O R - A 1 ( D C - ) 1 S P R I N G C H A R G E M O T O R - B 4 ( D C + ) 1 S H U N T T R I P - C 2 ( D C + ) 2 S H U N T T R I P - C 1 ( D C - ) 3 A U X - C O M ( 1 1 ) 4 A U X - N O ( 1 4 ) 5 A U X - N C ( 1 2 ) 6 T R I P U N I T P O W E R - F 2 ( D C + ) 7 T R I P U N I T P O W E R - F 1 ( D C - ) 8 1 2 AU X - N C CB 1 - D I 0 3 AU X - N O CB - B P O S CB - C L S CB - T R I P CB - O P E N AU X - C O M CB B - N E G ES T O P N O CB 2 - D I 0 4 DO 6 1 S H U N T T R I P - C 2 ( D C + ) 2 S H U N T T R I P - C 1 ( D C - ) 3 A U X - C O M ( 1 1 ) 4 A U X - N O ( 1 4 ) 5 A U X - N C ( 1 2 ) 6 7 8 1 S H U N T T R I P - C 2 ( D C + ) 2 S H U N T T R I P - C 1 ( D C - ) 3 A U X - C O M ( 1 1 ) 4 A U X - N O ( 1 4 ) 5 A U X - N C ( 1 2 ) 6 T R I P U N I T P O W E R - F 2 ( D C + ) 7 T R I P U N I T P O W E R - F 1 ( D C - ) 8 ES T O P N O DO - D CB - B N E G DO 6 SH E E T 8 Annunciators ENVIRONMENTAL TESTING STANDARD ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY BS EN 61000-6-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard for the Industrial Environment BS EN 61000-6-4 EMC Generic Emission Standard for the Industrial Environment ELECTRICAL SAFETY BS EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including Electrical Business Equipment TEMPERATURE BS EN 60068-2-1 Ab/Ae Cold Test -30 °C BS EN 60068-2-2 Bb/Be Dry Heat +70°C VIBRATION BS EN 60068-2-6 Ten sweeps in each of three major axes 5 Hz to 8 Hz @ +/-7.5 mm, 8 Hz to 500 Hz @ 2 gn SHOCK BS EN 60068-2-27 Three shocks in each of three major axes 15 gn in 11 Ms HUMIDITY BS EN 60068-2-30 Db Damp Heat Cyclic 20/55 °C @ 95% RH 48 Hours BS EN 60068-2-78 Cab Damp Heat Static 40 °C @ 93% RH 48 Hours DEGREES OF PROTECTION PROVIDED BY ENCLOSURES BS EN 60529 IP65 – Front of module when installed into the control panel with the supplied sealing gasket. SPECIFICATION CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE RATING 8 V to 35 V Continuous CRANKING DROPOUTS Able to survive 0 V for 50 mS, providing supply was at least 10 V before dropout and supply recovers to 5 V. This is achieved without the need for internal batteries. LEDs and backlight will not be maintained during cranking. MAXIMUM OPERATING CURRENT 112 mA at 12 V, 53 mA at 24 V MAXIMUM STANDBY CURRENT 74 mA at 12 V, 35 mA at 24 V DIMENSIONS OVERALL 355 mm x 369 mm x 90 mm 13.6’’ x 14.5” x 3.5” PANEL CUT-OUT 286 mm x 326 mm x 93 mm 11.2” x 12.8” x 3.6” MAXIMUM PANEL THICKNESS 8 mm 0.3” Remote Annunicator Moduel It is an LED expansion module that can be used with compatible control modules. The module has been designed to display a maximum of eight individual LED indications up to a maximum distance of 1 KM (0.6 miles). The Annunciator will consist of two modules to provide a 16 Channel Fault annunciation. It is presented in a vertical enclosure. It includes an alarm sounder that is triggered when the host controller detects an alarm condition. The alarm can be muted using the front push button. The Panels will be fitted with removable label cards which can be used to identify the standard NFPA alarms if desired. It includes individual LEDs for each channel and a ‘Power On’ LED that flashes when the link with the host controller is lost. Features • The Remote annunciator has an integral Sounder/Horn • Eight configurable LEDs (per module) • Works up to 1 KM (0.6 miles) from the host controller • A single controller can support five Caterpillar configured remote annunciator control boxes Picture shown may not reflect actual configuration. www.cat.com/electricpower ©2023 Caterpillar All rights reserved. Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice. The International System of Units (SI) is used in this publication. CAT, CATERPILLAR, LET’S DO THE WORK, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Corporate Yellow”, the “Power Edge” and Cat “Modern Hex” trade dress as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission. MECHANICAL DRAWINGS Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco 299.39in 205.82in 93.56in 4 8 . 3 2 i n 7 4 . 9 0 i n 1 3 . 3 1 i n 9.23in 1 2 3 . 1 9 i n 0 . 7 7 i n D C B AA B C D 12345678 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF HOLT CAT. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HOLT CAT IS PROHIBITED. PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/16" ANGULAR: MACH 1/2° BEND CHECKED ENG APPROVAL MFG. APPROVAL DATENAME TITLE: SIZEB DWG. NO.REV UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 25-0079 31455409 C18 PGAM DO NOT SCALE DRAWING ZERO PLANE REFERENCE (IF SHOWN) C OF CRANKSHAFT C OF ENGINE REAR FACE OF CYL BLOCK L01 03 02 L PROJECT DATA DRAWN CUSTOMER: DRAWING STATUS: ORDER ID: WORK ORDER: PROJECT: 44.81 93.09 196.30 290.00 8 5 . 4 3 145.18 162.12 29.53 1 2 . 6 7 4 . 7 6 3 1 . 5 2 1 5 . 5 9 2 0 . 5 2 4 . 8 4 93.70 9 . 1 3 45.73 Light Light BatteriesBatteries D C B AA B C D 12345678 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF HOLT CAT. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HOLT CAT IS PROHIBITED. PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/16" ANGULAR: MACH 1/2° BEND CHECKED ENG APPROVAL MFG. APPROVAL DATENAME TITLE: SIZEB DWG. NO.REV UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 25-0079 31455409 C18 PGAM NoEncl DO NOT SCALE DRAWING ZERO PLANE REFERENCE (IF SHOWN) C OF CRANKSHAFT C OF ENGINE REAR FACE OF CYL BLOCK L01 03 02 L PROJECT DATA DRAWN CUSTOMER: DRAWING STATUS: ORDER ID: WORK ORDER: PROJECT: 6 3 . 9 5 290.00 1 2 2 . 9 2 1 1 7 . 2 1 1 2 2 . 4 3 4 8 . 3 1 3.44 7.81 27.00 3 5 . 0 0 1 9 . 3 8 98.55 16.94 29.13 Light D C B AA B C D 12345678 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF HOLT CAT. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HOLT CAT IS PROHIBITED. PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/16" ANGULAR: MACH 1/2° BEND CHECKED ENG APPROVAL MFG. APPROVAL DATENAME TITLE: SIZEB DWG. NO.REV UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 25-0079 31455409 C18 PGAM NoEncl DO NOT SCALE DRAWING ZERO PLANE REFERENCE (IF SHOWN) C OF CRANKSHAFT C OF ENGINE REAR FACE OF CYL BLOCK L01 03 02 L PROJECT DATA DRAWN CUSTOMER: DRAWING STATUS: ORDER ID: WORK ORDER: PROJECT: 1 0 7 . 8 3 86.49 82.76 75.02 4 8 . 3 1 7 4 . 1 1 6.74 6 4 . 6 2 7 1 . 6 6 63.60 15.26 3 5 . 0 0 4 5 . 7 8 4 5 . 6 2 Light Light Battery D C B AA B C D 12345678 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF HOLT CAT. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HOLT CAT IS PROHIBITED. PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/16" ANGULAR: MACH 1/2° BEND CHECKED ENG APPROVAL MFG. APPROVAL DATENAME TITLE: SIZEB DWG. NO.REV UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 25-0079 31455409 C18 PGAM NoEncl DO NOT SCALE DRAWING ZERO PLANE REFERENCE (IF SHOWN) C OF CRANKSHAFT C OF ENGINE REAR FACE OF CYL BLOCK L01 03 02 L PROJECT DATA DRAWN CUSTOMER: DRAWING STATUS: ORDER ID: WORK ORDER: PROJECT: LS 4707 Dry weight 20,040 lbs GENERAL NOTES:GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALUMINUM RAMP, LANDING AND STAIR SECTIONS SHALL BE A RIGID, FREE-SPAN DESIGN. 2. DESIGN OF THE ALUMINUM STRUCTURES SHALL CONFORM TO THE CURRENT EDITION OF THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION SPECIFICATIONS AND GUIDELINES FOR ALUMINUM STRUCTURES. 3. ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION USING 6000 SERIES ALUMINUM ALLOYS. STRUCTURAL MEMBERS TO BE 6061-T6, 6063-T6 AND 6005-T5 ALUMINUM ALLOY. 4. ALUMINUM WILL BE STANDARD MILL FINISH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. WELDING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/AWS D1.2/D1.2M-2014 GAS METAL ARC WELDING (GMAW) PROCESS BY EXPERIENCED OPERATORS. 6. ALL FASTENERS TO BE 18-8 (SERIES 304) STAINLESS STEEL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. LANDING, RAMP AND STAIR SECTIONS ARE TO BE ENGINEERED FOR A 100 PSF LIVE LOAD. 8. LANDING AND RAMP WALKING SURFACES SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR A MINIMUM CONCENTRATED VERTICAL LOAD OF 300 LBS APPLIED EVENLY OVER A 12" x 12" AREA. STAIR TREADS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND A MINIMUM CONCENTRATED LOAD OF 300 LBS OVER A 4 SQUARE INCH AREA. 9. RAMP AND LANDING GUARDRAILS TO BE 42 INCH MINIMUM HEIGHT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. (34 AND 38 INCH TWO-LINE RAMP RAILS AND 34 AND 38 INCH VERTICAL PICKET RAMP RAILS AS WELL AS CUSTOM DESIGN RAMP RAILS AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST FOR SYSTEMS NO MORE THAN 30 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED GROUND LEVEL.) 10. HANDRAIL ASSEMBLIES AND GUARDRAILS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO RESIST A LOAD OF 50 PLF APPLIED IN ANY DIRECTION AT THE TOP OF THE RAIL. 11. HANDRAIL ASSEMBLIES AND GUARDRAILS SHALL BE ABLE TO RESIST A SINGLE CONCENTRATED LOAD OF 200 LBS, APPLIED IN ANY DIRECTION AT ANY POINT ALONG THE TOP OF THE RAIL. THIS LOAD NEED NOT BE ASSUMED TO ACT CONCURRENTLY WITH THE LOADS SPECIFIED IN THE PRECEDING PARAGRAPH. 12. INTERMEDIATE RAILS (ALL THOSE EXCEPT HANDRAILS), BALUSTERS AND PANEL FILLERS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND A HORIZONTALLY APPLIED NORMAL LOAD OF 50 LBS ON AN AREA EQUAL TO 1 SQUARE FOOT, INCLUDING OPENINGS AND SPACE BETWEEN RAILS. 13. GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS SHALL BE DESIGNED SO THAT A 4 (FOUR) INCH SPHERE CANNOT PASS THROUGH ANY OPENING. 14. DECK SURFACE SHALL BE A SLIP RESISTANT, EXTRUDED ALUMINUM DECKING WITH A TRIPLE I-BEAM, SELF-MATING DESIGN. 15. ALL SURFACES, MEMBERS AND THEIR WELDED JOINTS SHALL BE SMOOTH AND FREE FROM SHARP OR JAGGED EDGES. 16. ALL DESIGNS SHOWN HEREIN ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE PENDING FIELD VERIFICATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS. 17. CONCEALED AND UNEXPOSED SURFACES: WILL NOT BE CLEANED NOR DEBURRED. EXCEPTION (WHEN REQUESTED): UNDERSIDE OF PLATFORMS EXCEEDING 60” IN ELEVATION. 18. ANCHORING OF PRODUCT TO GRADE BY OTHERS Ex i s t i n g l a w p r o t e c t s H Y D R O r i g h t o f p o s s e s s i o n to t h i s d r a w i n g . T h e d e s i g n o r t h e d r a w i n g m u s t no t , w i t h o u t w r i t t e n p e r m i s s i o n o f H Y D R O , b e pu b l i s h e d , c o p i e d , r e p r o d u c e d , m a n u f a c t u r e d o r ex p l o i t e d i n a n y u n a u t h o r i z e d w a y . HY D R O 12 5 S u p e r i o r D r i v e De l h i , L A 7 1 2 3 2 Ph o n e : 1 ( 8 0 0 ) 7 7 9 - 5 5 0 9 Fa x : 1 ( 8 6 6 ) 8 4 0 - 4 5 6 6 PU R P O S E S O N L Y FO R Q U O T A T I O N COVER 4' x 6' LANDING 4' x 6' LANDING 4' x 6'-4" LANDING Ex i s t i n g l a w p r o t e c t s H Y D R O r i g h t o f p o s s e s s i o n to t h i s d r a w i n g . T h e d e s i g n o r t h e d r a w i n g m u s t no t , w i t h o u t w r i t t e n p e r m i s s i o n o f H Y D R O , b e pu b l i s h e d , c o p i e d , r e p r o d u c e d , m a n u f a c t u r e d o r ex p l o i t e d i n a n y u n a u t h o r i z e d w a y . HY D R O 12 5 S u p e r i o r D r i v e De l h i , L A 7 1 2 3 2 Ph o n e : 1 ( 8 0 0 ) 7 7 9 - 5 5 0 9 Fa x : 1 ( 8 6 6 ) 8 4 0 - 4 5 6 6 PU R P O S E S O N L Y FO R Q U O T A T I O N 01 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco x2 Breakers x2 GENERAL WIRE PULL Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Waco 1 | P a g e HOLT CAT Wire Pull Recommendations Note 1: IF a Remote Annunciator is present: •(1) 14 ‐ 16 AWG Stranded for Battery connection (Positive, Red cable) •(1) 14 ‐ 16 AWG Stranded for Battery connection (Negative, Black cable) •(1) 18 Gauge 3‐Wire Shielded – Annunciator cable J1939 CAN wire Note 2: IF remote E‐Stop Button is present: (2) 14ga. STRANDED Wires from generator control panel to the E‐Stop Button location (NO COLOR REQUIRMENT) CO N T R O L PA N E L GENERATOR PACKAGE See Note (1 & 4) Re m o t e An n u n c i a t o r BUILDING TRANSFER SWITCH RE M O T E E‐ST O P BU T T O N See Note (2) See Note (3) UTILITY POWER 2 | P a g e Note 3: Wiring between Generator and ATS (6) 14ga. STRANDED Wires from generator control panel to the ATS for auto‐start wiring (NO COLOR REQUIRMENT) o Auto start, EPS Supply and Load, 1 spare set – 3 pairs Note 4: IF a SECOND Remote Annunciator is present this wire pull must be in between the annunciators (daisy‐chained): •(1) 14 ‐ 16 AWG Stranded for Battery connection (Positive, Red cable) •(1) 14 ‐ 16 AWG Stranded for Battery connection (Negative, Black cable) •(1) 18 Gauge 3‐Wire Shielded – Annunciator cable J1939 CAN wire Note 5: Shore power must be installed. See below for examples on Shore Power requirement. On site electricians need to make sure that when they make those wire pulls that the size of the cable and the breaker supplying the power are sized properly. Shore Power Examples Note: Information taken from the cut sheets in the submittal Example 1: A C18, 750kW packaged generator set, 480V, 3phase, with the following additional equipment. Space heater, 20A GFIC Receptacles, 240V Jacket Water Heater, 125A Load Center and a 10A Battery Charger. Since shore power will be run to the load center, it’s best to run a 125A, 120/240V Single phase circuit to it. Example 2: A D200, 200kW packaged generator set, 208V, 3phase, with the following additional equipment. 1800 watt, 120V Jacket Water Heater, and a 10A Battery Charger. First you need to find the number of amps of the Jacket Water Heater. The formula is as follows: Amps = watts / Voltage, or 1800 / 120 = 15A Now you add the 10A from the battery charger and the 15A from the jacket water heater to come up with a total of 25A. Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Wac Submittal (1)Fuel Polishers This submittal was prepared based on the customer quote and is to meet the intent of the customer supplied specification 4.500 3.000 RIGHT VIEWFRONT VIEW 42.000 57.455 3.000 Ø0.438 (18) 3.000 TYP. 3.075 14.000 21.028 66.028±1.000 28.635±1.000 11.000 3.075 REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139333 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A PICTORIAL 1 OF 2 Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:8.1946 4 G.P.M. OPTION 404, CAST ALUMINUM, 1/2" INLET, 3/8" OUTLET 7 G.P.M. OPTION 407, CAST ALUMINUM, 3/4" INLET, 1/2" OUTLET 10 G.P.M. OPTION 410, CAST ALUMINUM, 3/4" INLET, 1/2" OUTLET 17 G.P.M. OPTION 417, CAST ALUMINUM, 3/4" INLET, 1/2" OUTLET 2 G.P.M. OPTION 502, CAST IRON, 1/2" INLET, 1/2" OUTLET 5 G.P.M. OPTION 505, CAST IRON, 3/4" INLET, 3/4" OUTLET 7 G.P.M. OPTION 507, CAST IRON, 1" INLET, 1" OUTLET 10 G.P.M. OPTION 510, CAST IRON, 1" INLET, 1" OUTLET 15 G.P.M. OPTION 515, CAST IRON, 1" INLET, 1" OUTLET 0.75 H.P. OPTION 822, 3PH, 60HZ, 208-230/460VAC, TEFC, 56C-FACE 0.75 H.P. OPTION 845, 1PH, 60HZ, 115/230VAC, TEFC, 56C-FACE 1.0 H.P. OPTION 945, 1PH, 60HZ, 115/208-230VAC, TEFC, 56C-FACE 1.0 H.P. OPTION 922, 3PH, 60HZ, 208-230/460VAC, TEFC, 56C-FACE 0.50 H.P. OPTION 722, 3PH, 60HZ, 208-230/460VAC, TEFC, 56C-FACE 0.50 H.P. OPTION 745, 1PH, 60HZ, 115/230VAC, TEFC, 56C-FACE Ø0.750(4) 3.000 42.000 1.0001.000 OUTLET 62.000 1.00" NPT. INLET 1.00" NPT. Ø0.438(18) 4.500(TYP.) 3.000 11.000 56.000 NEXUS STYLE UNION 1.00" NPT. MALE BODY UN PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRV 0.75" NPT. 0-300 PSI. SET @ 65 P.S.I. FLOW SWITCH FLS 0.75" NPT. 24VDC 1.8" PROBE LENGTH CHECK VALVE CV 1.00" NPT. SPRING TYPE BRONZE BODY BALL VALVE 1.00" NPT. FULL PORT BRASS BODY BV1 VACUUM GAUGE 2" DIA. 0-30HG W/ ISOLATION VALVE VG PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 4-20mA W/ ISOLATION VALVE PT1-PT3 PRE-FILTER 1.50" NPT. ALUMINUM HEAD W/ 10-MICRON SPIN-ON ELEMENT PF LINE PRESSURE SWITCH 0.25" NPT. SET @ 60 P.S.I. PS FINAL FILTER HOUSING W/ 5-MICRON COALESCER/SEPARATOR ELEMENTS FF 1200 WATT @ 120VAC W/ FAN, THERMOSTAT 32-140°F, & HIGH TEMP. CUT-OUT CABINET HEATER CABINET FUEL LINE LEAK SENSOR FLOAT LS BALL VALVE/ FUEL STRAINER COMBO 1.00" NPT. FEMALE INLET BV/FSR TAILPIECE SIZED TO PUMP INLET PORT MALE TAILPIECE 56.000 58.850 14.000 17.000 SIZED TO PUMP OUTLET PORT 10.000 2.000 14.735 2.000 PT1 PT2PT3 Y-STRAINER MOUNTING BRACKET DRWG #245472B MOTOR MOUNTING BRACKET DRWG #245925 1" OUTLET HOSE CABINET WELDMENT DRWG #241581W NOTES: 1.ALL DIMENSIONS ±0.50" 2.DUE TO SYSTEM COMPLEXITY SOME COMPONENTS MAY NOT BE VISIBLE IN ALL VIEWS CABINET GROUND STUD SS 3/8-16 BOLT 1" OUTLET HOSE 0.75" PRV HOSE INLET HOSE SIZED FOR PUMP INLET GROUND STUD FILTER CANISTER AUTO DRAIN WASTE WATER SYSTEM RIGHT SIDE VIEW LESS OUTER DOORS FRONT VIEW LESS OUTER DOORSLEFT SIDE VIEW LESS OUTER DOORS TOP VIEW LESS OUTER DOORS N5 N4 N4 N4 N5 N6 N6 11 12 T3 1.00" NPT. RIGHT-ANGLE TEE MALExFEMALExFEMALE 150#,BLK. T3 1.50"x4.00" NIPPLE STAINLESS STEEL N2 N3 1.00"x4.00" NIPPLE STAINLESS STEEL N4 1.00"x3.00" NIPPLE STAINLESS STEEL N5 1.00"x10.00" NIPPLE STAINLESS STEEL N3 13 N3 13 1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 3 3 5 6 7 6 11 12 8 14 15 14 MANUAL AIR PURGE VALVE N6 1.00"x5.00" NIPPLE STAINLESS STEEL 10 N5 N2 N4 N4 N4 9 N3 4 2 G.P.M. OPTION 399, CAST ALUMINUM, 1/2" INLET, 3/8" OUTLET 0.33 H.P. OPTION 622, 3PH, 60HZ, 208-230/460VAC, TEFC, 56C-FACE 0.33 H.P. OPTION 645, 1PH, 60HZ, 115/230VAC, TEFC, 56C-FACE REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139334 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A PICTORIAL 2 OF 2 Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:9.5534 3.042 WS2 WS3 6.750 WS1 FRONT VIEWLEFT SIDE VIEW FILTER HOUSING FBO-10 ASSEMBLY W/ SIGHT GLASS PN. 27000500 0.50" NPT. TEE TEE2 STAINLESS STEEL PN. 22533050 SCH. 40 NIPPLE 0.50"x1.50" NPT. STAINLESS STEEL PN. 22514048 (QTY: 2) SQ. HEAD PLUG 0.25" NPT. STAINLESS STEEL PN. 22901010 (QTY: 4) 0.25"x0.125" NPT. REDUCER RB3 BUSHING, STAINLESS STEEL PN. 22403050 (QTY: 3) SQ. HEAD PLUG 0.50" NPT. STAINLESS STEEL PN. 22905601 BALL VALVE BV2 0.25" NPT. PN. 24010090A (QTY: 2) CHECK VALVE CV2 0.125" NPT. BRASS PN. 22923104 SOLENOID VALVE SOL 0.125" NPT. BRASS 115VAC PN. 21704299 WASTE WATER 0.25" HOSE DRAIN LINE WASTE WATER 0.25" HOSE LINE TO HOLDING TANK REDUCER, STAINLESS STEEL PN. TBD FOR WASTE WATER HIGH LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH HOLDING TANK PN. 50000001 WASTE WATER HOLDING TANK VC VENT CAP, 1.00" MNPT. PN. 22953100 0.125"x0.25" WASTE WATER HOLDING TANK 0.25" HOSE DRAIN LINE HOLDING TANK 5 GALLON WASTE WATER POLY CONSTRUCTION PN. 50000000A WATER TANK BRACKET ASSEMBLY DRWG #252398 ALUMINUM BODY SENSOR MANIFOLD (8) 0.25" PORTS, (2) 0.50" PORTS PN. 15220000 OUT WS1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 23 414 6 7 5 4 5 5 6 8 IN 13 12 7 FBO-10 5-MICRON WATER SEPARATOR 11 9 10 REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139345 A JE JE A 06 / 1 6 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A AURO DRAIN DETAIL Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 6 / 2 0 2 5 1:4.3531 SILENCE ALARM PRESS TO RESET ALARM PRESS TO AUTO OFF MANUAL ALARM SUMMARY AVAILABLE POWER REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139336 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A CONTROLLER DETAIL Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:5.5189 SIMPLEX, INC., SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS, U.S.A. www.simplexdirect.com 800-637-8603 COMPACT SMART FILTER REPLACE FILTER ELEMENTS ANNUALLY OR WHEN INDICATED PREFILTER ELEMENT 10-MICRON: SIMPLEX #27000800 COALESCER/SEPARATOR ELEMENT SIMPLEX #27000501 5-MICRON: ELEMENT REPLACE NAMEPLATE FILTER, PRIME THE COALESCER CANISTER WITH WATER UNTIL IT IS VISIBLE IN BOTTOM OF CANISTER, THEN INSTALL FILTER WHEN REPLACING ELEMENT. CONTROLLER NAMEPLATE L1 GREEN L2 RED FUSE CHART NAMEPLATE SILENCE ALARM PRESS TO RESET ALARM PRESS TO AUTO OFF MANUAL ALARM SUMMARY AVAILABLE POWER PB1PB2S1 ENCLOSURE TYPE: LARGEST MOTOR FLA:6 3R -PH FULL LOAD AMPS: A-SYSTEM TOTAL VOLTAGE VAC MODEL HZ 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A 115 1 60 16.0 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: 5 kA RMS SYMMETRICAL, 600V MAXIMUM JOB# SIMPLEX, INC. www.simplexdirect.com 800-637-8603 FLUID VISCOSITY 32-100 SSU CONTROL POWER CIRCUIT: PUMP LIFT 20 FEET MAXIMUM -PH FULL LOAD AMPS: A-SYSTEM TOTAL VOLTAGE VAC HZ PUMP CAPACITY GPM PUMP MOTOR HP: 4 0.33 115 1 60 6 MOTOR POWER CIRCUIT: MAN'F BY NAMEPLATE FUSE REPLACEMENT CHART F21: F22: F23: FOR FIELD WIRING USE COPPER WIRE 60 DEGREE CENTIGRADE OR BETTER F20: F6:15.0 AMP, 600VAC, F3:1.0 AMP, 600VAC, F2:0.3 AMP, 600VAC, F1:2.0 AMP, 600VAC, F5:10.0 AMP, 600VAC, 1.0 AMP, 250VAC TD TD TD TD TD 1.0 AMP, 250VAC 1.0 AMP, 250VAC 1.0 AMP, 250VAC F4:0.3 AMP, 600VAC,TD REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139339 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A NAMEPLATE DETAIL Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:1.0237 TB'C' 1 6 1 3 TB'R' 1 9 TB'A'TB'DC' +- TB'T' PS T1 SUBPANEL DRWG #274278 PLC F1 2A TD GROUND STUD 4.000 1.000 MDS F2 .3A TD F3 1A TD F5 10A TD F6 15A TD F20 1A F21 1A F22 1A F23 1A F0-08ADH-1 ENCLOSURE HEATER KEEP AREA CLEAR OF WIRE & COMPONENTS 400W, 120VAC +-N.C.N.C.C0 Y1 Y3 Y4 Y6 C2 Y16Y14Y13Y11 N.C.Y0 Y2 C1 Y5 Y7 Y17Y15Y10Y12C3GLG N.C.C1 X5 X7 X10 X12 C3 X22X20X17X15X0X2 N.C.X4 X6 C2 X11 X13 X14 X23X21C4X16X1X3C0 PORT1 PORT2 RUN STOP TERM PWR RUN CPU TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 Direct LOGIC 06 Koyo D0-06DR-DY X OUTPUT:6-240V~ INPUT:12-24V- 50-60Hz 3-15mA 2.0A.2.0A.6-27V-PWR:12-24V-20W C MS WD R WS R SAR GROUND STUD 5.000 1 5 TB'PS' GN D TB'PS' RATED @ 30 AMP 2.000 +-1 6 1 3 TB'SOL' 1 20 TB'B' MATERIAL: 14 GA. (.075t) PERFORATED H.R.P.O. STAGGERED 1/8" ROUND PERFORATIONS, 3/16" ON CENTER SPACING, 40% OPEN AREA. 90° B.A. = .138 NOTE AD J . D C O K F4 .3A TD REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139337 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A SUBPANEL DETAIL Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:2.5101 TB`R' 9 9 SAR 3 6 BLUE BLUE 16 GA.16 GA.16 GA. BLUE 1 2 3 TB`PS'5 14 GA. BLACK 15A 4 TD BLACK 14 GA. W/ BUILT IN FAN, HIGH TEMP. CUT-OUT & THERMOSTAT 32-140°F (L)(N) WHITE 14 GA. 1200W @ 120VAC CABINET HEATER 45 TB`PS' 14 GA. BLACK WHITE 31TB`A'2 4 G L N POWER SUPPLY 100-240VAC INPUT, 50/60HZ 24VDC OUTPUT, 60W PS + V V - 2A F1 BLACK 14 GA. BLACK WHITEGREEN TB`DC' + + - - RED BLACK/ YELLOW TD 5 6 JUMPER JUMPER 14 GA. BLACK 10A F5 GROUND STUD BLACK 14 GA.(L) (N)WHITE 14 GA. TB`A' 5 TD CONTROLLER HEATER 400W,120VAC ON @ 41°F FIXED THERMOSTAT OFF @ 59°F #16 AWG OR LARGER DEPENDING ON LENGTH OF RUN USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY 60°C OR HIGHER F6 SUMMARY ALARM CONTACT CONTACTS RATED 10A @ 125/250VAC 10A @ 30VDC MOT TB`PS' C L2 T2 L1 T1 T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 N 14 GA. BLACK 14 GA. GREEN 14 GA. BLACK L3 T3 12 GA. GREEN GROUND STUD 12 GA. BLACK 14 GA. BLACK DEVICES OUTSIDE 508A PANEL MOT PUMP/MOTOR 115VAC,1Ø,60HZ L GL 12 GA. BLACK 12 GA. WHITE N 12 GA. GREEN #12 AWG OR LARGER DEPENDING ON LENGTH OF RUN USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY 60°C OR HIGHER TORQUE TO 15IN.-LB. CONTROL POWER INPUT 115VAC,1Ø,60HZ CIRCUIT BREAKER 20 AMP MAX (BY OTHERS) PUMP MOTOR POWER INPUT 115VAC,1Ø,60HZ CIRCUIT BREAKER 20 AMP MAX (BY OTHERS) MDS N L1 T1 L2 T2 L3 T3 G 21 3 4 5 GND 14 GA. BLACK 14 GA. BLACK 14 GA. WHITE GREEN MS SET MOTOR OVERLOAD TO JUMPERS NAMEPLATE FLA. JUMPERS REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139340 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A WIRING DIAGRAM 1 Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:1.7254 C LG CG PLC D0-06DR-D G - 24VDC PORT 1 J2J1 OPERATOR INTERFACE CABLE EA-2CBL YELLOW GREEN JUMPER RED RED G RED BLACK/ STRIPE YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE A2 RED 21 RED RED DC- DC+ 24VDC INPUT RED YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE R RED 1A F20 5 10 15 6 1 11 PORT 2 RED X0C0 X1 X2 X3 X4C1 X5 X6 X7 X10C2 X11 X12 X13 X14C3 X15 X16 X17 X20C4 X21 X22 X23 YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4C1 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y10C2 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14C3 Y15 Y16 Y17 WA T E R S E N S O R 1 PR E S S T O R E S E T SI L E N C E A L A R M 11 12 EMERGENCY STOP REMOVE JUMPER TO INSTALL RED EM E R G E N C Y S T O P PU M P O V E R L O A D T R I P P E D RED RED A2 WSR A1 RED AH ALARM HORN L1 POWER AVAILABLE L2 SUMMARY ALARM A1 RED YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE RED 1 2 3 4 5 6 JUMPER TB`B'2 RED AL A R M H O R N SU M M A R Y A L A R M PU M P S T A R T RED MS PUMP MOTOR OVERLOAD AUX YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE FUEL LINE LEAK SENSOR 9 RED 1 RED LO S S O F F L O W WA T E R S E N S O R P O W E R RE L A Y 2 LE A K D E T E C T 10 TB`C' WH I T E TX D + TX D - GR E E N RX D + RE D RX D - BL A C K 9 1013 6 OV BA R E 81411 1215 JUMPER JUMPER 1 2 3 15HD MALE RS-485/422 RS-485 MODBUS RTU 9600 BAUD, NO PARITY 1 STOP BIT, BELDEN 9841 3 14 SAR 13 RED SU M M A R Y A L A R M RE L A Y PRS PRESSURE 8 RED 1 RED SWITCH HI G H F U E L L I N E PR E S S U R E S W I T C H C0 DETAIL 'A' RED BLACK 7 GRAY 14 11 WSR 1716 + - TB`DC' RED STRIPE YELLOW BLACK/ DEVICES OUTSIDE 508A PANEL 5 8 7 BLACK GRAY 2 3 T1 12VA 120VAC 12VAC 2TB`A' WHITE BLACK 5 GRAY WDR RED WA T E R D R A I N RE L A Y YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE SEE DETAIL 'A' WS1 WS2 BLACKBLACK WS3 RED BLACK SHIELDED WIRE 18 19 20 GRAY WHITE GRAYGRAYGRAY WHITE WA T E R S E N S O R 2 WA T E R S E N S O R 3 RED WA T E R H O L D I N G T A N K HI G H L E V E L F L O A T 2 13 TO BMSYELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE RED FLOWSWITCH FLS +- CO M N. C . A BC 1 2 3 N. O . POWER RELAY RED REDRED BLACK/ YELLOW STRIPE RED 7 RED LS DIODE REDRED RED PB1 PRESS TO SILENCE ALARM HORN RED PB2 PRESS TO RESET ALARM SM A R T F I L T E R REDRED 4 3 S1 H.O.A. SWITCH RED RED HA N D ( M A N U A L M O D E ) SM A R T F I L T E R AU T O M O D E TB`A'TB`A' 3 BLACK WATER DRAIN SOLENOID VALVE SOL 16 GA. 115VAC, N.C. 1411 WDR BLACK 20 GA. BLACK 16 GA. 1 BLACK 20 GA. TB`SOL' DEVICES OUTSIDE 508A PANEL 2 TB`SOL' 6WHITE 16 GA. WHITE 16 GA. BLACK 16 GA. HAND-OFF-AUTO 1A F21 1A F22 SOLENOID VALVE ONLY INSTALLED W/ AUTO DRAIN SYSTEM WS1 USED ON ALL SYSTEMS WS2-3 ONLY USED W/ AUTO DRAIN SYSTEM F3 1A TD F2 0.3A TD OPTION OPTION A2 A1 -TB`DC' YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE TOP MIDDLE BOTTOM TO P MI D D L E BO T T O M BLACK 14 GA. 22 RED YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE YELLOW BLACK/ STRIPE JUMPER JUMPER GREEN REDRED + GREEN HLF YELLOW WHITE F4 0.3A TD REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139341 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A WIRING DIAGRAM 2 Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:2.3994 8 POINT, 0-20mA, F0-08ADH-1 ANALOG INPUT MODULE, SLOT 4 BLACK/ RED YELLOW STRIPE 0V +24V CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 COM CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 COM COM TB`T' RED 2 TB`T'1 PRESSURE SENSOR 4-20mA 1 2 WHITE BROWN PT1 1A F23 RED RED TB'B' TB'DC' DEVICES OUTSIDE 508A PANEL 3 5 4 6 PRESSURE SENSOR 4-20mA 1 2 WHITE BROWN PT2 PRESSURE SENSOR 4-20mA 1 2 WHITE BROWN PT3 RED RED RED RED PT1 PRESSURE BEFORE PREFILTER PT2 PRESSURE PREFILTER TO COALESCER PT3 PRESSURE AFTER COALESCER REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139342 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A WIRING DIAGRAM 3 Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:1.4679 REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139338 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A WIRING LEGEND Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:1.0768 REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139335 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A ASSEMBLY LEGEND Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:1.4706 FUEL FILTRATION SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION GENERAL:THE AUTOMATED FUEL FILTRATION SYSTEM PROVIDES TWO PRIMARY FUNCTIONS: 1. FILTRATION OF FUEL IN STORAGE TANK(S). 2. FUEL TRANSFER FROM TANK TO TANK VIA THE FILTRATION PROCESS. (MULTI-TANK SYSTEMS ONLY.) FILTRATION AND FUEL TRANSFER (IF APPLICABLE) IS DRIVEN BY THE ONBOARD FUEL PUMP. THE FUEL PASSES THROUGH A STRAINER, THEN PASSES THROUGH A PARTICULATE FILTER FOLLOWED BY A COALESCING SEPARATOR BEFORE RETURNING TO THE STORAGE TANKS. FILTRATION: THE FILTRATION CYCLE IS ACCOMPLISHED EITHER BY MANUALLY STARTING AND STOPPING THE FILTRATION CYCLE AT THE GRAPHIC FILTRATION CONTROL PANEL, OR A REGULAR SCHEDULE CAN BE PROGRAMMED INTO THE SYSTEM AT THE TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER (AUTO MODE). MANUAL MODE: 1.AT THE CONTROL PANEL GRAPHIC INTERFACE PRESS THE "FILTER MODE SELECT" BUTTON. 2.SELECT "MANUAL". 3.PRESS THE "SELECT TANK" BUTTON AND ENTER THE DESIRED TANK NUMBER. 4.ENTER THE AMOUNT TO FILTER. IF "0" IS ENTERED THE FILTER WILL RUN MANUALLY UNTIL STOPPED. 5.PRESS "START MANUAL FILTRATION". FOR MULTI-TANK SYSTEMS THE SUPPLY AND RETURN VALVES AT THE SELECTED TANK ARE ENERGIZED. THE VALVES AT ALL OTHER TANKS REMAIN CLOSED. 6.WHEN THE CONTROL VALVE IS OPEN, AN END SWITCH IN THE MOTOR ACTUATOR INDICATES TO THE PLC THAT THE VALVE IS OPEN. THE PUMP STARTS. 7.A FLOW SWITCH ESTABLISHES FLOW IN THE SYSTEM. IF NO FLOW IS ESTABLISHED IN 30 SECONDS, THE PUMP SHUTS DOWN, THE CONTROL VALVES (IF APPLICABLE) ARE DE-ENERGIZED, AND A LOSS OF FLOW ALARM IS ACTIVATED AT THE TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER. AUTO MODE: 1.WHEN PLACED IN THE AUTO MODE AT THE TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER, THE FILTRATION SYSTEM CAN BE PROGRAMMED TO FILTER THE STORAGE TANK(S) ON A REGULAR PRE-PROGRAMMED FILTRATION SCHEDULE. THE CONTROL VALVE SEQUENCING IS THE SAME AS THE MANUAL FILTRATION MODE ABOVE. THE OPERATOR ENTERS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION INTO THE TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER: a.SELECT AUTO MODE b.TANK NUMBER c.DAY OF WEEK TO FILTER d.START TIME e.FILTRATION DURATION (HOURS) FUEL TRANSFER BETWEEN TANKS: FUEL MAY BE MANUALLY TRANSFERRED BETWEEN TANKS THROUGH THE FILTRATION SYSTEM. (MULTI-TANK SYSTEMS ONLY.) TRANSFER FROM TANK TO TANK: 1.AT THE CONTROL PANEL GRAPHIC FACE PRESS THE "FILTER MODE SELECT" BUTTON. 2.SELECT "TRANSFER". 3.PRESS THE "SOURCE TANK" BUTTON AND ENTER THE DESIRED SOURCE TANK. 4.PRESS THE "DESTINATION TANK" BUTTON AND ENTER THE DESIRED DESTINATION TANK. 5.ENTER THE AMOUNT TO TRANSFER. IF "0" IS ENTERED THE FILTER WILL RUN UNTIL MANUALLY STOPPED, LOW FUEL IN THE SOURCE TANK, OR HIGH FUEL IN THE DESTINATION TANK. 6.PRESS "START MANUAL TRANSFER". THE SUPPLY VALVE AT THE SOURCE TANK AND THE RETURN VALVE AT THE DESTINATION TANK ARE ENERGIZED. ALL OTHER VALVES REMAIN CLOSED. 7.WHEN THE CONTROL VALVES ARE OPEN, AN END SWITCH IN THE MOTOR ACTUATOR INDICATES TO THE PLC THAT THE VALVE IS OPEN. THE PUMP STARTS. 8.A FLOW SWITCH ESTABLISHES FLOW IN THE SYSTEM. IF NO FLOW IS ESTABLISHED IN 30 SECONDS, THE PUMP SHUTS DOWN, THE CONTROL VALVES ARE DE-ENERGIZED, AND A LOSS OF FLOW ALARM IS ACTIVATED AT THE TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER. AUTOMATIC WATER DRAIN: WHEN THE WATER LEVEL IN THE COALESCER REACHES A HIGH LEVEL, THE WATER DRAIN SOLENOID AUTOMATICALLY OPENS AND DRAINS THE WATER INTO THE WATER HOLDING TANK. THE WATER DRAIN SOLENOID AUTOMATICALLY CLOSES WHEN THE WATER REACHES THE LOW LEVEL SENSOR IN THE COALESCER. IF THE WATER LEVEL IN THE WATER HOLDING TANK REACHES A HIGH LEVEL, THE ENTIRE SYSTEM IS DISABLED UNTIL THE WATER IS REMOVED FROM THE HOLDING TANK. LEAK IN CONTAINMENT PAN: THE ENTIRE SYSTEM IS HOUSED WITHIN A LIQUID TIGHT CONTAINMENT PAN. THE CONTAINMENT PAN IS MONITORED BY LEAK SENSOR. UPON SENSING A LEAK, THE ENTIRE SYSTEM IS DISABLED UNTIL THE LEAK IS CORRECTED AND THE LIQUID REMOVED FROM THE CONTAINMENT PAN. ALARM CONDITIONS: ALARM CONDITIONS ARE INDICATED ON THE TOUCH SCREEN AND ALARM HORN ON THE GRAPHIC PANEL DISPLAY FOR THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. THE ALARM HORN MAY BE SILENCED BY ACTIVATING THE SILENCE BUTTON ON THE PANEL FACE. 1.RETURN VALVE FAIL (IF APPLICABLE) 2.SUPPLY VALVE FAIL (IF APPLICABLE) 3.PUMP LOSS OF FLOW 4.TANK HIGH FUEL (TYPICAL OF ALL TANKS, WHEN APPLICABLE) 5.TANK LOW FUEL (TYPICAL OF ALL TANKS, WHEN APPLICABLE) 6.LEAK IN CONTAINMENT PAN. 7.SERVICE PREFILTER (PREFILTER HIGH DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE) 8.SERVICE COALESCER (COALESCER HIGH DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE) 9.SYSTEM OVERPRESSURE 10.HOLDING TANK HIGH LEVEL 11.FUEL IN WATER LINE SYSTEM RESET: SUBSEQUENT TO ALARMS AND SHUT DOWN CONDITIONS, THE SYSTEM MUST BE RESET BY ACTIVATING THE RESET BUTTON. THE RESET BUTTON RESTORES NORMAL SYSTEM OPERATION AND CLEARS ALARM INDICATIONS ON THE GRAPHIC PANEL FACE AND TOUCH SCREEN. EMERGENCY STOP: THE CONTROL PANEL IS CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT AN OPTIONAL CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EMERGENCY STOP INPUT. SEE WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION DETAILS. REMOTE ANNUNCIATION IS PROVIDED VIA MODBUS-RTU FOR THE FOLLOWING POINTS: 1.SUMMARY ALARM 2.SERVICE PREFILTER 3.SERVICE COALESCER 4.LOSS OF FLOW 5.LEAK 6.EMERGENCY STOP 7.SYSTEM OVERPRESSURE 8.HOLDING TANK HIGH LEVEL 9.FUEL IN WATER LINE 10.FILTER IN STOP 11.FILTER IN AUTO 12.FILTER IN MANUAL 13.PUMP RUNNING 14.TANK HIGH (TYPICAL OF ALL TANKS, WHEN APPLICABLE) 15.TANK LOW (TYPICAL OF ALL TANKS, WHEN APPLICABLE) 16.TANK SUPPLY VALVE OPEN (TYPICAL OF ALL TANKS, WHEN APPLICABLE) 17.TANK SUPPLY VALVE CLOSED (TYPICAL OF ALL TANKS, WHEN APPLICABLE) 18.TANK RETURN VALVE OPEN (TYPICAL OF ALL TANKS, WHEN APPLICABLE) 19.TANK RETURN VALVE CLOSED (TYPICAL OF ALL TANKS, WHEN APPLICABLE) 20.VALVE SYNC ERROR (WHEN APPLICABLE) REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139343 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:17.1281 TB`R' 9 9 SAR 3 6 BLUE BLUE 16 GA.16 GA.16 GA. BLUE 1 2 3 TB`PS'5 14 GA. BLACK 15A 4 TD BLACK 14 GA. W/ BUILT IN FAN, HIGH TEMP. CUT-OUT & THERMOSTAT 32-140°F (L)(N) WHITE 14 GA. 1200W @ 120VAC CABINET HEATER 45 TB`PS' 14 GA. BLACK WHITE 31TB`A'2 4 G L N POWER SUPPLY 100-240VAC INPUT, 50/60HZ 24VDC OUTPUT, 60W PS + V V - 2A F1 BLACK 14 GA. BLACK WHITEGREEN TB`DC' + + - - RED BLACK/ YELLOW TD 5 6 JUMPER JUMPER 14 GA. BLACK 10A F5 GROUND STUD BLACK 14 GA.(L) (N)WHITE 14 GA. TB`A' 5 TD CONTROLLER HEATER 400W,120VAC ON @ 41°F FIXED THERMOSTAT OFF @ 59°F #16 AWG OR LARGER DEPENDING ON LENGTH OF RUN USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY 60°C OR HIGHER F6 SUMMARY ALARM CONTACT CONTACTS RATED 10A @ 125/250VAC 10A @ 30VDC MOT TB`PS' C L2 T2 L1 T1 T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 N 14 GA. BLACK 14 GA. GREEN 14 GA. BLACK L3 T3 12 GA. GREEN GROUND STUD 12 GA. BLACK 14 GA. BLACK DEVICES OUTSIDE 508A PANEL MOT PUMP/MOTOR 115VAC,1Ø,60HZ L GL 12 GA. BLACK 12 GA. WHITE N 12 GA. GREEN #12 AWG OR LARGER DEPENDING ON LENGTH OF RUN USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY 60°C OR HIGHER TORQUE TO 15IN.-LB. CONTROL POWER INPUT 115VAC,1Ø,60HZ CIRCUIT BREAKER 20 AMP MAX (BY OTHERS) PUMP MOTOR POWER INPUT 115VAC,1Ø,60HZ CIRCUIT BREAKER 20 AMP MAX (BY OTHERS) MDS N L1 T1 L2 T2 L3 T3 G 21 3 4 5 GND 14 GA. BLACK 14 GA. BLACK 14 GA. WHITE GREEN MS SET MOTOR OVERLOAD TO JUMPERS NAMEPLATE FLA. JUMPERS REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00139340 A JE JE A 06 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JE JE _ COMPACT SMARTFILTER 116699-1-1 SFG4C-A WIRING DIAGRAM 1 Appr o v e d 0 6 / 1 2 / 2 0 2 5 1:1.7254 Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Wac Submittal Installation Schematic This submittal was prepared based on the customer quote and is to meet the intent of the customer supplied specification REVISIONSHEET NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF SIMPLEX, INC., AND/OR EXCEPT THAT FOR WHICH IT IS TRANSMITTAL TO OTHERS AND USE PERMISSION ANY COPYING, © 2025 SIMPLEX, INC. ITS SUBSIDIARIES. WITHOUT WRITTEN DA T E RE V RE V I S I O N S & U P D A T E S DE S C R I P T I O N 11 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SIMPLEX, INC. 5300 RISING MOON ROAD SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS 62711-6228 DRAWN BY: SCALE: SHEET SIZE: APPROVED BY: ANSI B LOANED IS PROHIBITED. TOLERANCES X.XXX ±0.005" X.XX ±0.010" X.X ±0.020" FRACTIONAL ±1/32" ANGLES ±1° SURFACES 125 DESCRIPTION / THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A 1234 234 1 AP P R IN T JOB NUMBER B C D A B C D ACD-00140746 A JLT JLT A 08 / 0 5 / 2 0 2 5 OR I G I N A L D E S I G N JL T JL T _ SMARTFILTER PIPING DIAGRAM Appr o v e d 0 8 / 0 5 / 2 0 2 5 1:10.2084 Austin • Brownsville • Corpus Christi • Dallas • Edinburg • Ft Worth • Laredo • Longview • Pflugerville • San Antonio • Victoria • Wac Submittal Installation Manual This submittal was prepared based on the customer quote and is to meet the intent of the customer supplied specification STATIONARY FILTRATION UNIT SMARTFILTER Table of Contents 1 Warnings and Cautions ........................................................1 Safety information symbols 1 Cautions 1 2 Nameplates and Placards .....................................................3 3 Description and Specification ..............................................4 Overview of use 4 Capabilities 4 4 Unpacking .............................................................................6 Included components and parts 6 Primary inspection 6 5 Installation ............................................................................7 Installing wiring 7 Installing control power 7 Installing ball valves 7 Connecting differential pressure switch 9 Installing BMS monitoring 9 Installing Dry Contact Alarms 9 6 Operating Instructions .......................................................10 Setting date and time 10 Scheduling automatic filtration cycles 10 Automatic operation 10 Manual operation 11 Transferring fuel 11 Viewing fuel quality history 12 Viewing tank status 12 Viewing filter quality summary 12 Automatic water drain 13 Water sensor operation 13 Priming the system with water 14 Filter replacement schedule 14 7 Alarms and Warnings ..........................................................15 Last Revision Date: June 8, 2021 For the most up-to-date information for this product and others, please contact Simplex, Inc. at (800) 637-8603 or visit us on the web att http://www.simplexdirect.com. Table of Figures Dimensions .........................................................................................................5 Conduit Entry Area ...........................................................................................7 Ball Valve ..............................................................................................................8 Manual Override Switch .................................................................................8 Valve Connectors ..............................................................................................8 ® Warnings and Cautions — 1 1 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS The following images indicate important safety information: This General warning symbol points out important information that, if not followed, could endanger personal safety and/or property. This Explosion warning symbol points out poten- tial explosion hazards. This Fire warning symbol points out potential fire hazards. This Electrical warning symbol points out poten- tial electrical shock hazards. Improper operation of this equipment such as neglecting its maintenance or being careless can cause possible injury or death. Permit only responsible and capable persons to install, operate, and/or maintain this equipment. • Potentially lethal voltages and amperages are present in these machines. Ensure all steps are taken to render the machine safe before attempting to work on the equipment. • All hardware covered by this manual have dangerous elec- trical voltages and can cause fatal electrical shock. Avoid contact with bare wires, terminals, connections, etc., on the hardware, if applicable. Ensure all appropriate covers, guards, grounds, and barriers are in place before operating the equip- ment. If work must be done around an operating unit, stand on an insulated dry surface to reduce shock hazard. • Do not handle any kind of electrical device while standing in water, while barefoot, or while hands or feet are wet. DAN- GEROUS ELECTRICAL SHOCK MAY RESULT. • If trained personnel must stand on metal or concrete while installing, servicing, adjusting, or repairing this equipment, place insulative mats over a dry wooden platform. Work on the equipment only while standing on such insulative mats. • The National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 250 requires the frame of the equipment to be connected to an approved earth ground and/or grounding rods. This grounding will help prevent dangerous electrical shock that might be caused by a ground fault condition or by static electricity. Never discon- nect the ground wire. • Wire gauge sizes of electrical wiring, cables, and cord sets must be adequate to handle the maximum electrical current Safety information SymbolS ! ! CautionS ®2 — Warnings and Cautions (ampacity) to which they will be subjected. • Before installing or servicing this (and related) equipment, make sure that all power voltage supplies are completely turned off at their source. Failure to do so will result in haz- ardous and possibly fatal electrical shock. • In case of accident caused by electric shock, immediately shut down the source of electrical power. If this is not possible, attempt to free the victim from the live conductor. AVOID DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE VICTIM. Use a noncon- ducting implement, such as a dry rope or board, to free the victim from the live conductor. If the victim is unconscious, apply first aid and seek immediate medical attention. • Never wear jewelry when working on this equipment. Jewel- ry can conduct electricity resulting in electric shock or may get caught in moving components causing injury. • Keep a fire extinguisher near the hardware at all times. Do NOT use any carbon tetra-chloride type extinguisher. Its fumes are toxic, and the liquid can deteriorate wiring insula- tion. Keep the extinguisher properly charged and be familiar with its use. If there are any questions pertaining to fire extin- guishers, please consult the local fire department. • The illustrations in this manual are examples only and may differ from your unit. • Main Disconnect to be provided by installer, rated 600V maximum, sized 150% maximum of rated current. • The system shall be for use with fuel oil as described by NFPA321, “Basic Classification of Flammable and Combusti- ble Liquids.” As defined by this standard, the fuel supply sys- tem shall be for use with “combustible liquids,” those having a flash point at or above 100°F and further defined as Class II or Class III liquids. In no case shall a liquid having a flash point less than 100°F be used. In every case, the system shall not be used or applied at a temperature in excess of the flash point of the contents. Electrical equipment used in the system shall be in accordance with NFPA30, section 5-7, wherein it states “For areas where Class II or Class III liquids only are stored or handled at a temperature below their flash points, the electrical equipment may be installed in accordance with provisions of NFPA70, National Electrical Code, for ordinary locations...” • It is the site’s responsibility to accommodate for thermal ex- pansion. Failure to install relief valves will void your warran- ty, as well as risk a fuel oil spill. ! ® Nameplates and Placards — 3 2 NAMEPLATES AND PLACARDS ®4 — Nameplates and Placards ® Description and Specification — 5 3 DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATION The SmartFilter is a fuel oil filtration, conditioning, and maintenance system for tanks dedicated to diesel or turbine en- gine generator sets or with oil-fired boiler or process heat sys- tems. SmartFilters are intended for use with fuel oil held in bulk, long-term storage, including underground and aboveground main supply tanks, large generator sub-base tanks and large day tanks. Typical tank capacities are in excess of 5,000 gallons, with 10,000-20,000 gallon or larger tanks being common. The SmartFilter draws fuel from the bottom of the tank (25%- 33% of tank capacity) and returns the fuel with minimal disturbance of the settled strata, resulting in good filtration per- formance and removal of contaminants and water. Most fuel contaminants will settle from still fuel, resulting in a stratification of fuel with contaminants concentrated in the lower strata. Therefore, it is necessary to circulate and filter the lower 25-33% of the tank contents. The SmartFilter draws fuel from the bottom of the tank and returns the fuel with minimal disturbance of the settled strata, resulting in good filtration per- formance and removal of contaminants and water. It is recommended to size the SmartFilter to circulate and fil- ter 25-33% of the tank capacity in a nominal 8-hour run period, once each week. Below is an example for a 20,000 gallon tank: • 25% of 20,000g = 5000g to circulate and filter in an 8-hour period. • 5000g/8 hours = 625 GPH or 10.4 GPM • Use the Simplex SFG-10 SmartFilter • For the same tank filtering 33%, or 6,600 gallons, run the SFG-10 for 11 hours or specify the SFG-20 and run for 5 hours There is no absolute rule. If it is desired to filter greater than 33%, or even 100% of the tank, simply specify a larger SmartFil- ter or run the filtration system longer. These are continuous duty devices. The only limit to run time is filter condition, which is constantly monitored by the SmartFilter controller. overview of uSe CapabilitieS ®6 — Description and Specification 4.500 3.000 42.000 3.000 Ø0.438 (18) 3.000 TYP. SMARTFILTER 17.893 11.000 Figure 1 Dimensions PUMPINLET PUMPOUTLET 6.000 ® Unpacking — 7 4 UNPACKING The following items are included with your SmartFilter. If any of the following are not included, please contact your Simplex representative or call Simplex Direct, Inc., at 800-637-8603. 1. SmartFilter 2. Manual 3. Electrical drawings package Preventative visual inspection of the shipping crate and the SmartFilter is advised. Never apply power to a SmartFilter before performing this procedure. The following four-point inspection is recommended before installation and as part of a 6-month maintenance schedule: 1. If the crate shows any signs of damage, examine the SmartFil- ter in the corresponding areas for signs of initial problems. 2. Check the entire outside of the cabinet for any visual damage, which could cause internal electrical or mechanical problems due to reduced clearance. 3. Check electrical connections for tightness. 4. Examine all accessible internal electrical components. inCluded ComponentS and partS primary inSpeCtion If any problems are observed during Primary Inspection, call Simplex 24 hours a day at 800-637-8603 ®8 — Installation 5 INSTALLATION The SmartFilter should be installed on a concrete pad at the desired location, then wired to the power source and any other sensors or system integration connections. The SmartFilter must be completely wired prior to applying pow- er. Failure to follow the wiring information and guide may result in product damage and loss of warranty cover- age. If requested, startup services can be provided by Simplex Onsite, Inc. or Simplex, Inc. to check field wiring before ap- plying power as well as assuring proper operation. To bring cabling into the SmartFilter, pull a hole into the cabinet in the Conduit Entry Area (see Figure 2) and install a 3R-rated conduit connector for access. To install control power, connect a primary 120VAC, 60Hz, 30-amp power source to the SmartFilter’s TB-PS-1-2. Ensure power source and SmartFilter are properly grounded. Ensure that the Manual Override Switches on each ball valve are set to “(A) Auto.” (See “Manual Override Switch” on page 9.) Connect the two cables provided with Motorized Ball Valve 1 to the SmartFilter controller as follows (see “Ball Valve” on page 9 for wire assignments:) 1. Neutral to TB-MBV-1 2. Open Valve to TB-MBV-10 3. Close Valve to TB-MBV-11 4. Actuator Ground to TB-MBV-4 5. Ground to TB-MBV-5 6. Valve Opened to TB-MBV-12 7. Valve Closed to TB-MBV-13 8. Status Common to TB-MBV-14 inStalling wiring inStalling Control power inStalling ball valveS 3.075 PUMPOUTLET Conduit Entry Area Figure 2 Conduit Entry Area ® Installation — 9 Motorized Ball Valve 2 1. Neutral to TB- MBV-2 2. Open Valve to TB- MBV-15 3. Close Valve to TB- MBV-16 4. Actuator Ground to TB-MBV-6 5. Ground to TB- MBV-7 6. Valve Opened to TB-MBV-17 7. Valve Closed to TB- MBV-18 8. Status Common to TB-MBV-19 Motorized Ball Valve 3 1. Neutral to TB- MBV-3 2. Open Valve to TB- MBV-20 3. Close Valve to TB- MBV-21 4. Actuator Ground to TB-MBV-8 5. Ground to TB-MBV-9 6. Valve Opened to TB-MBV-22 7. Valve Closed to TB-MBV-23 8. Status Common to TB-MBV-24 Actuator 1. Actuator Common (Brown) 2. Close Valve (Blue) 3. Open Valve (Black) 4. Ground (Green/Yellow) Position Signal 2. Valve Closed (Blue) 3. Valve Opened (Black) 4. Ground (Green/Yellow) Figure 3 Ball Valve Figure 4 Manual Override Switch Figure 5 Valve Connectors ®10 — Installation To connect the differential pressure switch to the SmartFilter, connect the normally open switch as follows: TB-B-15 and TB- B-4. To connect the SmartFilter to your BMS/BAS setup, connect: 1. Wire Shielding to TB-C-1 2. RS485+ to TB-C-2 3. RS485- to TB-C-3 To connect the controller to external alarms, connect TB-R- 1-15 to your system as follows: For Summary alarm annunciation: 1. Common to TB-R-1 2. Normally Closed to TB-R-2 3. Normally Open to TB-R-3 For Not in Auto alarm annunciation : 1. Common to TB-R-4 2. Normally Closed to TB-R-5 3. Normally Open to TB-R-6 For High Water alarm annunciation: 1. Sensor common to TB-R-7 2. Normally Closed to TB-R-8 3. Normally Open to TB-R-9 For Fuel Line Leak alarm annunciation: 1. Sensor common to TB-R-10 2. Normally Closed to TB-R-11 3. Normally Open to TB-R-12 For Loss of Flow alarm annunciation: 1. Common to TB-R-13 2. Normally Closed to TB-R-14 3. Normally Open to TB-R-15 ConneCting differential preSSure SwitCh inStalling bmS ® Operating Instructions — 11 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1. On the System Sta- tus Screen (Figure 6), press the “MAIN MENU” button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the “SET TIME AND DATE” button (see Figure 7). 3. Select the current time, date, and day of the week and press the “ACCEPT” push- button. If the “AC- CEPT” pushbutton is not pressed, the data will not be updated (Figure 8). 1. At the main menu, press the “PRO- GRAM FILTER CY- CLE” button. 2. Up to ten automatic filtration programs may be set by the user. Each program is set with a row of elements on this page (see Figure 9 on page 12). 3. Select the day of the week for your au- tomatic program by pressing one of the elements in the “DAY” column. Press repeatedly to select the desired day of the week. 4. Select the start time by pressing the hour and minute por- tions of the element in the “START TIME” column and en- tering the times on the popup keypad. 5. Select the duration of the automatic filter cycle by pressing Setting date and time SCheduling automatiC filtration CyCleS Figure 6 System Status Screen Figure 7 Main Menu Figure 8 Time and Date Screen ®12 — Operating Instructions the hour and minute portions of the ele- ment in the “DURA- TION” column and entering the times on the popup keypad. 6. Select the tank num- ber from which the fuel will be drawn by pressing the ele- ment in the “TANK” column and entering the number on the popup keypad. The maximum number allowed in this ele- ment is factory set to the number of tanks designed into your control system. 7. Press the “ACCEPT” pushbutton. If the “ACCEPT” pushbut- ton is not pressed, the data will not be updated. When operating the SmartFilter, putting the physical Hand- Off-Auto switch on the control panel in Auto will set the filtra- tion unit for Automatic Operation. Setting the switch in Hand mode enables Manual Operation and Fuel Transfer. 1. Place the Hand-Off-Auto switch in the auto position. 2. The conditioning system will now filter the fuel as pro- grammed by the user on the “PROGRAM FILTER CYCLE” screen. 3. If run times overlap, and the overlapping programs are set for the same tank, the system will run the filter until the latest end time. Overlapping user programmed filter cycles is not recommended. 1. Put the Hand-Off- Auto switch in Hand mode (Figure 10). 2. Press the “MANU- AL” pushbutton. 3. The touchscreen will change to the Man- ual Filtration Screen (Figure 11). 4. Enter the number of automatiC operation manual operation Figure 9 Program Filter Cycle Screen Figure 10 Manual Mode Screen ® Operating Instructions — 13 gallons to filter, or leave the field at 0 for unlimited filtration. 5. The pump will start and continue to run until the desired amount of fuel has been filtered, the “STOP” pushbutton is pressed, or a failure occurs. Most system alarm conditions are ignored when in manual. Fuel transfer from one tank to another is only available on multi-tank filtration systems. 1. Put the Hand-Off-Auto switch in Hand mode 2. Press the “TRANSFER” button. 3. Select the amount of fuel to transfer and the source and des- tination tanks. 4. Press the “START MANUAL FUEL TRANSFER” pushbut- ton. 5. The pump will start and continue to run until the desired amount of fuel has been transferred, the “STOP” pushbutton is pressed, or a failure occurs. Most system alarm conditions are ignored when in manual. tranSferring fuel Figure 11 Manual Filtration Screen ®14 — Operating Instructions At the main menu, press the “TANK OVER- VIEW” button on the touchscreen to enter the “TANK OVERVIEW” screen (Figure 12). At this screen the user can monitor the tank and valve status, as well as important information about the time since the last filtration and reset. The automatic water drain and water tank (if purchased) op- erate based on three water sensors which distinguish between water and diesel fuel. 1. The safety water sensor (the lower sensor) must sense water for the water drain system to operate. If fuel is detected in the water line, an alarm is activated to alert the operator. To restore normal operation, the operator must manually drain the water line and prime it with water so that the safety water sensor detects water. Prime the water line by pouring water in the top of the dirty fuel side of the filter canister. This alarm usually indicates a fault with the solenoid valve (stuck open) or one of the three water sensors. 2. When the filter system is in normal operation and both the upper and middle water sensors detect water in the coalescer, the water drain solenoid valve opens. 3. The water drain solenoid closes when the lower water sensor in the coalescer stops detecting water, or when one of the fol- lowing conditions occurs: a. The safety water sensor detects diesel (or air). b. An Emergency Stop is activated. c. Either of the water holding tank high level floats is trig- gered. d. The pump stops. The water sensors provide a signal to the PLC when they de- tect water. For this reason, air and diesel both look the same to the water sensors. The safety water sensor must be flooded with water for the filter to operate; air or diesel in the water drain line will trigger a Fuel in Water Line alarm. The power to the water sensors is pulsed to prolong the life viewing tank StatuS automatiC water drain water SenSor operation Figure 12 Tank Overview Screen ® Operating Instructions — 15 of the sensors: • When the pump is running, the water sensors are powered for ten seconds out of every minute. • The sensors are continuously powered during and for two minutes after a water drain cycle. For systems with automatic water drain, any time the water line is drained (changing the filter, etc.), it is necessary to prime the system with water. To prime the system, pour water into the top of the coalescer until it shows in the sight glass. Replace filters annually or when indicated by Smart Filter “SERVICE PREFILTER” or “SERVICE COALESCER” alarms, whichever occurs first. Simplex filter element reorder part numbers are displayed on the placard inside the door of the filter unit. priming the SyStem with water filter replaCement SChedule ®16 — Alarms and Warnings 7 ALARMS AND WARNINGS The SmartFilter can register a number of alarms. When an alarm is sounded, you can si- lence the horn on the SmartFilter by pressing the “Horn Silence” but- ton. Address the issue and press the “Alarm Reset” button to clear the error. Do not ignore alarms and warnings, no mat- ter how trivial they may seem. Doing so risks damage to your equip- ment and reduces reli- ability of your emergen- cy power system. To view information about the alarm, press the notification banner that appears at the bot- tom of the screen (Figure 13). This will open a help screen to explain the failure (Figure 14). Figure 13 Alarm Banner Figure 14 Alarm Help Screen Simplex, Inc. 5300 Rising Moon Road Springfield, IL 62711-6228 www.simplexdirect.com (800) 637-8603